Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question 1.
What are polymers?
Answer:
Polymers are high molecular mass macromolecules (103 – 107 u) and consist of repeating units of monomers.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question 2.
Write the classification of polymers based on the source. Give examples.
OR
What are natural and synthetic polymers? Give two examples of each type.
Answer:
Based on the source polymers are classified as natural, semisynthetic and synthetic polymers.

  1. Natural polymers : These polymers are obtained either from plants or animals, e.g., cellulose, jute, linene, rubber, silk.
  2. Semisynthetic polymers : The fibres obtained by giving special chemical treatment to natural fibres (cellulose) and further regenerated are called semisynthetic polymers e.g., acetate rayon, viscose rayon, cuprammonium silk.
  3. Synthetic polymers : The man made fibres prepared by polymerization of one monomer or copolymerization of
    two or more monomers are called synthetic polymers, e.g., nylon, terylene, polythene, etc.

Question 3.
Write the classification of polymers based on structure. Give examples
OR
Write the reactions involved in the preparation of (1) Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) (2) Polypropylene.
Answer:
Based on structure polymers are classified as linear chain polymers, branched chain polymers and network or cross linked polymers.

(1) Linear chain polymers : When the monomer molecules are joined together in a linear arrangement, the resulting polymer is straight-chain or long-chain polymer, e.g., polythene, PVC.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 4
They have high melting points; high densities and high tensile strength.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 5

(2) Branched-chain polymers : These polymers consist of long and straight chain with smaller side chains give rise to branched-chain polymers. They have low density. They have lower melting points and tensile strength. Polypropylene having methyl groups as branches.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 6

(3) Network or cross-linked polymers : These polymers consist of cross-linking of chains by strong covalent bonds leading to a network-like structure. Cross-linking results from polyfunctional monomers, e.g., melamine, bakelite, vulcanization of rubber. These polymers are hard rigid and brittle.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 7

Question 3.
How are polymers classified on the basis of mode of polymerization?
OR
Write the classification of polymers based on mode of polymerization.
Answer:
There are three modes of polymerization depending upon the types of reactions taking place between the monomers.

  1. Addition polymerization (or chain growth polymerization)
  2. Condensation polymerization (or step growth polymerization)
  3. Ring opening polymerization
  4. Addition polymerization or chain growth polymerization : It is a process of polymers by the repeated addition of a large number of monomers is called addition polymerization (like alkenes) without loss of any small molecules.
    Example : Formation of polyethylene from ethylene is well known example of addition polymerization. It is a chain growth polymerization.
  5. Condensation polymerization or step growth polymerization : The process of formation of polymers from polyfunctional monomers with the elimination of some small molecules such as water, hydrochloric acid, methanol, ammonia is called condensation polymerization.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 9
    Example : The formation of terylene, a polyester polymer, from ethylene glycol and terephthalic acid. Condensation polymerization is a step growth polymerization.
  6. Ring opening polymerization : The process of formation of polymers from cyclic compounds (like lactams, cyclic ethers, etc.) by ring opening is called ring opening polymerization.
    Example : Polymerization of e-caprolactam.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 10Ring opening polymerization proceeds by addition of a single monomer unit to the growing chain molecules. It is a step growth polymerization.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question 4.
Classify the polymers given below as addition, condensation and ring opening polymers:
PVC, polythene, cyclic ethers, polyester, polyacrylonftrile. polystyrene.
Answer:

  • Addition polymers: PVC, polythene. polyacrylonitrile. polystyrene.
  • Condensation polymers: Polyester.
  • Ring opening polymers : Cyclic ethers

Question 5.
Write the classification of polymers based on intermolecular forces. Give examples.
OR
In which dasses, are the polymers classified on the basis of Inter molecular forces?
Answer:
Molecular forces bind the polymer chains either by hydrogen bonds or Vander Waal’s forces. These forces are called intermolecular forces. On the basis of magnitude of intcrmolccular forces, polymers are further classified as ebstomers, fibres, thermoplastic polymers. thermosetting polymers.

(1) Elastomers: Weak van der Waals type of intermolecular forces of attraction between the polymer chains are observed in cbstomcrs. When polymer is stretched, the polymer chain stretches and when the strain is relieved the chain returns to its odginal position, Thus, polymer shows elasticity and is called elastomers. Elastomers, the elastic polymers, have weak van der Waals type of intermolecular forces which permit the polymer to be stretched. Lilastorners are soft and stretchy and used in making rubber bands. E.g.. neoprene, vulcanized rubber, buna.S, buna-N.

(2) Fibres : It consists of strong intermolecular forces of’ attraction due to hydrogen bonding and strong dipole-dipole forces. These polymers possess high tensile strength. Due to these strong intermolecular forces the fibres are crystalline in nature. They are used in textile industries, strung tyres. etc.. e.g., nylon, terylene.

(3) Thermoplastic polymers: These polymer possess moderately strong intermolecular forces of attraction between those of elastomers and fibres. These polymers arc called thermoplastic because they become soft on heating and hard on cooling. They are either linear or branched chain polymers. They can be remoulded and recycled. E.g. polyethenc, PVC, polystyrene.

(4) Thermosetting polymers: These polymers are cross linked or branched molecules and are rigid polymers. During their formation they have property of being shaped on heating. but they get hardened while hot. Once hardened these become infusible, cannot be softened by heating and therefore, cannot be remoulded and recycled.
This shows extensive cross linking by covalent bonds formed in the moulds during hardening/setting process while hot. E.g. Bakelite, urea formaldehyde resin.

Question 6.
What is meant by the term homopolymer?
Answer:
A polymer made from only one type of repeating units is called homopolymer. in some cases the repeating unit is formed by condensation of two distinct monomers. Examples. Polythene, PVC. Nylon-6.

Question 7.
What is meant by the term copolymer?
Answer:
A polymer made from two or more types of repeating units is called a copolymer. The different monomer units are randomly sequenced in the copolymer, e.g., Terylene, Nylon-6, 6, Buna-S, Buna-N.

Question 8.
Write the classification of polymers on the basis of biodegradability?
OR
(1) What are biodegradable polymers?
(2) What are nonbiodegradable polymers?
Answer:
Based un biodegradability, polymers are classified as biodegradable polymer and nonbiodegradable polymers.

(1) Biodegradable polymers: Polymers that are affected by microbes or disintegrate by themselves afler a certain period of time due to environmental degradation are called biodegradable polymers.

Examples: PHBV i.e., Polyhydroxy butyrate-CO-β-hydroxy valerate Dextron. Nylon-2-nylon-6.

(2) Non biodegradable polymers: Synthetic polymers do not disintegrate by themselves after a certain period or not affected by microbes, are called nonbiodegradhle polymers.

Examples: Bakelite, Nylon, Terylene.

Question 9.
Explain the following terms :
Answer:

  1. Branched chain polymer : The polymer consists of long and straight chain with smaller side chains give rise to branched chain polymers, e.g. Polypropylene
  2. Addition polymer : The polymer formed by the repeated addition of a large number of monomers (like alkenes) without loss of any small molecules are called addition polymers, e.g. polythene -[-CH2 – CH2-]n. It is a chain growth polymerization.
  3. Condensation polymer : The polymers formed by the repeated condensation reaction between polyfunctional monomers with the elimination of some molecules such as water, hydrochloric acid, methanol, ammonia are called condensation polymers, e.g. Nylon-6, 6.
  4. Elastomers : Polymers in which the intermolecular forces of attraction between the polymer chains are the weakest. When polymer is stretched, it has ability to stretch and when the strain is relieved it returns to its original position. Thus, polymer shows elasticity and is called elastomers, e.g. natural rubber, neoprene, vulcanized rubber.
  5. Homopolymer : A polymer made from only one type of repeating unit of one monomer is called homopolymer e.g. Polythene, PVC, etc.
  6. Biodegradable polymer : Polymers which are affected by microbes or disintegrate by themselves after a certain period of time due to environmental degradation are called biodegradable polymers.
    Example : PHSV i.e. Polyhydroxy butyrate -CO-β-hydroxy valerate Dextron.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question 10.
What is natural rubber?
Answer:
Natural rubber is a high molecular mass linear polymer of isoprene (2-methyl-1, 3-butadiene).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 12

Question 11.
Write a note on natural rubber.
Answer:
Natural rubber is manufactured from rubber latex obtained from the rubber tree in the form of colloidal suspension. Reaction involved in the formation of natural rubber by the process of addition polymerization is as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 13

Natural rubber is -1, 4- polyisoprene. It exhibits elastic properties.

Question 12.
State properties of natural rubber.
Answer:

  1. Polyisoprene molecule has cis configuration of the C = C double bond. It consists of various chains held together by weak van der Waals forces and has coiled structure.
  2. It can be stretched like a spring and exhibits elastic property.
  3. Its molecular mass varies from 130,000 u to 340,000 u.

Question 13.
Write a note on vulcanization of rubber. OR Discuss the main purpose of vulcanization of rubber.
Answer:
The tensile strength, toughness and elasticity of natural rubber can be increased by adding 3 to 5% sulphur and heating at 100-150°C, resulting in cross linking of cis-1, 4-polypropene chains through disulphide bonds, (-S-S-). This process is known as vulcanization of rubber. The physical properties of rubber can be changed by controlling the amount of sulphur in the vulcanization process. Rubber made with 20-30% sulphur is hard, 3 to 10% sulphur is little harder and is used in making tyres and 1 to 3% sulphur is used in making rubber bands.

Question 14.
Write the name and structure of one of the initiators used in free radical polymerisation.
Answer:
The initiator used in free radical polymerisation is acetyl peroxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 19

Question 15.
What is LDP? How is it prepared? Give its properties and uses.
Answer:
LDP means low-density polyethene. LDP is obtained by polymerization of ethylene under high pressure (1000 – 2000 atm) and temperature (350 – 570 K) in presence of traces of O2 or peroxide as initiator.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 20

The mechanism of this reaction involves free radical addition and H-atom abstraction. The latter results in branching. As a result the chains are loosely held and the polymer has low density.

Properties of LDP :

  • LDP films are extremely flexible, but tough chemically inert and moisture resistant.
  • It is poor conductor of electricity with melting point 110 °C.

Uses of LDP :

  • LDP is mainly used in preparation of pipes for agriculture, irrigation, domestic water line connections as well as insulation to electric cables.
  • It is also used in submarine cable insulation.
  • It is used in producing extruded films, sheets, mainly for packaging and household uses like in preparation of squeeze bottles, attractive containers, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question 16.
Whatis HDP ? How is it prepared ? Give its properties and uses ?
Answer:
HDP means high density polyethylene. It is a linear polymer with high density due to close packing.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 21

HDP is obtained by polymerization of ethene in presence of Zieglar-Natta catalyst which is a combination of triethyl aluminium with titanium tetrachloride at a temperature of 333K to 343K and a pressure of 6-7 atm.

Properties of HDP :

  • HDP is crystalline, melting point in the range of 144 – 150 °C.
  • It is much stiffer than LDP and has high tensile strength and hardness.
  • It is more resistant to chemicals than LDP.

Uses of HDP :

  • HDP is used in manufacture of toys and other household articles like buckets, dustbins, bottles, pipes, etc.
  • It is used to prepare laboratory wares and other objects where high tensile strength and stiffness is required.

Question 17.
How is polyacrylonitrile (PAN) prepared? Give its uses.
Answer:
Acrylonitrile (monomer) on polymerization (addition polymerization) in the presence of peroxide initiator gives polyacrylonitrile.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 23

Uses : Polyacrylonitrile resembles wool and is used as wool substitute and for making orlon or acrilan.

Question 18.
How is nylon-6 prepared?
Write the reaction for the preparation of nylon 6.
Answer:
When epsilon (ε)-caprolactam is heated with water at high temperature it undergoes ring opening polymerization to form the polyamide polymer called nylon-6.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 25

The name nylon-6 is given on the basis of six carbon atoms present in the monomer unit. Nylon-6 has high tensile strength and luster, nylon-6 fibres are used for manufacture of tyre cords, fabrics and ropes.

Question 19.
Draw the structures of polymers formed using the following monomers.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 28

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 29

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 30
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 31

Question 20.
How is Novolac prepared?
OR
Write the reaction to prepare Novolac polymer.
Answer:
The monomers phenol and formaldehyde undergo polymerisation in the presence of alkali or acid as catalyst.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 33
Phenol reacts with formaldehyde to form ortho or p-hydroxy methyl phenols, which further reacts with phenol to form a linear polymer called Novolac. It is used in paints.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question 21.
How is bakelite prepared?
Answer:
In the third stage, various articles are shaped from novolac by putting it in appropriate moulds and heating at high temperature (138 °C to 176 °C) and at high pressure forms rigid polymeric material called bakelite. Bakelite is insoluble and infusible and has high tensile strength.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 34
Bakelite is used in making articles like telephone instrument, kitchenware, electric insulators frying pans, etc.

Question 22.
How is a melamine-formaldehyde polymer (melamine) prepared?
Answer:
The monomers formaldehyde and melamine undergo condensation polymerisation to form cross-linked melamine formaldehyde. It is used in making crockeries, decorative table tops like formica and plastic dinner-ware.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 36

Question 23.
Write the preparation of the following synthetic rubbers and give their uses :
(1) Buna-S or styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR) (2) Neoprene rubber
Answer:
(1) Buna-S rubber : Its trade name is SBR (Styrene-butadiene rubber) Buna-S is a copolymer of styrene and 1, 3-butadiene. When 75 parts of butadiene and 25 parts of styrene subjected to addition polymerization by the action of sodium.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 37

Uses : Buna-S is superior to natural rubber with regard to mechanical strength and has abrasion resistance. Hence, it is used in tyre industry.

(2) Neoprene : Neoprene, a synthetic rubber, is a condensation polymer of chloroprene (2-chloro-l, 3-butadiene), Chloroprene polymerizes rapidly in presence of oxygen.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 38
Vulcanization of neoprene takes place in presence of magnesium oxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 39
Uses : Neoprene is resistant to petroleum, vegetable oils, light as well as heat. It is used in making hose pipes for transport of gasoline and making gaskets. It is used for manufacturing insulator cable, jackets, belts for power transmission and conveying.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question 24.
Write structure of natural rubber and neoprene rubber along with the name and structure of their monomers.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 40

Question 25.
Write the preparation of viscose rayon.
Answer:
Viscose rayon is a semisynthetic fibre. It is a regenerated cellulose. The molecular formula of cellulose is (C6H10O5)n. A modified representation of the molecular formula of cellulose Cell-OH is used in the reactions involved in viscose formation.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 42

Cellulose (wood pulp) is treated with the concentrated NaOH to form alkali cellulose. It is then converted to xanthate by treating with CS2. Further xanthate is mixed with dilute NaOH to form viscose solution which is extruted through spinnerates of spinning machine into acid bath, when regenerated cellulose fibres precipitate, i.e. viscose rayon.

Question 26.
How is PHBV polymer prepared?
Answer:
It is a copolymer. The monomers β-hydroxy butyric acid (3-hydroxy butanoic acid) and β-hydroxy valeric acid (3-hydroxy pentanoic acid) undergo polymerization to form PHBV polymer. It has an ester linkage. Hydroxyl group of one monomer forms ester link by reacting with carboxyl group of the other. Thus PHBV is an aliphatic polyester i.e. poly β-hydroxybutyrate-co-β-hydroxy valerate (PHBV). It is a biodegradable polymer.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 45

Question 27.
Write the name/s of monomer/s, polymer structure and one use of each of the following polymers (trade name) :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 47
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 48

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question 28.
Write the names of monomers used in preparing following polymers :
(1) Dacron.
Answer:
Monomers : Ethylene glycol and Dmiethyl terephthalate (DMT)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 49

(2) Bakelite.
Answer:
Monomers : o-hydroxy methyl phenol and formaldehyde.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 50

(3) Nylon-6, 8.
Answer:
Monomers : Hexamethylene diamine and Hexamethylene dicarboxylic acid.
H2N-(CH2)6-NH2 HOOC-(CH2)6-COOH

(4) Melamine.
Answer:
Monomers : Melamine and Formaldehyde
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 51

(5) Buna-S.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 52

(6) Buna-N.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 53

(7) Butyl rubber.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 54

(8) Teflon.
Answer:
Monomers : F2C = CF2 Tetrafluoroethene

(9) Natural rubber.
Answer:
Monomers : 1,3-Butadiene
CH2 = CH – CH = CH2

(10) Neoprene.
Answer:
Monomers : Chloroprene or 2-Chloro-l,3-butadiene
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 55

Question 29.
Write the structures of monomers used in the preparation of following polymers.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 56
Answer:
The monomers used in the preparation of above polymer are :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 57

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 58
Answer:
The monomers used in the preparation of above polymer are :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 59
Answer:
The monomer used in the preparation of above polymer are :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 60
Answer:
The monomer used in the preparation of above polymer is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 61

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question 30.
Following monomers are used to prepare polymers. Predict the structures of polymers:

(1) Ethylene glycol.
Answer:
Ethylene glycol Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 62 is used in the preparation of polyester (terylene or dacron).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 63

Terylene is polyester fibre formed by the polymerization of terephthalic acid and ethylene glycol.

Terylene is obtained by condensation polymerization of ethylene glycol and terephthalic acid in presence of catalyst zinc acetate and antimony trioxide at high temperature.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 26

Properties :

  • Terylene has relatively high melting point (265 °C)
  • It is resistant to chemicals and water.

Uses :

  • It is used for making wrinkle-free fabrics by blending with cotton (terycot) and wool (terywool), and also as glass reinforcing materials in safety helmets.
  • PET is the most common thermoplastic which is another trade name of the polyester polyethylenetereph- thalate.
  • It is used for making many articles like bottles, jams, packaging containers.

(2) ε-Caprolactam.
Answer:
ε-caprolactam is used in the preparation of nylon-6.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 64

When epsilon (ε)-caprolactam is heated with water at high temperature it undergoes ring opening polymerization to form the polyamide polymer called nylon-6.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 25

The name nylon-6 is given on the basis of six carbon atoms present in the monomer unit. Nylon-6 has high tensile strength and luster, nylon-6 fibres are used for manufacture of tyre cords, fabrics and ropes.

(3) Ethene.
Answer:
Ethene is used in the preparation of polythene
Polymer: Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 65

Linear chain polymers : When the monomer molecules are joined together in a linear arrangement, the resulting polymer is straight-chain or long-chain polymer, e.g., polythene, PVC.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 4
They have high melting points; high densities and high tensile strength.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 5

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

(4) Formaldehyde.
Answer:
Formaldehye is used in the preparation of bakelite.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 66

The monomers phenol and formaldehyde undergo polymerisation in the presence of alkali or acid as catalyst.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 33
Phenol reacts with formaldehyde to form ortho or p-hydroxy methyl phenols, which further reacts with phenol to form a linear polymer called Novolac. It is used in paints.

In the third stage, various articles are shaped from novolac by putting it in appropriate moulds and heating at high temperature (138 °C to 176 °C) and at high pressure forms rigid polymeric material called bakelite. Bakelite is insoluble and infusible and has high tensile strength.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 34
Bakelite is used in making articles like telephone instrument, kitchenware, electric insulators frying pans, etc.

Question 31.
Classify the following polymers as step growth or chain growth polymers :
(1) Nylon-6,6
(2) Terylene
(3) Polyethene (4) PVC.
Answer:
Step growth polymers : Nylon-6,6, terylene
Chain growth polymers : Polythene, PVC.

Question 32.
Classify the following as linear, branched or cross linked polymers :
(1) Bakelite
(2) Starch
(3) Polythene
(4) Nylon.
Answer:
Linear polymers : Polythene, nylon.
Cross-linked polymers : Bakelite, starch.

Question 33.
Classify the following as addition and condensation polymers :
(1) Bakelite
(2) polyvinyl chloride
(3) polythene
(4) terylene.
Answer:
Addition polymers : Polyvinyl chloride, polythene
Condensation polymers : Bakelite, terylene.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question 34.
Arrange the polymers in increasing order of their intermolecular forces :
Nylon-6,6, Polythene, Buna-S.
Answer:
The increasing order of their intermolecular forces of attraction follows the order :
Buna-S, Polythene, Nylon-6,6.

Question 35.
Classify the following as natural, synthetic and semisynthetic polymers :
Terylene, cuprammonium silk, jute, melamine
Answer:
Natural polymers : Jute
Synthetic polymers : Terylene, melamine
Semisynthetic polymers : Cuprammonium silk

Question 36.
Complete the following statements :
(1) Chemically teflon is …………………………. .
(2) …………………………. is the catalyst used to obtain HDP by polymerisation of ethene.
(3) Viscose rayon is a …………………………. .
Answer:
(1) polytetrafluoroethylene
(2) Zieglar-Natta
(3) semisynthetic fibre (regenerated fibre).

Question 37.
Answer the following in one sentence each.

(1) Name a polymer used for making LCD screen?
Answer:
The polymer used for making LCD screen is Perspex.

(2) Which of the two is a condensation polymer? Bakelite or Polythene?
Answer:
The condensation polymer is bakelite.

(3) Which of the two is a linear polymer? Nylon or Starch.
Answer:
The linear polymer is nylon.

(4) Which of the two is a step growth polymer? Nylon-6,6 or PVC.
Answer:
The step growth polymer is Nylon-6,6.

(5) Write the use of polyacrylamide gel.
Answer:
Polyacrylamide gel is used in electrophoresis.

(6) Write the use of urea formaldehyde resin.
Answer:
Urea formaldehyde resin is used in making unbreakable dinnerware and decorative laminates.

(7) Give an example of semisynthetic polymer.
Answer:
Semisynthetic polymer : Viscose rayon, cuprammonium silk.

(8) Write the monomer unit of teflon.
Answer:
Monomer unit of teflon : Tetrafluoroethene (F2C = CF2).

(9) Write the equation for the preparation of polypropylene.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 72

(10) Name a synthetic polymer which contains amide linkage.
Answer:
Polymer that contains amide linkage : Nylon-6; Nylon 6,6.

(11) Name a synthetic polymer which contains ester linkage.
Answer:
Polymer that contains ester linkage : Terylene or Dacron.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

(12) Name one thermosetting and one thermoplastic polymer.
Answer:
Thermosetting polymer : Bakelite.
Thermoplastic polymer : Polythene, polystyrene.

(13) State the uses of biodegradable polymers.
Answer:
Biodegradable polymers are used as orthopaedic devices, implants, sutures and drug release matrices.

(14) Name a copolymer which is used for making nonbreakable crockeries.
Answer:
The polymer used in making nonbreakable crockeries : Melamine formaldehyde polymer.

(15) Write the structure of monomer used in the preparation of Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 75
Answer:
The structure of monomer : Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 76

(16) Write the structure of melamine.
Answer:
The monomers formaldehyde and melamine undergo condensation polymerisation to form cross-linked melamine formaldehyde. It is used in making crockeries, decorative table tops like formica and plastic dinner-ware.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 36

(17) What does SBR stand for?
Answer:
SBR stand for styrene(S)butadiene (B) rubber (R).

(18) Draw the structure of repeating unit in nylon-6,10.
Answer:
The structure of repeating unit in nylon-6,10 is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 77

(19) What are the monomers used to prepare nylon given below?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 78
Answer:
Monomers used in the preparation of nylon are
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 79

(20) Write the monomers used to prepare nylon given below :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 80
Answer:
Monomers used in the preparation of nylon are
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 81

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

(21) Name the catalyst which is formed from titanium chloride and triethyl aluminium.
Answer:
The catalyst Zieglar Natta is formed from titanium chloride and triethyl aluminium.

(22) Define molecular mass of polymer.
Answer:
Molecular mass of a polymer is an average of the molecular masses of the constituent molecules.

(23) Which factor determines the molecular mass of polymer.
Answer:
Molecular mass of polymer depends upon the degree of polymerization (DP). DP is the number of monomer units in a polymer molecule.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 38.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each subquestion :

1. Which one is the natural polyamide polymer?
(a) Cuprammonium silk
(b) Wool
(c) Perlon-L
(d) Jute
Answer:
(b) Wool

2. The synthetic fibres are prepared from
(a) cellulose
(b) starch
(c) chemical compounds
(d) polymers
Answer:
(c) chemical compounds

3. Which of the following is NOT a vegetable fibre?
(a) Hemp
(b) Jute
(c) Cotton
(d) Keratin
Answer:
(d) Keratin

4. Which of the following fibres are made up of polyamides?
(a) Dacron
(b) Rayon
(c) Nylon
(d) Terylene
Answer:
(c) Nylon

5. An example of natural cellulose fibre is
(a) cotton
(b) wool
(c) silk
(d) rayon
Answer:
(a) cotton

6. Cellulose is the main constituent of
(a) nylon-6
(b) cotton
(c) terylene
(d) wool
Answer:
(b) cotton

7. Of the following, which group contains two cellulosic fibres and one protein fibre?
(a) Cotton, keratin, wool
(b) Linen, keratin, wool
(c) Cotton, linen, rayon
(d) Cotton, keratin, linen
Answer:
(d) Cotton, keratin, linen

8. Which of the following is not a vegetable fibres?
(a) Hemp
(b) Jute
(c) Cotton
(d) Keratin
Answer:
(d) Keratin

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

9. Which of the following is polyamide?
(a) Teflon
(b) Nylon 6, 6
(c) Terylene
(d) Bakelite
Answer:
(b) Nylon 6, 6

10. The monomer of e-caprolactam is
(a) styrene
(b) amino acid
(c) aminocaproic acid
(d) adipic acid O
Answer:
(c) aminocaproic acid

11. Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 83is the formula of _ Jn
(a) Nylon-66 salt
(b) Nylon-66
(c) DMT
(d) Nylon-6
Answer:
(d) Nylon-6

12. Nylon-6 is a
(a) polyester fibre
(b) protein fibre
(c) poly caprolactum fibre
(d) poly amine fibre
Answer:
(c) poly caprolactum fibre

13. The condensation product of e-caprolactum is
(a) teflon
(b) nylon-6
(c) nylon-66
(d) bakelite
Answer:
(b) nylon-6

14. \(\left[\overline{\mathrm{O}} \mathrm{OC}-\left(\mathrm{CH}_{2}\right)_{4}-\mathrm{COO}-\mathrm{N} \mathrm{H}_{3}-\left(\mathrm{CH}_{2}\right)_{6}-\mathrm{N} \mathrm{H}_{3}\right]\) is the formula of
(a) nylon-6
(b) nylon-6 salt
(c) nylon-66 salt
(d) nylon-66
Answer:
(b) nylon-6 salt

15. The starting material required for the preparation of Nylon-66 is
(a) glycol
(b) α-amino acid
(c) adipic acid and hexamethylene diamine
(d) dimethyl terephthalate and ethylene glycol
Answer:
(c) adipic acid and hexamethylene diamine

16. Terylene is also known as
(a) styrene
(b) butadiene
(c) dacron
(d) teflon
Answer:
(c) dacron

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

17. Terylene is
(a) vegetable fibre
(b) protein fibre
(c) polyester fibre
(d) polyamide fibre
Answer:
(c) polyester fibre

18. Terylene polymer is formed in
(a) the presence of nitrogen
(b) the presence of hydrogen
(c) the presence of oxygen
(d) the vacuum
Answer:
(d) the vacuum

19. The by-product formed during the preparation of terylene fibre is
(a) glycerol
(b) propylene glycol
(c) ethylene glycol
(d) ethyl alcohol
Answer:
(c) ethylene glycol

20. Nylon polymer cannot be used for making
(a) tyre cords
(b) films
(c) dress materials
(d) fishing nets
Answer:
(b) films

21. Glycol is an important constituent of
(a) nylon-6
(b) nylon-66
(c) terylene
(d) hexamethylene diammonium adipate
Answer:
(c) terylene

22. Terylene is prepared by the process of
(a) halogenation
(b) condensation
(c) esterification
(d) hydrogenation
Answer:
(b) condensation

23. What are the steps during polymerisation to form terylene?
(a) Terephthalic acid is condensed with ethylene glycol at 420 K-460 K.
(b) Ethylene glycol displaces methanol to form dihydroxy diethyl terephthalic acid
(c) Zinc acetate – antimony trioxide is used as catalyst
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

24. During polymerisation of nylon salt to nylon-66, the conditions are
(a) room temperature and pressure
(b) temperature 503 K
(c) temperature 553 K in presence of Nitrogen
(d) heating in an autoclave at 373 K
Answer:
(c) temperature 553 K in presence of Nitrogen

25. Which one of the following is a condensation polymer?
(a) Nylon
(b) Polythene
(c) PVC
(d) Teflon
Answer:
(a) Nylon

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

26. Which one of the following is an addition polymer?
(a) Bakelite
(b) Nylon-6,6
(c) Polystyrene
(d) Terylene
Answer:
(c) Polystyrene

27. A polymer of butadiene and Acrylonitrile is called
(a) Buna-S
(b) Buna-N
(c) Buna-B
(d) Buna-A
Answer:
(b) Buna-N

28. Natural rubber is a polymer of
(a) Styrene
(b) Butadiene
(c) Vinyl chloride
(d) Isoprene
Answer:
(d) Isoprene

29. In which of the following pairs both are copolymers?
(a) PHBV, bakelite
(b) Polythene, terylene
(c) Polyacrylonitrile, nylon-6,6
(d) Polystyrene, melamine
Answer:
(a) PHBV, bakelite

30. The polymer used in paints is
(a) Nylon
(b) Glyptal
(c) Neoprene
(d) Terylene
Answer:
(b) Glyptal

31. Which of the following contains biodegradable polymers only?
(a) Cellulose, dextron, PHBV
(b) Starch, PHBV, PVC
(c) Bakelite, nylon-2-nylon-6, nylon-6,6
(d) Cellulose, starch, terylene
Answer:
(a) Cellulose, dextron, PHBV

32. Thermosetting polymer is
(a) Nylon-6
(b) Nylon-6,6
(c) Bakelite
(d) SBR
Answer:
(c) Bakelite

33. Nylon thread contains the polymer
(a) Polyamide
(b) Polyvinyl
(c) Polyester
(d) Polyethylene
Answer:
(a) Polyamide

34. Polythene, PVC, teflon and neoprene are all
(a) Monomers
(b) Homopolymers
(c) Copolymers
(d) Condensation polymers
Answer:
(b) Homopolymers

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

35. Which one of the following is NOT a biodegrad¬able polymer?
(a) Starch
(b) Cellulose
(c) Dextron
(d) Decron
Answer:
(d) Decron

36. The polymer used in making blankets (artificial wool) is
(a) Polyester
(b) Polyacrylonitrile
(c) Polythene
(d) Polystyrene
Answer:
(b) Polyacrylonitrile

37. Which one of the following is a linear polymer?
(a) Bakelite
(b) LDP
(c) Nylon
(d) Formaldehyde melamine polymer
Answer:
(c) Nylon

38. Which one of the following is a branched polymer?
(a) PVC
(b) Polyester
(c) Nylon
(d) Polypropylene
Answer:
(d) Polypropylene

39. The polymer used to make non-stick cookware is
(a) Polyethene
(b) Polystyrene
(c) Polytetrafluoroethylene
(d) Polyvinyl chloride
Answer:
(c) Polytetrafluoroethylene

40. The monomer used to prepare orlon is
(a) CH2 = CH-CN
(b) CH2 = CHCl
(c) CH2 = CH-F
(d) CH2 = CF2
Answer:
(a) CH2 = CH-CN

41. Buna-N rubber is a copolymer of
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 86
Answer:
(b)

42. Bakelite is a polymer of
(a) Formaldehyde and phenol
(b) Benzaldehyde and phenol
(c) Formaldehyde and benzyl alcohol
(d) Acetaldehyde and phenol
Answer:
(a) Formaldehyde and phenol

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

43. The process involving heating of natural rubber with sulphur is known as
(a) Sulphonation
(b) Vulcanisation
(c) Galvanisation
(d) Calcination
Answer:
(b) Vulcanisation

44. A polymer of bisphenol and phosgene is called
(a) Polyamide
(b) Glyptal
(c) Polycarbonate
(d) Polystyrene
Answer:
(c) Polycarbonate

45. Thermocol is a homopolymer of
(a) terephthalic acid
(b) acrylonitrile
(c) methyl a-cyanoacrylate
(d) styrene
Answer:
(d) styrene

46. The polymer is used to prepare shatter resistant glass is called
(a) Perspex/acrylic glass
(b) Soda glass
(c) Buna N
(d) Polyacrylamide
Answer:
(a) Perspex/acrylic glass

47. A polymer used in making shoe soles is
(a) Glyptal
(b) Buna-N
(c) Buna-S
(d) Poly carbonate
Answer:
(b) Buna-N

48. The Zieglar-Natta catalyst is used in the preparation of
(a) LDPE
(b) PHBV
(c) PAN
(d) HDPE
Answer:
(d) HDPE

49. Which of the following is natural rubber?
(a) cis-1, 4-polyisoprene
(b) neoprene
(c) Trans-1. 4-polyisoprene
(d) Butyl rubber
Answer:
(a) cis-1, 4-polyisoprene

50. Which one from the following is the Terylene polymer?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 84
Answer:
(b)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

51. Equivalent amount of Hexamethylene diamine and adipic acid on complete neutralization produces :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 85
Answer:
(a)

52. Polyhydroxy butyrate-CO-β-hydroxy valerate represents
(a) Dextron
(b) Nylon-6, 6
(c) Nylon-2-nylon-6
(d) PHBV
Answer:
(d) PHBV

53. Among the following, the biodegradable polymer is
(a) PVC
(b) Nylon-6, 6
(c) Nylon-2-nylon-6
(d) Neoprene
Answer:
(c) Nylon-2-nylon-6

54. The monomers of Nylon-2-nylon-6 are
(a) glycine and ω-amino caproic acid
(b) lactic acid and glycolic acid
(c) glycolic acid and co-amino caproic acid
(d) isobutylene and isoprene
Answer:
(a) glycine and ω-amino caproic acid

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question 1.
What are biomolecules? Give examples of biomolecules.
Answer:
Biomolecules: The lifeless, complex organic molecules which combine in a specific manner to produce life or control biological reactions are called biomolecules.

Examples: Carbohydrates, lipids (fats and oils), nucleic acids, enzymes.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question 2.
What is the importance of biomolecules?
Answer:
Biomolecules are organic molecules which combine in a particular fashion to give complex substances which help to sustain life and produce identical daughter cells and play an important role in the actions of an organism.

  • Carbohydrates are the major constituents of food and source of energy.
  • Proteins help in proper functioning of living beings. They are important constituents of skin, hair, muscles. Enzymes which catalyse chemical reactions that take place in cells are proteins.
  • Lipids (fats and oils) function as the storehouses of energy.
  • Nucleic acids, the ribonucleic acid (RNA), and deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) are responsible for genetic characteristics and synthesis of proteins.

Question 3.
What are carbohydrates?
OR
Define the term : Carbohydrates.
Answer:
Carbohydrates : Carbohydrates are optically active polyhydroxy aldehydes or polyhydroxy ketones, or the compounds which on hydrolysis produce polyhydroxy aldehydes or polyhydroxy ketones.

Examples : Glucose, sucrose, fructose.

Question 4.
What is monosaccharide?
Answer:
The basic unit of all carbohydrates which is a simple carbohydrate and cannot be hydrolysed further is known as monosaccharide. The monosaccharide is crystalline and soluble in water. E.g. Glucose, fructose, ribose.

Question 5.
Mention the names of monosaccharides or simple carbohydrates.
Answer:
Monosaccharides are (1) glucose (2) fructose (3) ribose.

Question 6.
State the basic unit of all carbohydrates.
Answer:
The basic unit of all carbohydrates which is a simple carbohydrate and cannot be hydrolysed further is known as monosaccharide.

Question 7.
How are carbohydrates classified?
OR
Classification of carbohydrates with examples.
Answer:
Carbohydrates are classified as monosaccharides oligosaccharides and polysaccharides.
(1) Monosaccharides : These carbohydrates cannot be further hydrolysed into smaller units. They are basic units of all carbohydrates, and are called monosaccharides.

Examples : Glucose, fructose, ribose

(2) Oligosaccharides : An oligosaccharide is a carbohydrate (sugar) which on hydrolysis gives two to ten monosaccharide units.
Depending on the number of monosaccharides produced on hydrolysis, oligosaccharides are further classified as :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 1

Oligosaccharide is homogeneous. In this, each molecule of oligosaccharide contains the same number of monosaccharide units joined together in the same order as every other molecule of the same oligosaccharide.

(3) Polysaccharides : These are carbohydrates which on hydrolysis give a large number of monosaccharides.

Polysaccharides are tasteless, amorphous, insoluble in water. They are long chain, naturally αcurring polymers of carbohydrates.

Example : Cellulose, starch, glycogen.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question 8.
Classify the following carbohydrates into Monosaccharide, Disaccharide, Oligosaccharide, Polysaccharide.
(1) Glucose
(2) Starch
(3) Sucrose
(4) Maltose
(5) Galactose
(6) Lactose
(7) Ribose.
Answer:

Carbohydrates Class
(1) Glucose Monosaccharide
(2) Starch Polysaccharide
(3) Sucrose Disaccharide
(4) Maltose Disaccharide
(5) Galactose Monosaccharide
(6) Lactose Disaccharide
(7) Ribose Monosaccharide

Question 9.
Classify the following carbohydrates.
(1) Cellulose,
(2) Maltose,
(3) Raffinose,
(4) Fructose.
Answer:

Carbohydrates Class
(1)     Cellulose

(2)     Maltose

(3)     Raffinose

(4)     Fructose

Polysaccharide

Disaccharide

Trisaccharide

Monosaccharide

Question 10.
Classify the following into monosaccharides, oligosaccharides and polysaccharides.
(1) Starch
(2) Glucose
(3) Stachyose
(4) Maltose
(5) Raffinose
(6) Cellulose
(7) Sucrose
(8) Lactose.
Answer:

Monosaccharides Glucose
Oligosaccharides Stachyose, maltose, raffinose, sucrose, lactose
Polysaccharides Starch, cellulose

Question 11.
Classify the following into monosaccharides and disaccharides.
Ribose, maltose, galactose, fructose and lactose (~2 mark each)
Answer:

Monosaccharides Ribose, galactose, fructose
Disaccharides Maltose, lactose

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question 12.
Give the preparation of glucose from sucrose or cane sugar.
OR
Describe the laboratory method of preparation of glucose.
Answer:
Preparation of glucose from sucrose (cane sugar) : Laboratory method.

Glucose is prepared in the laboratory by hydrolysis of sucrose by boiling it with dilute hydrαhloric acid or dilute sulphuric acid for about two hours. On hydrolysis, sucrose gives one molecule of glucose and one molecule of fructose.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 5
Alcohol is added during cooling to separate glucose and fructose since, glucose is almost insoluble in alcohol, hence it crystallizes out first. Fructose remains in the solution as it is more soluble than glucose.

Crystals of glucose are separated out by filtration and purified by recrystallization.

Question 13.
Give the preparation of glucose from starch.
OR
How is glucose prepared on commercial scale?
Answer:
Commercially, on a large scale, glucose is prepared by hydrolysis of starch with dilute sulphuric acid. Starchy material is mixed with water and dilute sulphuric acid and heated at 393 K under 2 to 3-atm pressure. Starch is hydrolysed to give glucose.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 6

Question 14.
Explain the structure of glucose.
Answer:
Molecular formula of glucose is C6H12O6.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 7
Glucose has an aldohexose structure. In other words, glucose molecule contains one aldehydic, that is, formyl group and the remaining five carbons carry one hydroxyl group (-OH) each. The six carbons in glucose form one straight chain.

Question 15.
Describe the action of following reagents on glucose :
(1) HI
(2) Hydroxyl amine (NH2OH)
(3) Hydrogen cyanide
(4) Bromine water
(5) dil. Nitric acid
(6) Acetic anhydride.
Answer:
(1) Action of HI : Glucose on prolonged heating with HI gives n-hexane, indicates that all the six carbon atoms are linked in straight chain.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 8

(2) Action of hydroxyl amine : Glucose reacts with hydroxyl amine in an aqueous solution to form glucose oxime. This indicates the presence of CHO group in glucose.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 9

(3) Action of hydrogen cyanide : Glucose reacts with hydrogen cyanide to form glucose cyanohydrin.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 10

(4) Action of bromine water : Glucose on oxidation with mild oxidising agent like bromine water gives gluconic acid, which shows that the carbonyl group in glucose is aldehyde group.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 11

(5) Action of dll. nitric acid : Glucose on oxidation with dilute nitric acid forms dicarboxylic acid, saccharic acid. This indicates the presence of a primary alcoholic group (-CH2OH) in glucose.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 12

(6) Action of acetic anhydride : When glucose is heated with acetic anhydride in the presence of catalyst pyridine, glucose penta acetate is formed. It indicates that glucose is a stable compound and contains five hydroxyl groups.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 13

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question 16.
Write Fischer projection formulae for
(1) Glucose
(2) Gluconic acid
(3) Saccharic acid.
Answer:
Fischer projection formulae of glucose, gluconic acid and saccharic acid :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 17

Question 17.
Explain D and L configuration in sugars.
Answer:
The simplest carbohydrates glyceraldehyde is chosen as the standard, to assign D and L configuration to monosaccharides. Glyceraldehyde contains one asymmetric carbon atom and exist in two enantiomeric forms
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 18

The dextro entantiomer is represented as (+) glyceraldehyde and it is referred as D-configuration i.e., D-glyceraldehyde. The laevo enantiomer of glyceraldehyde is represented as ( -) glyceraldehyde and it corelated as L-configuration i.e., L-glyceraldehyde.

In Fischer projection formula, a monosaccharide is assigned D-configuration if the (- OH) hydroxyl group at the last chiral carbon and lies towards right hand side. On the other hand it is assigned L-configuration if the – OH group on the last chiral carbon atom and lies on the left hand side. In monosaccharides, the most oxidised carbon (i.e., -CHO) is at the top.

Examples :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 19

Question 18.
Write Fischer projection formulae for (a) L-( + )-erythrose (b) L-( +) ribulose.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 23

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question 19.
Is the following sugar, D-sugar or L-sugar?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 24
Answer:
The compound is L-sugar.
The compound is L-sugar.

Question 20.
Assign D/L configuration to the following monosaccharides.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 25
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 26
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 27

Question 21.
Explain ring structure of glucose.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 28
Glucose has two cyclic structures (II and III) which are in equilibrium with each other through the open chain structure (I) in aqueous solution.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

The ring structure of glucose is formed by reaction between the formyl ( – CHO) group and the alcoholic (- OH) group at C – 5. Thus, the ring structure is called a hemiacetal. The two hemiacetal structures (II and III) differ only in the configuration of C – I (Fig.), the additional chiral centre resulting from ring closure. The two ring structures are called α- and β- anomers of glucose and C-l is called the anomeric carbon. The ring of the cyclic structure of glucose contains five carbons and one oxygen. Thus, it is a six membered ring. It is called pyranose structure, in analogy with the six membered heterαyclic compound pyran (IV). Hence glucose is also called glucopyranose.

Question 22.
Write the structures of α-D-( + )-glucopyranose and β-D-( +) glucopyranose.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 29

Question 23.
Explain Haworth formula of glycopyranose.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 30
In the Haworth formula the pyranose ring is considered to be in a perpendicular plane with respect to the plane of paper. The carbons and oxygen in the ring are in the places as they appear in figure. The lower side of the ring is called α-side and the upper side is the β-side. The α-anomer has its anomeric hydroxyl (- OH) group (at C-l) on the α-side, whereas the β-anomer has its anomeric hydroxyl (- OH) group (at C-l) on the β-side. The groups which appear on right side in the Fischer projection formula appear on α-side in the Haworth formula, and the groups which appear on left side in the fischer projection formula appear on a β-side in the Haworth formula.

Question 24.
Explain the structure of fructose.
Answer:
Fructose has molecular formula C6H12O6. It contains ketonic functional group at carbon number 2 and six carbon atoms in straight chain. It belongs to D-series and is a laevo rotatory compound. It is written as D-( – )-fructose. Being an α-hydroxy keto compound fructose is a reducing sugar.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 31

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question 25.
Draw mirror images of glucose and fructose.
Answer:
(1) Glucose
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 32
(2) Fructose
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 33

Question 26.
Write the two cyclic structures of α-D-( – )-fructofuranose and β-D-( – )-fructofuranose exist in equilibrium with open chain structure.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 34

Question 27.
Write the Haworth projection formulae for α -D-( -) – Fructofuranose and β – D – ( -) – Fructo- furanose.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 35

Question 28.
Explain the structure of sucrose.
Answer:
Sucrose is a hexasaccharide and has molecular formula C12H22O11. The structure of shcrose contains glycosidic linkage between C – 1 of α-glucose and C – 2 of β-fructose. Since aldehyde and ketone groups of both monosaccharide units are involved in the formation of glycosidic bond, sucrose is a nonreducing sugar.

Sucrose is dextrorotatory, on hydrolysis with dilute acid or an enzyme invertase gives equimolar mixture of dextrorotatory glucose and laevorotatory fructose.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 36
The solution is laevorotatory because laevo rotation of fructose (- 92.4°) is more than dextrorotation of glucose ( + 52.50), hence the sign of rotation is changed from (+) to (-) after hydrolysis, the product is called invert sugar.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 37

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question 29.
Explain the structure of maltose.
Answer:
Maltose is another disaccharide obtained by partial hydrolysis of starch or made of two units of D-glucose. In maltose, C-l of one α-D-glucose is linked to C-4 of another α-D-glucose molecule by glycosidic linkage. The glucose ring which uses its hydroxyl group at C-1 is α – 1 → 4 glycosidic linkage. It is a reducing sugar because a free aldehyde group can be produced at C1 of second glucose molecule. Maltose on hydrolysis with dilute acids gives glucose.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 38

Question 30.
Draw a neat diagram for Haworth formula of maltose.

Question 31.
Explain the structure of lactose.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 39
Lactose (C12H22O11) is a disaccharide. It is found in milk, therefore, it is also known as milk sugar. It is formed from two monosaccharide units, namely D – galactose and D – glucose. The glycosidic linkage is formed between C-l of β-D-galactose and C -4 of glucose. Therefore the linkage in lactose is called β – 1,4 – glycosidic linkage. The hemiacetal group at C-l of the glucose unit is not involved in glycosidic linkage but is free. Hence lactose is a reducing sugar. The above figure shows Haworth formula of lactose.

Question 32.
What are the hydrolysis products of (1) lactose (2) sucrose?
Answer:
(1) Lactose on hydrolysis in presence of an acid or enzyme lactase gives one molecule each of glucose and galactose
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 40
(2) Sucrose on hydrolysis in the presence of dii. acid or the enzyme invertase gives one molecule each of glucose and fructose.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 41

Question 33.
Explain the structure of starch.
Answer:
Starch is found in cereal grains, roots, tubers, potatoes, etc. It is a polymer of α-D-glucose and consists of two components, amylose and amylopectin.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Amylose is water soluble component forms blue coloured complex with iodine. It constitutes about 20 % of starch. Amylose contains 200 to 1000 α-D-glucose units linked together by glycosidic linkage between C-l of one unit and C-4 of another unit. i.e. α-1, 4 glycosidic linkages.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 43
Amylopectin is insoluble in water and constitutes about 80 % starch which forms blue-violet coloured complex with iodine. It is a branched chain polymer. In amylopectin, α-D-glucose molecules are linked together by glycosidic linkage between C1 – of one unit and C-4 of another unit to form long chain and branching αcurs by glycosidic linkage between C-l and C6 glycosidic linkage.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 44

Question 34.
What are polysaccharides?
Answer:
A large number of same or different monosaccharides are joined together by glycosidic linkages are called polysaccharides. They have general formula (C6H10O5)n.

Question 35.
Explain the structure of cellulose.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 45
Cellulose mainly αcurs in plants. Cell wall of plant cells is made up of cellulose. It is a long chain polymer. In cellulose, β-D-glucose units are linked by glycosidic linkage between C1-of one unit of glucose and C4 of another glucose unit. Thus cellulose contains 1 → 4β glycosidic linkages like those in cellobiose.

Question 36.
Explain the structure of glycogen.
Answer:
The glucose is stored in animal body in the form of glycogen. It is also known as animal starch because its structure is similar to amylopectin. Glycogen is highly branched. Whenever the body is required glucose, enzymes breaks the glycogen to glucose.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question 37.
How is glycogen different from starch?
Answer:
Starch is the main storage molecules of plants whereas glycogen is the main storage molecule of animals. Starch is found in cereals, roots, tubers, etc. Glycogen is present in liver, muscles and brain.

Question 38.
What do you understand by the term glycosidic linkage?
Answer:
The linkage between two monosaccharide units through oxygen atom is called glycosidic linkage.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 46

Question 39.
What is the basic structural difference between starch and cellulose?
Answer:
Starch is a polymer of a-glucose and consists of two components-amylose and amylopectin. In amylose α-D-D-( + )-glucose units held by C,-C4 glycosidic linkage and in amylopectin, α-D-glucose units held by C1-C4 glycosidic linkage whereas branching αcurs by C1-C6 glycosidic linkage. [Refer Question 35 (i) (ii) Fig.] Cellulose is a straight chain polysaccharide composed only of β-D-glucose units held by C1-C4 glycosidic linkage. (Refer Question 37 Fig.)

Question 40.
Define the term : Protein OR What are proteins?
Answer:
Chemically proteins are polyamides which are high molecular weight polymers of the monomer units i.e. α-amino acids. OR It can also be defined as Proteins are the biopolymers of a large number of a-amino acids and they are naturally occurring polymeric nitrogenous organic compounds containing 16% nitrogen and peptide linkages (-CO-NH-).

Question 41.
Write the common sources of protein.
Answer:
Common sources of proteins are milk, pulses, peanuts, eggs, fishes, cheese, cereals, etc. They are also the principal materials of muscle, nerves, tendons, skin, blood, enzymes, many hormones and antibiotics.

Question 42.
What are the products of hydrolysis of proteins?
Answer:
On hydrolysis, proteins give a mixture of α-anlino acids.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 47
The α-carbon in α-amino acids ohtained by hydrolysis of proteins has ‘L’ configuration.

Question 43.
What are the a-amino acids?
Answer:
α-Amino acids are carboxylic acids having an amino (- NH2) group bonded to the α-carbon, i.e. the carbon next to the carboxyl (- COOH) group.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 48
α-amino acids are derivatives of carboxylic acids, obtained by replacing – H atom by amino group. They are bifunctional compounds containing acidic Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 49 and basic – NH2 groups.
Example : Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 50 (where R is an alkyl group or aryl group).

The amino acids are colourless, crystalline, water soluble, high melting solids. These acids in their aqueous solutions behave like salts due to presence of both acidic, Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 51 and basic. (- NH2) groups in the same molecule.

Such a doubly charged ion is known as zwitter ion. Example : Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 52
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 53

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question 44.
What are the final products of hydrolysis of proteins?
Answer:
Proteins on hydrolysis with dilute solution of acids, alkalies or enzymes give a mixture of large number of a-amino acids as final products.

For example :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 54

Question 45.
Write the classification of amino acids, giving examples.
Answer:
The amino acids are of three types : acidic, basic and neutral. The symbol ‘R’ in the structure of a-amino acids represents side chain and may contain additional functional groups.

(1) Acidic amino acids : If ‘R’ contains a carboxyl (- COOH) group the amino acid is acidic amino acid, i.e. If carboxyl groups are more in number than amino groups, then amino acids are acidic in nature.

Examples : Glutamic acid HOOC-CH2-CH2-; Aspartic acid HOO-CH2

(2) Basic amino acids : If ‘R’ contains an amino (1°, 2°, or 3°) group, it is called basic amino acid i.e. If amino groups are more in number than carboxyl groups then amino acids are basic in nature.

Examples : Arginine Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 55

(3) Neutral amino acids : The other amino acids having neutral or no functional group in ‘R’ are called neutral amino acids, i.e. The amino acids having equal number of amino and carboxyl groups are neutral amino acids.

Examples : Alanine CH3-; Valine (CH3)2-CH

Question 46.
What are essential and non-essential amino acids? Give two examples of each.
Answer:
The amino acids, which cannot be synthesised in the body and are supplied through diet are called essential amino acids. Examples : Lysine H2N-(CH2)4-; Valine (CH3)2CH- The amino acids which are synthesized in the body are called non-essential amino acids.

Examples : Glutamic acid HOO-CH2-CH2-; Serine HO-CH2

Question 47.
What is meant by Zwitter ion?
Answer:
An a-amino acid molecule contains both acidic carboxyl ( – COOH) group as well as basic amino (- NH2) group. Proton transfer from acidic group to basic group of amino acid forms a salt, which is a dipolar ion called a zwitterion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 61

Question 48.
Draw zwitter ion of alanine and other two forms.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 62

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question 49.
What is a peptide bond (peptide linkage)?
OR
Define peptide bond.
Answer:
Proteins are the polymers of a-amino acids and they are connected to each other. The bond that connects a-amino acids to each other is called peptide bond (peptide linkage, – CONH -).

Question 50.
How is peptide linkage (dipeptide linkage) formed in proteins? How is tripeptide formed?
Answer:
Peptide linkage is formed by condensation of acidic Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 63 group of one molecule of a-amino acid and basic -NH2 group of other molecule of α-amino acid with elimination of water.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 64

When one more molecule of amino acid combines with dipeptide, it forms tripeptide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 65
Thus, it forms tetra, penta and finally a polypeptide chain i.e. proteins. Hence, proteins are basically polypeptides.

Question 51.
Write the structures of all possible dipeptides which can be obtained from glycine and alanine.
Answer:
(1) Dipeptide from glycine :
Carboxylic group of glycine reacting with amino group another molecule of glycine to form dipeptide
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 73
(2) Dipeptide from alanine :
Carboxylic goup of alanine reaction with amino goup of another molecule of alamine to form dipeptide
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 74
(3) Dipeptide from glycine and alanine :
Carboxylic group of glycine reacting with amino group another molecule of alanine to form dipeptide
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 75

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question 52.
How are proteins classified on the basis of molecular shapes?
Answer:
On the basis of their molecular shapes proteins are classified as :
(1) Fibrous proteins : The proteins in which the polypeptide chains lie parallel (side by side) to form fibre-like structure, are called fibrous proteins. The polypeptide chains held together by hydrogen bonds. These proteins are insoluble in water.

The fibrous proteins are tough and insoluble in water, and dilute acids or bases.

Example : myαin (in muscles), keratin (in hair, nails, skin), fibroin (in silk), collagen (in tendons), etc.

(2) Globular proteins : The proteins have spherical shape. This shape results from coiling around of the polypeptide chain of protein, and have intramolecular hydrogen bonding are called globular proteins.

They are soluble in water and dilute acids or bases.

Example : Haemoglobin (in blood), albumin (in eggs), insulin (in pancreas), etc.

Question 53.
Distinguish between globular and fibrous proteins.
Answer:

Globular proteins Fibrous proteins
(1) The chains of polypeptides of protein coil around to give a spherical shape.
(2) Globular proteins are soluble in water.
(3) They are sensitive to small changes of temperature and pH.
(4) They possess biological activity.
(1) The proteins in which the polypeptide chains lie parallel to form fibre like structure.
(2) Fibrous proteins are insoluble in water.
(3) They are stable to moderate changes of temperature and pH.
(4) They do not possess biological activity.

Question 54.
Draw a neat labelled diagram for the secondary structure of protein.
Answer:
Secondary structure of proteins : The three-dimensional arrangement of lαalized regions of a long polypeptide chain is called the secondary structure of protein. Hydrogen bonding between N-H proton of one amide linkage and C = O oxygen of another gives rise to the secondary structure. There are two different types of secondary structures i.e. α-helix and β-pleated sheet.

α-Helix : In a-helix structure, a polypeptide chain gets coiled by twisting into a right handed or clαkwise spiral known as a-helixn. The characteristic features of α-helical structure of protein are :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 78
(1) Each turn of the helix has 3.6 amino acids.
(2) A C = O group of one amino acid is hydrogen bonded to N – H group of the fourth amino acid along the chain.
(3) Hydrogen bonds are parallel to the axis of helix while R groups extend outward from the helix core.
Myosin in muscle and a-keratin in hair are proteins with almost entire a-helical secondary structure.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

β-Pleated sheet : In secondary structure, when two or more polypeptide chains (strands) line up side-by-side is called β-pleated sheets. The β-picate sheet structure of protein consists of extended strands of polypeptide chains held together by intermolecular hydrogen bonding. The characteristics of β-pleated sheet structure are :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 79

  • The C = O and N – H bonds lie in the planes of the sheet.
  • Hydrogen bonding occurs between the N – H and C = O groups of nearby amino acid residues in the neighbouring chains.
  • The R groups are oriented above and below the plane of the sheet.

The β-pleated sheet arrangement is favoured by amino acids with small R groups.

Question 55.
What is denaturation of proteins? How is denaturation brought about?
OR
What is the effect of denaturation on the structure of proteins?
Answer:
The prαess by which the molecular shape of protein changes without breaking the amide / peptide bonds that form the primary structure is called denaturation. OR Proteins gets easily precipitated. It is an irreversible change and the prαess is called denaturation of proteins.

Denaturation uncoils the protein and destroys the shape and thus loses their characteristic biological activity. Denaturation is brought about by heating the protein with alcohol, concentrated inorganic acids or by salts of heavy metals. During denaturation secondary and tertiary and quternary structures are destroyed but primary structure remains intact.

Example : Boiling of egg to coagulate egg white, conversion of milk to curd.

Question 56.
Define : Enzymes
Answer:
All biological reactions are catalysed by bio-catalyst in living organisms called enzymes.

Question 57.
What are enzymes? Explain with suitable example.
Answer:
All biological or bio-catalysts which catalyse the reactions in living organisms are called enzymes. Chemically all enzymes are proteins. They are required in very small quantities as they are catalyst also they reduce the activation energy for a particular reaction.

Example : Enzyme maltase converts maltose to glucose.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 84

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question 58.
Explain the catalytic action of enzymes.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 85
Answer:
Mechanism of enzyme catalysis : Action of an enzyme on a substrate is known as lock-and-key mechanism.

Accordingly, the enzyme has active site on its surface. A substrate molecule can attach to this active site only if it has the right size and shape. Once in the active site, the substrate is held in the correct orientation, enzymes provide functional group which will attack the substrate and forms the products of reaction. The products leave the active site and the enzyme is ready to act as catalyst again.

Question 59.
Give examples of industrial application of enzyme catalysis.
Answer:

  • Glucose Isomerase (enzyme) is used in conversion of glucose to sweet-tasting fructose.
  • New antibiotics are manufactured using penicillin acylase (enzyme).
  • Laundry detergentts are manufactured using proteases (enzyme).
  • Esters used in cosmetics are manufactured using genetically engineered enzyme.

Question 60.
Draw a neat diagram for enzyme catalysis.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 85

Question 61.
State the main functions of enzymes.
Answer:
Enzymes are biological catalyst and they are highly specific in nature. The two main functions are as follows :
(1) They lower the requirement of activation energy.
(2) They speed up the rate of reaction.
E.g. Enzyme maltase catalyses maltose to glucose.
\(\mathrm{C}_{12} \mathrm{H}_{22} \mathrm{O}_{11}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O} \stackrel{\text { Maltase }}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{C}_{6} \mathrm{H}_{12} \mathrm{O}_{6}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question 62.
What are nucleic acids?
Answer:
Nucleic acids are unbranched polymers of repeating monomers i.e. nucleotides. In other words, nucleic acids have a polynucleotide structure which in turn consists of a base, a pentose sugar and phosphate moiety.

Nucleic acids are biomolecules which are found in the nuclei of all living cells in the form of nucleoproteins or chromosomes.

(Nucleoproteins = Proteins + Nucleic acid)
(prosthetic group)

Question 63.
State the types of nucleic acids.
Answer:
The types of nucleic acids are : Ribonucleic acid (RNA) and deoxy ribonucleic acid (DNA). DNA molecules contain several million nucleotides while RNA molecules contain a few thousand nucleotides.

Question 64.
Explain chemical composition of nucleic acids.
Answer:
Nucleic acids have a polynucleotide structure. Nucleic acids (RNA and DNA) consists of three components :
(1) monosaccharide (sugar)
(2) nitrogen containing base and
(3) phosphate group.

(1) Monosaccharides : Nucleotides of both RNA consist of five membered monosaccharide ring (furanose), called as simply sugar component.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 86
In RNA, the sugar component of nucleotide units is D-ribose and in DNA 2-deoxy-D-ribose.
2 – deoxy means no – OH group at C2 position.

(2) Nitrogen containing base : Total five nitrogen – containing bases are present in nucleic acids. Three bases with one ring (cytosine, uracil and thymine) are derived from the parent compound pyrimidine. Two bases with two rings (adenine and guanine) are derived from the parent compound purine. Each base in designated by a one-letter symbol. Uracil (U) αcurs only in RNA while thymine (T) ocurs only in DNA.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 87

(3) Phosphate group : The sugar units are joined to phosphate through C3 and C5 hydroxyl groups.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question 65.
What is meant by nucleosides?
OR
Write the structure of nucleoside. Give examples.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 89
A nucleoside contains two basic components of nucleic acids i.e. a pentose sugar and a nitrogenous base.

A nucleoside is formed when 1 -position of a pyrimidine (cytosine, thymine or uracil) or 9-position of guanine or adenine base is attached to C- l of sugar by β-linkage.

Examples: Formation of nucleoside:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 90

Question 66.
What is meant by nucleotide?
OR
Write the structure of nucleotide. Give example.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 91
A nucleotide contains all three basic components of nucleic acids i.e., a pentose sugar, a phosphoric acid and a nitrogenous base. These are obtained by esterification of \(\mathrm{C}_{5}^{1}-\mathrm{OH}\) group of the pentose sugar by phosphoric acid. Nucleotides are joined together through phosphate ester linkage. Thus, nucleotides are monophosphates of nucleosides. Abridged names of some nucleotides are AMP, dAMP, UMP, dTMP and so on. Here, the first capital letter is derived from the corresponding base. MP stands for monophosphate. Small letter ‘d’ in the beginning indicates deoxyribose in the nucleotide.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Example :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 92

 

Question 67.
Write the structure of nucleic acids.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 95
Answer:
Nucleic acids, both DNA and RNA, are polymers of nucleotides, formed by joining the 3′ – OH group of one nucleotide with 5′ – phosphate of another nucleotide. Two ends of polynucleotide chain are distinct from each other. One end having free phosphate group of 5′ position is called 5′ end. The other end is 3′ end and has free OH – group at 3′ position.

Question 68.
Draw a schematic representation of polynucleotide structure of nucleic acids.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 96

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question 69.
Explain double helix.
OR
State the salient features of the Watson and Crick mode of DNA.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 98
The Salient features are :

  1. DNA is made of two polynucleotide strands that wind into a right-handed double helix.
  2. The two strands run in opposite directions: one from the Y end to the 3’ end, while the other from the 3’ end to the Y end.
  3. Pcrpcndicular to the axis of the helix, the sugar – phosphate backbone lies on the outside of the helix and the bases lic on the inside.
  4. The hydrogen bonding between the hases of the two DNA strands stabilizes the double helix. This gives rise to a ladder-like structure of DNA double helix.
  5. Adenine always forms two hydrogen bonds with thymine and guanine forms three hydrogen bonds with cytosinc. Thus A – T arid C – G arc complementary hase pairs and the Two strands of the double helix arc complementary to each other.

Question 70.
Give scientific reasons :
1. In the preparation of glucose from sucrose, ethyl alcohol is added at the time of cooling.
Answer:
Hydrolysis of sucrose with dilute hydrαhloric acid gives glucose along with fructose.

Ethyl alcohol is added at the time of cooling in the preparation of glucose, to separate glucose from fructose. Glucose being insoluble in alcohol, crystallizes out first, while fructose being more soluble in alcohol, remains in the solution.

Question 71.
Answer in one sentence :

(1) How is glucose stored in the animal body?
Answer:
Glucose is stored in the form of glycogen in the animal body.

(2) Write other term used for carbohydrates.
Answer:
Carbohydrates are often termed as saccharides or sugars.

(3) How many moles of acetic anhydride will be required to form glucose penta acetate from 1 mole of glucose?
Answer:
10 moles of acetic anhydride.

(4) What are reducing sugars?
Answer:
Reducing sugars : Carbohydrates which reduce Fehling solution to red ppt of Cu20 or Tollen’s reagent to shining metallic silver are called reducing sugars. All monosaccharides and oligosaccharides except sucrose are reducing sugars.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

(5) What are non-reducing sugars?
Answer:
Non-reducing sugars : Carbohydrates which do not reduce Fehling solution and Tollen’s reagent are called non-reducing sugars. E.g. sucrose.

(6) Give an example each of reducing and non-reducing sugars.
Answer:
Reducing sugars : Maltose or lactose
Non-reducing sugars : Sucrose.

(7) Name the linkage which joins two monosaccharide units through oxygen atom.
Answer:
The linkage which joins two monosaccharide units through oxygen atom is called glycosidic linkage.

(8) Name the sugar present in DNA.
Answer:
The sugar present in DNA is deoxyribose.

(9) A nucleotide from DNA containing thymine is hydrolysed. What are the products formed?
Answer:
When nucleotide from DNA containing thymine is hydrolysed, 2-deoxy-D-ribose, thymine and phosphoric acid is obtained.

(10) How is zwitterion formed?
Answer:
In aqueous solution, the carboxyl group loses a proton while the amino group accepts it, as a result, a dipolar or zwitter ion is formed.

(11) Name the amino acids which are synthesized in the body.
Answer:
The amino acids which are synthesized in the body are called non-essential amino acids. Examples : Glutamic acid, serine.

(12) Name the four bases present in DNA which of these is not present in RNA.
Answer:
Purines-adenine (A) and guanine (G); Pyrimidines-thymine (T) and cytosine (C), these four bases are present in DNA. Out of these, thymine (T) is not present in RNA.

(13) What are different types of RNA which are found in the cell?
Answer:
There are three different types of RNA found in the cell. (1) The messenger RNA which carries the message to the ribosome (2) Ribosomal RNA where synthesis of protein takes place (3) The transport RNA.

(14) State the functions of RNA and DNA.
Answer:
RNA and DNA are responsible for generic characteristics : DNA preserves the information and uses it by producing duplicate identical DNA molecules. RNA carries messages and transports them.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 72.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each subquestion :

1. Which of the following is not sugar?
(a) Sucrose
(b) Starch
(c) Fructose
(d) Glucose
Answer:
(b) Starch

2. Which of the following is the example of disaccharide?
(a) Glucose
(b) Raffinose
(c) Cellulose
(d) Sucrose
Answer:
(d) Sucrose

3. Fructose is
(a) aldopentose
(b) aldohexose
(c) ketopentose
(d) ketohexose
Answer:
(d) ketohexose

4. Oxidation product of glucose with bromine water is
(a) sorbitol
(b) gluconic acid
(c) glutamic acid
(d) saccharic acid
Answer:
(b) gluconic acid

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

5. The general formula of carbohydrates is
(a) C(H2O)
(b) Cx(H2O)y
(c) Cx(H2O)
(d) Cx(H2O)x
Answer:
(b) Cx(H2O)y

6. Monosaccharides containing aldehyde group are called
(a) aldoses
(b) ketoses
(c) polysaccharides
(d) disaccharides
Answer:
(a) aldoses

7. Which of the following sugars can be used to prepare glucose on a large scale?
(a) Cellulose
(b) Cane sugar
(c) Galactose
(d) Starch
Answer:
(d) Starch

8. Which of the following carbohydrates cannot undergo hydrolysis?
(a) Glucose
(b) Sucrose
(c) Cellulose
(d) Maltose
Answer:
(a) Glucose

9. Glucose differs from fructose in
(a) the functional group
(b) the number of chiral carbon atoms
(c) the number of carbon atoms
(d) both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(d) both (a) and (b)

10. The example of aldopentose is
(a) arabinose
(b) glucose
(c) fructose
(d) sucrose
Answer:
(a) arabinose

11. Dextrose, grape sugar and blood sugar αcurs in
(a) fructose
(b) glucose
(c) sucrose
(d) starch
Answer:
(b) glucose

12. The example of ketopentose is
(a) galactose
(b) ribose
(c) raffinose
(d) maltose
Answer:
(b) ribose

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

13. Cane sugar on hydrolysis gives
(a) glucose and maltose
(b) glucose and lactose
(c) glucose and fructose
(d) only glucose
Answer:
(c) glucose and fructose

14. On commerical scale, glucose is prepared from
(a) starch
(b) potato pulp
(c) sucrose
(d) both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(d) both (a) and (b)

15. The number of monosaccharide units formed on hydrolysis of glucose are
(a) zero
(b) one
(c) two
(d) three
Answer:
(a) zero

16. Which of the following is NOT TRUE about glucose?
(a) It is monosaccharide
(b) It is a polyhydroxy aldehyde
(c) It is polyhydroxy ketone
(d) It contains six carbon atoms
Answer:
(c) It is polyhydroxy ketone

17. Final hydrolysis product of simple protein is
(a) carboxylic acid
(b) α-amino acid
(c) mineral acid
(d) acetic acid
Answer:
(b) α-amino acid

18. Haemoglobin is the example of-
(a) simple protein
(b) derived protein
(c) fibrous protein
(d) conjugated protein
Answer:
(d) conjugated protein

19. Protein are also called
(a) polysaccharides
(b) polypeptides
(c) polyglycerides
(d) polyster
Answer:
(b) polypeptides

20. The simplest amino acid is
(a) glycine
(b) oxalic acid
(c) adipic acid
(d) caprolactam
Answer:
(a) glycine

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

21. Amino acids usually exist in the form of zwitter ion which consist of
(a) the basic group-NH2 and the acidic group -COOH
(b) the acidic group -N+H3 and the basic group COO
(c) the acidic group -COO+ and the acidic group NH3-
(d) acidic or basic group
Answer:
(b) the acidic group -N+H3 and the basic group COO-

22. The water insoluble protein is
(a) casein of milk
(b) albumin
(c) serum albumin
(d) keratin of hair
Answer:
(d) keratin of hair

23. The main structural feature of a protein molecule is the presence of
(a) an ester linkage
(b) an ether linkage
(c) a peptide linkage
(d) all of these
Answer:
(c) a peptide linkage

24. Milk sugar is
(a) sucrose
(b) lactose
(c) maltose
(d) glucose
Answer:
(b) lactose

25. The carbohydrates used for silvering of mirror is
(a) fructose
(b) starch
(c) glucose
(d) cellulose
Answer:
(c) glucose

26. Which one of the following is NOT produced by human body?
(a) DNA
(b) Hormones
(c) Enzymes
(d) Vitamins
Answer:
(c) Enzymes

27. A biological catalyst is essentially
(a) an amino acid
(b) an enzyme
(c) a nitrogen molecule
(d) a carbohydrate
Answer:
(d) a carbohydrate

28. Which one of the following is not a constituent of RNA?
(a) Ribose
(b) Uracil
(c) Thymine
(d) Phosphate
Answer:
(b) Uracil

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

29. DNA is a polymer of units of
(a) sugars
(b) ribose
(c) amino acids
(d) nucleotides
Answer:
(c) amino acids

30. Which one of the following molecules will form zwitter ion?
(a) CH3COOH
(b) CH3CH2NH2
(c) CCl3NO2
(d) NH2CH2COOH
Answer:
(d) NH2CH2COOH

31. In metabolic prαess the maximum energy is given by
(a) carbohydrates
(b) proteins
(c) vitamins
(d) fats
Answer:
(d) fats

32. DNA has a structure of helix was reported by
(a) Herman Fischer
(b) Fedrick Sauger
(c) Andreas Marggraf
(d) Watson and Crick
Answer:
(d) Watson and Crick

33. The secondary structure of a protein is determined by
(a) co-ordinate bond
(b) covalent bond
(c) ionic bond
(d) hydrogen bond
Answer:
(d) hydrogen bond

34. In maltose, glycosidic linkage is present between the two glucose units at positions
(a) 1, 2
(b) 1, 1
(c) 1, 3
(d) 1, 4
Answer:
(d) 1, 4

35. Which of the following amino acids is basic in nature?
(a) Valine
(b) Tyrosine
(c) Arginine
(d) Luecine
Answer:
(c) Arginine

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

36. Sucrose molecules consists of
(a) a glucofuranose and a fructopyranose
(b) a glucofuranose and a fructofuranose
(c) a glucopyranose and a fructopyranose
(d) a glucopyranose and a’ fructofuranose
Answer:
(d) a glucopyranose and a’ fructofuranose

37. Which one of the following statements is not correct about DNA molecule?
(a) It has double helix structure
(b) It serves as hereditary material
(c) The two DNA strands are exactly similar
(d) Its replication is called semi-conservative mode of replication
Answer:
(c) The two DNA strands are exactly similar

38. Glycine on heating forms
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 107
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 108
Answer:
(a)

39. Acidic amino acid is
(a) Glutamine
(b) Glutamic acid
(c) Tyrosine
(d) Lysine
Answer:
(b) Glutamic acid

40. Basic amino acid is
(a) Lysine
(b) Glycine
(c) Cystine
(d) Alanine
Answer:
(a) Lysine

41. Precipitation of protein is referred to as
(a) destruction of proteins
(b) separation of proteins
(c) denaturation of proteins
(d) fragmentation of proteins
Answer:
(c) denaturation of proteins

42. An amino acid containing sulphur is
(a) serine
(b) cysteine
(c) valine
(d) asparagine
Answer:
(b) cysteine

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

43. Rhamnose is a
(a) carbohydrate
(b) protein
(c) lipid
(d) vitamin
Answer:
(a) carbohydrate

44. Lactose on hydrolysis gives
(a) glucose + glucose
(b) glucose + fructose
(c) glucose + galactose
(d) fructose + galactose
Answer:
(c) glucose + galactose

45. Raffinose on hydrolysis gives
(a) glucose + glucose + galactose
(b) glucose + fructose + galactose
(c) glucose + galactose + galactose
(d) fructose + galactose + galactose
Answer:
(b) glucose + fructose + galactose

46. Naturally αcurring glucose is
(a) dextro rotatory
(b) laevo rotatory
(c) racemic mixture
(d) all of these
Answer:
(a) dextro rotatory

47. Amylopectin is
(a) soluble in water and constitutes about 80% of starch
(b) insoluble in water and constitutes about 80% of starch
(c) Soluble in alcohol and constitutes about 60% of starch
(d) in soluble in alcohol and constitutes about 60% of starch
Answer:
(b) insoluble in water and constitutes about 80% of starch

48. Insulin contains
(a) 51 amino acids
(b) 151 amino acids
(c) 15 amino acids
(d) 115 amino acids
Answer:
(a) 51 amino acids

49. Pyranose structure of glucose is
(a) an open chain structure of glucose
(b) a structure of reduction product of glucose
(c) a cyclic six-membered structure of glucose
(d) a four-membered cyclic form of glucose
Answer:
(c) a cyclic six-membered structure of glucose

50. The number of – OH groups present in ribulose is
(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 6
(d) 5
Answer:
(b) 4

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

51. Peptide linkage is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 109
Answer:
(d)

52. Stachyose is an example of
(a) monosaccharides
(b) disaccharides
(c) trisaccharides
(d) tetrasaccharides
Answer:
(d) tetrasaccharides

53. How many moles of (CH3CO)2O will be required to form glucose pentaacetate form 2 moles of glucose?
(a) 2
(b) 5
(c) 10
(d) 2.5
Answer:
(c) 10

54. Which of the following NOT present in DNA?
(a) Adenine
(b) Guanine
(c) Thymine
(d) Uracil
Answer:
(d) Uracil

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

55. Maltose is a
(a) polysaccharide
(b) disaccharide
(c) trisaccharide
(d) monosaccharide
Answer:
(b) disaccharide

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Question 1.
What are amines?
Answer:
Amines : The alkyl or aryl derivatives of ammonia in which one, two or all the three hydrogen atoms attached to nitrogen are replaced by same or different alkyl or aryl groups are called amines. OR Amines are nitrogen-containing organic compounds having basic character.

Example : methyl amine : CH3 – NH2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Question 2.
Classify the following amines as primary, secondary and tertiary.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 7

Question 3.
Mention the functional group in :
(1) Primary amine
(2) Secondary amine
(3) Tertiary amine.
Answer:
(1) A primary amine has a functional group – NH2 (amino group).
Example : ethylamine, C2H5 – NH2
(2) A secondary amine has a functional group – NH – (imino group).
Example : Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 8
(3) A tertiary amine has a functional group Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 9 (tertiary nitrogen atom)

Example :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 10

Question 4.
Write common and IUPAC names of following compounds :
Answer:
(A) Primary amines :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 14
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 15
(B) Secondary amine :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 16
(C) Tertiary Aimines :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 17.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Question 5.
Give the structures of the following :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 22

Question 6.
Give the IUPAC names of the following amines :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 23

Question 7.
Write the IUPAC names of the following amines :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 24

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Question 8.
Give the structures and IUPAC names of the following amines :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 25

Question 9.
Classify the following amines as primary, secondary and tertiary and write the IUPAC names.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 26

Question 10.
Write the structures and classify the following amines as primary, secondary, tertiary amines.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 27

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Question 11.
Write the common and IUPAC name of a tertiary amine in which one methyl, one ethyl and one w-propyl group is attached to nitrogen.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 28

Question 12.
How will you prepare ethanamine from ethyl iodide?
Answer:
When ethyl iodide is heated with excess of alcoholic ammonia, under pressure at 373 K ethanamine is obtained as a major product.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 29

Question 13.
How is a nitroalkane converted to a primary amine?
OR
What is the action of LiAlH4/ether on (i) 1-Nitropropane (ii) 2-MethyI-l-nitropropane?
Answer:
When a nitroalkane is refluxed with tin (or iron) and concentrated HCl it gives corresponding primary amine.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 33
For example, (1) nitromethane on reduction by refluxing with Sn and concentrated HCl gives methylamine.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 34

(2) 1-Nitropropane on reduction with Sn and concentrated HCl gives propan-1-amine.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 35

(3) Niirobenzcnc on reducion with tin and concentrated HCI or by using H2/Pd in ethanol gives anilinc.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 36

(4) When nitropropane is reduced in the presence of LiAlH4 in ether, n-propyl amine is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 37

(5) When 2-methyl-1-nitropropane is reduced in the presence of LiAlH4 in ether, 2-methyl propan-1-amine is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 38

Question 14.
How will you prepare aniline from nitrobenzene?
OR
How is aniline prepared from nitro compounds?
Answer:
Nitrobenzene is reduced to aniline by passing hydrogen gas in the presence of finely divided nickel, palladium or platinum.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 39

Question 15.
Identify the compounds A and B in the following reactions
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 40
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 41

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Question 16.
How will you obtain a primary amine from an alkyl cyanide (nitrile)?
OR
Write a short note on Mendius reduction.
Answer:
Alkyl cyanides (nitriles) on reduction by sodium and ethyl alcohol form corresponding primary amines. This reaction is called Mendius reduction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 42
For example; propionitrile on reduction by sodium and ethanol gives n-propyl amine (Propan-1-amine).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 43
Methyl cyanide or acetonitrile on reduction by sodium and ethanol gives ethanaminc.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 44

Question 17.
How will you prepare ethylamine from acetonitrile?
OR
How is ethanamine prepared from methyl cyanide?
OR
What is the action of a mixture of sodium and alcohol on acetonitrile?
Answer:
Methyl cyanide or acetonitrile on reduction by sodium and ethyl alcohol forms ethanamine. The reaction is called Mendius reduction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 45

Question 18.
How will convert phenyl acetonitrile to β-phenylethylamine?
Answer:
When phenyl acetonitrile is reduced in the presence of sodium and ethanol, β-phenyl ethylamine is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 46

Question 19.
How will you obtain primary amine from an acid amide?
Answer:
Acid amides on reduction with lithium aluminium hydride or sodium, ethanol form corresponding primary amines.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 50
For example : Acetamide on reduction with lithium aluminium hydride or sodium, ethanol gives ethylamines.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 51

Question 20.
Explain Hoffmann degradation of amides.
Write a note on Hoffmann bromamide degradation.
Answer:
The conversion of amides into amines in the presence of bromine and alkali is known as Hoffmann degradation of amides. An important characteristic of this reaction is that an amine with one carbon less than those in the amide is formed. Thus, decreasing the length of carbon chain. This reaction is an example of molecular rearrangement and involves the migration of an alkyl or aryl group from the carbonyl carbon to the adjacent nitrogen atom. For example,

(1) When propanamide is treated with bromine and aqueous or alcoholic sodium hydroxide, ethanamine is obtained which has one carbon atom less.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 53
(2) When benzamide is treated with bromine and aqueous or alcoholic sodium hydroxide, aniline is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 54

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Question 21.
How will you obtain methyl amine from acetamide?
Answer:
When acetamide is treated with bromine and aq or alcoholic solution of KOH, methyl amine is obtained, which has one cabon atom less.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 55

Question 22.
How will you convert the following?

(1) Ethyl bromide to ethylamine.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 60

(2) Propionitrile to n-propyl amine.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 61

(3) Acetonitrile to ethylamine.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 62

(4) Phenyl acetonitrile to β-phenylethyl amine.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 63

(5) Acetamide to ethylamine.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 64

(6) Nitropropane to propan-l-amine.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 65

(7) Nitrobenzene to Aniline.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 66

(8) Benzamide to aniline.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 67

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Question 23.
How will you prepare propan-l-amine from (1) butane nitrile (2) 1-nitropropane (3) propanamide (4) butanamide?
Answer:
(1) From butane nitrile :
When butane nitrile is reduced by sodium and ethanol, it gives propan-l-amine.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 68

(2) From 1-nitropropane :
When 1-nitropropane is reduced in the presence of tin and cone, hydrochloric acid, propan-l-amine is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 69

(3) From propanamide :
When propanamide is reduced in the presence of lithium aluminium hydride, propan-l-amine is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 70

(4) From butanamide :
When butanamide is treated with bromine and aq. KOH, propan-l-amine is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 71

Question 24.
Write a reaction to, convert acetic acid into methyl amine.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 78

Question 25.
Primary and secondary amines have boiling points higher than the tertiary amines. Explain why?
Answer:
(1) The N – H bond in amines is polar in nature because of electronegativities of nitrogen (3.0) and hydrogen (2.1) are different.
(2) Due to the polar nature of N – H bond, primary and secondary have strong intermolecular hydrogen bonding. Tertiary amines do not have intermolecular hydrogen bonding as there is no hydrogen atom on nitrogen of tertiary amine. Thus, intermolecular forces of attraction are strongest in primary and secondary amines and weakest in to tertiary amines. Hence, primary and secondary amines have boiling points higher than the tertiary amines.

Question 26.
Amines have boiling points higher than the hydrocarbon but lower than the alcohols of comparable masses. Explain, why?
Answer:
Amines are polar than alkanes but less polar than alcohols. Primary and secondary amines form intermolecular hydrogen bonds. This hydrogen bonding leads to an associated structure. The association is more in primary amines than that in secondary amines as there are two hydrogen atoms attached to the nitrogen atom. However, tertiary amines do not form intermolecular hydrogen bonds because they do not contain any hydrogen atoms attached to the nitrogen atom. Hence, amines have higher boiling points than the hydrocarbons but lower boiling points than the alcohols of comparable masses.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 79

Compound Molar mass Boiling points (K)
nC2H5CH(CH3)2 72 300
nC4H9NH2 73 350.8
nC4H9OH 74 391

Question 27.
Arrange the following compounds in the decreasing order of their solubility in water.
(a) Ethyl amine, diethyl amine and triethyl amine.
Answer:
Diethyl amine > triethyl amine > ethyl amine
(The reason that ethyl group has greater +1 effect than methyl group)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

(b) Ethyl amine, n-propyl amine and n-butyl amine.
Answer: n-butyl amine < n-propyl amine < ethyl amine

(c) n-Butane, n -butyl alcohol and n-butyl amine
Answer:
n-butyl alcohol < n-butyl amine < n-butane

Question 28.
Arrange the following compounds in the decreasing order of their boiling points.
(a) Ethane, ethyl amine and ethyl alcohol.
Answer:
Ethyl alcohol < ethyl amine < ethane

(b) Ethyl amine, n-propyl amine and n-butyl amine.
Answer:
n-butyl amine < n-propyl amine < ethyl amine

(c) n-propyl amine, ethyl methyl amine and trimethyl amine.
Answer:
n-propyl amine < ethyl methyl amine < trimethyl amine.

(d) Ethyl alcohol, dimethyl amine and ethyl amine.
Answer:
Ethyl alcohol < ethyl amine < dimethyl amine.

Question 29.
Explain the basic nature of amines with a suitable examples.
OR
Explain why amines are basic.

Question 38.
Tertiary amine (R3N) or 3° amine is weaker base than secondary amine R2NH or 2° amine. Explain.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 81
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 82
The increase in basic strength from 1° amine to 2° amine is explained on the basis of increased stabilization of conjugate acids by +1 effect of the increased number of the alkyl group. However, decreased basic strength of 3° implies that the conjugate acid of 3° amine is less stabilized and is weak base though the +1 effect of three alkyl groups in R3NH is large.

R2NH is best stabilized by solvation while the stabilization by solvation is very poor in R3NH. Hence (R3N) or tertiary amine or 3° amine is weaker base than secondary amine (R2NH) or 2° amine.

Question 30.
Primary or aliphatic amine is a stronger base than ammonia. Explain.
Answer:
(1) The alkyl group in primary amines has +I effect i.e. (electron releasing).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 83
The alkyl group tends to increase the electron density on the nitrogen atom. As a result, amines can donate the lone pair of electrons on nitrogen more easily than ammonia.

(2) The amine being a base, can donate a pair of electrons to an acid. The alkyl group with +I effect will disperse the positive charge on the cation more than ammonia.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 84

Due to +I effect of alkyl group cation formed by primary amine is more stable compared to cation formed from ammonia. Also it is seen that observed increasing basic strength from ammonia to primary amine is explained on the basis of increased stabilization of conjugate acids by +I effect for the presence of alkyl (R) groups. Hence, primary or aliphatic amine is a stronger base than ammonia.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Question 31.
Aniline is less basic than ammonia. Explain.
Answer:
The less basic character of aniline can be explained on the basis of resonance shown by aniline.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 85

Due to resonance, the nitrogen atom of amino group in aniline acquires a positive charge, hence, lone pair of electrons is less available for protonation as compared to that of ammonia. Aniline is resonance stabilized by five resonance structures. On the other hand, aniline in aqueous medium, accepts a proton does not have lone pair of electrons on nitrogen to produce a very low concentration of anilium ion and anilium ion shows only two resonance structures and therefore less stabilized than anline.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 86

Thus, aniline is more stable than anilium ion. Hence aniline accepts proton less readily or less basic in nature than ammonia.

Question 32.
Explain the order of basicity in ammonia and aliphatic amines.
Answer:
Since nitrogen atom in ammonia molecule has a lone pair of electrons, it is a Lewis base.
Greater the availability of an electron pair, more is the basic character.

Since alkyl group (R -) is an electron releasing group with (+I) inductive effect, alkyl amines act as a stronger base than ammonia.

The decreasing order of basicity is –
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 87

The availability of a lone pair of electrons on a nitrogen atom in amines is influenced by steric factor due to crowding of alkyl groups which affects solvation along with inductive effect of alkyl groups.

Due to high energy of solvation of \(\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\) ions, they acquire higher stability in aqueous solutions.

The presence of alkyl groups in secondary and tertiary amines, due to steric hindrance decrease the solvation energy.

This effect is more in tertiary amines making the tertiary ammonium ions (R3NH+) unstable as compared to secondary ammonium ion (R2N+H2).
Hence the cumulative effect on the order of basicity of amines is, secondary amine > primary amine > tertiary amine > ammonia (NH3).

Question 33.
Arrange the following amines in the decreasing order of their basic nature.
(a) Aniline, propan-l-amine and N-methylethanamine.
Answer:
N-methylethanamine < propan-l-amine < aniline

(b) Benzene-1, 4-diamine, ammonia and 4-aminobenzoic acid.
Answer:
Ammonia < benzene-1, 4-diamine < 4-aminobenzoic acid

(c) N-Methylaniline, phenylmethylamine and N-phenylaniline.
Answer:
N-Methylaniline < N-phenylaniline < phenylmethylamine

Question 34.
Arrange the following amines in the increasing order of their pKb values.
(a) Aniline, N-methylaniline and cyclohexalamine.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 88

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

(b) Phenylmethylamine, 2-aminotoluene and 2-fluoroaniline.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 89

(c) Aniline, 4-methoxyaniline and 4-nitroaniline.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 90

Question 35.
Arrange the following compounds in the decreasing order of their basic nature in the gaseous phase.
Ammonia, N-methylhexanamine, propan-1-amine and N, N-dimethylethanolamine.
Answer:
Propan-1-amine < N-methylethanamine < N,N-dimethylmethanamine < ammonia

Question 36.
Explain laboratory test for amines.
Answer:
(1) All amines are basic compounds. Aqueous solution of water soluble amines turns red litmus blue.

(2) When water insoluble amine is dissolved in aqueous HCl, forms water soluble substituted ammonium chloride, further a substituted ammonium chloride on reaction with excess aqueous NaOH regenerates the original insoluble amine.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 91

(3) Diazotization reaction/ Orange dye test: In a sample of aromatic primary amine, 1-2 mL of cone. HCl is added. The aqueous solution of NaNO2 is added with cooling. This solution is transfered to a test tube containing solution of β naphthol in NaOH. Formation of orange dye indicates presence of aromatic primary amino group. (It may be noted that temperature of all the solutions and reaction mixtures is maintained near 0 °C throughout the reaction).

Question 37.
Explain Hofmann’s exhaustive alkylation.
OR
Explain Hofmann’s exhaustive methylation of amines.
Answer:
Hofmann’s Exhaustive alkylation : When a primary amine is heated with excess of primary alkyl halide it gives a mixture of secondary amine, tertiary amine along with tetraalkylammonium halide
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 92

If excess of alkyl halide is used, tetraalkyl ammonium halide is obtained as major product. The reaction is known as exhaustive alkylation of amines.

Hofmann’s Exhaustive Methylation : The process of converting a primary, secondary or tertiary amine into quaternary ammonium halide by heating them with excess of methyl iodide, is called exhaustive methylation or Hoffmann’s exhaustive methylation.

Thus when methyl amine is heated with excess of methyl iodide it forms dimethylamine (secondary amine), then trimethylamine (a tertiary amine) and finally of quaternary ammonium iodide. The reaction is carried out in the presence of mild base NaHCO3, to neutralize the large quantity of HI formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 93

Question 38.
Predict the products of exhaustive methylation of following compounds.
(1) Ethylamine.
Answer:
A primary amine, ethylamine (CH3 – CH2 – NH2) on exhaustive methylation, i.e., on heating with excess methyl iodide, forms secondary amine, tertiary amine and finally a quaternary ammonium salt, ethyl-trimethyl ammonium iodide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 97

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

(2) Benzylamine.
Answer:
Benzylamine C6H5CH2NH2 on exhaustive methylation i.e., on heating with excess methyl iodide forms benzylmethyl amine, benzyldimethyl ammonium chloride and finally benzyltrimethyl ammonium iodide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 98

Question 39.
Explain Hofmann elimination.
OR
Write a note on Hoffmann elimination.
Answer:
When tetra alkyl ammonium halide is heated with moist silver hydroxide, a quaternary ammonium hydroxide is obtained. Quaternary ammonium hydroxides are deliquescent crystalline solids and are basic in nature. Quaternary ammonium hydroxides on strong heating undergo ^-elimination to give tertiaryamine, alkenes and water, the reaction is called Hofmann elimination. The major product is least substituted alkene.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 99

Question 40.
Write the bond line formula of the alkene which is obtained as major product from the following amines, on heating with excess of methyl iodide followed by strong heating with moist silver oxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 102
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 103

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 104
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 105

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 106
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 107

Question 41.
Compound X with a molecular formula C5H13N did not react with nitrous acid, but reacted with one mole of CH3I to form a salt. What is the structure of X?
Answer:
The structure of compound X is Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 108 ethyl-N-methylethanamine since compound X is tertiary amine. It reacts with one mole of CH3I to give a quaternary ammonium salt.

Question 42.
What is the action of acetyl chloride on :
(1) ethyl amine (ethanamine)
(2) diethyl amine (N-Ethylethanamine)
(3) triethyl amine?
OR
Write a short note on acylation of amines.
Answer:
The reaction of amines with acetyl chloride is called acetylation of amines.

(1) Acetyl chloride on reaction with ethylamine forms monoacetyl derivative, N-ethylacetamide (or N-acetyl ethylamine).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 109
(2) Diethyl amine on reaction with acetyl chloride forms N-acetyl dimethylamine.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 110
(3) Triethyl amine, being a tertiary amine does not have H atom attached to nitrogen of amine, hence it does not react with acetyl chloride.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 111

Question 43.
What is the action of acetic anhydride on aniline?
Answer:
Aniline on reaction with acetic anhydride forms N-phenyl acetamide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 116

Question 44.
What is the action of benzoyl chloride on ethanamine?
Answer:
When benzoyl chloride is treated with ethanamine, N-ethyl benzamide is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 117

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Question 45.
What is the action of nitrous acid on ethylamine?
Answer:
Ethyl amine on reaction with nitrous acid in cold forms aliphatic diazonium salt, (unstable intermediate), which decomposes immediately by reaction with solvent water to produce ethyl alcohol and nitrogen gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 123

Question 46.
What is the action of nitrous acid on aniline?
Answer:
Aniline reacts with nitrous acid in cold to form diazonium salt which has reasonable solubility at 273 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 124

Question 47.
How is benzenediazon|um chloride prepared?
Answer:
Benzenediazonium chloride is prepared by the action of nitrous acid on aniline at 273-278 K. Nitrous acid being unstable, is prepared in situ by the reaction between sodium nitrite and dilute hydrochloric acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 125

Question 48.
Write resonance stabilized structures of aryl diazonium salt.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 126

Question 49.
Write a note on Sandmeyer’s reaction.
OR
How is aryl chloride or aryl bromide or aryl cyanide prepared from diazonium salt?
Answer:
[Replacement by Cl, Br and -CN : Sandmeyer reaction.] Freshly prepared aromatic diazonium salt on reaction with cuprous chloride gives aryl chloride, on reaction with cuprous bromide gives aryl bromide and on reaction with cuprous cyanide give aryl cyanide. The reaction in which copper (I) salts are used to replace nitrogen in diazonium salt is called Sandmeyer reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 128

Question 50.
How is aryl chloride or aryl bromide prepared by Gattermann reactions?
Answer:
The aryl chloride or bromides can also be prepared by Gattermann reactions in which diazonium salt reacts with
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 129

Question 51.
How is aryl iodide obtained from diazonium salt?
Answer:
When diazonium salt is warmed with potassium iodide, aryl iodide is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 130

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Question 52.
Explain the reduction of arene diazonium salt?
OR
How is arene obtained from arene diazonium salt?
OR
What is the action of benzene diazonium chloride on ethanol?
Answer:
Arene diazonium salt on treatment with mild reducing agents like phosphinic acid (hypophosphoric acid) or ethanol, arene is obtained.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 131Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 132

Question 53.
How is phenol obtained from arene diazonium salt?
Answer:
When arene diazonium salt is slowly added to a large volume of boiling dilute sulphuric acid, phenol is obtained,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 133

Question 54.
How is aryl fluoride obtained from diazonium salt?
Answer:
When fluoroboric acid is treated with the solution of diazonium salt, a precipitate of diazonium fluoroborate is obtained, which is filtered and dried. When dry diazonium fluoroborate is heated, it decomposes to give aryl fluoride. This reaction is called Balz-Schiemann reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 134

Question 55.
How is nitrobenzene obtained from benzene diazonium fluoroborate?
Answer:
When benzene diazonium fluoroborate is heated with aqueous solution of sodium nitrite in the presence of copper powder, nitrobenzene is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 135
Benzene diazonium fluorobate can be obtained by reaction of benzene diazonium chloride with HBF4.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 136

Question 56.
What is meant by a coupling reaction? Explain with suitable examples.
OR
What is the action of benzene diazonium chloride on (a) phenol in alkaline medium (b) aniline?
OR
Write a note on the coupling reaction.
Answer:
Diazonium salts react with certain aromatic compounds having an electron-rich group (e.g.-OH, – NH2, etc.) to form azo compounds. This reaction is an electrophilic substitution and is called coupling reaction. Azo compounds are brightly coloured and are used as dyes and indicators. Coupling reaction is an electrophilic substitution reaction. Benzene diazonium chloride reacts with alkaline solution of phenol to give p-hydroxy azo benzene (orange dye).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 139
Benzene diazonium chloride reacts with aniline in mild alkaline medium to give p-aminobenzene (yellow dye).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 140

Question 57.
What is the action of p-toluene sulphonyl chloride on ethyl amine and diethyl amine?
Answer:
(1) When ethyl amine is treated with p-toluene sulphonyl chloride, N-ethyl p-toluene sulphonamide is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 144
(2) When diethyl amine is treated with p-toluene suiphonyl chloride. N.N-dicthyl p-toluene suiphonyl amide is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 145

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Question 58.
How will you distinguish between :
(1) Ethylamine, diethyl amine and triethyl amine by using (i) nitrous acid (ii) Hinsberg’s reagent.
(2) Diethyl amine and triethyl amine by using acetic anhydride.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 150
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 151

Question 59.
Give a chemical test to distinguish between following pairs of compounds.
(i) Ethylamine and diethyl amine :
Answer:
Ethylamine (C2H5NH2) is a primary amine while diethyl amine ( (C2H5)2NH) is a secondary amine. So the two can be distinguished by the following test.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 152

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

(ii) Ethyl amine and aniline :
Answer:
Ethylamine is an aliphatic amine, while aniline is an aromatic amine. So the two can be distinguished by the following test :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 153

(iii) Aniline and benzyl amine :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 154

(iv) Aniline and N-ethylaniline :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 155

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Question 60.
Compound ‘X’ with a molecular formula C4H11N did not react with Hinsberg’s reagent, but reacted with one mole of CH3I to form a salt. What is the structure of ‘X’?
Answer:
The structure of compound ‘X’ is :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 156
Since the compound ‘X’ does not react with NaN02 and HC1 i.e. nitrous acid (HO – N = O), it must be a tertiary amine.

The tertiary amine reacts with one mole of CH3I to give a quaternary ammonium salt.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 157

Question 74.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 158
p-(dimethylamino) azobenzene is yellow dye which was formerly used as a colouring agent in margarine. Write the structures of the reactants used in the preparation of this dye.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 159

Question 61.
Convert 3-Methyl aniline into 3-nitrotoluene.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 160

Question 62.
How will you bring about following conversions?
(1) N.Methyl aniline into N-methyl benzanilide.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 161

(2) 1.4-Dichlorobutane Into hexane-1,6-diamlne.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 162

(3) Benzene into 3-bromo aniline.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 163

(4) Chlorobenzene into 4-chioroanilinc.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 164

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

(5) 11enaniide into toluene.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 165

Question 63.
What is the action of aqueous bromine on aniline?
Answer:
Action of aqueous bromine on aniline : When aniline is treated with bromine water at room temperature, a white precipitate of 2, 4, 6-tri bromoaniline is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 166

Question 64.
Explain the action of cone, nitric acid (nitrating mixture) on aniline.
Answer:
When aniline is warmed with a mixture of cone, nitric acid and cone, sulphuric acid (a nitrating mixture), a mixture of ortho, meta and para nitroaniline is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 169

Question 65.
What is the action of acetic anhydride on aniline?
Answer:
When aniline is heated with acetic anhydride, an acetanilide is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 170

Question 66.
How will you convert aniline to p-nltroanhline? (major product)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 171

Question 67.
What is the action of cone, sulphuric acid on aniline?
Answer:
Aniline on treatment with cold sulphuric acid forms anilium hydrogen sulphate which on heating with sulphuric acid at 453 K-475 K gives sulphanilic acid, (p-aminobenzene sulphonic acid) as major product.Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 172
Sulphanilic acid exists as a salt; called dipolar ion or zwitter ion. It is produced by the reaction between an acidic group and a basic group present in the same molecule.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Question 68.
How will you convert the following?
(1) Ethylamine to ethyl alcohol.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 173

(2) N-Methyl aniline to N-Nitroso-N-methyl aniline.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 174

(3) Diethylamine to N-nitrosodiethylamine
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 175

(4) Triethylamine to triethyl ammonium nitrite.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 176

(5) Ethyl amine to N-ethylacetamide.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 177

(6) Diethyl amine to N-acetyl diethylamine.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 178

(7) Aniline to acetanilide.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 179

(8) Aniline to N-ethyl henzamide.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 180

(9) Ethylamine to ethyl isocyanide.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 181

(10) Aniline to phenyl isocyanide.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 182

(11) Aniline to 2,4,6-tribromoaniline.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 183

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Question 69.
Give a plausible explanation for each of the following statements :
(1) Ethylamine is soluble in water whereas aniline is not.
Answer:
Ethylamine is soluble in water due to intermolecular hydrogen bonding resulting in the formation of C2H5NH3 ion. Whereas in anline the hydrogen bonding with water is negligible due to the phenyl group (C6H5) is bulky and has -I effect. Therefore, aniline is nearly insoluble in water.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 184

(2) Butan-1-ol is more soluble in water than butani-amine.
Answer:
Rutan- l-al is more soluble in watcr duc to intermoiccular hydrogen bonding. In alcohols, hydrogen bonding is through oxygen atoms. WIereas hutani-amine is less soluble in water due to the larger hydrocarbon part is hydrophobic in nature. Hence, butan-l-ol is more soluble in water than butani-amine.

(3) Butan-1-amlne has higher boiling point than N-ethylethanamine.
Answer:
Due to the presence of two H-atoms on N-atom in butait- I -amine, they undergo extensive intermolecular H-bonding while in N-cthylethanamine due to the presence of one-H atom on the N-atom, they undergo least intermolecular H-bonding. Hence, butan- l-amine has higher boiling point than-N-ethyl ethanamine.

(4) AnIline Is less basic than ethyl afine.
Answer:
Aniline (Kb4-2 x 10-10) is less basic than ethyl amine (Kb5.1 x 10-4). This is because -I effect of phenyl group in aniline as compared to + 1 effect of ethyl group in ethyl amine.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 185
Due to resonance, the lone pair of electrons on the nitrogen atom gets delocalized over the benzene ring and thus less available for protonation. On the other hand, in ethyl anine, delocalization of the lone pair of electrons on the nitrogen atom by resonance is not possible. Further more, the electron density on the nitrogen atom is increased by +1 effect of the ethyl group. Hence, aniline is less basic than ethyl amine.

(5) pKb value of diethyl amine is less than that of ethyl amine.
Answer:
The basic strength of amines is expressed in terms of pKb values. Smaller is the value of pKb more basic is the amine. The pKb value of ethyl amine is 3.29 and that of diethyl amine is 3.00. Therefore, diethyl amine is more basic than ethyl amine.

(6) Aniline cannot be prepared by Gabriel phthalimide synthesis.
Answer:
In Gabriel-phthalimide synthesis of aniline, potassium phthalimide requires the treatment with chlorobenzene or bromobenzene. Since aryl halides do not undergo nucleophilic substitution reaction. Therefore, chlorobenzene or bromobenzene does not react with potassium phthalimide to give N-phenylphthalimide and hence aniline cannot be prepared by Gabriel phthalimide synthesis.

(7) Gabriel phthalimide synthesis is preferred for the preparation of aliphatic primary amines.
Answer:
In aromatic amines, the lone pair of electrons on the N-atom is delocalized over the benzene ring. As a result electron density on the nitrogen atom decreases. Whereas in aliphatic primary amines, due to +1 effect of alkyl group, electron density on nitrogen atom increases. As the pKh value of aliphatic amines is more than that of aromatic amines, aromatic amines are less basic than primary aliphatic amines. Hence, Gabriel phthalimide synthesis is preferred for the preparation of aliphatic amines.

(8) Arere diazonium salts are relatively more stable than alkyl diazonium salts.
Answer:
Arene diazonium salts are stable due to the dispersal of the positive charge over the benzene ring as shown below :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 186
Alkane diazonium salts are unstable due to their tendency to eliminate a stable molecule of nitrogen to form carbocation. Aromatic diazonium salts have much lower tendency to remove nitrogen than aliphatic diazonium salts. Hence, arene diazonium salts are relatively more stable than alkyl diazonium salts.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 187

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

(9) Tertiary amines cannot be acylated.
Answer:
Tertiary amines do not react with acetic anhydride or acetyl chloride i.e. they can be acylated because they do not contain a H-atom on the N-atom.

(10) Besides the ortho and para derivatives, considerable amount of meta derivatives is also formed during nitration of aniline.
OR
Although amino group is o- and p-directing in electrophilic substitution reactions, aniline on nitration gives substantial amount of m-nitroaniline.
Answer:
In aromatic amines, -NH2 is an electron releasing or activating group. It activates the ortho and para positions in the benzene ring towards electrophilic substitution. When aniline is treated with nitrating mixture (cone. HNO3+ cone. H2SO4), a mixture of ortho and para nitroaniline is obtained. However, a substantial amount of m-nitroaniline is also formed. Aniline being a base gets protonated in acidic medium to form anilium cation, which deactivates the ring and the substitution takes place at the meta position.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 188

Question 70.
How will you convert :
(1) Aniline into benzyl alcohol.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 191

(2) Aniline into 4-bromoaniline.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 192

(3) Aniline into 1,3,5-tribromo benzene.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 193

(4) Aniline into 2,4,6-tribromo fluoro benzene.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 194

Question 71.
How will you convert :
(1) Propanoic acid into ethanoic acid.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 197

(2) Propanoic acid into ethanol
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 198

(3) Ethanamine into propan-l-amine.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 199

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

(4) Propan-l-amine into ethanamine.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 200

(5) Propanoic acid into ethanamine.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 201

(6) Ethanamine into propanoic acid.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 202

(7) Benzene to aniline.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 203

(8) Aniline to Benzene.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 204

(9) Aniline into benzoic acid.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 205

(10) Benzoic acid into aniline.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 206

(11) Aniline into benzamide.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 207

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

(12) 3-Nitrotoluene into 3-methyl aniline.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 208

(13) 3-Methyl aniline into 3-Nitrotoluene.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 209

Question 72.
An organic compound ‘A’ having molecular formula C2H6O evolves hydrogen gas on treatment with sodium metal and on treatment with red phosphorous and iodine gives compound ‘B’. The compound ‘B’ on treatment with alcoholic KCN and on subsequent reduction gives compound ‘C’. The compound ‘C’ on treatment with nitrous acid evolves nitrogen gas. Write the balanced chemical equations for all the reactions involved and identify the compounds ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C;.
Answer:
A = C2H5OH ethanol
B = C2H5I ethyl iodide
C = C2H5CH2NH2 n-propyl amine
Compound C2H6O = C2H5OH
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 215

Question 73
Identify B, C and D write complete reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 216
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 217
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 218

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

Question 74.
Identify the compounds B, C and D in the following series of reactions and rewrite the complete equations :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 219
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 220

Question 75.
Identify the compounds ‘A’ and ‘B’ in the following equation :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 221
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 222

Question 76.
Answer in one sentence :

(1) Arrange the following compounds in decreasing order of basic strength in their aqueous solutions. NH3, C2H5NH2, (CH3)2NH, (CH3)3N
Answer:
The decreasing order of basic strength is – (C2H5)2NH > (C2H5)3N > (C2H5)2NH > NH3
(The reason that ethyl group has greater +1 effect than methyl group).

(2) Arrange the following compounds in an increasing order of their solubility in water.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 226
Answer:
The solubility increases in order in which molecular mass decreases.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 227

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

(3) What is Hinsberg’s reagent?
Answer:
Benzenesulphonyl chloride (C6H5SO2Cl) is known as Hinsberg’s reagent.

(4) Name the reaction in which a primary amine is formed from amide.
Answer:
Hoffmann bromamide degradation.

(5) NH3 is a Lewis base.
Answer:
Since nitrogen in ammonia molecule has a lone pair of electrons, it is a Lewis base.

(6) How many primary amines are possible for the compound C3H9N?
Answer:
For the compound C3H9N, two primary amines are possible.

(7) State the hybridization of the nitrogen atom in amines.
Answer:
The hybridization of nitrogen atom in amines is sp3.

(8) Arrange the following compounds in an increasing order of basic strength. Aniline, p-nitroaniline, p-toluidine.
Answer:
p-nitroaniline < aniline < p-toluidine.

(9) Which of the two is more basic and why? CH3NH2 or NH3
Answer:
Due to +1 effect of -CH3 group, electron density on N-atom increases, hence methyl amine is a stronger base than ammonia.

(10) Which of the two is more basic and why? p-toluidine or aniline.
Answer:
p-toluidine is more basic due to the presence of -CH3 group at para position. Due to +1 effect of -CH3 group, electron density on nitrogen increases, hence the tendency to donate pair of electrons increases.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 77.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each subquestion :

1. Which of the following is an amine?
(a) C2H5N(COCH3)2
(b) (C2H5)2N – N = 0
(c) (C2H5)3N
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

2. N-methyl-N-ethyl-n-propyl amine is
(a) a primary amine
(b) a secondary amine
(c) a tertiary amine
(d) an alkyl nitrile
Answer:
(c) a tertiary amine

3. Which of the following is a tertiary amine?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 229
Answer:
(d)

4. Tertiary butyl amine is a
(a) primary amine
(b) secondary amine
(c) tertiary amine
(d) quaternary ammonium salt
Answer:
(a) primary amine

5. The IUPAC name of
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 230
(a) ethyl propanamine
(b) ethyl butylamine
(c) 2-pentanamine
(d) 3-hexanamine
Answer:
(d) 3-hexanamine

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

6. The IUPAC name of ethyl dimethyl amine is ……………..
(a) 2-amino propane
(b) N,N-dimethyl ethanolamine
(c) ethyl methanamine
(d) propanamine
Answer:
(b) N,N-dimethyl ethanolamine

7. Isopropyl amine and trimethyl amine are ……………..
(a) acidic in nature
(b) electrophilic compounds
(c) structural isomers
(d) optically active compounds
Answer:
(c) structural isomers

8. N, N-dimethylethanolamine is ……………
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 231
Answer:
(b)

9. IUPAC name of diethylmethyl amine is ………………
(a) methyl amino propane
(b) N-Ethyl-N-methylhexanamine
(c) methyl diethanamine
(d) amino pentane
Answer:
(b) N-Ethyl-N-methylhexanamine

10. Ethyl bromide reacts with excess of alcoholic ammonia, the major product is …………..
(a) ethyl amine
(b) diethylamine
(c) triethylamine
(d) tetraethyl ammonium bromide
Answer:
(a) ethyl amine

11. Isopropylamine is obtained by the reduction of
(a) acetoxime
(b) acetaldoxime
(c) formaldoxime
(d) aldoxime
Answer:
(a) acetoxime

12. Which of the following compounds can be converted into amines in the presence of Na and alcohol?
(a) Alkyl nitriles
(b) Aldoxime
(c) Ketoxime
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

13. Chloroethane when boiled with excess of aqueous-alcoholic ammonia gives hydrochloric acid and
(a) triethyl amine
(b) trimethyl amine
(c) diethyl amine
(d) ethyl amine
Answer:
(d) ethyl amine

14. How many hydrogen atoms are required for the reduction of 1-nitropropane to n-propyl amine?
(a) Four
(b) Three
(c) Six
(d) Two
Answer:
(c) Six

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

15. A secondary alkyl halide is heated with excess of ammonia, the major product obtained is
(a) primary amine
(b) secondary amine
(c) tertiary amine
(d) quaternary ammonium salt
Answer:
(a) primary amine

16. The true statement about ethylamine is
(a) it is weaker base than ammonia
(b) it is stronger base than diethyl amine
(c) it is stronger base than triethyl amine
(d) it is stronger base than alkali
Answer:
(c) it is stronger base than triethyl amine

17. The reaction which is given only by primary amines is
(a) acetylation
(b) alkylation
(c) reaction with HNO2
(d) carbyl amine test
Answer:
(d) carbyl amine test

18. The amine which reacts with NaNO2 and dil. HCl to give yellow oily compound is
(a) ethylamine
(b) isopropylamine
(c) sec-butylamine
(d) dimethylamine
Answer:
(d) dimethylamine

19. The name of the compound ‘C’ in the following series of reactions, is Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 232
(a) propan-l-ol
(b) propan-2-ol
(c) butan-l-ol
(d) butan-2-ol
Answer:
(b) propan-2-ol

20. Triethylamine when treated with nitrous acid gives
(a) an alcohol
(b) a nitrosamine
(c) a monoacetyl derivative
(d) a soluble nitrite salt
Answer:
(d) a soluble nitrite salt

21. Ammes are basic in nature because
(a) of the nitrogen atom contain or lone pair of electrons
(b) they give H+ ions in aqueous medium
(c) they form quaternary ammonium salts when heated with acids
(d) both (a) and (c)
Answer:
(a) of the nitrogen atom contain or lone pair of electrons

22. An aqueous solution of primary amine contains
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 233
Answer:
(d)

23. The basic nature of amines in an aqueous solution is in the order of
(a) tert. > sec. > pri.
(b) sec. > pri. > tert.
(b) pri. > sec. > tert.
(d) pri. > tert. > sec.
Answer:
(b) pri. > sec. > tert.

24. In trimethyl ammonium ion, the number of sigma bonds attached to nitrogen are
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(b) 3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

25. The number of coordinate bond/bonds in a trialkyl ammonium ion is
(a) one
(b) two
(c) three
(d) four
Answer:
(a) one

26. The number of electrons in the valence shell of nitrogen in methyl amine is
(a) 5
(b) 3
(c) 8
(d) 7
Answer:
(c) 8

27. Ethanamine reacts with excess of acetyl chloride to form
(a) C2H5NHCOCH3
(b) C2H5N(CH3)2
(c) C2H5N(COCH3)2
(d) C2H5N+H3Cl
Answer:
(c) C2H5N(COCH3)2

28. The compound used for acylation of amine is
(a) (CH3CO)2O
(b) CH3COOH
(c) CH3COCl
(d) both (a) and (c)
Answer:
(d) both (a) and (c)

29. Dimethyl amine reacts with acetyl chloride to give
(a) N-acetyl methyl amine
(b) N-acetyl ethyl amine
(c) N-acetyl dimethyl amine
(d) N-acetyl diethyl amine
Answer:
(c) N-acetyl dimethyl amine

30. Identify ‘A’ in the following reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 234
Answer:
(c)

31. n-propyl alcohol is obtained when HNO2 is treated with
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 235
Answer:
(c)

32. A mixture of CH3NH2, (CH3)2NH, (CH3)3N can be distinguished by using
(a) HCI
(b) HNO2
(c) HNO3
(d) H2SO4
Answer:
(b) HNO2

33. In the acetylation reaction the H-atom of an amine is replaced by
(a) a carbonyl group
(b) an alkyl group
(c) an acetyl group
(d) an imino group
Answer:
(c) an acetyl group

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

34. Amines are basic in nature
(a) as they have a fishy odour
(b) as they form quaternary ammonium salts with alkyl halides
(c) due to the presence of an unshared pair of electrons on the nitrogen atom
(d) all of these
Answer:
(c) due to the presence of an unshared pair of electrons on the nitrogen atom

35. The correct order of increasing basic strength is
(a) NH3 < CH3NH2 < (CH3)2NH
(b) CH3NH2 < (CH3)2NH < NH3
(c) CH3NH2 < NH3 < (CH3)2NH
(d) (CH3)2NH < NH3 < CH3NH2
Answer:
(a) NH3 < CH3NH2 < (CH3)2NH

36. Which of the following is the strongest base?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 236
Answer:
(d)

37. Identify the weakest base amongst the following :
(a) p-methoxyaniline
(b) o-toluidine
(c) benzene-1, 4-diamine
(d) 4-aminobenzoic acid
Answer:
(d) 4-aminobenzoic acid

38. Amine that cannot be prepared by Gabriel phthalimide synthesis is
(a) aniline
(b) benzyl amine
(c) methyl amine
(d) iso-butyl amine
Answer:
(a) aniline

39. Which of the following exist as Zwitter ion?
(a) Salicylic acid
(b) Suphanilic acid
(c) p-Aminophenol
(d) p-Amino acetophenone
Answer:
(b) Suphanilic acid

40. Reduction of benzene diazonium chloride with Zn/HCl gives
(a) phenyl hydrazine
(b) hydrazine hydrate
(c) aniline
(d) ozo benzene
Answer:
(c) aniline

41. When primary amine reacts with CHCl3 in alcoholic KOH, the product is
(a) aldehyde
(b) alcohol
(c) cyanide
(d) an isocyanide
Answer:
(d) an isocyanide

42. Which of the following amines cannot be prepared by Gabriel phthalimide synthesis?
(a) sec-Propylamine
(b) tert-Butylamine
(c) 2-Phenylethylamine
(d) N-Methyl benzyl amine
Answer:
(d) N-Methyl benzyl amine

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

43. Which of the following compounds has highest boiling point?
(a) Ethane
(b) Ethanoic acid
(c) Ethanol
(d) Ethanamine
Answer:
(b) Ethanoic acid

44. Identify the statement about the basic nature of amines.
(a) Alkylamines are weaker bases than ammonia.
(b) Arylamines are stronger bases than alkylamines.
(c) Secondary aliphatic amines are stronger bases than primary aliphatic amines.
(d) Tertiary aliphatic amines are weaker bases than arylamines.
Answer:
(c) Secondary aliphatic amines are stronger bases than primary aliphatic amines.

45. The compounds ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ react with methyl iodide to give finally quaternary ammonium iodides. Only ‘C’ gives carbylamines test while only ‘A’ forms yellow oily compound on reaction with nitrous acid. The compounds ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ are respectively.
(a) butan-1-amine, N-ethylethanamine and
N, N-dimethylethanamine.
(b) N-ethylethanamine, N, N-dimethylethanamine and butan-1 – amine.
(c) N, N-dimethylethanamine, N-ethylethanamine and butan-1-amine.
(d) N-ethylethanamine, butan-1-amine and N-ethylethanamine.
Answer:
(b) N-ethylethanamine, N, N-dimethylethanamine and butan-1 – amine.

46. Which of the following amines is most basic in nature?
(a) 2, 4-Dichloroaniline
(b) 2, 4-Dimethylaniline
(c) 2, 4-Dinitroaniline
(d) 2, 4-Dibromoaniline
Answer:
(b) 2, 4-Dimethylaniline

47. How many moles of methyl iodide are required to convert ethylamine, diethylamine and triethylamine into quaternary ammonium salt, respectively?
(a) 1, 2 and 3
(b) 2, 3 and 1
(c) 3, 2 and 1
(d) 3, 1 and 2
Answer:
(c) 3, 2 and 1

48. Which of the following amines does not undergo acetylation?
(a) t-Butylamine
(b) Ethylamine
(c) Diethylamine
(d) Triethylamine
Answer:
(d) Triethylamine

49. n-Propylamine can be prepared by catalytic reduction of
(a) n-propyl cyanide
(b) propionaldoxime
(c) acetoxime
(d) nitroethane
Answer:
(b) propionaldoxime

50. Identify the compound ‘B’ in the following series of reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 237
Answer:
(c)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Amines

51. Chloropicrin is used as
(a) antiseptic
(b) antibiotic
(c) insecticide
(d) anaesthetic
Answer:
(c) insecticide

52. Identify the compound B in the following series of reactions. Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Amines 238
(a) n-propyl chloride
(b) propanamine
(c) n-propyl alcohol
(d) Isopropyl alcohol
Answer:
(c) n-propyl alcohol

53. Which of the following amines yields foul smelling product with haloform and alcoholic KOH?
(a) Ethyl amine
(b) Diethyl amine
(c) Triethyl amine
(d) Ethyl methyl amine
Answer:
(a) Ethyl amine

54. Which of the following compounds is NOT prepared by the action of alcoholic NH3 on alkyl halide?
(a) CH3NH2
(b) CH3-CH2-NH2
(c) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – NH2
(d) (CH3)3CNH2
Answer:
(d) (CH3)3CNH2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 1.
What is a carbonyl group?
Answer:
Carbonyl group : A functional group in which a carbon atom is attached to an oxygen atom by a double bond and remaining two valencies of carbon atom are free is called a carbonyl group and represented as Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 7. Carbonyl group is present in aldehydes and ketones.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 2.
What are carbonyl compounds?
Answer:
The organic compounds containing a carbonyl group Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 7 are called carbonyl compounds. For example, acetaldehyde, Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 8, acetone, Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 9. As carbonyl group is common in aldehydes and ketones, their methods of preparation and properties show similarities.

Question 3.
What are carboxylic compounds?
Answer:
The compounds in which the functional group is – COOH are known as carboxylic compounds. Due to the – OH group bonded to Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 10 group, carboxylic acids are distinct from aldehydes and ketones.

Question 4.
How are carbonyl compounds classified ?
OR
Name the compounds containing carbonyl group.
Answer:
The carbonyl compounds contain a group Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 11. They are classified as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 12

Question 5.
What are aliphatic aldehydes?
Answer:
The compounds in which the – CHO group (formyl group or aldehyde group) is attached directly to sp3 hybridized carbon atom that is saturated carbon atom are called aliphatic aldehydes. (Exception : Formaldehyde, H – CHO is also classified as aliphatic aldehyde though – CHO group is not attached to any carbon).

For example :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 13

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 6.
What are aromatic aldehydes ?
Answer:
The compounds in which – CHO group is attached directly to an aromatic ring are called aromatic aldehydes.

For example :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 14

Question 7.
Explain the structure of carbonyl functional group.
Answer:

  • In the carbonyl functional group, carbon atom is attached to an oxygen atom by a double bond and remaining two valencies of carbon atom are free, and it is represented as Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 15.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 16
  • The carbonyl carbon atom is sp2-hybridised forming coplanar three sigma (σ) bonds with the bond angle 120°.
  • One sigma bond is formed with oxygen atom while other two sigma (σ) bonds are formed with hydrogen or carbon atoms.
  • The remaining unhybridised 2pz orbital of carbon atom overlaps with p orbital of oxygen atom colaterally forming a pi (π) bond. Hence, carbon atom is joined to oxygen atom by a double bond of which one is sigma and another is n.
  • The oxygen atom in the carbonyl group has two lone pairs of electrons.
  • The carbonyl bond is strong, short and polarized.
  • The polarity of the carbonyl group is explained on the basis of resonance involving neutral and dipolar structures as shown below :
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 17

Question 8.
What are aliphatic ketones? How are they classified?
Answer:
Aliphatic ketones : The compounds in which Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 15 group is attached to two alkyl groups are called aliphatic ketones.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 20
Ketones are classified into two types :

  1. Simple or symmetrical ketones and
  2. mixed or unsymmetrical ketones.

1. Simple or symmetrical ketone : The ketone in which the carbonyl carbon is attached to two identical alkyl groups is called a simple or symmetrical ketone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 21
2. Mixed or unsymmetrical ketone : The ketone in which the carbonyl carbon is attached to two different alkyl groups is called a mixed or unsymmetrical ketone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 22

Question 9.
What are aliphatic carboxylic acids? Give their general formula.
Answer:
The organic compounds in which carboxyl (- COOH) group is bonded to an alkyl group are called aliphatic carboxylic acids or fatty acids. (Exception : Formic acid, H-COOH is also classified as aliphatic carboxylic acid though-COOH group is not attached to any carbon).

For example :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 330

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 10.
How are carboxylic acids classified ? Give examples. (3 marks)
Answer:
Carboxylic acids are classified according to the presence of number of carboxyl groups into mono-, di-, tri- and polycarboxylic acids.

  • Monocarboxylic acids : These carboxylic acids contain one carboxyl group.
    Example : Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 331
  • Dicarboxylic acids : These contain two carboxyl groups
    Example : Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 332
  • Tricarboxylic acid : These contain three carboxyl groups
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 333

Question 11.
What are aromatic carboxylic acids ? Give examples.
Answer:
Aromatic carboxylic acids : These are the compounds in which one or more carboxyl groups (- COOH) are attached directly to the aromatic ring.

For example :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 334

Question 12.
Give examples of common carboxylic acids which are used in daily life.
Answer:
Common carboxylic acids are widely distributed in nature, they are found in both the plants and animals.

  • Acetic acid is main constituent of vinegar.
  • Butyric acid of butter which is responsible for odour of rancid butter.
  • L-lactic acid is present in curd.
  • Citric acid is found in citrus fruits.
  • Higher carboxylic acids such as palmitic acid, stearic acid and oleic acid are the components of animal fats and vegetable oils.

Nomenclature of Aldehydes :

(A) Common System :

  • The names of aldehydes are derived from the common names of acids.
  • The suffix ‘-ic acid’ of an acid is replaced by ‘aldehyde’.
  • The positions of the substituents in the molecule are indicated by Greek letters α, β, γ, etc.
  • starting from the carbon atom attached to the carbonyl group. E.g.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 26

(B) I UP AC System :

  • The longest carbon atoms chain containing aldehyde carbon atom is selected as a parent hydrocarbon.
  • ‘e’ of the alkane is replaced by ‘al’. Alkane → Alkanal
  • The position (locant) of aldehyde group need not be mentioned since it is always at the end position.
  • The substituents in the alkyl group are prefixed in an alphabetical order by appropriate locants.
  • When two – CHO groups are present at the two ends of the chain the ending ‘e’ of alkane is retained and the suffix  ‘-dial’ is added to the name of parent aldehyde.
  • In IUPAC nomenclature an alicyclic compound -in which – CHO group is attached directly to the ring is named as a carbaldeliyde. The suffix ‘carbaldehyde’ is added after the full name of parent cycloalkane structure.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

(C) Common or trivial names :

(1) The common name of a carboxylic acid is derived from the source from which it was first isolated.
The following table gives common names and the source or origin of name.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 27

(2) In branched carboxylic acids, the position of substituents are indicated by Greek alphabet.

For example : Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 28

(D) IUPAC system of nomenclature :

  • The longest continuous cha in of carbon atoms including the carbon atom of – COOH group ¡s selected.
  • The carboxvlic acid is conside red (IS a derivative of the corresponding parent a/kane.
  • The carbon atom of the – COOH group is always at terminal position, hence need not to be indicated while writing IUPAC name.
  • The position of the other substitutents are indicated by the appropriate locants in alphabetical order.
  • In case of dicarboxylic acids, ‘dioic acid’ is added to parent alkane.
  • In an alicyclic compound having a carboxyl group directly attached to alicyclic ring is named as cycloalkane carboxylic acid.

Trivial and IUPAC names of carboxylic acids and aldhydes
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 29
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 30

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 13.
Give the common names and IUPAC names of the Miowing aldehydes :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 31
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 32

Question 14.
Write the structures of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 33

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 15.
What is the IUPAC name of the following compound?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 34
Answer:
IUPAC name : 2-Amino butanoic acid

Question 16.
Write IUPAC name of
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 335
Answer:
IUPAC name : Ethanedioic acid

Question 17.
Write the structure and give IUPAC names of following carboxylic acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 35
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 36

Question 18.
Draw the structures of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 37

Question 19.
Give IUPAC names of the following carboxylic acids.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 38

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 20.
Write the structures and IUPAC names of all isomers of carboxylic acids having molecular formula C5H10O2. HOW many of them are chiral?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 39

Nomenclature of ketones :

(A) Common System :

  • Ketones are named according to the alkyl groups attached to the carbonyl carbon atom followed by the word ketone.
  • The substituents in the alkyl groups are indicated by Greek letters a, f, y, etc. starting from the carbon atom attached to the carbonyl group.

(B) IUPAC System :

  • The longest continuous chain containing carbonyl carbon atom is selected as a parent hydrocarbon.
  • ‘e’ of the alkane is replaced by ‘one’. Alkane → Alkanone
  • The position of carbonyl group is represented by the lowest locant.
  • The substituents in the alkyl groups are prefixed in the alphabetical order along with their positions by appropriate locants.
  • When two C = O groups are present, then ending ‘e ’ of alkane is retained and the suffix – ‘dione ’ is added to the name of parent ketone indicating the locants of ketonic carbonyl groups.
  • In case of polyfunctional ketones, higher priority group is given lower number.
  • When ketonic carbonyl is a lower priority group it is named as ‘oxo’, preceded by the locant. In alicyclic ketones, carbonyl carbon is numbered as 1.

Question 21.
Give the common and IUPAC names of the following ketones :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 40
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 41

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 22.
Give the structures of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 42
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 43

Question 23.
Give IUPAC names of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 44

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 24.
Write the structures and give common names and IUPAC names of the carbonyl compounds represented by formula C5H10O.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 45

Question 25.
Write the structure and give IUPAC names of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 46
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 47

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 26.
Write the structure of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 48

Question 27.
How is an aldehyde obtained from an alcohol ?
Answer:
When a primary alcohol is oxidized with potassium dichromate and dil. H2SO4 under controlled conditions, an aldehyde is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 51
For example, when ethanol is oxidized with potassium dichromate and dil. H2SO4 under controlled conditions, acetaldehyde (ethanal) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 52

Question 28.
How is ketone obtained from an alcohol?
Answer:
When a secondary alcohol is oxidized with potassium dichromate and dii. H2SO4 under controlled conditions, a ketone is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 53
For example. when 2-propanol is oxidized with potassium dichromate and dii, H2SO4 under controlled conditions, accIone (propanone) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 54

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 29.
How are the following compounds obtained from alcohol:
(1) Methanal
(2) Propanal
(3) BuLanal
(4) 3-Methylpentanal?
Answer:

  1. Mehanol on controlled oxidation with K2Cr2O7 and dilute H2SO4 forms methanal.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 55
  2. Propan-1-ol on controlled oxidation with K,Cr20 and dilute H2SO4 forms propanal.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 56
  3. Butan..l-ol on controlled oxidation with K2Cr2O7 and dilute H2SO4 forms butanal.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 57
  4. 3-Mcthylpcntan.1-ol on controlled oxidation with K2Cr2O7 and dilute H2SO4 gives 3-Methylpentanal.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 58

Question 30.
How are the following compounds prepared from alcohol :
(1) Butanone
(2) Pentan-3-one
(3) 2,2-Dimethylpropanal?
Answer:

  1. Butan-2-ol on controlled oxidation with K2Cr2O7 and dilute H2SO4 forms butanone.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 59
  2. Pentan-3-ol on oxidation with K2Cr2O7 and dilute H2SO4 forms Pentan-3-one.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 60
  3. 2,2-Dimethylpropan- I -ol on oxidation with K2Cr2O7 or KMnO4 and dilute H2SO4 forms 2,2-Dimethyipropanal.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 61

Question 31.
How is an aldehyde obtained from primary alcohol ?
Answer:
When vapours of primary alcohol is passed over heated copper at 573 K, dehydrogenation takes place, an aldehyde is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 62
For example : When vapours of isopropyl alcohol is passed over heated copper at 573 K, acetone (propanone) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 63

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 32.
How is ketone obtained from secondary alcohol?
Answer:
When vapours of secondary alcohol is passed over heated copper at 573 K. dehydrogenation takes place, a ketone is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 64
For example : When vapours of isopropyl alcohol is passed over heated copper at 573 K. acetone (propanone) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 65

Question 33.
How are the following compounds obtained from alkene :
(1) Formaldehyde
(2) Acetaldehyde and
(3) Acetone ?
Answer:
When a stream of ozonised oxygen is passed through a solution of an alkene, in organic solvent, an unstable addition cyclocompound, ozonide is formed which on reduction with zinc dust and water forms an aldehyde or a ketone or a mixture of both.

  1. Formaldehyde : Under these conditions ethylene gives formaldehyde.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 66
  2. AcetuIdeh&: Symmetrically disubstituted alkene like but-2-ene gives acetaldehyde.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 67
  3. scctnne: Tetrasubshtwed alkene like 2,3-dimethyl but-2-ene gives acetone.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 68

Question 34.
Write ozonolysis reaction for
(1) Propylene and
(2) Isobutylene.
Answer:
(1) Propylene on reaction with ozonised oxygen in the organic solvent forms propylene ozonide which on reduction with zinc dust and water forms acetaldehyde and formaldehyde.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 69
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 70

Question 35.
How are the following compounds obtained from alkynes :
(1) Acetaldehyde
(2) Acetone?
Answer:

  1. Acetaldehyde : On passing acetylene through warm 40% H2SO4 in the presence of 1 % HgSO4, vinyl alcohol is obtained which tautomerises and forms acetaldehyde. It is a hydration reaction.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 71
  2. Acetone : On passing propyne through warm 40 % H2SO4 in the presence of 1 % HgSO4, alkenol is obtained which on tautomerisation form acetone.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 72

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 36.
Predict the products when
(1) dimethyl acetylene
(2) ethyl acetylene and
(3) diethyl acetylene are treated with mercuric sulphate in dilute sulphuric acid.
Answer:
(1) Dimethyl acetylene with 40% H2SO4 in the presence of mercuric sulphate (HgSO4) forms ethyl methyl ketone by tautomerisation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 73

(2) Ethyl acetylene with 40% H2SO4 in the presence of mercuric sulphate (HgSO4) forms Butan-2-one by tautomerisation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 74

(3) Diethyl acetylene with 40% H2SO4 in the presence of mercuric sulphate (HgSO4) forms hexan-3-one.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 75
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 76

Question 37.
Write the structures of aldehydes and ketones obtained by ozonolysis.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 77
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 78

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 79
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 80

Question 38.
Predict the structures of ketones produced by hydration of but-l-yne and but-2-yne.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 81

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 39.
How is acetaldehyde prepared from acetyl chloride?
Answer:
Acetyl chloride is reduced to acetaldehyde by hydrogen in presence of Pd catalyst poisoned with BaSO4. This reaction is called Rosenmund reduction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 82

Question 40.
How is benzaldehyde obtained from benzoyl chloride?
OR
Write chemical equation for Rosenmund reduction.
Answer:
When benzoyl chloride is hydrogenated in the presence palladium on barium sulphate (Pd/BaSO4), benzaldehyde is obtained. This reaction is called Rosenmund reduction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 83

Question 41.
How will you prepare acetophenone from benzene? (Friedel – Crafts acylation).
Answer:
When benzene is treated with acetyl chloride in the prcscncc of anhydrous aluminium chloride, acetophenonc is obtained. This reaction is known as Friedel – Crafts acylation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 86

Question 42.
How will you convert benzene into 1-phenylethanone?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 87

Question 43.
How will you obtain 4-Nitrobenzaldehyde from 4-Nitrotoluene ? (Friedel- Crafts reaction).
Answer:
When 4-nitrotoluene is treated with chromium oxide in acetic anhydride, a diacetate derivative is obtained which on acid hydrolysis produces 4-nitrobenzaldehyde.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 88

Question 44.
How will you prepare Propanone (acetone) from Grignard reagent?
Answer:
Grignard reagent (methyl magnesium iodide) reacts with cadmium chloride to give dimethyl cadmium. When acetyl chloride reacts with dimethyl cadmium, propanone (acetone) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 89

Question 45.
How is acetophenone obtained from Grignard reagent ?
Answer:
Grignard reagent (methyl magnesium iodide) reacts with cadmium chloride to give dimethyl cadmium. When benzoyl chloride reacts with dimethyl cadmium, acetophenone is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 90

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 46.
How is benzyl methyl ketone obtained from Grignard reagent ?
OR
Convert: Acetyl chloride to benzyl methyl ketone.
Answer:
Grignard reagent (Benzyl magnesium chloride) reacts with cadmium chloride to give diphenyl cadmium. When acetyl chloride reacts with dibenzyl cadmium, benzyl methyl ketone is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 91

Question 47.
How is an aldehyde obtained from alkyl nitrile ?
OR
What is Stephen reaction ?
OR
Write a note on Stephen reaction.
Answer:
(1) An ethereal solution of a nitrile is reduced to imine hydrochloride by SnCl2 in the presence of HCl gas. Further, imine hydrochloride on acid hydrolysis gives aldehyde. This reaction is called Stephen reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 92
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 93
(2) Alternatively, nitriles are selectively reduced by diisobi.ityl aluminium hydride (DIBAI-H) lo imines which on acid hydrolysis to aldehydes.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 94

Question 48.
How are following compounds prepared using Gngnard reagent
(1) Acetone
(2) Benzophenone?
Answer:
(1) Acetone: Acetoniti-ile (ethanenitrile) reacts with methyl magnesium iodide in presence of dry ether to give imine complex which on hydrolysis gives acctonc. During reaction acetonitrile and methyl magnesium iodide should be
taken in equimolecular proportion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 95
(2) Benzophenone: Benzonitrile reacts with phenyl magnesium bromide in presence of dry ether to give an imine complex which on acid hydrolysis gives a benzophenone. During reaction bcnzonitrile and phenyl magnesium bromide should be aken in equimolecular proportion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 96

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 49.
Write the structures and IUPAC names of ketones produced by Friedel-Crafts acylation of benzene with
(i) C2H5COCl
(ii) C6H5COCl.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 97

Question 50.
Predict the products of the following conversions.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 98

Question 51.
How are the following preparations carried out ?

(1) Benzaldehyde from toluene. (Etard oxidation)
Answer:
When toluene is treated with solution of chromyl chloride (CrO2Cl2) in Cs2, brown chromium complex is obtained, which on acid hydrolysis gives benzaldehyde. This reaction is called Etard reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 99

(2) Benzaldehyde from methyl arene.
Answer:
Methylarene is converted into a benzyllidene diacetate on treatment with chromium oxide in acetic anhydride at 273-278 K. The diacetate derivative on acid hydrolysis gives benzaldehyde.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 100

(3) Benzaldehyde from toluene (commerical method).
Answer:
Side chain chlorination of toluene gives benzal chloride which on hydrolysis gives benzaldehyde.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 101

(4) Benzaldehyde from benzene (Gattermann-Koch synthesis).
OR
Write chemical equation for Gatter- mann-Koch formylation.
Answer:
When benzene is treated with vapours of carbon monoxide and hydrogen chloride in the presence of a catalyst mixture of A1Cl3 and CuCl under high pressure, benzaldehyde is obtained. This reaction is called Gattermann- Koch synthesis.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 102
Preparation of aromatic ketones from hydrocarbons

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 52.
Explain Friedel-Craft’s acylation reaction.
Answer:
The reaction in which hydrogen atom of benzene is replaced by an acyl group Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 103 I in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3 is called Friedel-Craft’s acylation. When benzene is heated with an acetyl chloride or acetic anhydride in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3, forms acetophenone (1-Phenyl ethanone).

Electrophile : R – C + = O acylium ion Formation of the electrophile :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 104
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 105

Question 53.
Give the preparation of acetophenone from benzene using
(i) acetyl chloride
(ii) acetic anhydride.
Answer:

The reaction in which hydrogen atom of benzene is replaced by an acyl group Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 103 I in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3 is called Friedel-Craft’s acylation. When benzene is heated with an acetyl chloride or acetic anhydride in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3, forms acetophenone (1-Phenyl ethanone).

Electrophile : R – C + = O acylium ion Formation of the electrophile :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 104
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 105

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 54.
How will you prepare propionaldehyde from ethyl propionate?
Answer:
When ethyl propionate is reduced in presence of diisobutyl aluminium hydride (DIBAI-H), propionaldehyde is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 107

Question 55.
Explain the structure of carboxyl group.
Answer:
In carboxyl group, the carboxyl carbon is sp2-hybridised and the bonds to the carboxyl carbon lie in one plane. The C-C = O and O = C-O bond angles are 120°. The carboxylic carbon is less electrophilic than carbonyl carbon because of the resonance structures shown below :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 110

Question 56.
How is carboxylic acid obtained by the acid hydrolysis of an alkyl cyanide ?
Answer:
Alkyl cyanides or alkyl nitriles on acid or alkaline hydrolysis give corresponding carboxylic acids.

Acid Hydrolysis of Alkyl ankle: When alkyl cyanide is boiled wiLh dilute mineral acid, it gives corresponding carboxylic acid. In this, acid amide is obtained as the intermediate product.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 111

Question 57.
How is ethanoic add obtained from methyl cyanide by acid hydrolysis?
Answer:
When methyl cyanide is heated with dilutc hydrochloric acid or dilute sulphuric acid. ethanoic acid is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 112

Question 58.
How Is proplonlc acid obtained from an alkyl nitrile?
Answer:
When ethyl cyanide (propionitrile) is boiled with dilute HCI or dilute H2SO4, propionic acid is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 113

Question 59.
How Is benzoic acid obtained from bcnzamide?
Answer:
When benzarnide is heated with dil. HCl. benzoic acid is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 114

Question 60.
How is carboxylic acid obtained from acyl chlorides and acid anhydrides?
Answer:
When acyl chloride is hydrolysed with water, carboxylic acid is obtained. The reaction is carried out in presence of a base pyridine or NaOH to remove HCl generated.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 118
Acetyl chloride reacts with water almost explosively while benzoyl chloride very slowly.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 119
Acid anhydrides react with water to give carboxylic acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 120
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 121

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 61.
How is benzoic acid obtained from
(i) ethyl benzoate
(ii) styrene?
Answer:
(i) Benzoic acid from ethyl benzoate : When an ethyl benzoate is heated with dil. H2SO4, undergoes hydrolysis to form benzoic acid and ethyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 122

(ii) Benzoic acid from styrene:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 123

Question 62.
How is propanoic acid obtained from phenyl propanoate?
Answer:
When phenyl propanoate is heated with dil. NaOH, sodium salt is obtained, which on hydrolysis gives propanoic- acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 124

Question 63.
How is propanoic acid obtained from methyl propanoate ?
OR
When methyl propanoate is heated with dil. NaOH, sodium, salt is obtained, which on hydrolysis gives propanoic acid.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 125

Question 64.
How is benzoic acid obtained from phenyl ethene?
Answer:
When phenyl ethene is heated with strong oxidising agents like acidic KMnO4 or acidic K2Cr2O7, benzoic acid is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 126

Question 65.
How is adipic acid obtained from cyclohexene?
Answer:
When cyclohexene is heated with acidified KMnO4, adipic acid (Hexane-1, 6-dioic acid) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 127

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 66.
What is carbonation of Grignard reagent ? How is acetic acid prepared by this reaction ? How is ethanoic acid pepared from dry ice?
Answer:
Addition reaction of carbon dioxide (0 = C = 0) to Grignard reagent, forming a complex and further formation of carboxylic acid is called carbonation of Grignard reagent.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 128
Example : When methyl magnesium iodide is added to solid carbon dioxide, a complex is formed which on acid hydrolysis forms acetic acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 129

Question 67.
How is benzoic acid prepared from Grignard reagent?
OR
Write the preparation of benzoic acid from dry ice.
Answer:
When phenyl magnesium bromide is treated with dry ice (solid carbon dioxide) in the presence dry ether, complex is obtained which on acidification gives benzoic acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 130

Question 68.
What are soaps ? How are they prepared ?
Answer:
The sodium or potassium salts of higher fatty acids are known as soaps. Soaps contain more than twelve carbon atoms.

When fat or oil is hydrolysed using sodium or potassium hydroxide solution, soap obtained remains in colloidal form. Soap and glycerol are separated by adding sodium chloride. Soap precipitates out due to common ion effect, and glycerol remains in the solution can be recovered by fractional distillation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 131

Question 69.
How is benzoic acid prepared from alkyl benzenes ?
OR
How will you convert the following :
(1) n-butyl benzene to benzoic acid.
(2) Toluene to benzoic acid.
(3) Cumene to benzoic acid ?
Answer:
When an alkyl benzene is heated with strong oxidizing agents like acidic or alkaline KMnO4 or acidified K2Cr2O7 etc. gives aromatic carboxylic acid. The alkyl side chain gets oxidised to -COOH group irrespective of the size of the chain.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 132

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 70.
Lower aldehydes and ketones are water soluble whereas higher homologues are insoluble. Explain, why.
Answer:
(1) The oxygen atom of Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 135 shows hydrogen bonding with water molecule.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 136
(2) As a result of this, the lower aldehydes and ketones are water soluble (example – acetaldehyde, acetone). As the molecular mass increases, the proportion of hydrocarbon part of the molecule increases which cannot form hydrogen bonding with water and the solubility of higher homologues in water decreases.

Question 71.
Carboxylic acids have higher boiling points than those of alcohols, aldehydes, ketones, ethers, hydrocarbons of comparable molecular masses. Explain, why.
Answer:
(1) Carboxylic group (-COOH) in acids is highly polar. in liquid state, pair of carboxylic acid molecules is held together by two intermolecular hydrogen bonds, have higher aggregations and in the vapour.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 137
(2) Intermolecular hydrogen bonding in carboxylic acids state most of the carboxylic acid.s exist as dimmers in which two molecules are held by two hydrogen R – R bonds. Acidic hydrogen of one molecule forms hydrogen bond with carbonyl oxygen of the other molecule. This doubles the size of the molecule resulting in increase in o – intermolecular van der Waals forces, which in turn results in high boiling points. Therefore, carboxylic acids possess higher boiling points than those of alcohols, aldehydes, ketones. ether, hydrocarbons of comparable molecular masses.

Question 72.
Lower aliphatic carboxylic acids are miscible with water while higher carboxylic acids are immiscible.
Answer:
(1) Lower aliphatic carboxylic acids are miscible with water due to the formation of hydrogen bonding with water molecules.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 138
(2) Hydrogen bonding between acid and water. As the molecular mass increases (he solubility of carboxylic acids in water decreases. The insolubility of carboxylic acids is due to increased hydrophobic interaction of hydrocarbon parts with water.

Question 73.
Explain why carboxylic acids are much weaker acids than mineral acids.
Answer:
Carboxylic acids are the organic compounds which are acidic in nature. However, compared to mineral acids like HCI or H2SO4. the carboxylic acids are weaker acids.

The strength of acidity depends upon their ability to release H+ ions. Greater the ease with which they release H+ ions, stronger is the acid.

Carboxylic acids when dissolved in water, pcoduce H+ due to its dissociation. (it does not dissociate completely.)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 139
The mineral acid-s like HCI, H2SO4 release H+ ion to a larger extent as they dissociatc almost complctcly in aqueous solution for e.g. HCl → H+ Cl thus carboxylic acids are weaker than mineral acids. The equilibrium exists in aqueous solution of carboxylic acid as
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 140
Since concentration of water practically remains constant
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 141

where Ka is acidity constant
Larger the value Ka greater is the extent of ionization and stronger is the acid. But strength of acids is expressed in ternis of their pKa values. Smaller the value of pKa. the stronger is the carboxylic acid. Here pKa value of carboxylic acids is higher than mineral acids. Hence, carboxylic acids arc weaker than mineral acids.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 74.
Carboxylic acids are more acidic than phenols and alcohols. Explain. Why?
Answer:
(1) Carboxylic acid loses a proton as compared to phenol. Consider the ionization of carboxylic acid and phenol
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 142
Due to delocalization the negative charge over the ortho and para positions of aromatic ring, phenoxide anion is more stable than phenol. Thus phenol easily undergoes ionization
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 143
However, alcohol and alkoxide ion are single structures. In an alkoxide anion the negative charge is localized on a single oxygen atom. Hence, phenols are more acidic than alcohols.

(2) Carboxylic acid has two resonance hybride non equivalent structures (I & II) while carboxylate anion has two resonance hybrid equivalent structures (III & IV). The carboxylate ion is more stable than carboxylic acid and equilibrium is shifted towards the direction of increased ionization.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 144
(3) Carboxylate ion has two equivalent resonance structures with nejative charge is delocalized over two electro negative oxygen atoms. Phenoxide anion has non-equivalent resonance structures in which negative charge is
delocalized over one oxygen atom and less electronegative carbon atom. As a result carboxylate anion is more stable than phenoxide ion. Hence carboxylic acids ionize to the greater extent than phenol furnishing higher concentration of H+ ions. Therefore, carboxylic acids are more acidic than phenols and alcohols.

Question 75.
Trichloro acetic acid is a stronger acid than acetic acid. ExplaIn.
Answer:
(1) The acidic nature of carboxylic acid is due to the ability to release H ions. Greater the ease with which they release H+ ions, stronger is the acid. Any factor that stabilizes the carboxylate ion would help the release of H+
ions and thus increase the strength of the acid. The electron-withdrawing group attached to -carbon atom increases the strength of the acid. In trichloroacetic acid, three chloro substituents on s-carbon atom of acetic acid makes the electrons withdrawing effect more pronounced and the negative charge of carboxylate ion formed gets dispersed.

Thus, increases the stability of carboxylate ion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 336

(2) The acetate ion formed gets destabilised due to the electron releasing effect of a methyl group (+ I effect). As a result, acetic acid dissociates to a lesser extent.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 145

(3) The trichloro acetate ion formed gels stabilised due to electron-withdrawing effect of three 3Cl atoms (- I effect). As a result. trichloro acetic acid dissociates to a greater extent. Trichioro acetic acid having lower pKa value than acetic acid. Hence. trichloro acetic acid is a stronger acid than acetic acid.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 76.
Which is the stronger acid in each of the following pairs ?
(1) CH3-COOH and CH2 = CH-COOH
Answer:
CH2 = CH-COOH is the stronger acid than CH3-COOH

(2) C6H5-COOH and C6H5-CH2-COOH
Answer:
C6H5-COOH is the stronger acid than C6H5-CH2-COOH

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 148
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 149

(4) CH3-CH2-COOH and NC-CH2-COOH
Answer:
NC-CH2-COOH is the stronger acid than CH3-CH2-COOH

(5) (CH2)2CH-CH2-COOH and (CH3)2NH-CH2-COOH
Answer:
(CH3)2NH-CH2-COOH is the stronger acid than (CH3)2CH-CH2-COOH

(6) O2N-CH2-C00H and Cl-CH2-COOH
Answer:
NO2-CH2-COOH is the stronger acid than Cl-CH2-COOH.

Question 77.
Arrange the following acids in their increasing order of acidic strength.

(1) Acetic acid, chloroacetic acid, propionic acid, formic acid.
Answer:
Propionic acid < acetic acid < formic acid < chloroacetic acid

(2) Bromoacetic acid, chloroacetic acid, fluoroacetic acid, iodoacetic acid.
Answer:
Iodoacetic acid < bromoacetic acid < chloroacetic acid < fluoroacetic acid.

(3) Acetic acid, chloroacetic acid, dichloroacetic acid, trichloroacetic acid.
Answer:
Acetic acid < chloroacetic acid < dichloroacetic acid < trichloroacetic acid.

(4) n-butyric acid, 3-chlorobutyric acid, 2-chlorobutyric acid, 3-chlorobutyric acid.
Answer:
n-Butyric acid < 3-chlorobutyric acid < 2-chlorobutyric acid < 1-chlorobutyric acid.

(5) Acetic acid, benzoic acid, p-methoxy benzoic acid, p-nitrobenzoic acid.
Answer:
Acetic acid < benzoic acid < p-methoxy benzoic acid < p-nitrobenzoic acid.

(6) Acetic acid, phenyl acetic acid, p-nitro phenyl acetic acid.
Answer:
Acetic acid < phenyl acetic acid < p-nitro phenyl acetic acid.

(7) Benzoic acid, p-toluic acid, p-chlorobenzoic acid.
Answer:
p-toluic acid < benzoic acid < p-chlorobenzoic acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 157

Question 78.
Arrange the following carboxylic acids in order of increasing acidity : m-Nitrobenzoic acid, Trichloroacetic acid, benzoic acid, a-Chlorobutyric acid.
Answer:
Acidity in the increasing order : Benzoic acid, m-nitrobenzoic acid, a-chlorobutyric acid, trichloroacetic acid.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 79.
Arrange the following carboxylic acids with increasing order of their acidic strength and justify your answer.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 158

Question 80.
Explain polarity of carbonyl group.
Answer:
The polarity of a carbonyl group is duc to higher electronegativity of oxygen compared to carbon. It is explained on the basis of resonance involving neutral and dipolar structures.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 159
The carbonyl carbon has positive polarity (see structures (A) and (D)). Therefore, it is electron deficient. As a result, this carbon atom is electrophilic (electron loving) and is susceptible to attack by a nucleophile (Nu : ).

Question 81.
Explain SchifPs reagent test.
OR
What is a SchifPs reagent ? How is it used to detect aldehydes ?
Answer:

  • Schiff’s reagent is prepared by dissolving pink p-rosaniline hydrochloride (dye Fuchsin) in water and passing SO2 gas till the pink solution is decolourised.
  • Schiff s reagent is an oxidising agent.
  • When an aldehyde is added to Schiff s reagent, the colourless solution turns pink or in magenta colour and aldehyde is oxidised to a carboxylic acid.
  • This test is not given by ketones, hence, used to distinguish between aldehyde and ketone.

Question 82.
Which colour is obtained when SchifFs reagent is treated with acetaldehyde?
Answer:
When Schiff s reagent is treated with acetaldehyde, pink colour is obtained.

Question 83.
What is Tollen’s reagent?
Answer:

  • Tollen’s reagent is an ammoniacal silver nitrate, [Ag(NH3)2]+ OH.
  • It is prepared by adding NH4OH solution to silver nitrate solution.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 162
  • It is a stronger oxidising agent than Fehling solution. Aldehyde when heated with Tollen’s reagent, silver mirror is deposited.

Question 84.
Explain Tollen’s reagent test.
OR
Explain silver mirror test.
Answer:

  • Tollen’s reagent is an (ammoniacal silver nitrate) [Ag(NH3)2]+ OH.
  • When an aldehyde, like acetaldehyde is heated with Tollen’s reagent, it is oxidised to acetic acid and silver ions Ag+ in Tollen’s reagent complex are reduced to silver Ag giving greyish black precipitate or deposition of silver on inner surface of the test tube which shines like a mirror. Hence this test is also called silver mirror test.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 163
  • This test is not given by ketones.
  • Hence Tollen’s reagent is used to distinguish between aldehydes and ketones.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 85.
What is Fehling’s solution? How is it prepared?
Answer:

  • Fehling’s solution is a complex of cupric ions with tartaric acid.
  • It is a mild oxidising agent.
  • It is prepared by mixing equal amount of Fehling’s solution ‘A’ containing CuSO4 solution and Fehling’s solution ‘B’ containing sodium potassium tartrate (Rochelle salt) in caustic soda (NaOH) solution.
  • It is used to detect aldehydes that decolourise deep blue colour of the solution and give red precipitate of Cu2O.

Question 86.
Explain Fehling’s solution test.
Answer:

  • Fehling’s solution is a mixture of Fehling’s solution ‘A’ containing CuSO4 solution and Fehling’s solution ‘B’ containing sodium potassium tartrate (Rochella salt) in caustic soda (NaOH) solution.
  • When an aldehyde is heated with Fehling’s solution, the deep blue colour of the solution disappears and Cu+2 (cupric ion) is reduced to Cu+ ion a red precipitate of cuprous oxide, Cu2O is obtained while aldehyde is oxidised to a carboxylate ion.
  • For example,
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 164
  • This test is not given by ketones, since they cannot be oxidised by Fehling solution.
  • Aromatic aldehydes are not oxidised by Fehling solution.
  • Hence this test is used to distinguish between aldehydes and ketones.

Question 87.
What is the action of the following reagents on ethanal :
(1) Fehling’s solution,
(2) Tollen’s reagent or Ammonical silver nitrate ?
Answer:

  1. When ethanal is heated with Fehling’s solution, the deep blue colour of the solution disappears and a red precipitate of Cu2O is obtained.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 165
  2. When ethanal is heated with Tollen’s reagent a greyish black precipitate or deposition of silver is obtained.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 166

Question 88.
Why is benzaldehyde NOT oxidized by Fehling solution ?
Answer:
When benzaldehyde is treated with Fehling solution, it does not reduce cupric ion (Cu+2). Fehling solution does not oxidise benzaldehyde. Thus, Fehling test cannot be used for aromatic aldehyde.

Question 89.
Explain laboratory test for ketonic group or sodium nitroprusside test.
Answer:
Laboratory test for ketonic group : Sodium nitroprusside test : When a freshly prepared sodium nitroprusside solution is added to a ketone, mixture is shaken well and basified by adding sodium hydroxide solution drop by drop, red colour appears in the solution, which indicates the presence of ketonic (> C = O) group.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 170
The anion of ketone formed by alkali reacts with nitroprusside ion to form a red coloured complex which indicates the presence of the ketonic group.

Question 90.
What is the action of hydrogen cyanide on the following :
(1) Acetaldehyde
(2) Acetone
(3) Benzaldehyde?
Answer:
(1) Action of HCN on acetaldehyde : When acetaldehyde is treated with hydrogen cyanide, acetaldehyde cyanohydrin is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 171

(2) Action of HCN on acetone : When acetone is treated with hydrogen cyanide, acetone cyanohydrin is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 172

(3) Action of HCN on benzaldehyde : When benzaldehyde is treated with hydrogen cyanide, benzaldehyde cyanohydrin is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 173

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 91.
What is the action of hydrogen cyanide in basic medium on (1) butanone (2) 2,4-dichlorobenzaldehyde?
Answer:
(1) Action of hydrogen cyanide on butanone : When butanone is treated with hydrogen cyanide, butanone cyanohydrin is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 174

(2) Action of hydrogen cyanide on 2,4-dichlorobenzaldehyde : When 2, 4-dichloro benzaldehyde is treated with hydrogen cyanide, cyanohydrin of 2,4-dichloro benzaldehyde is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 175

Question 92.
What is the action of sodium bisulphite on :
(1) Acetaldehyde
(2) Acetone (propanone)?
Answer:
(1) Acetaldehyde reacts with saturated aqueous solution of sodium bisulphite (NaHSO3) and forms crystalline acetaldehyde sodium bisulphite. It is water soluble crystalline solid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 176

(2) Acetone reacts with saturated aqueous solution of sodium bisuiphite (NaHSO3) and forms crystalline acetone sodium bisuiphite. It is water soluble crystalline solid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 177

Question 93.
A carbonyl compound ‘A’ having molecular formula C5H10O forms crystalline precipitate with sodium bisulphite and gives positive iodoform test but does not reduce Fehling solution. Write the structure of carbonyl compound.
Answer:
A carbonyl compound C5H10O has two structures.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 178
Pentan-2-one forms crystalline precipitate with sodium bisulphite and gives positive iodoform test. But does not reduce Fehling solution.

Pentan-3-one does not react with iodine and NaOH because it does not contain Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 180 group.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 94.
How does alcohols react with aldehydes and ketones?
Answer:
Aldehyde reacts with one molecule of anhydrous monohydric alcohol in presence of dry hydrogen chloride to give alkoxyalcohol known as hemiacetal, which further reacts with one more molecule of anhydrous monohydric alcohol to give a geminaldialkoxy compound known as acetal as shown in the reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 181
Ketones react with 1, 2 – or 1, 3 – diols in presence of dry hydrogen chloride to give five or six-membered cyclic ketals.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 182

Question 95.
What is the action of ethanol on acetaldehyde ? What is the action of ethylene glycol on acetone ?
Answer:
Acetaldehyde reacts with one equivalent of monohydric alcohol in the presence of dry hydrogen chloride to form an intermediate known as hemiacetal, which further adds another molecule of alcohol to form a gem-dialkoxy compound known as acetal. Acetone reacts with ethylene glycol under similar conditions to form cyclic products known as ethylene glycol ketals.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 183

Question 96.
Write the structure of product in the following reactions:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 187
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 188

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 189
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 190

Question 97.
How does Grignard reagent react with the carbonyl compounds (or aldehydes and ketones)?
Answer:
The carbonyl compounds like aldehydes and ketones react with Grignard reagent (R – Mg – X) in dry ether and form a complex which on further hydrolysis with acid forms the corresponding alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 191

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 98.
What is the action of Grignard reagent, CH3 – Mg – I on : (1) formaldehyde (2) acetone?
Answer:
(1) Grignard reagent with formaldehyde gives a primary alcohol.
Formaldehyde on reaction with Grignard reagent, CH3 – Mg – I in dry ether forms a complex which on hydrolysis with dilute HCl forms ethyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 192

(2) Acetone on reaction with Grignard reagent, CH3 – Mg – I in dry ether forms a complex which on hydrolysis with dilute HC1 forms tert-butyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 193

Question 99.
Explain the mechanism of addition reactions of ammonia derivatives H2N-Z with carbonyl compounds (aldehydes or ketones).
Answer:
Derivatives of ammonia H2N-Z reacts with carbonyl compounds (aldehydes or ketones) in weakly acidic medium to give addition products, which loses a water molecule to give a final product imine derivatives. A substituted imine is called a Schiff base. Schiff bases are solids and have sharp melting points.

General reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 194

Question 100.
What Is the action of ethylamine on :
(1) acetaldehyde
(2) acetone ?
Answer:
(1) Acetaldehyde on reaction with ethyl amine forms imine (Schiff base).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 195
(2) Acetone on reaction with ethyl amine forms imine (Schiff base).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 196

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 101.
What are oximes? Which functional group do they contain?
Answer:
Oximes : These are the compounds obtained by the reactions of carbonyl compounds namely aldehydes and ketones with hydroxyl amine NH2OH.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 197

Question 102.
What is the action of hydroxyl amine (NH2OH) on (1) acetaldehyde (2) acetone?
Answer:
(1) Acetaldehyde on reaction with hydroxyl amine (in weakly acidic medium) forms crystalline acetaldoxime.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 198
(2) Acetone on reaction with hydroxyl amine (in weakly acidic medium) forms crystalline acetoxime.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 199

Question 103.
What are hydrazones?
Answer:
Carbonyl compounds like aldehydes and ketones react with hydrazine forming compounds like hydrazones. For example, acetaldehyde on reaction with hydrazine gives acetaldehyde hydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 200

Question 104.
Which compound can convert Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 201
Answer:
The compound which can convertMaharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 202.

Question 105.
What is the action of hydrazine on (1) formaldehyde (2) acetone ?
Answer:
(1) Formaldehyde on reaction with hydrazine forms formaldehyde hydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 203
(2) Acetone with hydrazine forms acetone hydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 204

Question 106.
What are phenylhydrazones?
Answer:
The carbonyl compounds like aldehydes and ketones on reaction with phenylhydrazine form hydrazones. For example, acetaldehyde on reaction with phenylhydrazine forms acetaldehydephenylhydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 205

Question 107.
What is the action of phenylhydrazine on (1) formaldehyde (2) acetone (propanone) ?
Answer:
(1) Formaldehyde on reaction with phenylhydrazine forms formaldehydephenylhydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 206
(2) Acetone on reaction with phenylhydrazine forms acetone phenylhydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 207

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 108.
What is the action of 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazine on
(1) Acetaldehyde
(2) Acetone
(3) Butanone
(4) Benzaldehyde ?
OR
Complete and rewrite the balanced chemical equation : Butanone + 2, 4-Dinitrophenylhydrazine.
Answer:
(1) Acetaldehyde on reaction with 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazine forms 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 208
(2) Acetone on reaction with 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazine forms 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 209
(3) Butanone on reaction with 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazine forms 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 210

Question 109.
What is the action of semi carbazide on (1) Acetaldehyde (2) Acetone?
Ans.
(1) Acetaldehyde on reaction with semicarbazide forms scrnicarbazone derivative.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 211
(2) Acetone on reaction with sernicarbazide forms semicarbazone derivative.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 212

Question 120.
Write the structures of carbonyl compounds and ammonia derivatives that combine to give following imines.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 213

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 121.
Write the structure of the products obtained from the following ketones by action of hydrazine in presence of (1) slightly acidic medium (2) strong base KOH.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 214
Answer:
(1) In slightly acidic medium
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 215
(2) In the presence of a strong base KOH
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 216

Question 122.
Explain haloform reaction.
Answer:
A ketone containing -COCH3 group is oxidised by sodium hypohalite a mixture of (sodium hydroxide and halogen) results in the formation of sodium salt of carboxylic acid having one carbon atom less than that of ketone and methyl group is converted to haloform.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 220
Acetaldehyde is the only aldehyde which gives haloform reaction. In this reaction, R may be hydrogen, methyl group or aryl group and X may be Cl, Br or I. The reaction is given by all methyl ketones (CH3 – CO – R) and all alcohols containing CH3 – (CHOH) group.

When a methyl ketone is warmed with iodine and sodium hydroxide, a yellow precipitate of iodoform is obtained. The iodoform reaction is used as a qualitative test for detection of CH3CO-group in a organic compound.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 221

Question 128.
Identify the compounds, amongst the following, that give positive iodoform test.
(CH3)2CHOH, (CH3)3COH, CH3COCH2CH2CH3, CH3CH2CHO, CH3CH2CH(OH)CH2CH3, CH3CH2OH, C6H5COCH2CH3, CH3CHO, C6H5CH2CH2OH and CH3CH(OH)CH2CH2CH3.
Answer:
For an iodoform test, the carbonyl compound must have Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 222 group.
The compounds that give positive iodoform test :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 223

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 129.
Explain cross aldol condensation.
Answer:
(1) An aldol condensation between two different carbonyl compounds (aldehydes and or ketones) takes place even though one of the two carbonyl compounds molecules does not contain a-hydrogen atom e.g. HCHO and C6H5CHO.

(2) If both aldehydes or ketones contain two a-hydrogen atoms each, then a mixture of four products, is formed. For example, a mixture of ethanal and propanal on reaction with dilute alkali followed by heating gives a mixture of four products.

Self aldol condensation:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 232
Cross aldol condensation:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 233

Question 130.
Write the structure of the major product of the following crossed aldol condensation.
Answer:
(1) Formaldehyde and propionaldehyde :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 236
(2) Benzaldehyde with acetone:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 237

Question 131.
Explain aldol condensation reaction of propionaldehyde.
Answer:
Since propionaldehyde has an a-hydrogen atom it undergoes aldol condensation with alkali Ba(OH)2, forming 3-Hydroxy-2-methylpentanal.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 238
3-Hydroxy-2-methylpentanal on heating undergoes dehydration and forms 2-Methylpent-2-enal.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 239

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 132.
If a mixture of formaldehyde and acetaldehyde is subjected to aldol condensation, predict the products formed and draw their structures.
Answer:
Since formaldehyde, Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 240 does not have α-hydrogen atom it will not undergo self aldol condensation. Since acetaldehydeMaharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 241has a-hydrogen atom, it will undergo self aldol condensation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 242
Formaldehyde and acetaldehyde undergo cross aldol condensation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 243
Hence two aldol condensation products will be obtained.

Question 133.
Indicate by equations, what happens when a mixture of acetaldehyde and acetone are treated with alkali.
Answer:
When a mixture of acetaldehyde and acetone is treated with alkali, Ba(OH)2, they undergo self aldol condensation and cross aldol condensation.
(1) Self aldol condensation acetaldehyde :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 244
(2) Self aldol condensation of acetone:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 245
(3) Cro5s aldol condensation:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 246

Question 134.
Explain Cannizzaro reaction.
OR
Write a note on Cannizzaro reaction.
OR
Write a note on self oxidation-reduction reaction of aldehyde with suitable example.
Answer:

  • Aldehydes which do not have a-hydrogen atom, on heating with concentrated alkali (50% aqueous or ethanolic solution of NaOH or KOH) undergo self oxidation and reduction reaction or redox reaction.
  • This self redox reaction or disproportionation reaction is called Cannizzaro reaction.
  • In this reaction one molecule of the aldehyde is oxidised to carboxylic acid while the second molecule of the aldehyde is reduced to alcohol (carboxylic acid formed, reacts with alkali, NaOH and forms a salt R – COONa).
  • When formaldehyde (methanal) is heated with 50% NaOH solution, methanol (reduction product) and sodium formate (oxidation product) are formed.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 248.
  • Ketones and aldehydes like acetaldehyde, propionaldehyde, etc. having a – H atom do not give Cannizzaro reaction.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 135.
Explain cross Cannizzaro reaction with example.
OR
Write the reaction for the action of 50 % NaOH on a mixture of formaldehyde and benzaldehyde.
Answer:
The reaction between two different aldehydes, not having a-hydrogen atoms is called cross Cannizzaro reaction. These two aldehydes undergo disproportionation in presence of concentrated alkali to give four products. However, if one of the aldehydes is formaldehyde, the reaction yields exclusively formate and alcohol to corresponding aldehyde.

Formaldehyde and benzaldehyde since do not have a-hydrogen atom, will undergo Cannizzaro (redox) reactions.

(1) Self Cannizzaro (redox) reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 249
(2) Cmss Cannizzaro (redox) reaction:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 250

Question 136.
What is the action of cone, potassium hydroxide on benzaldehyde?
Answer:
When benzaldehyde is heated with concentrated potassium hydroxide in presence of methanol, a mixture of potassium benzoate and phenyl methanol (benzyl alcohol) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 251

Question 137.
Differentiate between Cannizzaro reaction and Aldol reaction.
Answer:

Cannizzaro reaction Aldol reaction
1. It is given by aldehydes not having alpha hydrogen atom.
2.  In this reaction an aldehyde is converted to the corres­ponding acid and an alcohol.
3.  It is a disproportionate ion reaction.
4.  It requires concentrated alkali as a catalyst.
1. It is given by aldehydes and ketones possessing alpha hydrogen atom.
2.  In this reaction aldehydes and ketones are converted into aldol and ketols, respectively.
3.  It is an addition reaction.
4.  It requires dilute alkali as a catalyst.

Question 138.
Write the chemical equations for aldol condensation or Cannizzaro reaction that the following compounds undergo :
(1) Propanal
(2) 2-Methyl propanal (isobutyraldehyde)
(3) Pentanal
(4) 3-Methylbutanal
(5) Acetophenone
(6) p-Methoxybenzaldehyde
(7) 2-Methyl cyclohexanone
(8) Chloral
(9) Cyclopentanone
(10) Phenyl acetaldehyde
(11) 1-Phenyl propan-l-one.
Answer:
(1) Propanal (Aldol condensation) : Propanal contains α-H atom. Two molecules of propanal undergo self condensation in presence of dil. alkali to form 3-Hydroxy-2-methyl pentanal.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 253

(2) 2-NIethvl propanal (Canniuaro reaction) : Two molecules of them undergo cannizzaro reaction in the presence of 50% alkali to form sodium isobutyrate and isohutyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 254

(3) Pentanal (Aldol condensation) : Pentanal contains a-H atom. Two molecules of them undergo self condensation in the presence of dil. alkali to form 3-Hydroxy-2-propyl heptanal.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 255

(4) 3-Methyl butanal (Aldol condensation) : 3-Methyl butanal contains a-H atom. Two molecules of them undergo self condensation in the presence of dil. alkali to form 3-Hydroxy-2-isopropyl-5-methyl hexanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 256

(5) Acetophenone (Aldol condensation) : Acetophenone contains a-H atom. Two molecules of them undergo self condensation in the presence of base to form 3-Hydroxy-1, 3-diphenyl but-l-one.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 257

(6) p-Methoxybenzaldehyde (Cannizzaro reaction) :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 258

(7) 2-Methyl cyclohexanone
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 259

(8) Chloral (Cannizzaro’s reaction) : There is no α-H atom CCl3CHO, therefore it undergoes Cannizzaro’s reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 260

(9) Cyclopentanone (Aldol condensation) : Cyclopentanone contains a-H atom. Two molecules of them undergo self-condensation in the presence of base to form 2-(l-Hydroxy-1 cyclopentyl) cyclo pentane-l-one.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 261

(10) Phenyl acetaldehyde (Aldol condensation) : Phenyl acetaldehyde contains a-H atom. Two molecules of them undergo self-condensation in the presence of base to form 3-Hydroxy-2, 4-diphenylbutanal.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 262

(11) 1-phenyl propan-l-one (Aldol condensation) : 1-phenyl propan-l-one contains a-H atom. Two molecules of them undergo self-condensation in the presence of base to form 3-Hydroxy-2-methyl-l, 3-diphenyl pentan-l-one
3-Hydroy-2-methyl-1, 3-diphenyl pentan-l-one
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 263

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 139.
Write a note on Clemmensen reduction.
OR
Explain Clemmeusen’s reduction.
OR
Explain the reduction of carbonyl group into methylene group.
Answer:

  • The carbonyl groupMaharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 264on reduciion with zinc amalgam (Zn – Hg) in concentrated hydrochloric acid is converted into methylene group ( – CH2 -).
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 265
  • Aldehydes and kctoncs on reaction with Zn – Hg in concentrated HCl forms corresponding alkanes. ibis reduction is called Clemmensen reduction.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 266
  • Acetaldehyde on reduction with Zn – Hg in concentrated HCl forms ethane.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 267
  • Acetone on reduction with Zn – Hg in concentrated HCl forms propane.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 268

Question 140.
Explain Wolff-Kishner reduction.
Answer:
Hydrazine (NH2-NH2) reduces carbonyl groupMaharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 269of aldehydes or ketones to metylene group Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 270 When aldehyde or ketone is heated with hydrazine in the presence of base such as potassium hydroxide and ethylene glycol, an alkane is obtained due to reduction of carbonyl compound.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 271

Question 141.
Compound A (C5H10O) form a phenyl hydrazone and gives a negative Tollen’s reagent test and iodoform test. On reduction with Zn-Hg/HCl, compound A gives n-pentane. Write the structure of ‘A’.
Answer:
Since A (C5H10O) forms a phenyl hydrozone, it is a carbonyl compound. Since it gives negative Tollen’s reagent test, it is not an aldehyde but it must be a ketone.

Since it doesn’t give iodoform test, it doesn’t have Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 272group.
Hence the structure of ‘A’ will be,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 273

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 142.
Identify A and B in the following reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 274
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 275

 

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 276
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 277

 

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 278
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 279

 

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 280
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 281

Question 143.
What is the action of concentrated nitric acid on (1) Benzaldehyde (2) Benzophenone?
Answer:

  1. Benzaldehyde on reaction with concentrated nitric acid in presence of cone. H2SO4 forms m-nitrobenzaldehyde
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 282
  2. Benzophenone on reaction with concentrated nitric acid in presence of cone. H2SO4 forms m-nitrobenzophenone
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 283

Question 144.
Explain laboratory tests for carboxyl (- COOH) group.
Answer:
The presence of – COOH group in carboxylic acids is identified by the following tests :

(1) Litmus test : (valid for water soluble substances)
Aqueous solution of Organic compound containing – COOH group turns blue litmus red which indicates the presence of acidic functional group.

(2) Sodium bicarbonate test : When sodium bicarbonate is added to an organic compound containing – COOH group, a brisk effervescence of carbon dioxide gas is evolved. Water insoluble acid goes in solution and gives precipitate an acidification with cone. HCl. This indicates the presence of -COOH group.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 284

(3) Ester test : One drop of concentrated sulfuric acid is added to a mixture of given organic compound containing – COOH group and one mL of ethanol, the reaction mixture is heated for 5 minutes in hot water bath. After this, hot solution is poured in a beaker containing water, fruity smell of ester confirms the presence of carboxylic acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 285

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 145.
How is acid chloride obtained from carboxylic acid?
Answer:
Carboxylic acid on heating with thionyl chloride (SOCl2), phosphorus trichloride (PCl3) or phosphorus pentachloride (PCl5) give corresponding acid chlorides. In this reaction – OH of carboxyl group is replaced by -Cl.

The reactions are :
(1) Action on SOCl2 on carboxylic acid :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 286
Example : Acetic acid reacts with thionyl chloride to give acetyl chloride.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 287

(2) Action of PCl3 on carboxylic acid (ethanoic acid) :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 288
Example : Action of phosphorus trichloride on acetic acid gives acetyl chloride.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 289

(3) Action of PCI5 on carboxIic acid :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 290

Question 146.
How will you convert 3,5-Dinitrobenzoic acid to 3,5-Dinitrobenzoyl chloride?
Answer:
When 3,5-Dinitrobenzoic acid is heated with phosphorus pentachloride, 3,5-Dinitrobenzoyl chloride is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 291

Question 147.
How is acid amide obtained from carboxylic acid?
Answer:
Carboxylic acid or acid chloride with ammonia salts, which on further strong heating at high temperature decompose to give amides.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 292
When acetic acid is treated with ammonia, ammonium acetate is obtained. Ammonium acetate on strong heating decomposes to form acetamide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 293
When acetyl chloride is treated with ammonia, acetamide is obtained
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 294

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 148.
How is acid anhydride obtained from carboxylic acid?
Answer:
When carboxylic acid is heated with strong dehydrating agent like phosphorus pentoxide or concentrated sulphuric acid, an acid anhydride is obtained,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 295

The reaction is reversible and anhydride is hydrolysed back to acid.

Alternatively, when sodium acetate is heated with acetyl chloride, acetic anhydride is obtained. This reaction is irreversible.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 296

Question 149.
What is decarboxylation of an acid ? How is it done?
OR
What happens when sodium acetate is heated with soda lime ?
Answer:
Removal of a carboxylic group from acid is called decarboxylation. Decarboxylation of an acid is carried out by heating anhydrous sodium salts of carboxylic acids with soda lime (NaOH + CaO). The product hydrocarbons obtained contain one carbon atom less than the carboxylic acid.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 297
When sodium acetate is heated with soda lime, methane is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 298

Question 150.
How is alcohol obtained from carboxylic acid ?
OR
What is the action of LiAlH4/H3O+on ethanoic acid? Write balanced equation for the conversion :
Cyclopropane carboxylic acid to Cyclopropylmethanol.
Answer:
Carboxylic acids are reduced to primary alcohols using powerful reducing agent lithium aluminium hydride.

(i) When ethanoic acid is reduced in the presence of LiAlH4 in dry ether, forms ethanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 299
(ii) When cyclopropane carboxylic acid is reduced in the presence of lithium aluminium hydride in dry ether, forms cyclopropyl methanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 300
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 301

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 151.
What is the action 9f following compounds on cyclohexanone in presence of dry hydrogen chloride?
(1) Ethyl alcohol
(2) Ethylene glycol
Answer:
(1) With Ethyl alcohol : Cyclohcxanonc reacts with one equivalent of monohydric ethyl alcohol lo form hemi ketal, which further adds another molecule of alcohol to form a gem-dialkox compound known as ketal.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 309
(2) With Ethylene glycol : cyclohexanone reaCts with ethylene glycol to form cyclic ketal.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 310

Question 152.
Answer the following in one sentence.

1. Name the compound which reacts with formaldehyde to produce ethyl alcohol.
Answer:
The compound which reacts with formaldehyde to produce ethyl alcohol is methyl magnesium iodide.

2. What are imines ?
Answer:
These are the compounds obtained by the reactions of carbonyl compounds namely aldehydes and ketones with primary amine.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 317

3. Why does skin have burning sensation, when an ant bites ?
Answer:
When an ant bites, formic acid is released from an ant which gives burning sensation as the acid comes in contact with the skin.

4. What is the percentage of acetic acid in vinegar?
Answer:
The percentage of acetic acid in vinegar is 6 to 8%.

5. Which reagent is used to distinguish formic acid and acetic acid?
Answer:
The reagent used to distinguish formic acid and acetic acid is ammoniacal silver nitrate.

6. What happens when acetyl chloride is treated with dibenzyl cadmium ? Give reaction.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 318

7. Complete the following reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 319
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 320

8. Give reason : Aromatic carboxylic acids do not undergo Friedel-Crafts reaction.
Answer:
Aromatic carboxylic acids do not undergo Friedel-Crafts reaction because the catalyst aluminium chloride (Lewis acid) gets bonded to carboxyl group.

9. Write the name of two compounds which do not contain carbonyl group but show iodoform test.
Answer:
The name of two compounds which do not contain carbonyl group but show iodoform test are ethanol
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 321

10. Give reason : In semicarbazide, – NH2 group bonded to carbonyl group is not involved in the formation of semicarbazone.
Answer:
NH2 group attached to – NH group in semicarbonide is more active than NH2 group attached to carbonyl group due to electron density difference.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

11. Fehling solution does not oxidise benzaldehyde but Tollen’s reagent oxidises benzaldehyde. Give reason.
Answer:
When benzaldehyde is heated with Fehling solution, there is no change in colour of the solution, Cu2+ ion is not reduced, hence Fehling solution does not oxidise benzaldehyde. However, Tollen’s reagent oxidises benzaldehyde to give silver mirror test.

12. Give reason : Direct attachment of vinyl group to carboxylic group increases the acidity of corresponding acids.
Answer:
Direct attachment of vinyl group to carboxylic group increases the acidity of corresponding acids due to greater electronegativity of sp2-hybridised carbon to which carboxyl carbon is attached.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 322

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 153.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each sub-question :

1. IUPAC name of
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 337
(a) l-Phenylhexan-2-one
(b) 6-Phenylhexan-5-one
(c) l-Benzylhexan-2-one
(d) Dodecan-5-one
Answer:
(a) l-Phenylhexan-2-one

2. The general formula of carbonyl compounds is
(a) CnH2n+1OH
(b) CnH2nO
(c) CnH2nO2
(d) CnH2n+1O
Answer:
(b) CnH2nO

3. Aldehydes and ketones are
(a) chain isomers
(b) functional isomers
(c) geometrical isomers
(d) position isomers
Answer:
(b) functional isomers

4. Identify ‘C’ in the following reaction,
\(\mathrm{C}_{2} \mathrm{H}_{5} \mathrm{Br} \stackrel{\mathrm{KCN}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{A} \stackrel{\mathrm{H}^{+} \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{B} \stackrel{\mathrm{LiAlH}_{4}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{C}\)
(a) Propan – 1 – ol
(b) Propanone
(c) 2-Ethyl-3-pentanone
(d) Propanal
Answer:
(d) Propanal

5. Grignard reagent when reacted with alkyl cyanide followed by hydrolysis gives
(a) an aldehyde
(b) a ketone
(c) a primary alcohol
(d) a secondary alcohol
Answer:
(b) a ketone

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

6. Identify ‘ B ’ in the following reaction :
\(\mathrm{CH}_{3}-\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{N} \stackrel{\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{MgI}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{A} \underset{\mathrm{HCl}}{\stackrel{2 \mathrm{HOH}}{\longrightarrow}} \mathrm{B}+\mathrm{NH}_{3}+\mathrm{MgIOH}\)
(a) Magnesium intermediate
(b) Ethanol
(c) Propanal
(d) Propanone
Answer:
(d) Propanone

7. \(\mathrm{A}+\mathrm{B} \stackrel{\text { dry ether }}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{Col}\) Complex \(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O} / \mathrm{H}^{+}\) Ethyl Methyl Ketone. In the above reaction, A and B are
(a) Formonitrile, Propyl magnesium bromide
(b) Ethyl cyanide, Ethyl magnesium bromide
(c) Hydrogen cyanide, Ethyl magnesium bromide
(d) Acetonitrile, Ethyl magnesium bromide
Answer:
(d) Acetonitrile, Ethyl magnesium bromide

8. A dilute solution of p-rosaniline hydrochloride in water whose pink colour has been discharged by passing sulphur dioxide, does not restore its colour by
(a) HCHO
(b) CH2CHO
(c) (CH3)2COCH3
(d) CCl3CHO
Answer:
(c) (CH3)2COCH3

9. The reagent with which both acetaldehyde and acetone reacts easily is –
(a) Fehling’s solution
(b) Tollen’s reagent
(c) Grignard reagent
(d) Schiff s reagent
Answer:
(c) Grignard reagent

10. Isopropyl methyl ketone when treated with Zn-Hg and concentrated hydrochloric acid give
(a) iso-butane
(b) iso-pentane
(c) n-pentane
(d) neo-pentane
Answer:
(b) iso-pentane

11. The formation of acetone cyanohydrin from acetone is an example of
(a) Nucleophilic addition
(b) Nucleophilic substitution
(c) Electrophilic addition
(d) Electrophilic substitution
Answer:
(a) Nucleophilic addition

12. Which of the following is Fehling solution ‘A’?
(a) CuSO4 solution
(b) CaSO4 solution
(c) NaOH solution
(d) Sodium potassium tartarate solution
Answer:
(a) CuSO4 solution

13. The compound ‘X’ upon alkaline hydrolysis gives a product which reacts with phenylhydrazine but does not reduce ammoniacal silver nitrate solution. A possible structure for ‘X’ is
(a) CH3CHCl CH2Cl
(b) CH3CCl2CH3
(c) CH3CH2CH2Cl
(d) CH3CH2CHCl2
Answer:
(b) CH3CCl2CH3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

14. Which of the following is the correct statement with respect to aldehyde and ketones ?
(a) Ketones are reducing agents
(b) Aldehydes are good reducing agents
(c) Cannizzaro reaction is an addition reaction
(d) Ketones do not react with Grignard reagent
Answer:
(b) Aldehydes are good reducing agents

15. Acetaldehyde acts as
(a) a catalyst
(b) a reducing agent
(c) an oxidizing agent
(d) a mordant
Answer:
(b) a reducing agent

16. An organic compound (A) C3H80 on oxidation gives (B) C3H6O2. The compound A may be
(a) an ester
(b) an alcohol
(c) an aldehyde
(d) a ketone
Answer:
(b) an alcohol

17. Identify ‘B’ from the following reaction :
\(\mathrm{C}_{2} \mathrm{H}_{5} \mathrm{CHO}+\mathrm{NH}_{2} \mathrm{OH} \rightarrow \mathrm{A} \stackrel{\mathrm{Na} / \mathrm{C}_{2} \mathrm{H}_{5} \mathrm{OH}}{\Delta} \mathrm{B}\)
(a) Propan-1-amine
(b) Propan-2-amine
(c) Isopropylamine
(d) Dimethylamine
Answer:
(a) Propan-1-amine

18. Sodium borohydride does not reduce
(a) – COOH group
(b) – NO2 group
(c) – X atom
(d) – CHO group
Answer:
(a) – COOH group

19. An aldehyde when warmed with Zn/Hg and cone. HCl gives
(a) alcohol
(b) hydrocarbon
(c) carboxylic acid
(d) ketone
Answer:
(b) hydrocarbon

20. Acetaldol is
(a) 3-hydroxy butanol
(b) 3-hydroxy butanal
(c) 2-hydroxy propanal
(d) 3-hydroxy pentanal
Answer:
(b) 3-hydroxy butanal

21. Acetone can be reduced to propane, the reduction is called
(a) Clemmensen’s reduction
(b) catalytic reduction
(c) Rosenmund’s reduction
(d) partial reduction
Answer:
(a) Clemmensen’s reduction

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

22. Which of the following reagents can react with acetaldehyde to give water soluble white crystal-line solid?
(a) NaHSO4
(b) NaHSO3
(c) Na2SO3
(d) Na2SO4
Answer:
(b) NaHSO3

23. Which of the following compounds does NOT undergo aldol condensation?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 326
Answer:
(a)

24. Formalin is 40% aqueous solution of :
(a) Methanal
(b) Methanoic acid
(c) Methanol
(d) Methanamine
Answer:
(a) Methanal

25. Which of the following compounds do not produce pink colour with Schiff s reagent?
(a) Formaldehyde
(b) 2-propanone
(c) 3-pentanone
(d) Both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) Both (b) and (c)

26. Both aldehydes and ketones can react with
(a) Tollen’s reagent
(b) the Grignard reagent
(c) Fehling’s solution
(d) Schiffs reagent
Answer:
(b) the Grignard reagent

27. Aldol reaction is.
(a) an addition reaction
(b) an elimination reaction
(c) a self-reduction reaction
(d) a disproportionate ion reaction
Answer:
(a) an addition reaction

28. The reaction in which two molecules combine to form a new molecule with the elimination of a small molecule like water is called
(a) an oxidation reaction
(b) a condensation reaction
(c) a hydrolysis reaction
(d) a redox reaction
Answer:
(b) a condensation reaction

29. Benzaldehyde undergoes Cannizzaro’s reaction to give
(a) sodium benzoate and methyl alcohol
(b) sodium benzoate and benzyl alcohol
(c) benzyllic acid and benzyl alcohol
(d) phenol and benzoic acid
Answer:
(b) sodium benzoate and benzyl alcohol

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

30. Identify ‘X’ in the following reaction :
CH3-CHO + X → CH3-CH = N-NH-C6H5 + H2O
(a) C6H5-NH2
(b) C6H5-NH-NH2
(c) C6H5-N = NH
(d) C6H5-NH-NH-CH3
Answer:
(b) C6H5-NH-NH2

31. What happens when propanal is treated with zinc amalgam and conc.HCl ?
(a) Propan-l-ol
(b) Propan-2-ol
(c) Propane
(d) Propanone
Answer:
(c) Propane

32. Identify ‘ B ’ in the following reaction :
\(2 \mathrm{CH}_{3}-\mathrm{CHO} \frac{\text { dil. base or acid }}{300 \mathrm{~K}} \mathrm{~A} \underset{\text { dehydration }}{\text { dehy }} \mathrm{B}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}\)
(a) CH3-CH(OH)-CH2-CHO
(b) CH3-CH2-CH(OH)-CHO
(c) CH3-CH = CH-CHO
(d) CH3-CO-CH3
Answer:
(c) CH3-CH = CH-CHO

33. The blue colour of Fehling’s solution is due to
(a) Cu2O
(b) CuCO3
(c) CuO
(d) Cu++ ions
Answer:
(d) Cu++ ions

34. How is Schiff s reagent prepared?
(a) By passing CO2 through p-rosaniline solution
(b) By passing NO2 through p-rosaniline solution
(c) By passing SO2 through p-rosaniline solution
(d) By passing NH3 through silver nitrate solution
Answer:
(c) By passing SO2 through p-rosaniline solution

35. Benzaldehyde when treated with cone. HNO3 gives
(a) o-nitrobenzaldehyde
(b) p-nitrobenzaldehyde
(c) m-nitrobenzaldehyde
(d) a mixture of -o and -p-nitrobenzaldehyde
Answer:
(c) m-nitrobenzaldehyde

36. Which of the following carbonyl compounds undergoes aldol condensation ?
(a) Benzaldehyde
(b) Benzophenone
(c) Acetophenone
(d) tert-Butyl phenyl ketone
Answer:
(c) Acetophenone

37. Which of the following carbonyl compounds undergoes self redox reaction in presence of concentrated base ?
(a) 3-Methylpentanal
(b) 2-Chlorobutanal
(c) 2,2-Dimethylpropanal
(d) tert-Butyl methyl ketone
Answer:
(c) 2,2-Dimethylpropanal

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

38. The smell of bitter almond is given by the compound.
(a) Benzoic acid
(b) Benzaldehyde
(c) Vanillin
(d) Cinnamaldehyde
Answer:
(b) Benzaldehyde

39. Which of the following will not give yellow precipitate when treated with NaOH and H?
(a) 3-Methylbutan-2-one
(b) 2-methylpentan-3-one
(c) Propanone
(d) Hexan-2-one
Answer:
(b) 2-methylpentan-3-one

40. A β-hydroxyl carbonyl compound is obtained by the action of NaOH on
(a) HCHO
(b) C6H5CHO
(c) CR3CHO
(d) CH3CHO
Answer:
(d) CH3CHO

41. Decarboxylation of sodium propionate gives
(a) methane
(b) ethane
(c) propane
(d) ethene
Answer:
(b) ethane

42. Ester on hydrolysis with dil HCl gives
(a) RCOOH + ROH
(b) RCOR + ROH
(c) ROH + ROH
(d) RCOR + RCOOH
Answer:
(a) RCOOH + ROH

43. \(\mathrm{CH}_{3}-\mathrm{CO}-\mathrm{CH}_{3} \stackrel{\mathrm{CrO}_{3}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{A}\) The compound A is
(a) acetic acid
(b) propionic acid
(c) formic acid
(d) benzoic acid
Answer:
(a) acetic acid

44. The reaction of C6H5CH = CHCHO with LiAlH4 gives
(a) C6H5CH2CH2CH2OH
(b) C6H5CH2CH2CHO
(c) C6H5CH = CHCH2OH
(d) C6H5CH2CHOHCH3
Answer:
(a) C6H5CH2CH2CH2OH

45. A mixture of sodium benzoate and sodalime on heating yields
(a) methane
(b) benzene
(c) sodium benzoate
(d) calcium benzoate
Answer:
(b) benzene

46. Which is the strongest acid?
(a) CH3COOH
(b) CH3CH2COOH
(c) (CH3)3CCOOH
(d) CICH2COOH
Answer:
(d) CICH2COOH

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

47. Benzaldehyde when treated with alkaline KMnO4 yields
(a) Benzyl alcohol
(b) Benzoic acid
(c) CO2 and H2O
(d) Salicylic acid
Answer:
(a) Benzyl alcohol

48. Acetonitrile on acidic hydrolysis gives
(a) HCOOH
(b) CH3NC
(c) CH3COONa
(d) CH3COOH
Answer:
(d) CH3COOH

49. The organic compounds A and B reacts with sodium metal and liberates hydrogen gas. A and B reacts together to give ethyl acetate. The A and B are
(a) CH3COOH & C2H5OH
(b) HCOOH & C2H5OH
(c) CH3COOH & HCOOH
(d) CH3COOH & CH3OH
Answer:
(a) CH3COOH & C2H5OH

50. Which one of the following undergoes reaction with 50% NaOH to give to corresponding alcohol and acid?
(a) Phenol
(b) Benzoic acid
(c) Benzaldehyde
(d) Butanal
Answer:
(c) Benzaldehyde

51. Identify the reactant in the following reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 327
Answer:
(c) CO

52. The strongest acid is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 328
Answer:
(c)

53. Predict the product in the following reaction
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 338
The compound A is
(a) butane
(b) propane
(c) ethane
(d) propene
Answer:
(b) propane

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

54. Ethyl benzoate when heated with dil H2SO4 gives
(a) acetic acid
(b) benzoic acid
(c) ethanoic acid
(d) phenyl methanol
Answer:
(b) benzoic acid

55. Margarine contains
(a) acetaldehyde
(b) propionaldehyde
(c) butyraldehyde
(d) formaldehyde
Answer:
(c) butyraldehyde

56. Monocarboxylic acids have the general formula
(a) CnH2n+1O2
(b) CnH2nO2
(c) CnH2nO
(d) CnH2n-1O2
Answer:
(b) CnH2nO2

57. Formic acid is obtained from
(a) vinegar
(b) red ants
(c) butter
(d) oil
Answer:
(b) red ants

58. Butter contains
(a) lactic acid
(b) butyric acid
(c) citric acid
(d) acetic acid
Answer:
(b) butyric acid

59. Glacial acetic acid is
(a) HCOOH
(b) CH3COOH
(c) CH3CH2COOH
(d) C3H7COOH
Answer:
(b) CH3COOH

60. Which of the following acids is optically active?
(a) Oxalic acid
(b) Salicylic acid
(c) Acetic acid
(d) Lactic acid
Answer:
(d) Lactic acid

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

61. Lactic acid is
(a) propionic acid
(b) α-hydroxy propionic acid
(c) p-hydroxy benzoic acid
(d) butyric acid
Answer:
(b) α-hydroxy propionic acid

62. The carbon atom of the carboxylic group is
(a) sp3-hybridized
(b) sp2-hybridized
(c) sp-hybridized
(d) unhybridized
Answer:
(b) sp2-hybridized

63. The common name of carboxylic fatty acids is derived from
(a) the name of parent alkanes
(b) the name of corresponding aldehydes
(c) from their original sources
(d) the name of alkyl group present in them
Answer:
(c) from their original sources

64. The IUPAC name of a-methylpropionic acid is
(a) Propanoic acid
(b) Butanoic acid
(c) 2-Methylpropanoic acid
(d) 2-Methylbutanoic acid
Answer:
(c) 2-Methylpropanoic acid

65. For the nomenclature of carboxylic acids, the suffix used is
(a) -ane
(b) -oic
(c) -al
(d) -ol
Answer:
(b) -oic

66. Propionic acid can be prepared by the
(a) action of propyl magnesium chloride on dry ice
(b) alkaline hydrolysis of propyl cyanide
(c) acid hydrolysis of ethyl cyanide
(d) oxidation of Propanone
Answer:
(c) acid hydrolysis of ethyl cyanide

67. The intermediate compound formed during hy-drolysis of acetonitrile to acetic acid is
(a) acetone
(b) acetamide
(c) ammonium acetate
(d) ethyl ammonium chloride
Answer:
(b) acetamide

68. Carbonation of CH3MgI gives organic compound. The same compound can also be obtained by
(a) oxidation of Methanol
(b) oxidation of Methanal
(c) acid hydrolysis of acetonitrile
(d) alkaline hydrolysis of ethyl cyanide
Answer:
(c) acid hydrolysis of acetonitrile

69. The acid that cannot be prepared by the action of Grignard reagent on dry ice is
(a) methanoic acid
(b) ethanoic acid
(c) propanoic acid
(d) butanoic acid
Answer:
(a) methanoic acid

70. The compound which on acid hydrolysis followed by oxidation gives acetic acid is
(a) CH3I
(b) CH2Cl2
(c) ClCH2CH2C1
(d) CH3CHCl2
Answer:
(d) CH3CHCl2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

71. The hydrolysis product of alkyl cyanide is
(a) primary amine
(b) amides
(c) aldehyde
(d) carboxylic acid
Answer:
(d) carboxylic acid

72. To prepare acetic acid,
(a) methyl alcohol is oxidized with KMnO4
(b) calcium acetate is distilled with calcium for-mate under dry conditions
(c) acetaldehyde is oxidized in the presence of K2Cr2O7 and dil. H2SO4
(d) glycerol is heated with H2SO4
Answer:
(c) acetaldehyde is oxidized in the presence of K2Cr2O7 and dil. H2SO4

73. Solid carbon dioxide when treated with etheral solution of C2H5MgBr followed by acid hydrolyzis gives
(a) propanoic acid
(b) ethanoic acid
(c) propionic acid
(d) both (a) and (c)
Answer:
(d) both (a) and (c)

74. Which of the following compound does not give acetic acid on oxidation ?
(a) Ethanol
(b) Propan-l-ol
(c) Propan-2-ol
(d) 2-Methyl propan-2-ol
Answer:
(b) Propan-l-ol

75. A carboxylic acid resembles an alcohol with respect to its reaction with
(a) acidified K2Cr2O7
(b) washing soda
(c) caustic soda
(d) sodium metal
Answer:
(d) sodium metal

76. Acetic acid can be converted into acetic anhydride on heating with
(a) POCl3
(b) PCl3
(c) PCI5
(d) P2O5
Answer:
(d) P2O5

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

77. Acetyl chloride reacts with ammonia to give
(a) ammonium acetate
(b) ethylammonium chloride
(c) ethylamine
(d) acetamide
Answer:
(d) acetamide

78. The reagent that reacts with acetic acid to give sodium acetate with liberation of carbon dioxide gas is
(a) sodium metal
(b) caustic soda
(c) caustic potash
(d) baking soda
Answer:
(d) baking soda

79. An alkene on hydration gives a compound, which reacts with propionic acid to produce isopropyl propionate. The alkene is
(a) CH2 = CH2
(b) CH3-CH = CH2
(c) CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH2
(d) CH3 – CH = CH – CH3
Answer:
(b) CH3-CH = CH2

80. Both the compounds ‘A’ and ‘B’ react with sodium metal to liberate hydrogen gas and react with each other to give Methylethanoate. The compounds ‘A’ and ‘B’ are
(a) C2H5 – COOH and CH3 – OH
(b) C2H5 – COOH and C2H5 – OH
(c) CH3 – COOH and C2H5 – OH
(d) CH3 – COOH and CH3 – OH
Answer:
(d) CH3 – COOH and CH3 – OH

81. Identify the product ‘D’ in the following series of reactions.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 339
(a) CH3COOCH3
(b) CH3COOC2H5
(c) C2H5COOCH3
(d) C2H5COOC2H5
Answer:
(b) CH3COOC2H5

82. Acetyl chloride on heating with sodium acetate gives
(a) ethyl acetate
(b) acetamide
(c) acetic anhydride
(d) acetaldehyde
Answer:
(c) acetic anhydride

83. Carboxylic acids are acidic in nature because
(a) it dissociates to give H+ ions
(b) it donates proton
(c) it reacts with active metal and liberates hydro-gen gas
(d) all of these
Answer:
(d) all of these

84. Carboxylic acids on heating with P2O5 give
(a) acid chlorides
(b) alkyl halides
(c) acid amides
(d) acid anhydrides
Answer:
(d) acid anhydrides

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

85.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 329
Answer:
(c)

86. The compound having general formula is called
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 340
(a) diester
(b) acid anhydride
(c) hemiacetal
(d) acetal
Answer:
(d) acetal

87. Identify the strongest acid amongst the following :
(a) Chloroacetic acid
(b) Acetic acid
(c) Trichloroacetic acid
(d) Dichloroacetic acid
Answer:
(c) Trichloroacetic acid

88. Acetaldehyde, when treated with which among the following reagents does ‘not’ undergo addition reaction?
(a) ammonia
(b) hydroxyl amine
(c) ammoniacal silver nitrate
(d) semicarbazide
Answer:
(c) ammoniacal silver nitrate

89. Popcorn has butter flavour which contains
(a) butan-l-one
(b) butane-2, 3-dione
(c) butan-2-one
(d) butyric acid
Answer:
(b) butane-2, 3-dione

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

90. On acid hydrolysis, propane nitrile gives
(a) propanal
(b) acetic acid
(c) propionamide
(d) propanoic acid
Answer:
(d) propanoic acid

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 1.
What are alcohols? How are they classified?
Answer:
Alcohols are the hydroxy derivatives of hydrocarbons in which one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced by hydroxyl group.

Examples : CH3 – OH methyl alcohol, CH3 – CH2 – OH ethyl alcohol. Depending on the basis of hydroxyl groups present in a molecule, alcohols are classified into monohydric, dihydric, trihydric and polyhydric alcohols.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 2.
What are monohydric alcohols? How are they classified?
Answer:
Alcohols having only one hydroxyl group in their molecules are called monohydric alcohols. Monohydric alcohols are classified according to the type of hybridization of the carbon atom to which the hydroxyl group is attached.

(1) Alcohols containing Csp3 – OH bond : In these alcohols -OH group is attached to a sp3 – hybridised carbon atom of alkyl group. These alcohols are represented as R-OH. They are further classified as primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols in which – OH group is attached to primary, secondary and tertiary carbon atoms respectively.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 2

(a) Allylic alcohols : In these alcohols -OH group is attached to a sp3 -hybridised carbon atom next to the carbon-carbon double bond i.e., to allylic carbon. Allylic alcohols may be primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 3

(b) Benzylic alcohols : In these alcohols -OH group is attached to a sp3 -hybridised carbon atom next to an aromatic ring. Benzylic alcohols may be primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 4

(2) Alcohols containing Csp3 – OH bond: In these alcohols -OH group is attached to a sp2 – hybridised carbon atom,
i.e., vinylic carbon. These alcohols are also called vinylic alcohols.
e.g., CH2 = CH – OH vinyl alcohol.

Question 3.
What are phenols (carbolic acids)?
Answer:
Hydroxy derivatives of aromatic hydrocarbons in which the hydroxyl group is directly attached to the aromatic ring are called phenols.
Examples:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 5

Question 4.
What is phenol? OR Define carbolic acid.
Answer:
The hydroxy derivative of benzene in which the OH group is directly attached to benzene ring is called phenol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 6

Question 5.
How are phenols classified? Give suitable examples.
Answer:
Phenols are classified on the basis of number of hydroxyl (- OH) groups present in a molecule of phenol.
(1) Monohydric phenols : Phenols contain one hydroxyl group in their molecule.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 8

(2) Dihydric Phenols : Phenols contain two hydroxyl groups in their molecule.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 9

(3) Trihydric phenols : Phenols contain three hydroxyl groups in their molecule.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 10

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 6.
What are ethers? How are ethers classified?
Answer:
They are alkoxy derivatives of alkanes in which a hydrogen atom of alkane (R – H) is replaced by alkoxy group ( – O – R) and divalent oxygen atom is attached to two alkyl groups or two aryl groups or one alkyl and one aryl group. Ethers are organic oxides R – O – Ar, Ar – O – Ar.
E.g. R – O – R or C2H5 – O – C2H5.

Ethers are classified into two groups as follows :
(1) Simple or symmetrical ether : The ethers in which both alkyl (or aryl) groups attached to the oxygen atom are same are called simple ethers.
E.g. (R – O – R), CH3 – O – CH3, dimethyl ether; C6H5 – O -C6H5 diphenyl ether.

(2) Mixed or unsymmetrical ethers : The ethers in which the two alkyl (or aryl) groups attached to the oxygen atom are different are called mixed ethers.
E.g. (R – O – R), CH3 – O – C2H5 ethyl methyl ether; C2H5 – O – C6H5 ethyl phenyl ether.

Question 7.
What is the general formula of ethers?
Answer:
The general formula of ethers is CnH2n + 2 O. For example, dimethyl ether CH3 – O – CH3 has molecular formula C2H6O.

Common nomenclature system :
(1) In this system, monohydric alcohols (R — OH) are named as alkyl alcohols.
(2) According to the attachment of hydroxyl group to a carbon atom they are named with prefixes as n-(normal or primary) alcohol, sec-(secondary) alcohol, tert-(tertiary) alcohol.
(3) Alcohols with two hydroxyl groups are named as glycols.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 12

Carbinol system : In this system alcohols are considered as derivatives of methyl alcohol which is called carbinol. The alkyl group attached to the carbon carrying – OH group are named in alphabetical order. Then the suffix carbinol is added.

For example :Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 13

IUPAC system of nomenclature :

  • In this system, alcohols are named as alkanols.
  • A longest continuous chain of carbon atoms containing – OH group is chosen as a parent hydrocarbon and alcohol is considered as a hydroxy derivative of this alkane.
  • The carbon atoms are numbered from a terminal carbon atom nearest to a carbon atom attached to – OH group so that the position of – OH group is indicated by the lowest locant.
  • ‘e’ of an alkane is preplaced by ‘oT, giving alkanol. The number of OH groups is indicated by prefix, di, tri, etc. before ‘oT. The positions of -OH groups are indicated by appropriate locants.
  • The different substituents are arranged in the alphabetical order, and their positions are indicated by proper numbers.
  • Their names are hyphened on either sides except the last substituent.
  • For cyclic alcohols are named by using prefix cyclo to the parent alkane considering – OH group attached to carbon atom C – 1.

Question 8.
Give common and IUPAC names for the following :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 14
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 15

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 9.
Classify the following alcohols as primary, secondary and tertiary and write their IUPAC names.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 16

Question 10.
Give the structures of the following :
(1) Ethanol
(2) Propan-l-ol
(3) 2-Methylbutan-l-ol
(4) Pentan-3-ol
(5) Butan-2-ol
(6) 3-Methylbutan-2-ol
(7) Hexan-l-ol
(8) 3-Methylpentan-3-ol
(9) 2-Methylpropan-2-ol
(10) Butan-l-ol (H-Butyl alcohol)
(11) 2-Methylpropan-l-ol
(12) 2,3-Dimethylbutan-l-ol
(13) 2, 3-Dimethylbutan-2-oI
(14) 2-MethyIhexan-l-ol
(15) 2,2,3-Trimethylpentan-3-ol
(16) 2,3,3-Trimethylbutan-2-ol
(17) 3-EthyI-4-methylpentan-l-ol.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 17
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 18

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 11.
Give the IUPAC names of the following alcohols. Classify them as primary (1°), secondary (2°) and tertiary (3°) alcohols. Identify allylic and benzylic alcohols amongst them.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 19
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 20

Question 12.
Write all the possible structural isomers of alcohol having molecular formula C6H140. Give their IUPAC names. Classify them as primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols. Identify optically active alcohols amongst them.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 21
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 22

The optical isomers of C6H14O are (2), (3), (6), (7), (12).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 13.
Give the IUPAC names of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 23

Question 14.
Write IUPAC names of following alcohols :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 24

Question 15.
Write the structures of following alcohols : (1 mark each)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 25

The IUPAC system name of phenol is benzenol. The common name phenol is also accepted by IUPAC. The common names have prefixes ortho, meta and para in substituted phenols. IUPAC system uses the locant 2-, 3-, 4-, etc. to indicate the positions of substituents.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 16.
Write the IUPAC names of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 26
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 27

Question 17.
Write IUPAC name of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 28

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 18.
Give the structures and IUPAC names of isomeric phenols represented by the molecular formula C8H10O.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 29

Common and IUPAC system of nomenclature of ethers

In the common system of nomenclature, the ethers are named by writing names of the alkyl groups attached to the oxygen atom in alphabetical order and word ether is added. If two alkyl groups are same, prefix di- is used. According too the IUPAC system of nomenclature, ethers are named as alkoxyalkanes. The larger alkyl group is considered to be parent alkane. The name of the smaller alkane is prefixed by the name of alkoxy group and its locant.

Question 19.
Give common name and JUPAC name for the I11owing ethers :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 30

Question 20.
Give the IUPAC name of the following ethers.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 31

Question 23.
Give the structures and IUPAC names of all metameric ethers represented by formula C5H12O.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 38

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 24.
How many isomeric compounds can be represented by formula C4H10O?
Answer:
A compound with the molecular formula C4H10O can show two functional isomers as a monohydric alcohol and ether.

Isomers of C4H10O as alcohol :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 39
Isomers of C4H10O as ether :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 40

Hence, the total number of isomers of C4H10O are seven

Question 25.
Write the structural formula and IUPAC names of all possible isomers of the compound with molecular formula C3H8O.
Answer:
Possible isomers of C3H8O with structural formulae and IUPAC names :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 41

Question 26.
Write structures of alcoholic and ether isomers of a compound having molecular formula C7H8O.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 42

Question 27.
How is alkyl halide converted into alcohol by using
(1) Aqueous NaOH (or KOH),
(2) Moist silver oxide?
Answer:
(1) When an alkyl halide (R – X), is boiled with aqueous NaOH (or KOH) an alcohol is obtained,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 43
(2) Alkyl halide when heated with moist Ag2O, undergoes hydrolysis and forms an alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 44

Question 28.
How are following compounds prepared by hydrolysis of alkyl halides
(1) Ethanol
(2) Isopropyl alcohol
(3) tert-butyl alcohol
(4) methyl alcohol
(5) butan-2-ol?
Answer:
(1) Ethanol When ethyl bromide (bromoethane) is refluxed with aqueous potassium hydroxide, ethyl alcohol is formed. The reaction is called a hydrolysis reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 45

(2) Isopropyl alcohol : When isopropyl bromide (2-bromopropane) is boiled with aqueous potassium hydroxide, isopropyl alcohol is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 46

(3) Tert-butyl alcohol : When tert-butyl chloride is refluxed with aqueous potassium hydroxide, tert-butyl alcohol is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 47

(4) Methyl alcohol : When methyl bromide (bromomethane) is heated with aq KOH, it is hydrolysed to methyl alcohol (methanol).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 48

(5) Butan-2-ol : When 2-Chlorobutane is boiled with aqueous KOH, Butan-2-ol is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 49

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 29.
How are following compounds prepared from alkyl halides using moist silver oxide?
(1) Ethanol
(2) Propan-2-ol.
Answer: ‘
(1) Bromoethane (C2H5Br) when boiled with moist Ag2O undergoes hydrolysis and forms C2H5OH.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 50

(2) When 2-chloropropane is boiled with moist Ag20, propan-2-ol is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 51

Question 30.
What is hydration of alkenes or olefins? How is it carried out? Explain with an example.
OR
How are alcohols prepared from alkenes?
Answer:
The addition of a water molecule across the double bond in an alkene is called hydration of alkenes or olefins.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 52

Hydration does not take place directly. It is carried out by passing an alkene through cold and concentrated H2SO4 which forms deliquescent solid, alkyl hydrogen sulphate, which when boiled with water forms an alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 53

Question 31.
How are the following compounds obtained by hydration of alkenes :
(1) Ethyl alcohol
(2) Isopropyl alcohol
(3) Tert-butyl alcohol?
Answer:
(1) When ethene is passed through cold 98 % H2SO4, ethyl hydrogen sulphate is formed, which on heating with water gives ethanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 54

(2) Propene with cold 80% H2SO4 gives isopropyl hydrogen sulphate which further on boiling with water gives isopropyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 55

(3) 2-Methylpropene (isobutylene) directly reacts with 50 % H2SO4 giving tert-butyl hydrogen sulphate, which when heated with water gives tert-butyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 56

Question 32.
Identify C in the following reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 57
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 58

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 33.
Explain hydroboration-oxidation of alkene.
Answer:
When diborane is treated with alkene in the presence of tetrahydrofuran (THF) solvent, an addition product trialkyl borane is formed. Trialkyl borane is then oxidised with alkaline peroxide forms primary alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 62

The addition of diborane to the double bond takes place in such a way that the boron gots attached to the less substituted carbon. The overall reaction gives Anti-Markovnikov’s product from unsymmetrical alkenes.

Question 34.
How is propan-l-ol prepared using diborane?
Answer:
When diborane is treated with propene, in the presence of THF an addition product tripropyl borane is formed. Tripropyl borane is then oxidised to propan-l-ol using hydrogen peroxide in the presence of dil NaOH.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 63
The addition of diborane to the double bond takes place in such a way that the boron gets attached to the less substituted carbon. The alcohol formed by the addition of water to the alkene in a way opposite to the Markovnikov’s rule.

Question 35.
How is ethanol prepared using diborane?
Answer:
When diborane is treated with ethene in the presence of THF an addition product triethylborane is formed.Triethylborane is then oxidised with hydrogen peroxide to form ethyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 64

Question 36.
Predict the major product when 2-methylbut-2-ene is converted into an alcohol in each of the following methods :
(1) acid catalysed hydration
(2) hydroboration by BH3 – THF complex.
Answer:
(1) Acid catalysed hydration :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 66
(2) Hydroboration by BH3 – THF complex :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 67

Question 37.
How are alcohols prepared from aldehydes and ketones?
OR
How are the following compounds obtained using Ni as catalyst and at high temperature
(1) Ethanol
(2) Propan-2-ol?
Answer:
Aldehyde and ketones are carbonyl compounds containing a carbonyl group  C = O. The reduction of the carbonyl group gives an alcohol.

(1) Primary alcohols are prepared by the reduction of aldehydes.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 68

Example : When acetaldehyde is reduced with hydrogen in the presence of nickel as catalyst and at high temperature, ethyl alcohol (ethanol) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 69

(2) Secondary alcohols are prepared by the reduction of ketones.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 70

Example : When acetone is reduced with hydrogen in the presence of nickel as catalyst and at high temperature, isopropyl alcohol (propan-2-ol) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 71

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 38.
How will you convert carboxylic acids and esters to primary alcohols? Explain with suitable examples.
Answer:
Carboxylic acids and esters are not easily reduced by catalytic hydrogenation or by NaBH4. However, relatively more reactive and an expensive LiAlH4 is used to convert carboxylic acids and esters to primary alcohols. When acetic acid is reduced in the presence of LiAlH4 and followed by their acid hydrolysis, ethyl alcohol is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 72

When ethyl acetate is reduced in the presence of LiA1H4 and followed by their acid hydrolysis. n-propyl alcohol and ethyl alcohol is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 73

[Since LiA1H4 is an expensive reagent. commercially acids are reduced to alcohol by converting them to esters, followed by their reduction. (catalytic hydrogenation)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 74

Question 39.
How is Crotoflyl alcohol obtained from crotonaldehyde?
Answer:
When crotonaldehyde is reduced in the presence of lithium aluminium hydride, the produc obtained is hydrolysed to give crotonyl alcohol. Here. LiA1H4 does not reduce carbon-carbon double bond.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 75

Question 40.
WrIte the structure of aldehyde that yields
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 79
Answer:
The structure of aldehyde:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 80

Question 41.
How are the following compounds prepared using Grignard reagent
(1) Ethanol
(2) Propan-l-ol
(3) Propan-2-ol
(4) 2-Methyl propan-2-ol?|
Answer:
(1) Ethanol : Formaldehyde on reaction with Grignard reagent, CH3 – Mg – I in dry ether forms a complex which on further hydrolysis with dilute HCl forms ethanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 81

(2) Propanol-l-ol : Formaldehyde on reaction with Grignard reagent, C2H5 – Mg – I in dry ether forms a complex which on further hydrolysis with dilute HC1 forms Propan-l-ol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 82

(3) Propan-2-ol : An acetaldehyde on reaction with Grignard reagent in dry ether forms a complex which on further hydrolysis with dilute acid HC1, forms propan-2-ol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 83
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 84

(4) 2-Methyl propan-2-ol : Acetone on reaction with Grignard reagent in dry ether forms a complex which on further hydrolysis with dilute acid HCl, forms a tertiary butyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 85

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 42.
Give a mechanism of following reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 86
Answer:
Grignand reagent reacts with aldehyde or ketone to form an adduct which on hydrolysis with dil. acid gives the corresponding alcohol.

In the first step, the nucleophilic addition of Grigard reagent to the carbonyl group resulting in the formation of an adduct, which on hydrolysis yields an alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 87

Question 43.
Write the structure of carbonyl compounds that can be converted by reduction methods into following alcohols :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 89
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 90
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 91

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 92
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 93

Question 44.
Using Grignard reagent, suggest synthesis of following alcohols from aldehydes or ketones. Wherever possible, suggest more than one combination.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 94
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 95
(b) Synthesis of propan- 1-01:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 96
(c) Synthesis of butan-2-ol:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 97
(d) Synthesis of 2-methylhexan-2-oI:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 98

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 45.
How will you obtain butan-2-ol from
(1) Propanal
(2) butan-2-one
(3) but-2-ene?
Answer:
(1) Propanal : When propanal is treated with methyl magnesium iodide in the presence of dry ether, a complex is formed, which on acid hydrolysis butan 2-ol is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 99
(2) Butan-2-one: When butan-2-one is hydrogenated at 413 K in the presence of catalyst finely divided nickel butan-2-ol is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 100
(3) But-2-ene : When but-2-ene is passed through cold concentrated sulphuric acid, isobutyl hydrogen sulphate is formed. Isobutyl hydrogen sulphate on heating with water gives butan-2-ol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 101

Question 46.
Write the structure of aldehyde, carboxylic acid and ester that yield the following alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 102
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 103

Question 47.
How will you prepare?
(1) 2-Ntethylbutan-1-oI from an alkene.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 104

(2) CycIoheyImethanoI from a Grignard reagent.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 105

(3) 1-Phenyl ethanol from acelaldehyde.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 106

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 48.
How are following conversions brought about?
(1) Benzyl chloride to benzyl alcohol. (NCERT)
OR
How is benzyl alcohol prepared from benzyl chloride?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 107

(2) Benzyl alcohol to Benzoic acid.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 108

(3) 1-Ethyl cyclohexanol from cyclohexanone.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 109

Question 49.
How is phenol (carbolic acid) prepared from chlorobenzene (Dow’s process)? OR
Write chemical reaction for the preparation of phenol from chlorobenzene.
Answer:
Preparation of phenol from chlorobenzene (Dow’s process) : Chlorobenzene is fused with NaOH at about 623 K under a pressure of about 150 atmospheres (1.5 x 107 Nm-2), when sodium phenoxide is formed. Sodium phenoxide is acidified with dil.HCl to obtain phenol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 110

Question 51.
How is phenol (carbolic acid) prepared from benzene sulphonic acid?
Answer:
Preparation of phenol from benzene sulphonic acid : Benzene sulphonic acid is neutralized with the requisite quantity of soda ash (Na2CO3) or NaOH and the solution is evaporated to obtain sodium benzene sulphonate salt. Dry sodium benzene sulphonate is fused with an excess of caustic soda (NaOH) at about 573 K when sodium phenoxide is formed. The fused mass of sodium phenoxide on treatment with dilute HC1 gives phenol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 112

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 52.
How is phenol (carbolic acid) prepared from aniline (diazotization)?
OR
How is carbolic acid prepared from amino benzene?
Answer:
Preparation of phenol from aniline (diazotization) : When aniline is treated with sodium nitrite and hydrochloric acid (NaNO2 + HC1) at low temperature (0°C – 5°C), benzene diazonium chloride is formed. This reaction is called diazotization. An aqueous solution of benzene diazonium chloride on warming with water or dil. H2S04 gives phenol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 113

Question 54.
Describe the physical properties of alcohols and phenols.
Answer:
The properties of alcohols and phenols are mainly due to the hydroxyl group.

(1) Nature of intermolecular forces : Due to presence of – OH groups, alcohols and phenols are polar molecules. The polar – OH groups are held together by the strong intermolecular forces i.e. hydrogen bonding.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 114

(2) Physical State : Lower alcohols are colourless, toxic liquids having characteristic alcoholic odour. Pure phenol is colourless, toxic, low melting solid having characteristic carbolic or phenolic odour.

(3) Boiling Points : The boiling points of alcohols and phenols increase with increase in their molecular mass.
Methyl alcohol – 65 °C
Phenol -182° C
n-Butyl alcohol-118 °C
o-nitrophenol-217 °C

(4) Solubility : Solubility of alcohols and phenols in water due to their ability to form intermolecular hydrogen bonding.

Question 55.
Arrange the following compounds in order of their increasing boiling points.
Butan-2-ol, ethanol, pentan-l-ol, butan -l-ol, propan-l-ol, methanol.
Answer:
Methanol, ethanol, propan:l-ol, butan-2-ol, butan-1 -ol pentan-l-ol.

Question 56.
Explain the following :
(1) Ethanol has higher boiling point than ethane.
Answer:
(1) The hydroxyl group in alcohols is highly polar. The H-atom has partial positive charge and the oxygen atom has partial -ve charge. The hydroxyl group in ethanol is extensively hydrogen bonded.

(2) Large number of ethanol molecules associated together by intermolecular hydrogen bonding. The energy required to separate the molecules by breaking hydrogen bond into vapour state is higher. This results in increasing the boiling point of ethanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 116

(3) On the other hand, in ethane (alkane) there is no hydrogen bonding between the molecules. The molecules of ethane are held together by weak van der Waals forces of attraction. Hence, these molecules can be easily separated. Thus, ethanol has higher boiling point than that of ethane.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

(2) Methanol is more soluble in water than propan-l-ol.
Answer:
(1) Methanol being lower members of alcohols is more soluble in water, but as the size of an alkyl group or molecular weight of alcohol increases the solubility decreases.

(2) The solubility of methanol in water is due to polar characters of alcohols (R – O -H ) and water (H – O – H).

(3) The solubility of methanol is due to the formation of intermolecular hydrogen bonding between polar molecules of methyl alcohol and water. Hence, methyl alcohol is a associated liquid.

(4) In methyl alcohol, size of methyl group being very small, -OH group constitutes major part of the molecule giving more solubility. As size of alkyl group increases, the non-polar character increases the solubility decreases. Hence, methanol is more soluble in water than propan-l-ol.

Question 57.
Which of the following pair is more acidic and why?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 270
Answer:
Due to high electronegativity of sp2-hybridized carbon, electron density on oxygen in phenol (I) decreases. This increases the polarity of O – H bond and results in more ionization of phenol than that of cyclohexyl alcohol (II). Therefore, phenol is more acidic than cyclohexyl alcohol.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 120
Answer:
In p-nitrophenol, nitro group (N02) is an electron-withdrawing group present at ortho position which enhances the acidic strength (- I effect). The O – H bond is under strain and release of proton (H+) becomes easily. Hence, o-nitrophenol is more acidic than phenol.

Question 58.
Draw intramolecular hydrogen bonding structures in the following compounds :
(a) o-nitrophenol
(b) o-hydroxy benzoic acid.
Answer:
(a) o-nitrophenol :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 121
(b) o-hydroxy benzoic acid :

Question 59.
Explain laboratory test of alcohols and phenols.
Answer:
Laboratory test : Aqueous solution of alcohols and phenols can be tested with litmus paper. Aqueous solution of alcohols is neutral to litmus (neither blue nor red litmus change colour). Aqueous solutions of phenols turn blue litmus red. Thus, phenols have acidic character.

Question 62.
Write the action of aq NaOH on phenol and the product obtained is acidified.
Answer:
Phenols dissolve in aqueous NaOH by forming water soluble sodium phenoxide and are reprecipitated/ regenerated as phenols on acidification with HC1.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 124

Question 63.
Explain the action of sodium on ethanol.
Answer:
When cthanol is treated with sodium metal, sodium ethoxide is formed and hydrogen gas is liberated.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 125
Liberation of H2 gas is used to detect the presence of alcoholic -OH group of a molecule.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 64.
How are the following compounds obtained from alcohols using HCI:
(1) C2H5CI
(2) Isopropyl chloride
(3) tert-butyl chloride?
Answer:
(1) Ethyl alcohol, C2H5OH in the presence of Lucas reagent (ZnCl2 + HCI conc.) forms ethyl chloride.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 126

(2) Isopropyl alcohol reacts with Lucas reagent forms isopropyl chloride.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 127

(3) Tert-butyl alcohol reacts with Lucas reagent forms tert-butyl chloride
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 128

Question 65.
What is Lucas reagent? What are its uses?
Answer:
Lucas reagent is composed of a mixture of concentrated HCl and Lewis acid. anhydrous ZnCI2.

It is used to prepare alkyl chlorides and distinguish between 10, 2° and 3° alcohols.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 129

Question 66.
How can alcohols be distinguished with the help of Lucas reagent?
Answer:
Lucas reagent is a mixture of concentrated HCI and anhydrous ZnCl2. It is used to distinguish between primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols.
Alcohol with Lucas reagent forms an alkyl chloride, R -Cl which is insoluble and gives cloudiness and forms separate layer.

The time required for cloudiness to appear is based on the type of the alcohol and its reactivity :

(1) Primary alcohol : It reacts with the Lucas reagent very slowly and on heating forms alkyl chloride. The cloudiness and separation of a layer takes place after a long time on heating.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 130

(2) Secondary alcohol : It reacts with the Lucas reagent much faster to form alkyl chloride. The cloudiness and separation of layer takes place slowly.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 131

(3) Tertiary alcohol : It reacts immediately with the Lucas reagent at room temperature to form alkyl chloride. The cloudiness and separation of layer takes place instantaneously.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 132

Question 67.
What is esterificatlon? how Is an ester obtained from alcohol or phenol?
Answer:
(1) When an alcohol or phenol is heated with a carboxylic acid in the presence of conc.sulphuric acid an ester is obtained. The reaction is called esterification. This is reversible reaction and the formation of an ester is favoured
using excess of alcohol in the presence of conc. H2SO4.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 138

(2) Alcohols and phenols react with acid anhydrides in presence of acid catalyst to form eser.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 139

(3) The reaction of alcohol and phenols with acid chloride is carried out in the presence of pyridine (base), which neutralizes HCl.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 140

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 68.
Explain the action of the following on ethanol :
(1) Acetic acid
(2) Acetic anhydride
(3) Acetyl chloride.
Answer:
(1) Acetic acid : When ethanol is treated with acetic acid in the presence of cone, sulphuric acid, ethyl acetate (ester) is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 141

(2) Acetic anhydride : When ethanol is treated with acetic anhydride in the presence of cone, sulphuric acid, ethyl acetate (ester) is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 142

(3) Acetyl chloride : When ethanol is treated with acetyl chloride in the presence of pyridine, ethyl acetate (ester) is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 143

(Pyridine neutralises HC1 formed during reaction)

Question 69.
Explain the action of the following phenol :
(1) Acetic acid
(2) Acetic anhydride
(3) Acetyl chloride
Answer:
(1) Acetic acid : When phenol is treated with acetic acid in the presence of cone, sulphuric acid, (ester) is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 144
(2) Acetic anhydride : When phenol is treated with acetic anhydride in the presence of cone, sulphuric acid, (ester) is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 145
(3) Acetyl chloride : When phenol is treated with acetyl chloride in the presence of cone, sulphuric acid, (ester) is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 146
(Pyridine neutralizes HC1 formed during reaction.)

Question 70.
What is the action of acetic anhydride on salicyclic acid?
Answer:
When acetic anhydride is treated with salicyclic acid in presence of glacial acetic acid, acetyl salicyclic acid (aspirin) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 147
Aspirin is a common analgesic, antipyretic drug. Reactions involving breaking of C – O bond of alcohol :

Question 71.
How are the following compounds prepared by using HBr from corresponding alcohols :
(1) Ethyl bromide
(2) Isopropyl bromide
(3) Tert-butyl bromide (2-Methyl-propan-2-ol)?
Answer:
(1) When ethyl alcohol is heated with HBr, ethyl bromide is formed. (HBr is prepared in situ by adding NaBr to HCl or H2SO4)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 148

(2) Isopropyl alcohol on heating with HBr forms isopropyl bromide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 149

(3) Tert-butyl alcohol on heating with HBr forms tert-butyl bromide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 150

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 72.
Explain the action of hydroiodic acid on the following :
(1) Propan-2-ol
(2) 3-Methyl butan-2-ol.
Answer:
(1) Propan-2-ol : When propan-2-ol is heated with hydroiodic acid, 2-iodopropane is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 151

(2) 3-Methyl butan-2-ol : When 3-Methyl butan-2-ol is heated with hydroiodic acid, 2-Iodo-2-methyl butane is obtained. Here, secondary alcohol is converted into a tertiary alkyl halide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 152

Question 73.
Describe the action of PCl3 on
(1) ethanol
(2) Propan-l-ol
(3) Propan-2-ol.
Answer:
(1) Ethanol : When ethanol is treated with PCl3, ethyl chloride is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 153

(2) Propan-l-ol : When propan-l-ol is treated with PCl3, n-propyl chloride is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 154

(3) Propan-2-ol : When Propan-2-ol is treated with PCl3, 2-Chloropropane is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 155

Question 74.
Describe the action of PCl5 on
(1) ethanol
(2) propan-2-ol.
Answer:
(1) Ethanol : When ethanol is treated with PCl5, ethyl chloride is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 156

(2) Propan-2-ol : When propan-2-ol is treated with PCl5, 2-chloropropane is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 157

Question 75.
Describe the action of SOCl2 on
(1) ethanol
(2) propan-l-ol.
Answer:
(1) Ethanol : When ethanol is treated with SOCl2 in the presence of pyridine, ethyl chloride is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 158

(2) Propan-l-ol : When propan-l-ol is treated with SOCl2 in the presence of pyridine, w-propyl chloride is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 159

Question 76.
Explain dehydration of alcohols.
OR
What is dehydration of alcohols? Give the chemical reactions showing dehydration of primary (1°), secondary (2°) and tertiary (3°) alcohols.
Answer:
Removal of water from an alcohol is called dehydration of alcohol. Alcohols having a /i-hydrogen is heated with dehydrating agents like concentrated H2SO4 (or H3PO4 or P2O5 or Al2O3). The ease of dehydration of alcohols is in the following order : tert-alcohol (3°) > secondary (2°) > primary (1°)
(1) Primary (1°) alcohol is dehydrated by heating it with 95% H2SO4 at 453 K.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 160
(2) Secondary alcohol (2°) is dehydrated by heating with 60% H2SO4 at 373 K.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 161
(3) A ternary alcohol can be easily dehydrated by heating with 20% H2SO4 at 363 K.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 162

An alcohol can be dehydrated by passing vapours alcohols over heated alumina (Al2O3).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 163

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 77.
Explain oxidation of primary and secondary alcohols.
Answer:
(1) Primary alcohol on oxidation with CrO3 forms aldehyde. However, a better reagent to bring about this oxidation is PCC (pyridinium chlorochromate).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 169

(2) Secondary alcohol on oxidation with chromic anhydride (CrO3) forms ketone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 170

Question 78.
What is the action of acidified K2Cr2O7 on the following :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 171
How are following alcohols distinguished :
(1) ethyl alcohol
(2) isopropyl alcohol
(3) tert-butyl alcohol?
OR
How will you distinguish primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols by oxidation process?
Answer:
Primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols are distinguished on the basis of their oxidation products, when their oxidation is carried out using K2Cr2O7 and dil. H2SO4. Acidified potassium dichromate, K2Cr2O7 is an oxidising agent.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 172

(1) Ethyl alcohol is a primary alcohol and on oxidation, it first forms acetaldehyde, which on further oxidation forms acetic acid. In this both, aldehyde and acid have same number of carbon atoms.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 173

(2) Isopropyl alcohol is a secondary alcohol and on oxidation it gives a ketone, acetone with the same number of carbon atoms. Acetone resists further oxidation as it involves breaking of C-C bond.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 174

(3) The oxidation of tert-butyl alcohol is difficult, since it does not have a-hydrogen atom. It is oxidised by using acidic and stronger oxidising agents like KMn04, CrO3 at high temperature, which dehydrate tertiary alcohol to alkene and then oxidise it to a ketone, acetone with less number of carbon atoms.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 175

Question 79.
What happens when vapours of primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols are passed over heated copper at 573 K?
Answer:
When vapours of primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols are passed over heated copper at 573 K, dehydrogena¬tion of primary and secondary alcohol takes place while tertiary alcohols undergo dehydrogenation to given an alkene.

Primary alcohol :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 176

Secondary alcohol :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 177

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Reactions of phenols :

Question 80.
(1) Explain the action of bromine in carbon disulphide (CS2) on phenol (carbolic acid). OR Give equation of the reaction of bromine in CS2 with phenol.
Answer:
When phenol is stirred at a low temperature with bromine dissolved in a polar solvent such as carbon disulphide or CCl4 at (273 K), a mixture of o-bromophenol and p-bromophenol is formed, p-bromophenol is the major product.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 179

Question 81.
Explain the action of bromine water on phenol (carbolic acid).
OR
Name the reagent used in the bromiriation of phenol to 2, 4, 6 tribromophenol.
Answer:
When phenol is treated with bromine water, a yellowish white precipitate of 2, 4, 6 – tribromophenol is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 180

Question 82.
Explain the action of dilute nitric acid on phenol (carbolic acid).
OR
Give equation of the reaction of dilute HNO3 with phenol.
Answer:
When phenol is treated with dilute nitric acid, a mixture of o-nitrophenol and p-nitrophenol is formed. In this reaction, p-nitrophenol is formed as the major product.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 181

Question 83.
Explain the action of cone, nitric acid (nitrating mixture) on phenol (carbolic acid).
OR
How is phenol converted into picric acid?
Answer:
When phenol is warmed with a mixture of cone, nitric acid and cone, sulphuric acid (a nitrating mixture or the mixed acid), 2, 4, 6 – trinitrophenol, commonly called picric acid, is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 182

Question 84.
Explain the action of concentrated sulphuric acid on phenol at different temperatures.
Answer:
(a) At room temperature : When phenol is treated with cone. H2SO4 at room temperature (about 300 K), o-phenol sulphonic acid is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 183
(b) At 373 K : When phenol is treated with cone. H2SO4 at about 373 K, p-phenol sulphonic acid is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 184

Question 85.
Explain (1) Kolbe’s reaction (2) Reimer-Tiemann reaction.
Answer:
(1) Kolbe’s reaction : When phenol reacts with sodium hydroxide, sodium phenoxide is obtained. Phenoxide ion being more reactive than phenol towards electrophilic substitution. Phenoxide undergoes electrophilic substitution with carbon dioxide at 398 K under pressure of 6 atm (a weak electrophile) forms salicylic acid as major product.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 185

(2) Reimer-Tiemann reaction : Phenol is heated with chloroform along with aqueous NaOH, this is followed by acidification with dil. HC1 when salicyladehyde (2-hydroxy benzaldehyde) is formed as the major product, which can be separated from p-isomer by steam distillation. The stability of o-isomer is due to intramolecular hydrogen bonding.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 186

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 86.
Explain the action of zinc dust on phenol.
OR
How is phenol converted into benzene?
Answer:
When phenol is heated with zinc dust, benzene is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 187

Question 87.
Explain the action of chromic acid on phenol.
OR
How is phenol converted into benzoquinone?
Answer:
When phenol is oxidised by chromic acid, a diketone, p-benzoquinone is formed. It is a conjugated diketone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 188

Question 88.
Explain catalytic hydrogenation of phenol.
Answer:
When a mixture of vapours of phenol and hydrogen is passed over nickel catalyst at 433 K., cyclohexanol is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 189

Question 89.
How is diethyl ether (ethoxyethane) obtained from alcohol?
Answer:
When excess of ethyl alcohol is distilled with concentrated sulphuric acid (H2SO4) at 413 K, diethyl ether is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 190

Question 91.
Write a note on Williamson’s synthesis.
OR
How are ethers prepared from Alkyl halides?
OR
How are simple ethers and mixed ethers prepared by Williamson’s synthesis?
Answer:
Williamson’s synthesis : When an alkyl halide (R – X) is heated with sodium alkoxide (R – O – Na), an ether is obtained, this reaction is known as Williamson’s synthesis. This method is used to prepare simple (or symmetrical) ethers and mixed (unsymmetrical) ethers.

Sodium alkoxide is obtained by a reaction of sodium with an alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 194

(A) Simple (Symmetrical) ether : When an alkyl halide and sodium alkoxide having similar alkyl groups are heated, symmetrical ether is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 195
Sodium ethoxide on heating with ethyl bromide gives diethyl ether.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 196

(B) Mixed (Unsymmetrical) ether : When an alkyl halide and sodium alkoxide or sodium phenoxide having different alkyl groups are heated, unsymmetrical ether (dialkyl ethers or alkyl aryl ether) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 197
Sodium ethoxide on heating with methyl bromide gives ethyl methyl ether.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 198
Sodium phenoxide on heating with ethyl bromide gives ethyl phenyl ether.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 199

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 92.
How is anisole obtained from phenol?
OR
How is methoxy benzene prepared from carbolic acid?
Answer:
Phenol reacts with sodium hydroxide, sodium phenoxide is formed. When sodium phenoxide is heated with methyl iodide, anisole is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 200

Question 93.
Explain the limitations for the preparation of unsymmetrical ethers.
OR
What care is to be taken in the preparation of unsymmetrical ethers by Williamson’s synthesis? Explain.
OR
Illustrate with examples the limitations of Williamson’s synthesis for the preparation of certain types of ethers.
Answer:
(1) In the preparation of unsymmetrical ethers by Williamson’s synthesis, the proper choice of the reactants namely alkyl halide and sodium alkoxide is necessary.

(2) The best yield of unsymmetrical ether is obtained when primary alkyl halide and tertiary alkoxide are heated, since primary alkyl halides are more susceptible to SN2 reaction.

(3) Secondary or tertiary alkyl halide undergo a and fi (halogen and hydrogen) elimination reaction giving an alkene instead of an ether since a carbon atom is sterically hindered by bulky alkyl groups.

(4) For example : t-butyl methyl ether can be synthesised by reaction of methyl bromide with sodium t-butoxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 201

Question 94.
State physical properties of ethers.
Answer:
(1) Dimethyl ether and ethyl methyl ether are gases. Other ethers are colourless liquids with pleasant odour.
(2) Lower ethers are highly volatile and highly inflammable substances.
(3) Boiling points of ethers show gradual increase with the increase in molecular mass.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 205
(4) The solubility/miscibility of ethers in water is similar to that of alcohols of comparable molecular mass.

Question 95.
Explain, ethers posses a small net dipole moment.
Answer:
In ethers, Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 206 bond angle is 110° and not 180°, bond dipole moments of the two C – O bonds do not cancel each other, therefore, ethers possess a smal net dipole moment, (for example, dipole moment of diethyl ether is 1.18 D)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 207

Question 96.
Explain, the solubility/miscibility of ethers in water is similar to that of alcohols of comparable molecular mass.
Answer:
The solubility/miscibility of ethers in water is similar to that of alcohols of comparable molecular mass. This is because ethers can form hydrogen bonds with water through ethereal oxygen.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 208

For example, diethyl ether and n-butyl alcohol have respective miscibilities of 7.5 and 9 g per 100 g of water.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 97.
Explain laboratory test for ethers.
Answer:
Ethers are neutral compounds in aqueous medium. Ethers do not react with bases, cold dilute acids, reducing agents, oxidizing agents and active metals. However, ethers dissolve in cold concentrated H2SO4 due to formation of oxonium salts.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 209
This property distinguishes ethers from hydrocarbons.

Question 98.
What is the action of atmospheric oxygen on diethyl ether?
Answer:
When atmospheric oxygen combines with diethyl ether, peroxide of diethyl ether is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 210

Question 99.
What is the action of dilute sulphuric acid on
(1) Dimethyl ether
(2) Diethyl ether
(3) Ethyl methyl ether?
(4) Anisole?
OR
Explain hydrolysis of ethers.
Answer:
Simple ethers on heating with dilute sulphuric acid under pressure undergoes hydrolysis to give alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 211
(1) Dimethyl hydrolysis on hydrolysis give methanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 212
(2) Diethyl ether on hydrolysis give ethanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 213
(3) A mixed ether on heating with dii. H2SO4 under pressure undergoes hydrolysis to give mixture of two different alcohols.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 214
Ethyl methyl ether on hydrolysis give a mixture of ethanol and methanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 215
(4) Anisole on hydrolysis give a mixture of phenol and methanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 216

Question 100.
State the combustion products of diethyl ether.
Answer:
The combustion products of diethyl ether are CO2 and H2O.

Question 101.
What is the action of phosphorus pentachloride on
(1) Diethyl ether
(2) Ethyl methyl ether
(3) Methyl phenyl ether (anisole)?
Answer:
(1) Diethyl ether : When diethyl ether is heated with ethyl methyl ether, ethyl chloride is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 217
(2) Ethyl methyl ether : When ethyl methyl ether is heated with phosphorus pentachloride, a mixture of ethyl chloride and methyl chloride is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 218
(3) Methyl phenyl ether (Anisole) : When methyl phenyl ether is heated with phosphorus pentachloride, a mixture of methyl chloride, chlorobenzene is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 219

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 102.
Describe the action of hot concentrated HI on
(i) Dialkyl ether
(ii) Alkyl aryl ether.
Answer:
Ether reacts with excess of hot concentrated hydrogen halide to give two alkyl halide molecules.
R – O – R + HX → RX + R – OH
R – OH + HX → RX + H20
Alkyl aryl ether reacts with hot concentrated hydrogen halide to give phenol and alkyl halide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 220
Ethers with two different alkyl groups react with hot.conc. HI to give alkyl halides.
R – O – R’+ 2H – X → R – X + R’ – X + H2O
The order of reactivity of HX is HI > HBr > HC1

Question 103.
What is the action of hot HI on isopropyl methyl ether?
Answer:
When isopropyl methyl ether is treated with excess of hot hydroiodic acid, a mixture of isopropyl iodide and methyl iodide is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 221

Question 104.
Describe the action of hydroiodic acid on the following :
(1) Diethyl ether.
Answer:
When diethyl ether (ethoxy ethane) is treated with hydroiodic acid, a mixture of ethanol and ethyl iodide is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 222

If excess of hydroiodic acid is available, then ethyl alcohol further reacts with hydroiodic acid at higher temperature to form ethyl iodide and water.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 223

(2) Ethyl methyl ether.
Answer:
When ethyl methyl (methoxy ethane) is treated with hydroiodic acid, a mixture of ethyl alcohol and methyl iodide is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 224

If excess of hydroiodic acid is available, then ethyl alcohol further reacts with hydroiodic acid at higher temperature to form ethyl iodide and water.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 225

(3) Methyl n-propyl ether.
Answer:
When methyl n-propyl ether (1-Methoxy propane) is treated with hydroiodic acid, a mixture of n-propyl alcohol and methyl iodide is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 226

If excess of hydroiodic acid is available then n-propyl alcohol further reacts with hydroiodic acid at higher temperature to form n-propyl iodide and water.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 227

(4) Methyl phenyl ether (anisole).
Answer:
When methyl phenyl ether (anisole) is treated with hydroiodic acid, phenol and methyl iodide is formed. Here, phenol does not react further with HI because – OH group is attached to sp2-hybridised carbon atom and it cannot be replaced by iodide (nucleophile).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 228

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 105.
Draw the resonance structures of aromatic ethers.
Answer:
The alkoxy group in aromatic ether is a ring activating and ortho-, paradirecting group toward electrophilic aromatic substitution.

Resonance structures :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 234
+ R Effect of – OR group results in increased electron density at the para- and two ortho-posotions (see resonance structures II, III and IV).

Question 106.
Describe the action of bromine in acetic acid on anisole.
OR
Write the equation of the reaction of bromination of anisole in ethanoic acid medium.
Answer:
When anisole is treated with bromine in acetic acid, /i-bromoanisole (major product) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 235

Question 107.
Describe the action of methyl chloride on anisole (Friedel-Crafts reaction).
OR
Write the equation of Friedel-Crafts reaction-alkylation of anisole.
Answer:
When anisole is treated with alkyl halide in the presence of anhydrous aluminium chloride (a Lewis acid) as catalyst, 4-Methoxy toluene is formed as major product. The alkyl groups are introduced at -ortho and -para positions in anisole, the reaction is known as Friedel-Crafts alkylation reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 236

Question 108.
Describe the action of Acetyl chloride on anisole (Friedel-Crafts acylation).
OR
Write the equation of the reaction Friedel-Crafts acylation of anisole.
OR
Write a note on Friedel-Crafts acylation.
Answer:
When anisole is treated with acetyl chloride in the presence of anhydrous aluminium chloride (a Lewis acid), 4-Methoxy acetophenone (major product) is obtained. The acetyl groups are introduced at -ortho and -para positions in anisole, the reaction is known as Friedel Craft’s acylation reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 237

Question 109.
Describe the action of cone. HNO3 on anisole.
OR
Write the equation of nitration of anisole.
Answer:
When anisole is reacted with nitrating mixture (cone. HNO3 + cone. Fl2SO4), a mixture of p-nitroanisole and o-nitroanisole is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 238

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 110.
An organic compound with the formula C4H10O3 shows properties of ether and alcohol. When treated with an excess of HBr yields only one compound 1,2 dibromomethane. Write structural formula of ether and that of alcohol.
Answer:
When C4H10O3 is treated with excess of HBr, a single compound 1,2-dibromoethane is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 239

Question 111.
An organic compound ‘A’ having molecular formula C4H10O does not react with sodium metal. On hydrolysis with dilute H2SO4 it gives only one organic compound ‘B’ The compound B on heating with red phosphorus and iodine gives compound ‘C’. The compound C can also be obtained from compound ‘A’ on heating with excess HI. Identify the compounds A, B and C.
Answer:
(1) The organic compound ‘A’ with molecular formula C4H10O may be an alcohol or ether.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 240
(2) Since ‘A’ does not react with sodium (Na), it is not an alcohol. Hence ‘A’ may be an ether.
(3) Since an ether ‘A’ on hydrolysis with dilute H2SO4 gives only one compound ‘B’, the compound ‘A’ must be a symmetrical (simple) ether. Hence compound ‘A’ may be, C2H5 – O – C2H5Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 241

Question 112.
How will you affect the following two-step conversions? Diethyl ether into n-butane :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 242

Question 114.
Answer in one sentence/word.

(1) Name the alcohol that is used to make propan-2-one.
Answer:
The alcohol used to make propan-2-one is iso-propyl alcohol.

(2) Which is the first oxidation product of secondary alcohol?
Answer:
The first oxidation product of secondary alcohol is ketone.

(3) Name the alcohol that is used to make acetic acid.
Answer:
The alcohol that is used to make acetic acid is ethyl alcohol.

(4) Write the structure of cyclohexane-1, 4-diol.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 246

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

(9) Which of the following isomers is more volatile : o-nitrophenol or p-nitrophenol?
Answer:
The isomer o-nitrophenol with lower boiling point is more volatile.

(10) Identify the product of the following reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 247
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 248

(11) Identify the product obtained by industrial synthesis of carboxylation of phenoxide ion followed by acidification.
Answer:
The product is phenol
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 249

(12) What is the product A obtained in the following reaction?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 250
Answer:
The product is phenolMaharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 251

(13) Which positions are occupied by – NO2 group during nitration of carbolic acid?
Answer:
– o – (ortho) and – p – (para) positions are occupied by – NO2 group during nitration of carbolic acid.

(14) Write the name of reactants used for the preparation of ethyl-tert-butyl ether.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 252
are used for the preparation of ethyl-tert-butyl ether.

(15) The product formed in the reaction of reverse of dehydration of alcohol is
Answer:
The product formed in the reaction of reverse of dehydration of alcohol is alkene.

(16) Which rule is obeyed by hydroboration oxidation process?
Answer:
The rule obeyed by hydroboration oxidation process is opposite to the Markovnikov’s rule.

(17) Name the reagents for the complete hydroboration-oxidation reaction in step 1 and step 2.
Answer:
Step 1 : Diborane
Step 2 : Hydrogen peroxide and dil. NaOH.

(18) Write the name of the test by which methanol can be distinguished from ethanol.
Answer:
Iodoform test by which methanol can be distinguished from ethanol.

(19) Write the name of reactant used for preparation of phenol, which gives byproduct used as solvent.
Answer:
Reactant used in the preparation of phenol :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 253

(20) Ether is a good solvent for Grignard reagent. Which property makes it a good solvent?
Answer:
Ether has a low polarity, this property makes it a good solvent.

(21) The C – O – C bond angle in dimethyl ether is
Answer:
The C – O – C bond angle in dimethyl ether is 110°.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 115.
State the uses of methyl alcohol.
Answer:
(1) Methyl alcohol is used as an industrial solvent for dissolving oils, fats, gums, etc.
(2) It is used for dry cleaning and preparation of perfumes and varnishes.
(3) It is used as antifreeze agent for automobile radiators at low temperature.
(4) It is used in the preparation of methyl chloride, dimethyl sulphate and formaldehyde.
(5) It is used to denature ethyl alcohol.

Question 116.
State the uses of ethyl alcohol. OR Write two uses of ethyl alcohol.
Answer:
(1) Ethyl alcohol is used as solvent for dyes, oils, perfumes, cosmetics and drugs.
(2) A mixture of 10-20% ethyl alcohol with petrol is used as motor fuel.
(3) A mixture of ethyl alcohol and calcium acetate in gel form is used as solid fuel.
(4) It is widely used in beverages.
(5) Since ethyl alcohol has low freezing point, it is used in thermometer.
(6) It is an effective tropical antiseptic therefore it is used in many mouth washes.
(7) It kills micro-organisms on wound surface and in the mouth but its low toxicity does not kill the cells of the skin or mouth tissues.
(8) It is used in the preparation of chloroform, iodoform, acetic acid and ethers.
(9) It is used as fuel.

Question 117.
Give the important uses of phenol.
OR
Write two uses of phenol.
Answer:
(1) Phenol is used in the preparation of phenol-formaldehyde polymer which is used in a plastic bakelite.
(2) It is used in the preparation of phenol-phthalein-an indicator and in certain dyes.
(3) It is used in the preparation of drugs such as salol, aspirin, etc.
(4) It is used in the preparation of dettol, which is an antiseptic.
(5) It is used in the preparation of 2,4-dichlorophenoxy acetic acid which is used as selective weed killer.
(6) It is used to prepare picric acid which is used as explosive.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 118.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each sub-question:

1. Which one of the following is a tertiary alcohol?
(a) Pentan-l-ol
(b) Pentan-2-ol
(c) 2-Methylpentan-2-ol
(d) 3-Methylpentan-2-ol
Answer:
(c) 2-Methylpentan-2-ol

2. Which of the following is a primary alcohol?
(a) 3-ethyl-3-hexanol
(b) 2-butanol
(c) 3-methyl-l-butanol
(d) 1-hexanol
Answer:
(d) 1-hexanol

3. The molecular formula C4H10O represents
(a) aldehydes
(b) alcohols
(c) ethers
(d) both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) both (b) and (c)

4. The general formula of primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols is
(a) CnH2nOH
(b) CnH2n-1OH
(c) CnH2n+1OH
(d) CnHn+1OH
Answer:
(c) CnH2n+1OH

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

5. Which of the following alcohols cannot be prepared by hydration of the corresponding alkene?
(a) Ethanol
(b) Propan- l-ol
(c) Propan-2-ol
(d) 2-Methylpropan-2-ol
Answer:
(b) Propan- l-ol

6. Which of the following compounds when treated with CH3MgI in dry ether followed by the hydroly¬sis, will give Propan-2-ol?
(a) HCHO
(b) CH3CHO
(c) CH3CH2OH
(d) CH3COCH3
Answer:
(b) CH3CHO

7. To prepare 3-Ethylpentan-3-ol, the reagents needed are
(a) CH3CH2MgBr + CH3COCH2CH3
(b) CH3MgBr + CH3CH2CH2COCH2CH3
(c) CH3CH2MgBr + CH3CH2COCH2CH3
(d) CH3CH2CH2MgBr + CH3COCH2CH3
Answer:
(c) CH3CH2MgBr + CH3CH2COCH2CH3

8. How is 1-propanol obtained?
(a) Using propanal
(b) Using propanone
(c) Using propene
(d) All of these
Answer:
(a) Using propanal

9.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 260
Answer:
(a)

10. Ketone on reduction gives
(a) 1° alcohol
(b) 2° alcohol
(c) 3° alcohol
(d) all of these
Answer:
(b) 2° alcohol

11. Primary alcohols are prepared by catalytic hydro-genation of aldehydes in presence of ……………………………… as a catalyst
(a) aluminium bromide
(b) fluoroboric acid
(c) dry ether
(d) palladium
Answer:
(d) palladium

12. Lower member of alcohols are
(a) insoluble in water
(b) soluble in water
(c) insoluble in acetaldehyde
(d) insoluble in petrol
Answer:
(b) soluble in water

13. Which of the following compounds contain hydro¬gen bonds?
(a) Ethane
(b) Ethanol
(c) Methoxymethane
(d) Ethylene
Answer:
(b) Ethanol

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

14. Which of the following is a trihydric alcohol?
(a) n-propyl alcohol
(b) Glycerol
(c) Glycol
(d) Glycine
Answer:
(b) Glycerol

15. Aldehydes are first oxidation products of
(a) primary alcohols
(b) secondary alcohols
(c) tertiary alcohols
(d) carboxylic acids
Answer:
(a) primary alcohols

16. The oxidation product of alcohol depends on
(a) – OH group of an alcohol
(b) number of carbon atoms in alcohol
(c) number of hydrogen atoms attached to hydroxyl bearing carbon
(d) all of these
Answer:
(c) number of hydrogen atoms attached to hydroxyl bearing carbon

17. The order of ease of oxidation is
(a) primary > secondary > tertiary
(b) primary < secondary < tertiary
(c) primary > tertiary > secondary
(d) secondary > tertiary > primary
Answer:
(b) primary < secondary < tertiary

18. Ethyl alcohol \(\frac{\text { conc. } \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{SO}_{4}}{443 \mathrm{~K}} \mathrm{~A} \stackrel{\mathrm{HBr}}{\longrightarrow}\) Ethyl bromide. Identify A.
(a) Ethyl hydrogen sulphate
(b) Ethylene
(c) Isopropyl hydrogen sulphate
(d) Acetic acid
Answer:
(b) Ethylene

19. One mole of PCl5 reacts with one mole of ethyl alcohol to give
(a) 1 mole Cl2
(b) 1/2 mole Cl2
(c) 1 mole HCl
(d) 1/2 mole HCl
Answer:
(c) 1 mole HCl

20. When ethyl alcohol is reacted with sodium metal and the compound so formed is treated with ethyl bromide, the product formed is
(a) an acid
(b) an alkane
(c) an ether
(d) an ester
Answer:
(c) an ether

21. Dehydration occurs at the lowest temperature and concentration for
(a) methyl alcohol
(b) n-propyl alcohol
(c) iso-propyl alcohol
(d) tert-butyl alcohol
Answer:
(d) tert-butyl alcohol

22. One mole of sodium when reacts with one mole of methyl alcohol, gives
(a) one mole of oxygen
(b) one mole of hydrogen
(c) half mole of hydrogen
(d) half mole of oxygen
Answer:
(c) half mole of hydrogen

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

23. A compound ‘X’(C3H8O) on oxidation gives com-pound ‘ Y’(C3H6O2), hence compound ‘X’ must be
(a) a ketone
(b) an aldehyde
(c) a primary alcohol
(d) a secondary alcohol
Answer:
(c) a primary alcohol

24. The toxicity of alcohols
(a) increases with an increase in their molecular weight
(b) decreases with an increase in their molecular weight
(c) increases with a decrease in their molecular weight
(d) does not depend on their molecular weight
Answer:
(a) increases with an increase in their molecular weight

25. The structural formula of 2-phenyl ethanol is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 261
Answer:
(c)

26. Compound that fails to give effervescence with NaHCO3 is
(a) C6H5COO
(b) CH3COOH
(c) C6H5OH
(d) Picric acid
Answer:
(c)

27. Phenol is a bifunctional compound because
(a) it gives reactions of hydroxyl group (-OH) as well as aromatic ring
(b) it is a strong acid
(c) it is insoluble in NaOH
(d) it is readily soluble in water
Answer:
(a) it gives reactions of hydroxyl group (-OH) as well as aromatic ring

28. Phenol gives characteristic colour with
(a) iodine solution
(b) bromine water
(c) ammonium hydroxide
(d) aqueous ferric chloride solution
Answer:
(d) aqueous ferric chloride solution

29. Ethanol and phenol are distinguished from each other by the action of
(a) neutral ferrous chloride
(b) neutral ferric chloride
(c) ferric hydroxide
(d) ferrous hydroxide
Answer:
(b) neutral ferric chloride

30. Which of the following compounds is used to prepare bakelite resin?
(a) Acetaldehyde
(b) Ethanol
(c) Phenol
(d) Methyl amine
Answer:
(d) Methyl amine

31. Increasing order of acid strength among p-methoxy-phenol, p-methyl phenol and p-nitro- phenol is as
(a) p-nitrophenol > p-methoxyphenol > p-methylphenol
(b) p-methylphenol > p-methoxyphenol > p-nitrophenol
(c) p-nitrophenol > p-methylphenol > p-methoxyphenol
(d) p-methoxyphenol > p-methylphenol > p-nitrophenol
Answer:
(d) p-methoxyphenol > p-methylphenol > p-nitrophenol

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

32. The IUPAC name of the compound is Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 262
(a) 3,3-dimethyl-l-hydroxy cyclohexane
(b) l,l-dimethyl-3-cyclohexanol
(c) 3,3-dimethyl-1-cyclohexanol
(d) l,l-dimethyl-3-hydroxy cyclohexane
Answer:
(c) 3,3-dimethyl-1-cyclohexanol

33. Which of the following is the most reactive towards electrophilic attack?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 263
Answer:
(a)

34. In the following reaction, Ethanol \(\stackrel{\mathrm{PBr}_{3}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{A}\)\(\stackrel{\text { Alc-KOH }}{\longrightarrow} \text { B } \frac{\text { (i) } \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{SO}_{4} \text {, room temp. }}{\text { (ii) } \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}, \text { heat }} \mathrm{C} \text {. }\). The product C is
(a) CH3 – CH2 – O – CH2 – CH3
(b) CH3 – CH2 – OSO3H
(c) CH3CH2OH
(d) CH2 = CH2
Answer:
(c) CH3CH2OH

35. What is the general formula of ethers?
(a) CnH2nO
(b) CnH2n+2O
(c) CnH2n-1O
(d) CnH2n-2O
Answer:
(b) CnH2n+2O

36. The Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 264 linkage is present in
(a) proteins
(b) ketones
(c) ethers
(d) aldehydes
Answer:
(c) ethers

37. Methoxy ethane is the functional isomer of
(a) CH3CHOHCH3
(b) CH3CH2CH2OH
(c) CH3 – O – CH3
(d) both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(d) both (a) and (b)

38. An oxygen atom in ether is
(a) sp2-hybridized
(b) sp3-hybridized
(c) sp-hybridized
(d) sp2-d-hybridized
Answer:
(b) sp3-hybridized

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

39. C5H12O represents
(a) only an alcohol
(b) only an aldehyde
(c) only an ether
(d) an alcohol and an ether
Answer:
(d) an alcohol and an ether

40. Ether molecules are
(a) tetrahedral
(b) angular
(c) pyramidal
(d) diagonal
Answer:
(b) angular

41. Which one of the following compounds is not isomeric with Ethoxypropane?
(a) 1-Methoxypropane
(b) 2-Methoxypropane
(c) 2-Methylpropane-2-ol
(d) 2-Methylbutan-2-ol
Answer:
(d) 2-Methylbutan-2-ol

42. The IUPAC name of C2H5 – O – CH2 – CH(CH3)2 is
(a) 1-Ethoxy-1-butane
(b) 2-Ethoxy-2-butane
(c) l-Ethoxy-2-methylpropane
(d) 3-Ethoxy-2-methylpropane
Answer:
(c) l-Ethoxy-2-methylpropane

43. The IUPAC name of CH3OC6H5 is
(a) methoxy phenyl ether
(b) phenoxy methane
(c) methoxy benzene
(d) methyl phenyl ether
Answer:
(c) methoxy benzene

44. In CH3(CH2)3 – O -CH3, the parent hydrocarbon of large alkyl group is
(a) n-butane
(b) butane
(c) pentane
(d) n-pentane
Answer:
(a) n-butane

45. Which one of the following alkyl halide gives best yield in Williamson’s synthesis?
(a) CH3 – Br
(b) CH3 – CH(Br) – CH3
(c) CH2 – CH(Br) – CH3 – CH3
(d) (CH3)3 C – Br
Answer:
(a) CH3 – Br

46. Which one of the following ethers cannot be pre¬pared by using diazomethane?
(a) Dimethyl ether
(b) Diethyl ether
(c) Ethyl methyl ether
(d) t-Butyl methyl ether
Answer:
(b) Diethyl ether

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

47. The continuous etherification is carried out at
(a) 473 K
(b) 413 K
(c) 498 K
(d) 403 K
Answer:
(b) 413 K

48. Williamson’s synthesis is used for the preparation of
(a) only unsymmetrical ethers
(b) only symmetrical ethers
(c) both symmetrical and unsymmetrical ethers
(d) only methyl ethers
Answer:
(c) both symmetrical and unsymmetrical ethers

49. Which of the following ethers on hydrolysis gives two different products that are successive members of a homologous series?
(a) Methoxymethane
(b) Ethoxythane
(c) Methoxyethane
(d) 2-Methoxypropane
Answer:
(c) Methoxyethane

50. Which one of the following compounds dissolves in hot dilute sulphuric acid but does not react with sodium metal?
(a) Ethyl bromide
(b) Acetic acid
(c) Ethyl alcohol
(d) Diethyl ether
Answer:
(d) Diethyl ether

51. Identify ‘A’ in the following reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 271
Answer:
(c)

52. The C-O-C bond angle in an ether is
(a) 180
(b) 90°
(c) 104.5°
(d) 109.5°
Answer:
(d) 109.5°

53. Ether free from moisture and alcohol is known as ,
(a) dry ether
(b) absolute ether
(c) pure ether
(d) spirit ether
Answer:
(b) absolute ether

54. The geometry of ether is similar to
(a) ammonia
(b) methane
(c) water
(d) ethyne
Answer:
(c) water

55. Sodium metal does not react with
Answer:
C2H5 – O – C2H3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

56. Ethers have boiling points
(a) lower than those of alkanes of comparable molecular masses
(b) higher than those of isomeric alcohols
(c) lower than those of isomeric alcohols
(d) higher than those of alkanes of comparable molecular masses
Answer:

57. Ether on hydrolysis gives
(a) aldehyde
(b) alcohol
(c) acid
(d) ester
Answer:
(c) acid

58. Which of the following reactions represent Williamson’s reaction?
(a) R – O – R’ + HI →
\(\text { (b) } \mathrm{R}^{\prime}-\mathrm{OH}+\stackrel{\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{SO}_{4}}{\longrightarrow}\)

(d) R – O – Na + R’X →
Answer:
(c)

59. Which of the following reactions represent the continuous etherification process?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 265
Answer:
(b)

60. Ethers on complete combustion produce
(a) an alcohol and water
(b) an alkene and water
(c) an alkane and an alkene
(d) carbon dioxide and water
Answer:
(d) carbon dioxide and water

61. Diethyl ether is used as a solvent in many organic reactions because it
(a) is liquid at room temperature
(b) has lower boiling point
(c) contains divalent oxygen atom
(d) is inert in nature
Answer:
(d) is inert in nature

62. Which of the following reagents can be prepared using ether as a solvent?
(a) Tollen’s reagent
(b) Grignard’s reagent
(c) Schiff’s reagent
(d) Millon’s reagent
Answer:
(b) Grignard’s reagent

63. Diethyl ether is used as
(a) a hypnotic
(b) an antiseptic
(c) an anaesthetic
(d) an antipyretic
Answer:
(c) an anaesthetic

64. To obtain fuel, diethyl ether is mixed with
(a) ester
(b) ethanal
(c) ethanol
(d) 2-propanone
Answer:
(c) ethanol

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

65. Which of the following alcohols is prepared by acid catalyzed hydration of alkenes?
(a) Butan-l-ol
(b) Propan-l-ol
(c) Ethanol
(d) Methanol
Answer:
(c) Ethanol

66. Which of the following alcohols can be prepared by direct hydration of corresponding alkene in presence of 50 % sulphuric acid?
(a) Butan-l-ol
(b) Butan-2-ol
(c) 2-Methylpropan-1 -ol
(d) 2-Methylpropan-2-ol
Answer:
(d) 2-Methylpropan-2-ol

67. Which of the following alcohols cannot be prepared by reduction of carbonyl compounds?
(a) Pentan-l-ol
(b) Pentan-2-ol
(c) 2-Methylpentan-2-ol
(d) 3-Methylpentan-2-ol
Answer:
(c) 2-Methylpentan-2-ol

68. Which of the following conversions explains the acidic nature of alcohols?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 268
Answer:
(b)

69. Which of the following compounds gives 3-ethyl- pentan-3-ol by the action of ethyl magnesium iodide followed by acid hydrolysis?
(a) Propanone
(b) Butanone
(c) Pentan-2-one
(d) Pentan-3-one
Answer:
(d) Pentan-3-one

70. Benzyl phenyl ether reacts with hydrogen bromide to give
(a) benzyl bromide and phenol
(b) benzyl alcohol and bromobenzene
(c) benzyl bromide and bromobenzene
(d) benzyl alcohol and phenol
Answer:
(a) benzyl bromide and phenol

71. Ethers are considered as
(a) monoalkyl derivatives of water
(b) divalent oxygen atom is attached to two alkyl groups
(c) alkyl derivatives of fatty acids
(d) condensation products of acid and alcohol
Answer:
(b) divalent oxygen atom is attached to two alkyl groups

72. Which of the following compounds is not isomeric with ethoxyethane?
(a) 1-methoxypropane
(b) 2-methoxypropane
(c) 2-methylpropan-2-ol
(d) 2-methylbutan-2-ol
Answer:
(d) 2-methylbutan-2-ol

73. Which of the following compounds dissolves in hot dilute sulphuric acid but does not reacts with sodium metal?
(a) Ethyl bromide
(b) Acetic acid
(c) Ethyl alcohol
(d) Diethyl ether
Answer:
(d) Diethyl ether

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

74. Which of the following alcohol will have the fastest rate of dehydration?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 266
Answer:
(c)

75. The phenol having lowest acidity is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 267
Answer:
(b)

76. Which of the following reagents is best for the following conversion?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 269
Answer:
(a)

77. 3-Methyl butane-2-ol on heating with HI gives
(a) 2 -iodo-3-methyl butane
(b) 2-iodo-2-methyl butane
(c) l-iodo-3-methyl butane
(d) l-iodo-2-methyl butane
Answer:
(b) 2-iodo-2-methyl butane

78. In phenol carbon atom attached to -OH group undergoes –
(a) sp3-hybridisation
(b) sp-hybridisation
(c) sp2-hybridisation
(d) No hybridisation
Answer:
(c) sp2-hybridisation

79. Which among the following reducing agents is ‘not’ used to reduce acetaldehyde to ethyl alcohol?
(a) Na-Hg and water
(b) Zn-Hg and cone. HCl
(c) H2-Raney Ni
(d) Li-A1H4/H+
Answer:
(b) Zn-Hg and cone. HCl

80. Identify the weakest acidic compound amongst the following :
(a) p-nitrophenol
(b) p-chlorophenol
(c) p-cresol
(d) p-aminophenol
Answer:
(d) p-aminophenol

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

81. Natalite is a mixture of
(a) diethyl ether and methanol
(b) diethyl ether and ethanol
(c) dimethyl ether and methanol
(d) dimethyl ether and ethanol
Answer:
(b) diethyl ether and ethanol

82. The alcohol used in thermometers is
(a) methanol
(b) ethanol
(c) propanol
(d) butanol
Answer:
(b) ethanol

83. Which of the following is the first oxidation product of secondary alcohol?
(a) Alkene
(b) Aldehyde
(c) Ketone
(d) Carboxylic acid
Answer:
(c) Ketone

84. When phenol is heated with cone. HNO3 in presence of cone. H2SO4 it yields
(a) o-nitrophenol
(b) p-nitrophenol
(c) 2, 4, 6-trinitrophenol
(d) m-nitrophenol
Answer:
(c) 2, 4, 6-trinitrophenol

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 1.
What are d-block elements? Give their general electronic configuration.
Answer:
Definition: d-block elements are defined as the elements in which the differentiating electron enters d-orbital of the penultimate shell i.e. (n – 1) d-orbital where ‘n is the last shell.

The general electronic configuration can be represented as, (n – n) dn – 10, nsn – 2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 2.
What is the position of the transition elements in the periodic table?
Answer:
The transition elements are placed in periods 4 to 7 and groups 3 to 12 of the periodic table.

Question 3.
In which block of the modern periodic table are the transition elements placed?
Answer:
Transition elements are placed in d-block of the modern periodic table.

Question 4.
Why are most of the d-block elements called transition elements?
Answer:

  • d-block elements have electronic configuration,(n – n) dn – 10, nsl – 2. They are all metals.
  • In the periodic table, they are placed between the ,s-block and p-block elements, i.e., in the groups between 2 and 13.
  • They show characteristic properties which are intermediate between those of the elements of s-block and p-block.
  • Hence, they show a transition in the properties from those of the most electropositive .v-block elements and less
  • electropositive (or electronegative) p-block elements.
  • Therefore, most of the d-block elements are called transition elements.

Question 5.
How many series of d-block elements are present in the long-form periodic table? Give their general electronic configuration.
Answer:
There are four series of d-block elements which are placed between 5 and p-block elements in the long-form periodic table as follows :

d-series Period Electronic configuration
(1) 3d-series fourth [Ar] 3d1 – 10, 4s1 – 2
(2) 4d-series fifth [Kr] 4d1 – 10, 5s1 – 2
(3) 5d-series sixth [Xe] 4f14 5d1 – 10 6s1 – 2
(4) 6d- series seventh [Rn] 5f14 6d1 – 10 7s2

Modern periodic table :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 6.
Represent the elements in the four series of transition elements.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 2

Question 7.
In which period of the periodic table, will an element, be found whose differentiating electron is a 4d-electron?
Answer:
An element whose differentiating electron is a 4d-electron will be present in fifth period of the periodic table.

Question 8.
Write the condensed electronic configuration of each series of transition elements.
Answer:
Condensed Electronic Configuration of Transition Elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 4

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 9.
Write expected and observed electronic configuration of 3d-series block elements.
Answer:
Electronic configuration of 3d-series of d-block elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 5

Question 10.
Explain why transition elements with electronic configuration 3d44s2 and 3d94s2 do not exist.
Answer:
(1) d-orbitals are degenerate orbitals and they acquire extra stability when half-filled (3d5) or completely filled (3d10). Hence 3d4 and 3d9 electronic configurations are less stable.
(2) The energy difference between 3d and 4.s’ subshells is very low, hence there arises a transfer of one electron from 45 orbital to 3d orbital.
The electronic configuration changes as,
3d4, 4s2 → 3d5 4s1
3d9, 4s2 → 3d10 451
Therefore transition elements, with electronic configurations 3d4, 4s2 and 3d9, 4s2 do not exist.

Question 11.
Write observed electronic configuration of elements from first transition series having half-filled d-orbitals.
Answer:
There are two elements namely Cr and Mn which have half-filled d-orbitals.
24Crls22s22p63s23p63d54s1
25Mnls22s22p63s23p63d54s2

Question 12.
Explain the variable oxidation states of metals of first transition series.
Answer:

  • The transition metals (or, elements) exhibit variable oxidation states due to their electronic configuration, (n – 1) d1 – 10 ns1 – 2 for the first row.
  • They show only positive oxidation states due to loss of electrons from outer 45-orbital and the penultimate 3rf-orbital.
  • Loss of one 45 electron forms M+ ion. Loss of two 45 electrons form M2+ ion.
  • +2 is the common oxidation state of these elements.
  • Higher oxidation states are due to loss of 3 d-electrons along with 45 electrons.
  • As the number of unpaired electrons increases, the number of oxidation states shown by the element also increases.
  • Sc has only one unpaired electron and it shows two oxidation states ( + 2 and + 3)
  • Mn with 5 unpaired d electrons show six different oxidation states. They are +2, +3, +4, +5, +6 and + 7. Thus Mn has the highest oxidation state.
  • From Fe onwards variable oxidation states decreases as the number of unpaired electron decreases.
  • The last element in the series, Zn shows only one oxidation state ( + 2).

Question 13.
Show different oxidation states of 3d-series of transition elements.
Answer:
The following table shows, different oxidation states of 3d-series of transition elements.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 7

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 14.
Write oxidation states and outer electronic configuration of first transition series elements.
Answer:
Oxidation states of first transition series elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 8
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 9

Question 15.
Zinc shows only one oxidation slate. Explain.
Answer:

  • The electronic conliguration of zinc is, 30Zn Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10 4s2 or [Ar] 3d10 4s2.
  • Due lo loss of two electrons from 4s suhshell Zn shows oxidation state +2. with elcctronic configuration. [Ar] 183d10.
  • Since Zn+2 acquires an extra stability of completely fIlled 3d10 orbital. it shows only one oxidation state + 2.

Question 16.
Why is manganese more stable in the + 2 state than the + 3 state and the reverse is true for iron?
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of Mn is 25Mn [Ar] 3d5 4s2
  • In + 2 and + 3 oxidation states, the electronic configuration of Mn is, Mn2+ [Ar] 3d5 and Mn3+ [Ar] 3d4
  • Since half-filled d-orbital (3d5) has more stability and lower energy than 3d4, Mn2+ is more stable than Mn3+.
  • The electronic configuration of Fe is 26Fe [Ar] 3d6 4s2 In + 2 and + 3 oxidation states of Fe, the electronic configuration is, Fe2+ [Ar] 3d6 and Fe3+ [Ar] 3d5 Since half-filled orbital is more stable, + 3 state of Fe is more stable than + 2 state.

Question 17.
What are the electronic configurations of various ions of 3d-elements?
Answer:
Electronic configuration of various ions of 3d elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 10

Question 18.
Scandium shows only two oxidation states. Explain.
Answer:
Scandium has electronic configuration, 21Sc : Is2, 2s2, 2p6, 3s2, 3p6, 3d1, 4s2 Sc shows only two oxidation states namely + 2 and + 3.

  • Due to the loss of two electrons from the 4s-orbital, Sc acquires + 2 oxidation state Sc2 + : Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d1.
  • Due to the loss of one more electron from the 3d-orbital, it acquires + 3 oxidation state with the extra stability of an inert element 18Ar. Sc+3 : Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6.
  • Since Sc3+ acquires extra stability of inert element [Ar]18, it does not form higher oxidation state.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 19.
Write different oxidation states of iron.
OR
Write the electronic configurations of
(i) Fe
(ii) Fe2+ and
(iii) Fe3+.
Answer:
Oxidation states of iron are +2, +3, +4, +5, +6.
(i) 26Fe : ls22s22p63s23p63d64s2
(ii) Fe2+ : Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d6
(iii) Fe3+ : Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d5.

Question 20.
Explain different oxidation states of chromium.
Answer:

  • The observed electronic configuration of chromium is, 24Cr [Ar] 3d5 4s1.
  • Different possible oxidation states of Cr are 4-1 (3d5), + 2 (3d4), + 3 (3d3), + 4 (3d2), + 5 (3d1) and + 6 (3d°).
  • Although in + 1 state, Cr gets extra stability of half-filled 3d5-orbital, it does not exhibit + 1 state in common except with pyridine.
  • Cr+2 has few stable salts like CrCl2, CrSO4 while Cr+3 forms very stable salts like CrCl3.
  • Cr+4 and Cr + 5 are unstable oxidation states.
  • Cr+6 is the most stable state due to inert gas [Ar] electronic configuration and form the salts like K2Cr2O7.

Question 21.
Manganese shows variable oxidation states. Give reasons.
Answer:

  • Manganese (25Mn) has electronic configuration. 25Mn [Ar]18 3d5 4s2.
  • Mn has stable half-filled d-subshell.
  • Due to a small difference in energy between 3d and 4s-orbitals, Mn can lose or share electrons from both the orbitals, hence shows variable oxidation states.
  • Mn shows oxidation states ranging from + 2 to + 7.

Question 22.
Write the different oxidation states of manganese. Why is + 2 oxidation state of manganese more stable than Mn3+?
Answer:

  • The different oxidation states of Mn are +2, +3, +4, +5, + 6 and +7.
  • The electronic configuration of Mn is Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d5 4s2
  • + 2 oxidation state is very stable due to higher stability of half-filled 3d orbital.
  • Mn3+ has electronic configuration, ls22s2 2p63s23p63dA which is less stable.

Question 23.
Write the physical properties of first transition series.
Answer:
Physical properties of first transition series :

  • All transition elements of the first series are metals.
  • Except Zn, they are very hard and have low volatility.
  • They show characteristic properties of metals. They are lustrous, malleable and ductile.
  • They are good conductors of heat and electricity.
  • They have high melting points and boiling points.
  • Except Zn and Mn, they have one or more typical metallic structures at normal temperatures.

Question 24.
Which elements in the transition elements, 3d-series has
(i) the lowest density
(ii) the highest density?
Answer:
In 3d transition elements,
(i) Scandium (Sc) has lowest density and
(ii) Zinc (Zn) has the highest density.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 25.
Explain the variation in density of d-block elements.
Answer:
The densities of d-block elements are higher than 5-block elements due to higher nuclear charge which results in reduction in atomic size.

Question 26.
Explain the variation in melting points of the transition elements.
Answer:

  1. All transition elements are metals and the strength of metallic bonding increases as the number of unpaired electrons increases.
  2. In transition elements as atomic number increases, the number of unpaired electrons increases from (n – 1)d1 to (n – 1 )d5.
    For example in 3d-series, melting points increase from 21Sc to 24Cr in 4d-series from 39Y to 42Mo, and in 5d-series from 72Hf to 74W.
  3. After (n – l)d5 electronic configuration, the electrons start pairing, hence the number of unpaired electrons decrease, hence metallic character, melting points decrease from (n-1 )d6 to (n – 1)d10.
  4. In all transition series the melting point increases steadily up to d5 configuration and after this melting point decreases regularly.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 11

Question 27.
The first ionisation enthalpies of third transition series elements are much higher than those of the elements of first and second transition series. Explain.
Answer:

  1. Third transition series elements have electronic configuration, 4f14 5d1 – 10 6s2.
  2. Thus, atoms of third series elements possess filled 4f-orbitals.
  3. 4f-orbitals due to their diffused shape, exhibit poor shielding effect and give rise to lanthanide contraction. Hence the valence electrons experience greater nuclear attraction and greater amount of energy is required to ionise the elements of third transition series namely (Hf to Au).
  4. Therefore the ionisation enthalpies of third transition series elements are much higher than those of the first and second transition series.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 13

Question 28.
Explain the metalic character of transition metals.
Answer:

  • All the transition elements are metals.
  • They are hard, lustrous, malleable, ductile and they have high tensile strength.
  • They have high melting points and boiling points.
  • Their metallic character is due to vacant or partially filled (n – 1) d-orbitals, and they involve both metallic and covalent bonding.
  • Since the strength of metallic bonds depends upon the number of unpaired electrons, it increases up to middle i.e., up to (n – 1 )d5, hence accordingly melting points and boiling points also increase.
  • After (n – l)d5 configuration, the electrons start pairing, hence the metallic strength, melting points and boiling points decrease with the increase in atomic number.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 29.
How does metallic character vary in 3d transition elements?
Answer:

  1. In 3d-series elements as atomic number increases from scandium (Sc [Ar]18 3d1 4s2) the number of unpaired electrons increases up to 3d5 in chromium.
  2. As the number of unpaired electrons increases, the metallic character increases, hence the melting points and boiling points increase from 21Sc(3d1) to 24Cr (3d5).
  3. After chromium the number of unpaired electrons goes on decreasing due to the pairing of electrons, hence metallic character, melting points and boiling points decrease from 25Mn to 29Cu.
  4. Zinc has all electrons paired, hence it is soft, has a low melting and boiling points.

Question 30.
Which are the common arrangement of the atoms in the structure of transition metals?
Answer:
Most of the transition metals have simple hexagonal closed packed (hep), cubic closed packed (ccp) or body centred cubic (bcc) lattices.

Question 31.
Why do the compounds of transition metals exhibit magnetic properties?
Answer:
The compounds of transition metals exhibit magnetic properties due to the presence of unpaired electrons in their atoms or ions.

Question 32.
What is the cause of paramagnetism and ferromagnetism?
Answer:
Paramagnetism and ferromagnetism is due to the presence of unpaired electrons in species.

Question 33.
When does species become diamagnetic?
Answer:
When there is no unpaired electron, i.e. all electron spins are paired, the species become diamagnetic.

Question 34.
How do metals Fe, Co, Ni acquire permanent magnetic moment?
Answer:
The transition metals Fe, Co and Ni are ferromagnetic. When the magnetic field is applied, all the unpaired electrons in these metals (and their compounds) align in the direction of the applied magnetic field. Due to this the magnetic susceptibility is enhanced and these metals can be magnetised, that is, they acquire permanent magnetic properties.

Question 35.
In which oxidation state, is vanadium diamagnetic?
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of vanadium is, 23V [Ar] 3d3 4s2.
  • In +5 oxidation state, the electronic configuration is, V5+ [Ar].
  • Since in V5+ state, vanadium has all electrons paired, it is diamagnetic.

Question 36.
How is a magnetic moment expressed?
Answer:
The magnetic moment is expressed in Bohr magneton (B.M.). It is denoted by μ.

Question 37.
What is Bohr magneton (B.M.)?
Answer:
Bohr magneton (B.M.) is a unit of magnetic moment :
\(1 \mathrm{~B} . \mathrm{M} .=\frac{e h}{4 \pi m_{\mathrm{e}} c}\)
where, h : Planck’s constant (h = 6.626 x 10-34 Js)
e : electronic charge (1.60218 x 10-19 C)
me : mass of an electron (9.109 x 10-31 kg)
c : velocity of light. (2.998 x 108 ms-1)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 38.
Explain the magnetic properties of transition (or d-block) elements.
Answer:

  • Most of the transition metal ions and their compounds are paramagnetic in nature due to the presence of one or more unpaired electrons in their (n – 1)d-orbitals. Hence they are attracted in the magnetic field.
  • As the number of unpaired electrons increases from 1 to 5 in J-orbitals, the paramagnetic character and magnetic moment increase.
  • The transition elements or their ions having all electrons paired are diamagnetic and they are repelled in the magnetic field.
  • Metals like Fe, Co and Ni possess very high paramagnetism and acquire permanent magnetic moment hence they are ferromagnetic.

Question 39.
Explain the effective magnetic moment of the species.
Answer:

  • The magnetic moment in the species arises due to the presence of unpaired electrons.
  • The magnetic moment depends upon the sum of orbitals and spin contribution for each unpaired electron present in the species.
  • In transition metal ions, the contribution of orbital magnetic moment is suppressed by the electrostatic field of other atoms, molecules or ions surrounding the metal ion in the compound.
  • Hence the net or effective magnetic moment arises mainly due to spin of electrons. The effective magnetic moment μeff, of a paramagnetic substance is given by 1 spin only’ formula represented as, \(\mu=\sqrt{n(n+2)}\) B.M. where n is the number of unpaired electrons.

Question 40.
What is the importance of magnetic moment (μ)?
Answer:

  • From the measurements of the magnetic moment (μ) of the species or metal complexes of the first row of transition elements, the number of unpaired electrons can be calculated with the spin-only formula.
  • As magnetic moment is directly related to the number of unpaired electrons, value of μ will vary directly with the number of unpaired electrons.
  • In 2nd and 3rd transition series, orbital angular moment is significant. Hence spin-only formula for the complexes of 2nd and 3rd transition series is not useful.

Question 41.
Calculate the magnetic moment of the following species :
(1) Cr3+
(2) Co
(3) Co3+
(4) Cu2 +.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 14

Question 42.
Explain : A slight difference in the calculated and observed values of magnetic moments.
Answer:
Magnetic moments are determined experimentally in solution or in solid state where the central atom or ion is hydrated or bound to ligands. Hence a slight difference is observed in calculated and experimentally obtained values of magnetic moment (μ).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 15

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 43.
Calculate the magnetic moment of a divalent ion in an aqueous solution, if its atomic number is 24.
Answer:
(1) The electronic configuration of divalent inri M2+ having atomic number 24 is.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 18

The ion has number of unpaired electrons. n = 4.
By spin only’ formula, the magnetic μ is given by, \(\mu=\sqrt{n(n+2)}=\sqrt{4(4+2)}=4.90 \mathrm{~B} . \mathrm{M}\)
(This M2+ ion is Cr2+ ion)

Question 44.
When does a substance appear coloured?
Answer:
A substance appears coloured when it absorbs a portion of visible light. The colour depends upon the wavelength of absorption in the visible region of electromagnetic radiation.

Question 45.
Why do the d-block elements form coloured compounds?
Answer:

  • Compounds (or ions) of many d-block elements or transition metals are coloured.
  • This is due to the presence of one or more unpaired electrons in (n – 1) d-orbital. The transition metals have incompletely filled (n – 1) cf-orbitals.
  • The energy required to promote one or more electrons within the d-orbitals involving d-d transitions is very low.
  • The energy changes for d-d transitions lie in visible region of electromagnetic radiation.
  • Therefore transition metal ions absorb the radiation in the visible region and appear coloured.
  • Colour of ions of d-block elements depends on the number of unpaired electrons in (n – 1) d-orbital. The ions having equal number of unpaired electrons have similar colour.
  • The colour of metal ions is complementary to the colour of the radiation absorbed.

Question 46.
How is complementary colour of a compound identified?
Answer:

  1. The transition metal ions absorb the radiation in the visible region and appeared coloured.
  2. Metal ion absorbs radiation of certain wavelength from the visible region. Remaining light is transmitted and the observed colour corresponds to the complementary colour of the light observed.
  3. The complementary colour can be identified (with the diagram given).

For example if red colour is absorbed then transmitted complementary colour is green.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 19

Question 47.
Write outer electronic configuration (d-orbital) and colour of 3d-series of transition metal ions.
Answer:
Colour of 3d-transition metal ions
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 20

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 48.
Mention the factors on which the colour of a transition metal ion depends.
Answer:
The factors on which the colour of transition metal ion depends are as follows :

  • The presence of incompletely filled d-orbitals in metal ions. (The compounds with the configuration d° and d’0 are colourless.)
  • The presence of unpaired electrons in d-orbitals.
  • d → d transitions of electrons due to absorption of radiation in the visible region.
  • Nature of groups (anions) (or ligands) linked to the metal ion in the compound or a complex.
  • Type of hybridisation in metal ion in the complex.
  • Geometry of the complex of the metal ion.

Question 49.
Give reasons : Zinc salts are colourless.
Answer:

  • Colour of the ions of d-block elements depends on the number of unpaired electrons in (n – 1) d-orbitals.
  • Zinc forms salts of Zn2+ ions.
  • The electronic configuration of Zn+2 is [Ar] 3d10.
  • Since Zn+2 does not have unpaired electrons in 3d-orbital, d→d transition cannot take place, hence, Zn+2 ions form colourless salts.

Question 50.
Explain : The compounds of Cu(II) are coloured.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of 29Cu [Ar] 3d10 4s1 and Cu2+ [Ar] 3d9.
  • In copper compounds Cu2+ ions have incompletely filled 3d-orbital (3d9).
  • Due to the presence of one unpaired electron in 3 d-orbital, Cu2+ ions absorb red light from visible spectrum and emit blue radiation due to d → d transition. Therefore, copper compounds are coloured.

Question 51.
Explain why the solution of Ti3+ salt is purple in colour.
OR
Why is Ti3+ coloured? (atomic number Ti = 22)
Answer:

  • Ti2+ ions in the aqueous solution exist in the hydrated complex form as [Ti(H2O)6]2+.
  • The electronic configuration of Ti is, 22Ti [Ar]18 3d2 4s2 and Ti3+ [Ar]18 3d1. Hence in complex, Ti3+ has one unpaired electron in 3d subshell.
  • Initially, the 3d electron occupies lower energy d-orbital (in t2g-orbitals).
  • On the absorption of radiations of about 500 nm in yellow green region by a complex, 3d1 electron is excited to the higher energy d-orbital (eg-orbitals).
  • When the electron returns back to the lower energy d-orbital (t2g), it transmits radiation of complementary colour i.e. red blue or purple colour. Hence, the solution of hydrated Ti3+ is purple.

Question 52.
What will be the colour of Cd2+ salts? Explain.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of, 48Cd [Kr]36 3d10 5s2 and Cd2+ [Kr]36 3d10.
  • Cd2+ ions have completely filled 3d subshell and there are no unpaired electrons in 3d-orbital.
  • Hence d → d transition is not possible.
  • Therefore, Cd2+ ions do not absorb radiations in the visible region and the salts of Cd2+ ions are colourless (or white).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 53.
Indicate which of the ions may be coloured- V3+, Sc3+, Cr31, Cu2+, Ti3+, Cu+
Answer:

  • V3+ [Ar]18 3d2-((green)
    Since there are two unpaired electrons available, for d → d transition, it will show a Green colour.
  • Sc3+ [Ar]18 3d° (colourless/white).
    Since there are no unpaired electrons in the 3d subshell, it will not show colour.
  • Cr3+ [Ar]18 3d3 – (violet)
    There are three unpaired electrons in the 3d subshell, hence due to d → d transition, it will show violet colour.
  • Cu2+ [Ar]18 3d9 (blue)
    It has one unpaired electron that can undergo a d → d transition, hence it will show the colour blue.
  • Ti3+ [Ar]18 3d1 (purple)
    It has one unpaired electron that can undergo a d → d transition, hence it will show the colour purple.
  • Cu1+ [Ar]18 3d10 (colourless)
    There are no unpaired electrons in the 3d subshell, hence it will not show colour.

Question 54.
Explain why is cobalt chloride pink in colour when dissolved in water but turns deep blue when treated with concentrated hydrochloric acid.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of 27Co : [Ar] 3d14s2 and Co2+ [Ar] 3d1.
  • When dissolved in water cobalt chloride, Co2+ forms pink complex, [Co(H2O)6]2+.
  • The complex has octahedral geometry.
  • Due to absorption of radiation in the visible region and d – d transition, it forms pink coloured solution.
  • When CoCl2 solution is treated with concentrated HCl solution it turns deep blue.
  • This change is due to the formation of another complex, [CoC14]2+ which has a tetrahedral geometry.
  • Thus due to a change in geometry of the complex formed the colour of the solution changes from pink to deep blue.

Question 55.
Explain the catalytic properties of the rf-block or transition metals.
Answer:

  • d-block elements or transition metals and their compounds or complexes influence the rate of a chemical reaction and hence act as catalysts.
  • In homogeneous catalysis a catalyst forms an unstable intermediate compound which decomposes into products and regenerates the catalyst. But transition metals involve heterogeneous catalysis.
  • The transition metals have incompletely filled d-subshells which adsorb reactants on the surface and provide a large surface area for the reactants to react.
  • Since transition metals have variable oxidation states they are very good catalysts.
  • Hence, compounds of Fe, Co, Ni, Pt, Pd, Cr etc are used as catalysts in many reactions.

Question 56.
Explain the use of different transition metals as catalysts.
Answer:
The transition metals are very good catalysts.

  • MnO2 is used as a catalyst in the decomposition of KClO3.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 21
  • In the manufacture of ammonia by Haber’s process, Mo/Fe is used as a catalyst.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 22
  • In the synthesis of gasoline by Fischer Tropsch process, Co-Th alloy is used as a catalyst.
  • Finely divided Ni (formed by reduction of heated oxide in hydrogen) is very efficient catalyst in hydrogenation of ethene to ethane at 140 °C.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 23
  • Commercially, hydrogenation with Ninkel as catalyst is used to convert inedible oils into solid fat for the production of margarine.
  • In the contact process of industrial production of sulphuric acid, sulphur dioxide and oxygen (from air) react reversibly over a solid catalyst of platinised asbestos.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 24
  • Carbon dioxide and hydrogen are formed by the reaction of carbon monoxide and steam at 500 °C with Fe-Cr catalyst.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 25

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 57.
What are interstitial compounds of transition metals?
Answer:

  • The interstitial compounds of the transition metals are those which are formed when small atoms like H, C or N are trapped inside the interstitial vacant spaces in the crystal lattices of the metals.
  • Sometimes, sulphides and oxides are also trapped in the crystal lattices of transition elements.
  • Presence of these elements in the crystal lattices of metals provide new properties to the metals.

Question 53.
Give one example of an interstitial compound.
Answer:
Steel and cast iron are examples of interstitial compounds of carbon and iron.

Question 54.
Give examples of interstitial compounds where the property of the transition metal is changed.
Answer:
Steel and cast iron are interstitial compounds of carbon and iron (carbides of iron). Due to the presence of carbon, the malleability and ductility of iron is reduced while its tenacity increases.

Question 55.
What are the properties of the interstitial compounds of transition metals?
Answer:

  • The chemical properties of the interstitial compounds are the same as that of parent transition metals.
  • They are hard and show the metallic properties like electrical and thermal conductivity, lustre, etc.
  • Since metal-non-metal bonds in the interstitial compounds are stronger than metal-metal bonds in pure metals, the compounds have very high melting points, higher than the pure metals.
  • They have lower densities than the parent metal.
  • The interstitial compounds containing hydrogen (i.e., hydrides of metals) are powerful reducing agents.
  • The compounds containing carbon, hence behaving as carbides, are chemically inert and extremely hard like diamond.
  • In these compounds, malleability and ductility are changed. For example steel and cast iron.

Question 56.
What are interstitial compounds? Why do these compounds have higher melting points than corresponding pure metals?
Answer:

  1. The interstitial compounds of the transition metals are those which are formed when small atoms like H, C or N are trapped inside the interstitial vacant spaces in the crystal lattice of the metals.
  2. Since metal-nonmetal bonds in the interstitial compounds are stronger than metal-metal bonds in pure metals, the compounds have very high melting points, higher than the pure metals.

Question 57.
Explain the formation of alloys of transition metals.
Answer:

  • The transition metals form a large number of alloys among themselves, which are hard with high melting points.
  • During alloy formation atoms of one metal are distributed randomly in the lattice of another metal.
  • The metals with similar atomic radii and similar properties readily form alloys.
  • These alloys have industrial importance.
  • The alloys can be ferrous alloys or nonferrous alloys.

Question 58.
How are the transition metal alloys classIfied?
Answer:
The transition metal alloys are classified into

  • Ferrous alloys
  • Nonferrous alloys.

Question 59.
Explain what are
(1) ferrous alloys and
(2) nonferrous alloys.
Answer:

  1. Ferrous alloys: In ferrous alloys, atoms of other elemems are distributed randomly in atoms of iron in the mixture. As the percentage of iron is more in these alloys, they are termed as ferrous alloys. For expamle : nickel steel, chromium steel, stainless steel, (All steels have abot 2% carbon)
  2. onferrous alloys : These are formed by mixing atoms of transition metal other than iron with a non transition elemeni. For example, brass is an alloy of Cu and Zn. Bronze is an alloy of Cu and Sn.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 60.
What are the uses of alloys?
Answer:

Name of alloy Important use in industry
(1) Bronze (Cu + Sn) In making statues, medals and trophies (as it is tough, strong and corrosion-resistant)
(2) Cupra-nickel (Cu + Ni) In making machinery parts of marine ships, boats, marine conden­ser tubes.
(3) Stainless steel In the construction of the outer fuselage of ultra-high-speed aircraft.
(4) Nichrome : (Ni+ Cr in the ration 80 : 20) For gas turbine engines.
(5) Titanium alloys For ultra-high-speed flight, fireproof bulkheads and exhaust shrouds (as they withstand high temperatures).

Question 61.
Write the preparation of potassium permanganate.
Answer:
Potassium permanganate (KMnO4) is prepared in the following steps,

(1) Chemical Oxidation : When finely divided manganese dioxide (Mn02) is heated strongly with fused caustic potash (KOH) and an oxidising agent potassium chlorate (KCIO3), dark green potassium manganate (K2MnO4) is obtained. (In neutral or acidic medium K2MnO4 disproportionates.)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 26

The liquid is filtered through glass wool or sintered glass and evaporated. Potassium manganate crystallises as small, blackish crystals.

(2) Oxidation of K2MnO4 by
(i) Electrolytic oxidation : An alkaline solution of manganate ion is electrolysed between iron electrodes separated by a diaphragm. Manganate ion \(\left(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{2-}\right)\) undergoes oxidation at anode forming permanganate ion \(\left(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}\right)\). Oxygen evolved at anode converts \(\left(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{2-}\right)\) to \(\left(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}\right)\).

The overall reaction is as follows :
2K2MnO4 + H2O + [O] → 2KMnO4 + 2KOH

The electrolytic solution is filtered and evaporated to obtain deep purple black crystals of KMn04.

(ii) By passing CO2 through the solution of K2MnO4 :
3K2MnO4 + 4CO2 + 2H2O → 2KMnO4 + MnO2 + 4 KHCO3

Question 62.
What is meant by the disproportionation of an oxidation state? Explain giving example of manganese.
Answer:

  1. Disproportionation reaction is a chemical reaction in which atom or an ion of an element forms two or more species having different oxidation states, one lower and one higher.
  2. Manganese (Mn) shows different oxidation states + 2 to +7.
  3. When one oxidation state, lower or higher oxidation state becomes unstable as compared to another oxidation state, it undergoes disproportionation reaction.
  4. For example, + 6 oxidation state of Mn is less stable than + 7 and + 4.
    • Hence, in acidic medium \(\mathrm{Mn}^{6+} \text { in } \mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{2-}\) undergoes disproportionation reaction.
      Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 27
    • In neutral medium green K2MnO4 disproportionates to KMn04 and MnO2.
      Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 28

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 63.
Give examples of oxidising reactions of KMnO4.
Answer:
(1) KMnO4 in acidic medium :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 57
(2) KMnO4 in neutral or alkaline medium in neutral or weakly alkaline medium :
(i) Iodide is oxidised to iodate ion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 33
(ii) Thiosulphate ion is oxidised to sulphate ion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 34
(iii) Manganous salt is oxidised to MnO2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 35

Question 64.
Balance the following equations :
KI + KMnO4 + H2SO4 → K2SO4 + MnSO4 + 8H2O + I2
H2S + KMnO4 + H2SO4 → K2SO4 + MnSO4 + H2O + S.
Answer:
10 KI + 2KMnO4 + 8H2SO4 → 6K2SO4 + 2MnSO4 + 8H2O + 5I2
5H2S + 2KMnO4 + 3H2SO4 → K2SO4 + 2MnSO4 + 8H2O + 5S.

Question 65.
Give the uses of potassium permanganate.
Answer:
Uses of potassium permanganate :

  • as an antiseptic.
  • as a powerful oxidising agent in laboratory and industry.
  • in the detection of unsaturation in organic compounds in the laboratory. (Baeyer’s reagent, alkaline KMnO4).
  • for detecting halides in qualitative analysis.
  • in volumetric analysis for the estimation of H2O2, FeSO4 etc.)

Question 66.
Write the formula of chromite ore.
Answer:
FeOCr2O3.

Question 67.
How is potassium dichromate manufactured from chromite ore (FeOCr2O3)?
Answer:
Manufacture of potassium dichromate (K2Cr2O2) from chrome iron ore (FeOCr2O3) involves following steps :
(1) Concentration of ore : The chromite ore (FeOCr2O3) is powdered and washed with current of water.
(2) Conversion of chromite ore into sodium chromate : The concentrated ore is mixed with anhydrous sodium carbonate (Na2CO3) and a flux of lime in excess air and heated in a reverberatory furnace.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 36
Sodium chromate (Na2CrO4) formed in the reaction is then extracted with water so that Na2CrO4 dissolves into solution and insoluble substances separate out.
(3) Conversion of Na2CrO4 into sodium dichromate (Na2Cr4O7) : Na2CrO4 solution is acidified with concentrated H2SO2, so that sodium chromate is converted into sodium dichromate.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 37
Less soluble sodium sulphate crystallises out as Na2SO4.10H2O. which is filtered off.
(4) Conversion of Na2Cr2O7 into K2Cr2O7 : Concentrated solution of Na2Cr2O7 is treated with KCl on by double decomposition, K2Cr2O7 is obtained.
Na2Cr2O7 + 2KCl → K2Cr2O7 + 2NaCl
On concentrating and cooling the solution, less soluble orange coloured K2Cr2O7 crystallises out which is filtered and purified by recrystallisation.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 68.
What happens when hydrogen sulphide gas (H2S) is passed through acidified K2Cr2O7 solution?
Answer:
When hydrogen sulphide (H2S) gas is passed into solution of K2Cr2O7, H2S is oxidised to a pale yellow solid (precipitate) of sulphur. Orange coloured solution becomes green due to formation of chromic sulphate (green coloured).

In the reaction, H2S is oxidised to S and K2Cr2O7 is reduced to Cr2(SO4)3.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 38

Question 69.
What are the common physical properties of d-block elements?
Answer:
The common physical properties of d-block elements are :

  • All d-block elements are lustrous and shining.
  • They are hard and have high density
  • They have high melting and boiling points.
  • They are good electrical and thermal conductors.
  • They have high tensile strength and malleability.
  • They can form alloys with transition and nontransition elements
  • Many metals and their compounds are paramagnetic.
  • Most of the metals are efficient catalysts.

Question 70.
What are the common chemical properties of d-block elements?
Answer:
The common chemical properties of the d-block elements are :

  • All d-block elements are electropositive metals.
  • They exhibit variable oxidation states and form coloured salts and complexes.
  • They are good reducing agents.
  • They form insoluble oxides and hydroxides.
  • Iron, cobalt, copper, molybdenum and zinc are biologically important metals.
  • They catalyse biological reactions.

Question 71.
Give examples to show that elements of first row of d-block elements differ from second and third row with respect to the stabilisation of higher oxidation states.
Answer:

  • Highest oxidation state for the first row element is + 7 as in Mn.
    For the second row, the highest oxidation state is + 8 as in Ru (RuO4).
    For the third row, the highest oxidation state is + 8 as in Os (OsO4).
  • Compounds of Mo(V) of 2nd row and W(VI) of 3rd row of transitional elements are more stable than Cr(VI) and Mn (VIII) of first row elements.

Question 72.
How do metals occur in nature?
Answer:
In nature, few metals occur in earth’s crust in free state or native state while other metals occur in the combined form.
(1) Elements in free state or native state : The metals which are non-reactive with air, water, CO2 and non-metals occur in free state or native state. For example, gold, platinum, palladium occur in free state. Metals like Cu, Ag and Hg occur partly in the free state.

(2) Combined form : The metals which are reactive occur in the combined state with other elements forming compounds like oxides, sulphides, sulphates, carbonates, silicates, etc.

Question 73.
What are minerals?
Answer:
Minerals : They are naturally occurring chemical substances in the earth’s crust containing metal in free state or in combined form and obtainable from mining are called minerals. For example, haematite Fe203, galena PbS, etc.

Question 74.
What are ores?
Answer:
Ores : The minerals containing a high percentage of metals from which metals can be profitably extracted are called ores.
[Note : Every ore is a mineral but every mineral is not an ore.]

Question 75.
Write names of minerals and ores of Iron, Copper and Zinc.
Answer:

Metals Mineral Ore
Iron Haematite Fe2O3
Magnetite Fe3O4
Limonite 2Fe2O3, 3H2O
Iron pyrites FeS2
Siderite FeCO3
Haematite
Copper Chalcopyrite CuFeS2 Chalcocite Cuprite Cu2O Chalcopyrite
Chalcocite
Zinc Zinc blende ZnS
Zincite ZnO
Calamine ZnCO3
Zinc blende

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 76.
What is metallurgy?
Answer:
Metallurgy : The process of extraction of metal in a pure state from its ore is called metallurgy.

Question 77.
Define the following:
(1) Pyrometallurgy
(2) Hydrometallurgy
(3) Electrometallurgy.
Answer:

  1. Pyrometallurgy : It is a process of extraction of metal from metal oxide from concentrated ore by reduction with a suitable reducing agent like carbon, hydrogen, aluminium, etc. at high temperature.
  2. Hydrometallurgy : It is a process of extraction of metals by converting their ores into aqueous solutions of metal compounds and reducing them by suitable reducing agents.
  3. Electrometallurgy : It is a process of extraction of highly electropositive metals like Na, K, Al, etc. by electrolysis of fused compounds of the metals where metal ions are reduced at cathode forming metals.

Question 78.
What is gangue?
Answer:
Gangue : The earthly and undesired impurities of various substances like sand (SiO2), metal oxides, etc. present in the ore are called gangue or matrix.

Question 79.
Define concentration of an ore.
Answer:
Concentration : A process of removal of gangue or unwanted impurities from the ore is called concentration of an ore. It is also called benefaction or dressing of an ore.

Question 80.
What are common methods of concentration of an ore?
Answer:
The concentration of an ore involves different methods depending upon the differences in physical properties of compounds or the metal present and the nature of the gangue.

The common methods of concentration of ore are as follows :

  1. Gravity separation or hydraulic washing :
    This can be carried out by two processes as follows :

    • Hydraulic washing by using Wilfley’s table method
    • Hydraulic classifier methods.
  2. Magnetic separation
  3. Froth floatation process.
  4. Leaching.

The method depends upon the nature of ore.

Question 81.
What is leaching?
Answer:
Leaching : ft is a (chemical) process used in the concentration of an ore by extracting soluble material from an insoluble solid by dissolving in a suitable solvent. This method is used in the concentration process of ores of Al, Ag, Au, etc.

Question 82.
What is roasting of an ore?
Answer:
Roasting : It is a process of strongly heating a concentrated ore in the excess of air below melting point of metal, to convert it into oxide form. It is used for a sulphide ore. For example, ZnS ore on roasting forms ZnO.

Question 83.
Write an equation to show how zinc blende (ZnS) is converted to ZnO.
Answer:
When zinc blende is roasted, it is converted to ZnO.
\(\mathrm{ZnS}+\mathrm{O}_{2} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{ZnO}+\mathrm{SO}_{2}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 84.
Explain the term : Smelting
Answer:
Smelting : The process of extraction of a metal from its ore by heating and melting at high temperature is called smelting. Reduction of ore is carried out during smelting.

Question 85.
What is calcination?
Answer:
Calcination is a process in which the ore is heated to a high temperature below the melting point of the metal in the absence of air or limited supply of air in a reverberatory furnace.

It is generally used for carbonate and hydrated oxides to convert them into anhydrous oxides.

Question 86.
Define the terms :
(1) Flux
(2) Slag
Answer:
(1) Flux : A flux is a chemical substance which is added to the concentrated ore during smelting in order to remove the gangue or impurities by chemical reaction forming a fusible mass called slag.
(2) Slag : It is a waste product formed by combination of a flux and gangue (or impurities) during the extraction of metals by smelting process.

Iron is the fourth most abundant element in the earth’s crust.

Question 87.
What is the composition of haematite ore?
Answer:
Composition of Haematite ore is Fe2O3 + SiO2 + Al2O3 + phosphates

Question 88.
Which impurities (gangue) are present in haematite ore?
Answer:
SiO2 and Al2O3 are the impurities present in the haematite ore.

Question 89.
Which reducing agents are used to reduce haematite ore into metallic iron?
Answer:
Haematite ore is reduced using coke and CO. Carbon in the coke is converted to carbon monoxide. Carbon and carbon monoxide together reduce Fe203 to metallic iron.

Fe2O3 + 3C → 2Fe + 3CO.
Fe2O3 + 3CO → 2Fe + 3CO2.

Question 90.
Why is limestone used in the extraction of iron?
Answer:

  • The ore of iron contains acidic gangue or impurity of silica, SiO2.
  • To remove silica gangue, basic flux like calcium oxide CaO, is required, which is obtained from the decomposition of limestone, CaCO3. \(\mathrm{CaCO}_{3} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{CaO}+\mathrm{CO}_{2}\)
  • Silica reacts with CaO and forms a fusible slag of CaSiO3.
    \(\mathrm{SiO}_{2}+\mathrm{CaO} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{CaSiO}_{3}\)

Therefore in the extraction of iron, lime is used.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 91.
Name the furnace in which iron is extracted from Haematite ore.
Answer:
Extraction of iron is carried out in Blast furnace.

Question 92.
Explain the extraction of iron from haematite.
Answer:
Iron is mainly extracted from haematite, Fe2O3 by reduction process.
Haematite ore contains silica (SiO2), alumina (Al2O3) and phosphates as impurity or gangue.

Coke is used for the reduction of ore.

To remove acidic gangue SiO2, a basic flux CaO is used which is obtained from lime stone CaCO3.

The extraction process involves following steps :
(1) Concentration of an ore : The powdered ore is concentrated by gravity separation process by washing it in a current of water. The lighter impurities (gangue) are carried away leaving behind the ore.
(2) Roasting : The concentrated ore is heated strongly in a limited current of air. During this, moisture is removed and the impurities like S, As and phosphorus are oxidised to gaseous oxides which escape.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 41
After roasting, the ore is sintered to form small lumps.
(3) Reduction (or smelting) : The roasted or calcined ore is then reduced by heating in a blast furnace.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 42
The blast furnace is a tall cylindrical steel tower about 25 m in height and has a diameter about 5-10m lined with fire bricks inside.

Blast furnace has three parts :

  • the hearth,
  • the bosh and
  • the stack.

At the top, there is a cup and cone arrangement to introduce the ore and at the bottom, tapping hole for withdrawing molten iron and an outlet to remove a slag.

The roasted ore is mixed with coke and limestone in the approximate ratio of 12 : 5 : 3.

A blast of hot air at about 1000 K is blown from downwards to upwards by layers arrangement. The temperature range is from bottom 2000 K to 500 K at the top. The charge of ore from top and the air blast from bottom are sent simultaneously. There are three zones of temperature in which three main chemical reactions take place.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

(i) Zone of combustion : The hot air oxidises coke to CO which is an exothermic reaction, due to which the temperature of furnace rises.
C + 1/2 O2 → CO ΔH= – 220kJ
Some part of CO dissociates to give finely divided carbon and O2.
2CO → 2C + O2
The hot gases with CO rise up in the furnace and heats the charge coming down. CO acts as a fuel as well as a reducing agent.

(ii) Zone of reduction : At about 900 °C, CO reduces Fe2O3 to spongy (or porous) iron.
Fe2O3 + 3CO → 2Fe + 3CO2
Carbon also reduces partially Fe203 to Fe.
Fe2O3 + 3C → 2Fe + 3CO

(iii) Zone of slag formation : At 1200 K limestone, CaCO3 in the charge, decomposes and forms a basic flux CaO which further reacts at 1500 K with gangue (SiO2, Al2O3) and forms a slag of CaSiO3 and Ca3AlO3.
CaCO3 + CaO + CO2.
CaO + SiO2 → CaSiO3
12CaO + 2Al2O3 → 4Ca3AlO3 + 3O2

The slag is removed from the bottom of the furnace through an outlet.

(iv) Zone of fusion : The impurities in ore like MnO2 and Ca3(PO4)2 are reduced to Mn and P while SiO2 is reduced in Si. The spongy iron moving down in the furnace melts in the fusion zone and dissolves the impurities like C, Si, Mn, phosphorus and sulphure. The molten iron collects at the bottom of furnace. The lighter slag floats on the molten iron and prevents its oxidation.

The molten iron is removed and cooled in moulds. It is called pig iron or cast iron. It contains about 4% carbon.

Question 93.
Write the reaction involved in the zone of reduction in blast furnace during extraction of iron.
Answer:
Zone of reduction : At about 900 °C, CO reduces Fe2O3 to spongy (or porous) iron.
Fe2O3 + 3CO → 2Fe + 3CO2
Carbon also reduces Fe2O3 to Fe.
Fe2O3 + 3C → 2Fe + 3CO

Question 94
Write reactions involved at different temperatures in the blast furnace.
Answer:

Temperature K Change taking place in the blast furnace Reactions
1. 500 K Haematite ore loses moisture ore xH2O → ore
2. 900 K Reduction of ore by CO Fe2O3 + 3CO → 2Fe + 3CO
3. 1200K Limestone decomposes CaCO3 → CaO + CO2
4. 1500K Reduction of ore by C Fe2O3 + 3C → 2Fe + 3CO
5. 1600 K (i) Reduction of FeO by C
(ii) Fusion of iron and slag formation
FeO + C → Fe + CO
CaO + SiO2 → CaSiO3
6. 2000 K Combustion of coke 2C + O2 → CO

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 95.
What is the action of carbon on Fe203 in blast furnace?
Answer:
Fe2O3 + 3C → 2Fe + 3CO

Question 96.
What is refining of metals?
Answer:
Refining of metals : The purification of impure or crude metals by removing metallic and nonmetallic impurities is known as refining of metals. H

Question 97.
How is pure iron obtained from crude iron?
Answer:
Pure iron can be obtained by electrolytic refining.

Question 98.
Name the methods of refining of metals.
Answer:
Methods of refining of metals :

  • Electrorefining
  • Liquefaction
  • Distillation
  • Oxidation m

Question 99.
What are the factors that govern the choice of extraction technique of metals?
Answer:
The choice of extraction technique is governed by the following factors.

  • Nature of ore
  • Availability and cost of reducing agent. (Generally, cheap coke is used).
  • Availability of hydraulic power.
  • Purity of metal required.
  • Value of by-products. For example. SO2 obtained during the roasting of sulphide ores is important for the manufacture of H2SO4.

Question 100.
Which are the commercial forms of iron?
Answer:
Commercial forms of iron are :

  • Cast iron
  • wrought iron
  • steel. H

Question 101.
(A) What are f-block elements?
(B) What are inner transition elements?
Answer:
(A)

  • Elements in which differentiating electron enters into the pre-penultimate shell the (n – 2) f-orbital are known as f.block elements.
  • They include 28 elements with atomic numbers ranging from 58-71 and atomic numbers 90 to 103 collectively.
  • There are two f-series or two f-block elements, namely 4f and 5f series.
  • The f-block includes two inner transition series namely the lanthanoid series. Cerium (58) to LuteUum (71) or the 4 f-block elements and the actinoid series. Thorium (90) to I.awrencium (103) or the 5f block elements.

(B) f-block elements are called inner transition elements since f-orbital lies much inside the f-orbital in relation to the transition metals, These elements have 1 to 14 electrons in their f-orbital.

Question 102.
What are fIrst inner transition elements?
Answer:

  1. 4f-hlock elements are called (first) inner transition elements and have partly filled inner orbitaIs or (4f) orbitais.
  2. They have general outer electronic configuration \((n-2) f^{1-14},(n-1) d^{0-1}, n s^{2}\).
  3. There are two f-series, namely 4f and 5f series, called lanthanoids and acùnoids respectively.
  4. They shos intermediate properties as compared to electropositive s-block elements and electronegative p-block elements. Hence they are called (first) inner transition elements.

Question 103.
What are lanthanoids (or lanthanides)?
OR
What is the lanthanoid series?
Answer:

  • Lanthanoids or Lanthanoid series or Lanthanones : The series of fourteen elements from 58Ce to 71Lu in which a differentiating electron enters 4f sub-shell and follows lanthanum is called lanthanoid series and the elements are called lanthanoids.
  • They have general electronic configuration, [Xe] 4f1-14 ,5d0-1, 6s2.
  • They follow Lanthanum (Z = 57) in 3d-series.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 104.
What are rare earths?
Answer:

  • Lanthanoids or 4f-block elements are called rare earths.
  • Lanthanoids are never found in free state, and their minerals are not pure.
  • They exhibit similar chemical properties hence cannot be extracted and separated by normal metallurgical processes.
  • Lanthanoid metals are available on small scale. Therefore they are called rare earths.

Question 105.
Explain the position of lanthanoids in the periodic table.
OR
How is the position of lanthanoids justified?
Answer:

  1. Position of Lanthanoids in the periodic table : Group – 3; Period – 6.
  2. They interrupt the third transition series of t/-block elements (i.e. 5 d series) in the sixth period.
  3. They are 14 elements from 58Ce to 71Lu and their position is in between La and Hf. Since they follow lanthanum, they are called lanthanoids.
  4. They are called 4f-series elements and for the convenience, they are placed separately below the main periodic table.
  5. The actual position of lanthanoids is in between Lanthanum (Z = 57) and Hafnium (Z = 72).
  6. Their position is justified due to following reasons :
    • All these elements have the same electronic configuration in ultimate and penultimate shells, one electron in 5d-orbital and two electrons in 6s-orbital.
    • Group valence of all lanthanoids is 3.
    • All lanthanoids from 58Ce to 71Lu have similar physical and chemical properties.

Question 106.
Explain the meaning of inner-transition series.
Answer:
A series of f-block elements having electronic configuration (n – 2)f1-14 (n – I) d0-1 ns2 placed separately in the periodic table represents inner transition series. The f-orbitals lie much inside the e/ orbitals.

Since the last electron enters pre-penultimate shell, these elements are inner transition elements.

There are two inner transition series as follows :
4f-series 58Ce → 71Lu
5f-series 90Th → 103Lr

Question 107.
Draw a skeletal diagram of the periodic table to show the position of d and/- block elements.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 44

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 108.
What are the properties of lanthanoids?
Answer:

  • Lanthanoids are soft metak with silvery white colour, Colour and brightness reduces on exposure to air.
  • They are good conductors of heat and electricity.
  • Except promethium (Pm), all are non-radioactive in nature.
  • The atomic and ionic radii decrease from La to Lu. (Lanthanoid contraction).
  • Coordination numbers arc greater than 6.
  • They are paramagnetic.
  • They become ferromagnetic at lower temperature.
  • Their magnetic and optical properties are independent of environment.
  • They are called rare earths as their exiractioli was difficult.
  • They are abundant in earth’s crust
  • All lanthanoids fonn hydroxides which are ionic and basic. l3asicity decreases with atomic number,
  • They react with nitrogen to give nitrides and with halogen to give halides.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 45
  • When heated with carbon at very high temperature give carbides
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 46

Question 109.
Explain the variations in ionisation enthalpy of lanthanoids.
Answer:

  • The first ionisation enthalpy of lanthanoids is nearly same. It is very high for Gd and Yb.
  • The ionisation enthalpy increases from first (IE1] to third (IE3).

First, second and third ionization enthalpies of lanthanoids in kj/mol

Lanthanoid IE1 IE2 IE3
La 538.1 1067 1850.3
Ce 528.0 1047 1949
Pr 523.0 1018 2086
Nd 530.0 1034 2130
Pm 536.0 1052 2150
Sm 543.0 1068 2260
Eu 547.0 1085 2400
Gd 592.0 1170 1990
Tb 564.0 1112 2110
Dy 572.0 1126 2200
Ho 581.0 1139 2200
Er 589.0 1151 2190
Tm 596.7 1163 2284
Yb 603.4 1175 2415
Lu 523.5 1340 2022

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 110.
Give the general electronic configuration of 4f-series elements (OR lanthanoids).
Answer:

  • The general electronic configuration of 4f-series elements is, Ln[Xe]54 4f1-14 5d0-1 6s2 where Ln is a lanthanoid.
  • Xenon has electronic configuration, [Xe] : Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10 4s2 4p6 4d10 5s2 5p6.
  • In lanthanoids, the differentiating electron enters prepenultimate shell, 4f m

Question 111.
What are the important features of the electronic configuration of lanthanoids?
Answer:

  1. Lanthanoids show two types of electronic configurations
    (a) an expected or idealized
    (b) an observed electronic configuration.
    In the idealized electronic configuration, the filling of the 4/-orbitals is regular but in the observed configuration, there is the shift of a single electron from 5d to 4/ sub-shell.
  2. Lanthanum (57) has an electronic configuration [Xe] 4f° 5d16s2. It does not have any f-electron.
  3. The next incoming electron does not enter the 5d sub-shell but goes to the 4f sub-shell.
  4. 14 electrons are progressively filled in the 4f sub-shell as the atomic number increases by one unit from La to Lu.
  5. La, Gd and Lu are the only elements which possess one electron in a 5d orbital, while in all other lanthanoids the 5d sub-shell is empty.
  6. La-(4f°), Gd-(4f7) and Lu-(4f14) posses extra stability due to their empty, half-filled and completely filled 4f-orbitals respectively.
  7. The 4f-electrons in the prepenultimate shell are shielded by the outermost higher orbitals, 5s2, 5p6, 5d1, 6s2, i.e. by eleven electrons, hence they are less effective in chemical bonding.

Electronic configuration (Idealised and observed)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 48
[Xe]54 ls22s22p63s23p63d104s24p64d105s25p6

Question 112.
Write the expected electronic configuration of (a) Nd (Z = 60) (b) Tm (Z = 69).
Answer:
Expected electronic configuration :
(a) Nd = [Xe] 4f3 5d1 6s2
(b) Tm= [Xe] 4f145d16s2

Question 113.
Write electronic configurations of
(i) Gd
(ii) Yb.
Answer:
(i) 64Gd [Xe] 4f75d16s2 (Observed)
(ii) 70Yb [Xe] 4f145d°6s2 (Observed)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 114.
Write expected and observed electronic configurations of
(i) Ce
(ii) Tb.
Answer:

Element Expected (Idealised) Observed
(i) 58Ce [Xe] 4f15d16s2 [Xe] 4f25d°6s2
(ii) 65Tb [Xe] 4f85d16s2 [Xe] 4f95d°6s2

Question 115.
Why are the expected and observed ground state electronic configurations of gadolinium and lawrencium same?
Answer:

  • The degenerate orbitals like 4f and 5f acquire extra stability when they are half filled (4f7) or completely filled (5f14).
  • The expected and observed electronic configuration of gadolinium is, 64Gd [Xe] 4f7 5d1 6s2.
  • The expected and observed electronic configuration of lawrencium is 103Lr [Rn] 5f14 6d1 7s2.

Question 116.
Explain oxidation states of lanthanoids.
Answer:

  • The common oxidation state of the Lanthanoids is 3 + due to the loss of 2 electrons from outermost 6s orbital and one electron from the penultimate 5d sub-shell.
  • Gd3+ and Lu3+ show extra stability due to their half-filled and completely filled f-orbitals, Gd3+ = [Xe]4f7, Lu3+ = [Xe]4f14
  • Ce and Tb attain the 4f° and 4f7configurations in the 4 + oxidation states. Eu and Yb attain the 4f7 and 4f14 configurations in the 2 + oxidation states. Sm and Tm also show the 2+ oxidation state although their stability can be explained based on thermodynamic factors.
  • Some lanthanoids show 2 + and 4 + oxidation states even though they do not have stable electronic configuration of 4f°, 4f7 or 4f14. E.g. Pr4+ (4f1), Nd2+ (4f4), Sm2+ (4f6), Dy4+ (4f8) etc

Question 117.
Write the. electronic configuration of the following ions :
(1) La3 + ;
(2) Gd3+;
(3) Eu3+;
(4) Ce3+.
Answer:
(1) La3 + = [Xe]
(2) Gd3+ = [Xe] 4f7
(3) Eu3+ = [Xe] 4f6
(4) Ce3+ = |Xe] 4f1

Question 118.
Write the electronic configuration of
(1) Nd2+
(2) Nd3+
(3) Nd4+.
Answer:
(1) Nd2+ [Xe] 4f4
(2) Nd3+ [Xe] 4f3
(3) Nd4+ [Xe] 4f2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 119.
Among the following lathanoids, which elements show only one oxidation state 3 +? Why? Dy, Gd, Yb, Lu.
Answer:
Gd and Lu show only one oxidation state 3 +, since they acquire electronic configurations with extra stability namely 4f7 and 4f14 respectively.

Question 120.
Write the expected electronic configurations of :
(1) europium (Z = 63),
(2) erbium (Z = 68).
Answer:
(1) Europium (63Eu) [Xe]544f6 5d1 6s2
(2) Erbium (68Er) [Xe]544f11 5d1 6s2

Question 121.
Why does lanthanum form La3+ ion, while cerium forms Ce4+ ion? (Atomic number La = 57 and Ce = 58).
Answer:

  1. Electronic configuration Lanthanum is La [Xe] 4f° 5d1 6s2. By losing three electrons, La acquires stable electronic configuration of Xe and forms La3+.
  2. Electronic configuration of Cerium is Ce [Xe] 4f1 5d1 6s2. By losing four electrons, Ce acquires stable electronic configuration of Xe and forms Ce4+.

Question 122.
63EU and 70Yb show 2 + oxidation state. Explain.
Answer:
63EU has electronic configuration, [Xe] 4f7 5d°6s2. By losing 2 electrons from 6s orbital, it acquires stable configuration and 4f-orbital is half-filled.
70Yb has electronic configuration, [Xe] 4f14 5d° 6s2. By losing 2 electrons from 6 s orbital, it acquires stable configuration and 4/-orbital is completely filled.
Hence Eu and Yb show 2 + oxidation states.

Question 123.
Display electronic configuration, atomic and ionic radii of lanthanoids.
Answer:
Answers are given in bold.

Electronic configuration and atomic ionic radii of lanthanoids
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 49

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 124.
Explain the trend in atomic and ionic sizes of lanthanoids.
Answer:

  • From 57La (187 pm) to first element of 4f-series 58Ce (183 pm), the contraction in atomic radius is very large, 4 pm.
  • But from Ce onwards as atomic number increases atomic radius decreases very steadily so that total decrease in atomic radius from Ce to Lu is only 10 pm.
  • In case of tripositive ions due to large pull by nucleus, the decrease in ionic radii is slightly more, i.e. 18 pm. For example, Ce3+ (103 pm) to Lu3+ (85 pm ).
  • Hence all lanthanoids have similar properties. Therefore they cannot be separated from each other easily by normal metallurgical methods but require special methods.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 50

Question 125.
What is meant by lanthanoid contraction?
Answer:
Lanthanoid contraction : The gradual decrease in atomic and ionic radii of lanthanoids with the increase in atomic number is called lanthanoid contraction.

Question 153.
Explain the causes of the lanthanoid contraction.
Answer:
The causes of the lanthanoid contraction are as follows :

  • As the atomic number of lanthanoids or 4f-block elements increases the positive nuclear charge increases and correspondingly electrons are added to the prepenultimate 4f sub-shell.
  • The attraction of nucleus on 4 f-electrons increases with the increase in atomic number.
  • The outer eleven electrons namely, 5s2, 5p6, 5d3 and 6s2 do not shield inner 4 f-electrons from the nucleus.
  • There is imperfect shielding of each 4f-electron from other 4 f-electrons.
  • As compared to d sub-shell, the extent of shielding for 4 f-electrons is less.
  • Due to these cumulative effects, 4 f-electrons experience greater nuclear attraction and hence valence shell is pulled towards the nucleus to the greater extent decreasing atomic and ionic radii appreciably.
  • From 57La to 58Ce, there is a sudden contraction in atomic radius from 187 pm to 183 pm but the further decrease up to the last 4f-element, 71Lu is comparatively low (about 10 pm).

Question 126.
Explain lanthanoid contraction effect with respect to (1) decrease in basicity, (2) ionic radii of post-lanthanoids.
Answer:
The lanthanoid contraction has a definite effect on the properties of lanthanoids as well as on the properties of post-lanthanoid elements.
(1) Decrease in basicity :

  • In lanthanoids due to lanthanoid contraction, as the atomic number increases, the size of the lanthanoid atoms and their try positive ions decreases, i.e. from La3+ to Lu3+.
  • As size of the cation decreases, according to Fajan’s rule, the polarizability increases and thus the covalent character of the M-OH bond increases, and ionic character decreases.
  • Therefore the basic nature of the hydroxides decreases.
  • Basicity and ionic character decrease in the order La(OH)3 > Ce(OH)3 > … Lu(OH)3.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

(2) Ionic radii of post-lanthanoids :

  • Elements following the lanthanoids in the 6th period (third transition series, i.e. 5d-series) are known as post-lanthanoids.
  • Due to lanthanoid contraction the atomic radii (size) of elements which follow lanthanum in the 6th period (3rd transition series – Hf, Ta, W, Re)-are similar to the elements of the 5th period (4d-series Zr, Nb Mo, Tc).
  • Due to similarity in their size, post-lanthanoid elements (5d-series) have closely similar properties to the elements of the 2nd transition series (4d-series) which lie immediately above them.
  • Pairs of elements namely Zr-Hf(Gr-4), Nb-Ta (Gr-5), Mo-W(Gr-6), Tc-Re (Gr-7) are called chemical twins since they possess almost identical sizes and similar properties.

Question 127.
Why do lanthanoids form coloured compounds?
Answer:

  • The colour in lanthanoid ions is due to the presence of unpaired electrons in partially filled 4f sub-shells.
  • Due to the absorption of radiations in the visible region there arises the excitations of the unpaired electrons from f-orbital of lower energy to the f-orbital of higher energy-giving f → f transitions.
  • The observed colour is complementary to the colour of the light absorbed.
  • The colour of try positive ions (M3+) depends upon the number of unpaired electrons in f-orbitals. Hence the lanthanoid ions having equal number of unpaired electrons have similar colour.
  • The colours of M3+ ions of the first seven lanthanoids, La3+ to Eu3+ are similar to those of seven elements Lu3+ to Tb3+ in the reverse order.

Question 128.
Explain, why Ce3+ ion is colourless.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of Ce3+ is, [Xe] 4f7
  • Even though there is one unpaired electron in 4f sub-shell, the f → f transition involves very low energy. Hence, Ce3+ ion does not absorb radiation in the visible region.

Therefore Ce3+ ion is colourless.

Question 129.
Explain why Gd3+ is colourless.
Answer:

  • Gd3+ has electronic configuration, [Xe] 4f7
  • Due to extra stability of half filled orbital, it does not allow f → f transition, and hence does not absorb radiations in the visible region.

Hence Gd3+ is colourless.

Question 130.
The salts of (1) La3+ and (2) Lu3+ are colourless. Explain.
Answer:
(1) (i) La3+ has electronic configuration, [Xe] 4f°
(ii) Since there are no unpaired electrons in 4 f-orbital, f → f transition is not possible. Hence La3+ ions do not absorb radiations in visible region, and they are colourless.

(2) (i) LU3+ has electronic configuration [Xe] 4 f14
(ii) Since there are no unpaired electrons in 4f-orbital, f → f transition is not possible. Hence Lu3+ ions do not absorb radiations in visible region and they are colourless.

Question 131.
Explain giving examples, the colour of nf electrons is about the same as those having (14-n) electrons.
Answer:
(1) Consider Pr3+ and Tm3+ ions.
Tm3+ (4f12) has nf electron 12 electrons.
Pr2+ (4f2) has (14 – n) = (14 – 2) = 12 electrons. Both, Tm3+ and Pr3+ are green.

(2) Consider Nd3+ and Er3+ ions. Er3+ (4f11) has nf electrons 11.
Nd3+ (4f3) has (14 – n) is (14 – 3) = 11 electrons. These both ions Er3+, Na3+ are pink in colour.

Question 132.
Lu3+ has observed magnetic moment zero. How many unpaired electrons are present?
Answer:
Since magnetic moment is zero, it has no unpaired electrons.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 133.
What are the application of lanthanoids?
Answer:

  1. Lanthanoid compounds are used inside the colour television tubes and computer monitor. For example mixed oxide (Eu, Y)2 O3 releases an intense red colour when bombarded with high energy electrons.
  2. Lanthanoid ions are used as active ions in luminescent materials. (Optoelectronic application)
  3. Nd : YAG laser is the most notable application. (Nd : YAG = neodymium doped ytterium aluminium garnet)
  4. Erbium doped fibre amplifiers are used in optical fibre communication systems.
  5. Lanthanoids are used in cars, superconductors and permanent magnets.

Question 134.
What are actinoids? Give their general electronic configuration.
Answer:

  • Actinoids : The series of fourteen elements from 90Th to 103Lr which follow actinium (89Ac) and in which differentiating electrons are progressively filled in 5f-orbitals in prepenultimate shell are called actinoids.
  • Their general electronic configuration is, [Rn]86 5f1-14 6d0-1 7s2.

Question 135.
Why are actinoids called inner transition elements?
Answer:

  • Actinoids are 5f-series elements in which electrons progressively enter into 5f-orbitals, which are inner orbitals.
  • They have electronic configuration [Rn]86 5f1-14 6d0-1 7s2.
  • They show intermediate properties as compared to electropositive 5-block elements and electronegative p-block elements. Hence they are called second inner transition elements.

Question 136.
Explain the position of actinoids in the periodic table.
OR
What is the position of actinoids in the periodic table?
Answer:

  • Position of actinoids in the periodic table : Group-3; Period-7.
  • They interrupt the fourth transition series (6d series) in the seventh period in the periodic table.
  • After Actinium, 89Ac which has electronic configuration [Rn] 6d17s2, the electrons enter progressively 5f orbital and they have general electronic configuration, [Rn] 5f1 – 14 6d0 – 1 7s2.
  • They are fourteen elements from 90Th to 103Lr and since they follow actinium, they are called actinoids.
  • They are called 5f series or second inner transition series elements and for the convenience they are placed separately below the periodic table.

Question 137.
Write idealised and observed electronic configuration of actinoids.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 52

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 138.
Explain the oxidation states of actinoids.
Answer:

  • Due to availability of electrons in 5f, 6d and 7s sublevels, lanthanoids show varied oxidation states.
  • The most common oxidation state is + 3 due to loss of one electron from 6d and two electrons from 6s-orbitals.
  • Ac, Th and Am show + 2 oxidation state.
  • Th, Pa, U, Np, Pu, Am and Cm show + 4 oxidation state.
  • Np and Pu show the highest oxidation state + 7.
  • U, Np, Bk, Cm and Am show stable oxidation state + 4.
  • In + 6 oxidation state, due to high charge density the actinoid ions form oxygenated ions, e.g. \(\mathrm{UO}_{2}^{+}, \mathrm{NpO}_{2}^{+},\) etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 53

Question 139.
Why do actinoids show variable oxidation states?
Answer:

  • The large number of variable oxidation states of actinoids is due to very small energy difference between 5f, 6d and 7s subshells.
  • The electronic configuration of actinoids is, [Rn] 5f1-14 6d0-1, 7s2
  • Due to the loss of three electrons from 6d1 and 7s2, the common oxidation state is + 3, but due to further loss of electrons from 5f subshell, actinoids show higher oxidation states.
  • The variable oxidation states are + 2 to + 7.

Electronic configuration of actinoids and their ionic radii in + 3 oxidation state
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 54

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 140.
What is meant by actinoid contraction?
Answer:
Actinoid contraction: The gradual decrease in atomic and ionic radii of actinoids with the increase in atomic number is called actinoid contraction.

Question 141.
The extent of actinoid contraction is greater than lanthanoid contraction. Explain Why?
Answer:

  • The electronic configurations of :
    Lanthanoids [Xe] 4f1 – 14 5d0 – 1 6s2
    Actinoids [Rn] 5f1 – 14, 6d0 – 1 7s2
  • The mutual screening offered in case of 5f-electrons is less than that in the 4f-electrons.
  • Hence, the outer orbitals are pulled to the greater extent by nuclei in actinoids (5f-series) than in lanthanoids (4f-series).
  • Therefore, actinoid contraction is greater than lanthanoid contraction.

Question 142.
Describe the important properties of actinoids.
Answer:
Properties of actinoids :

  • Actinoids are silvery white ( similar to lanthanoids).
  • They are highly reactive radioactive elements.
  • Most of these elements are not found in nature. They are radioactive and man made.
  • They experience decrease in the atomic and ionic radii from Ac to Lw, known as actinoid contraction.
  • The common oxidation state is +3. Elements of the first half of the series exhibit higher oxidation states.

Question 143.
What are the applications of actinoids?
Answer:

  • Thorium oxide (ThO2) with 1% CeO2 is used as a major source of indoor lighting, as well as for outdoor camping.
  • Uranium is used in the nuclear reactors.
  • The isotopes of Thorium and Uranium have very long half-life, so that we get very negligible radiation from them: Hence they can be used safely.

Question 144.
What are transuranic elements?
Answer:

  • The man-made elements heavier titan Uranium (Z = 92) in the Actinoid señes are called transuranic elements.
  • These are synthetically or artificially prepared (man-made) elements starting from Neptunium (Z= 93).
  • Transuranic elements arc generally considered to be from Neptunium (Z = 93) to Lawrencium (Z = 103).
  • Recently elements from atomic number 104 (Rf) to atomic number 118 (Og) or (Uuo) in 6 d series have also been identified as transuranic elements.
  • All transuranic elements are radioactive.

Question 145.
What are post actinoid elements?
Answer:

  • Elements from atomic number 104 to 118 are called postactinoid elements.
  • The post actinoid elements known so far are transition metals.
  • They can be synthesised in the nuclear reactions.
  • As they have very short half life period, it is difficult to study their chemistry.
  • Ruiherfordium forms a chloride (RfCl4) similar to zirconium and hafnium in + 4 oxidation state.
  • Dubniurn resembles niobium and protactinium.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 146.
Name the transuranic elements.
Answer:
Names of transuranic elements

Name Symbol Atomic number
Neptunium Np 93
Plutonium Pu 94
Americium Am 95
Curium Cm 96
Berkelium Bk 97
Californium Cf 98
Einsteinium Es 99
Ferminum Fm 100
Mendelevium Md 101
Nobelium No 102
Lawrencium Lr 103
Rutherfordium Rf 104
Dubnium Db 105
Seaborgium Sg 106
Bohrium Bh 107
Hassium Hs 108
Meitnerium Mt 109
Darmstadtium Uun/Ds 110
Roentgenium Uuu/Rg 111
Copernicium Uub/Cn 112
Ununtrium Uut 113
Ununquadium Uuq 114
Ununpentium Uup 115
Ununhexium Uuh 116
Ununseptium Uus 117
Ununoctium Uuo 118

In the transuranic elements, elements from atomic number 93 to 103 are actinoids and from atomic number 104 to 118 are called postactinoid elements.

Question 147.
What are the similarities between lanthanides and actinides.
Answer:
Lanthanides and actinides show similarities as follows :

  • Both, lanthanides and actinides show+ 3 oxidation state.
  • In both the series, the f-orbitals are filled gradually.
  • Ionic radius of the elements in both the series decreases with increase in atomic number.
  • Electronegativity in both the series is low for all the elements.
  • They all are highly reactive.
  • The nitrates, perchlorates and sulphates of all elements are soluble while their hydroxides, theorides and carbonates
    are insoluble.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 148.
Differentiate between lanthanoids and actinoids.
Answer:

Lanthanoids Actinoids
Electronic configuration [Xe] 4f1-14 5d0-1, 6s2 Electronic configuration [Rn] 5f1-14 6d0-1, 7s2
The differentiating electron enters the 4f subshell. The differentiating electron enters the 5f subshell.
Except for Promethium all other elements occur in nature. Except for Uranium and Thorium, all others are synthesized in the laboratory.
The binding energy of 4f electrons is higher. 5f-orbitals have lower binding energy.
Only Promethium is radioactive. All elements are radioactive.
Besides 3 + oxidation state they show 2 + and 4 + oxidation states. Besides 3 + oxidation state they show 2 + , 4 + , 5 + , 6 + , 7 + oxidation states.
They have a less tendency to form complexes. They have greater tendency to form complexes.
Many lanthanoid ions are colourless. Their colour is not as deep and sharp as actinoids. Actinoids are coloured ions. Their colour is deep, e.g. U3+ is red and U4+ is green.
Lanthanoids cannot form oxo-cations. Actinoids form oxo-cations such as – UO2+, PuO2+, UO22+, PuO22+.
Lanthanoid hydroxides are less basic. Actinoid hydroxides are more basic.
Lanthanoid contraction is relatively less. Actinoid contraction from element to element is comparatively more.
Mutual shielding of 4f electrons is more. Mutual shielding effect of 5f electrons is less.

Question 149.
Compare Pre-transition metals, Lanthanoid and transition metals.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 55

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 150.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each sub-question :

1. In transition elements, the different electron enters into
(a) ns subshell
(b) np subshell
(c) (n – 1) d subshell
(d) (n – 2)f subshell
Answer:
(c) (n – 1) d subshell

2. Chromium (Z = 24) has electronic configuration
(a) [Ar]4dA 4s2
(b) [Ar] 4d5 451
(c) [Ar] 3d5 3s1
(d) [Ar] 3d5 4s1
Answer:
(d) [Ar] 3d5 4s1

3. Manganese achieves the highest oxidation state in its compounds
(a) Mn3O4
(b) KMnO4
(c) K2MnO4
(d) MnO2
Answer:
(b) KMnO4

4. The group which belongs to transition series is
(a) 2
(b) 7
(c) 13
(d) 15
Answer:
(b) 7

5. The last electron of transition element is called
(a) s-electron
(b) p-electron
(c) d-electron
(d) f-electron
Answer:
(c) d-electron

6. Which one of the following elements does NOT belong to first transition series?
(a) Fe
(b) V
(c) Ag
(d) Cu
Answer:
(c) Ag

7. The incomplete d-series is
(a) 3d
(b) 4d
(c) 5d
(d) 6d
Answer:
(d) 6d

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

8. The electronic configuration of Sc is
(a) [Ar] 3d2 4s2
(b) [Ar] 3d1 4s2
(c) [Kr] 3d1 4s2
(d) [Kr] 3d2 4s1
Answer:
(b) [Ar] 3d1 4s2

9. The observed electronic configuration of copper is
(a) [Ar]18 3d9 4s2
(b) [Kr] 3d10 451
(c) [Kr] 3d9 4s2
(d) [Ar] 3d10 451
Answer:
(d) [Ar] 3d10 451

10. Fe belongs to the
(a) 3d-transition series elements
(b) 4d-transition series elements
(c) 5d-transition series elements
(d) 6d-transition series elements
Answer:
(a) 3d-transition series elements

11. Which one of the following elements does not exhibit variable oxidation states?
(a) Iron
(b) Copper
(c) Zinc
(d) Manganese
Answer:
(c) Zinc

12. In KMnO4, oxidation number of Mn is
(a) 2+
(b) 4 +
(c) 6 +
(d) 7+
Answer:
(d) 7+

13. Which one of the following transition elements shows the highest oxidation state?
(a) Sc
(b) Ti
(c) Mn
(d) Zn
Answer:
(c) Mn

14. The colour of transition metal ions is due to
(a) s → s transition
(b) d → d transition
(c) p → p transition
(d) f → f transition
Answer:
(b) d → d transition

15. Which one of the following compounds is expected to be coloured?
(a) AgNO3
(b) CuSO4
(c) ZnCl2
(d) CuCl
Answer:
(b) CuSO4

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

16. The metal ion which is NOT coloured, is
(a) Fe3+
(b) V2+
(c) Zn2+
(d) Ti3+
Answer:
(c) Zn2+

17. A pair of coloured ion is
(a)Cu2+, Zn2+
(b)Cr3+ , Cu+
(c) Cd2+, Mn5+
(d) Fe2+, Fe3+
Answer:
(d) Fe2+, Fe3+

18. The highest oxidation state is shown by
(a) Fe
(b) Mn
(c) Os
(d) Cr
Answer:
(c) Os

19. Transition elements are good catalysts since
(a) they show variable oxidation states
(b) they have partially filled d-orbitals
(c) they have low I.P
(d) they have small atomic radii
Answer:
(a) they show variable oxidation states

20. Highest magnetic moment is shown by the ion
(a) V3+
(b) Co3+
(c) Fe3+
(d) Cr3+
Answer:
(c) Fe3+

21. The most common oxidation state of lanthanoids is
(a) +4
(b) +3
(c) +6
(d) +2
Answer:
(b) +3

22. Which one of the following elements belong to the actinoid series?
(a) Cerium
(b) Lutetium
(c) Thorium
(d) Lanthanum
Answer:
(c) Thorium

23. The total number of elements in each of f-series is
(a) 10
(b) 12
(c) 14
(d) 15
Answer:
(c) 14

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

24. The general electronic configuration of Lanthanoids is
(a) [Xe] 4f1 – 14 5d0 – 1 6s2
(b) [Xe] 4f2 – 14 5d0 – 1 6s2
(c) [Xe] 4f1 – 13 5d0 – 1 6s2
(d) [Xe] 4f0 – 14 5d0 – 1 6s1
Answer:
(a) [Xe] 4f1 – 14 5d0 – 1 6s2

25. f-block elements are called ………………….
(a) transition elements
(b) representative elements
(c) inner transition elements
(d) alkalin earth metals
Answer:
(c) inner transition elements

26. Actinoids form coloured salts due to the transition of electrons in
(a) d – d
(b) f – f
(c) f – d
(d) s – f
Answer:
(b) f – f

27. In the periodic table, Gadolinium belongs to
(a) 4th Group 6th period
(b) 4th group 4th period
(c) 3rd group 5th period
(d) 3rd group 7th period.
Answer:
(d) 3rd group 7th period.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

28. The transuranic elements are prepared by
(a) addition reaction
(b) substitution reactions
(c) decomposition reaction
(d) nuclear reactions
Answer:
(d) nuclear reactions

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 1.
What are p-block elements?
Answer:
The elements in which the differentiating electron (last filling electron) enters the p-orbital of the outermost shell of the atoms are called p-block elements. The elements of groups 16, 17 and 18 are p-block elements.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 2.
To which groups in the periodic table do p-block elements belong?
Answer:
A maximum of 6 electrons can be accommodated in the p-subshell, giving rise to six groups. In the periodic table, groups 13 to 18 include p-block elements.

Question 3.
What is the general electronic configuration of p-block elements?
Answer:
The general electronic configuration of valence shell of p-block elements is ns2 np1 – 6 (except He which has electronic configuration Is2).

Question 4.
What factors influence the properties of p-block elements?
Answer:
The properties of p-block elements are influenced by

  • atomic and ionic radii
  • ionisation enthalpy
  • electron gain enthalpy (or electron affinity)
  • electronegativity
  • the presence or absence of electrons in d or d and orbitals in the p-block elements. m

Question 5.
Mention the symbols and atomic numbers of p-block elements. Also show the positions in the periods and groups.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 1

Question 6.
Name the elements in groups 16, 17 and 18. What is the oxygen family?
Answer:
Group 16 elements :
Oxygen (8O); Sulphur (16S); Selenium (34Se); Tellurium(52Te); Polonium(84Po)

Group 17 elements :
Fluorine (9F); Chlorine (17Cl); Bromine (35Br); Iodine (53I); Astatine (85At).

Group 18 elements :
Helium : (2He) Neon (10Ne), Argon (18Ar), Krypton (36Kr), Xenon(54Xe), Radon (86Rn)

The group 16 is called the oxygen family.

Question 7.
What are chalcogens?
Answer:
Group 16 elements are called chalcogens or ore-forming elements, as a large number of metal ores are oxides or sulphides.

Question 8.
Which is the most abundant element on the earth?
Answer:
(i) Oxygen is the most abundant of all the elements on the earth.
(ii) 46.6% by mass of earth’s crust contains oxygen and oxygen forms 20.95 % by volume of air.

Question 9.
How does sulphur occur?
Answer:
Sulphur forms 0.034 % by mass of the earth’s crust. In the combined form it occurs as follows :

  • Sulphides : Galena (PbS), Zinc blende (ZnS), Copper pyrites (CuFeS2)
  • Sulphates : Gypsum (CaSO4.2H2O), Epsom salt (MgSO4.7H2O), Baryte (BaSO4)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 10.
How do selenium, tellurium and poloniumoccur?
Answer:
Selenium and tellurium are found as metal selenides and tellurides in sulphide ores. Polonium occurs in nature as a decay product of thorium and uranium metals.

Question 11.
What are group 17 elements called?
Answer:
Group 17 elements are collectively called halogens. In Greek, halo means salt and gene means born, so halogens are salt produClng elements.

Question 12.
Why are halogens not found in the free state?
Answer:
Halogens are highly reactive due to high elec-tronegativities, hence do not occur in the free state. They mostly occur in the form of compounds.

Question 13.
How do group 17 elements occur 1
Answer:
Group 17 elements occur mostly in the form of compounds.

  • Fluorine is available as insoluble fluorides in the earth’s crust.
  • The important minerals are fluorspar, CaF2, cryolite, Na3AlF6, fluorapatite 3Ca3(PO4)2.CaF2.
  • Halides (chloride, bromides, iodides) of Na, K, Mg and Ca are present in sea water.
  • The dried up sea beds contain sodium chloride and the mineral carnallite (KCl.MgCl2.6H20).
  • Seaweeds contain up to 0.5 % of iodine. The compound chile saltpetre contains 0.2% of sodium iodate.
  • Astatine is the last member of the halogen family. It is radioactive and has a half life of 8.1 hours.

Question 14.
How do noble gases occur?
Answer:

  • The most important source of noble gases is the atmosphere where they make up about 1% by volume of air. Argon is the major constituent.
  • All noble gases occur in nature except Radon. Radon is a decay product of radioactive 226Ra.
  • Helium on a large scale is obtained from natural gas. Helium and neon are found in the minerals pitchblende, monazite and cleveite.
  • Xenon and Radon are the rarest noble gases.

Question 15.
How does the general electronic configuration of groups 16, 17 and 18 vary?
Answer:
The general electronic configuration of group 16 elements is ns2np4, group 17 is ns2np5 and group 18 is ns2np6. Group 16 has two electrons less than the stable electronic configuration of the nearest noble gas. while group 17 has one electron less than the stable electronic configuration of the nearest noble gas.

Question 16.
Give the names, atomic numbers and electronic configuration of the group 16 elements.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 2

Question 17.
Write the names and electronic configuration of group 17 elements.
Answer:
Electronic configuration of group 17 elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 18.
Write the names of group 18 elements and their electronic configuration.
Answer:
Electronic configuration of group 18 elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 4

Question 19.
Mention the different atomic and physical properties of group 16 elements.
Answer:
Atomic and physical properties of group 16 elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 5

Question 20.
Mention the different atomic and physical properties of group 17 elements.
Answer:
Atomic and physical properties of group 17 elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 6

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 21.
Mention the different atomic and physical properties of group 18 elements.
Answer:
Atomic and physical properties of group 18 elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 7

Question 22.
Discuss the trends in the following in case of groups 16, 17 and 18 elements.
(1) Atomic and ionic radii
(2) Ionisation enthalpy
(3) Electronegativity
(4) Electron gain enthalpy
Answer:

  1. Atomic and ionic radii :In groups 16, 17, 18 the atomic and ionic radii increase down the group, due to increase in the number of quantum shells. Across a period atomic or ionic radii decrease due to increase in effective nuclear charge.
  2. Ionisation enthalpy :
    • The elements of groups 16, 17 and 18 have a high ionisation enthalpy
    • In groups 16, 17, 18 the ionisation enthalpy decreases down the group, due to increase in atomic size.
  3. Electronegativity : In groups 16, 17, 18 the elec-tronegativity decreases down the group.
  4. Electron gain enthalpy :
    • In groups 16 and 17 the electron gain enthalpy becomes less negative down the group.
    • Group 18 elements have large positive electron gain enthalpy.

Question 23.
Explain the electron gain enthalpy of group 16 elements.
Answer:

  1. Electron gain enthalpy (or electron affinity) is the energy released when an electron is added to the valence shell of a gaseous atom forming gaseous ion.
    \(\mathrm{M}_{(\mathrm{g})}+\mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{M}^{+}{ }_{(\mathrm{g})}+\text { energy }\)
    More the energy released more is electron gain enthalpy or electron affinity.
  2. Group 16 elements have high values for electron gain enthalpy. On moving down the group, electron gain enthalpy decreases from S to Po.
  3. Oxygen has less negative electron gain enthalpy, due to high electronegativity, low atomic size and high electron density so that the incoming electron is repelled.
  4. Electron gain enthalpy of the elements decreases down the group due to successive decrease in electronegativity and nuclear attraction and increase in atomic size.
Element S Se Te Po O
Electron gain enthalpy kJ/mol -200 -195 – 190 – 174 – 141

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 24.
Oxygen has low electron gain enthalpy in group 16 elements. Explain.
Answer:

  • Oxygen has low atomic size.
  • It has high electronegativity (3.5).
  • It has high electron density.
  • The incoming electron is repelled due to high electron density hence oxygen has less negative value of electron gain enthalpy as compared to other group 16 elements. O(g) + e → O(g) ΔegH = – 141 kJ mol-1

Question 25.
Bromine has the highest negative electron gain enthalpy as compared to other elements of 4th period. Explain.
Answer:

  • As compared to other elements (K to Kr) of 4th period, bromine (Br) has the lowest atomic size.
  • It has electronic configuration, 35Br [Ar]18 3d10 4s2 4p5.
  • It has seven valence electrons and it needs one electron to complete octet.
  • Hence Br has the strongest tendency to gain an electron and energy released is maximum in the period. Br(g) + e → Br(g) ΔegH = -325 kJ mol-1

Therefore Br has the highest electron gain enthalpy as compared to other elements of 4th period.

Question 26.
Fluorine has higher electronegativity but less electron gain enthalpy. Explain.
Answer:

  • Halogens have the highest values for electronegativity due to their small atomic radii and high nuclear charge.
  • Fluorine has the highest electronegativity due to its small size.
  • In fluorine due to strong inter electronic repulsions in the relatively small 2p orbitals and higher electron density, there is not much attraction of the nucleus for the incoming electron.
  • Thus the electron gain enthalpy of fluorine is less in spite of higher electronegativity.

Question 27.
Explain the trend in atomic radius of group 18 elements.
Answer:

  • The atomic radii of group 18 elements is larger than the atomic radii of group 17 elements.
  • Down the group from He to Xe, atomic radii increases due to increase in the number of quantum shells.
  • The atomic radii increase in the order He < Ne < Ar < Kr < Xe

Question 28.
Explain the variation in (1) ionisation enthalpy and (2) electron gain enthalpy in group 18 elements.
Answer:
(1) Ionisation enthalpy :

  • In general, group 18 elements have high values of ionisation enthalpy.
  • In a period, each noble gas has the highest ionisation enthalpy.
  • The noble gases have electronic configuration, ns2 np6, they have complete octet with paired electrons and very stable closed-shell electronic configuration. Therefore high energy is required to remove the electron from valence shell.
  • Down the group ionisation enthalpy decreases.

(2) Electron gain enthalpy :

  • Group 18 elements have electronic configuration ns2 np6 and complete octet of electrons, hence they have no tendency to accept electrons.
  • Therefore, they have a large positive electron gain enthalpy.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 29.
How does the atomic radii and ionisation enthalpy vary across a period?
Answer:

  • The atomic or ionic radii decreases across a period with increase in atomic number and increase in the effective nuclear charge (Zeff).
  • The ionisation enthalpy also increases across a period with increase in atomic number. This is due to addition of electrons to the same shell, while moving across a period.
  • Inert element at the end of period has the highest value of ionisation enthalpy.

Question 30.
Why are atomic radii of noble gases larger than those of halogens?
Answer:

  • Halogens (F to At) are in group 17 while noble gas (He to Rn) are in group 18.
  • Generally, atomic radii decrease on moving from left to right in a period, hence atomic radii of noble gases are expected to be smaller than those of halogens.
  • Due to the crowding of eight electrons in the valence shell, electron density increases and there is an appreciable electronic repulsion between them.
  • To decrease this repulsion and electronic density, the volume of valence shell increases.

Therefore atomic radii of noble gases are larger than those of halogens.

Question 31.
Which element has higher electron affinity among O and S? Why?
Answer:

  1. Oxygen has less negative electron gain enthalpy, due to high electronegativity, low atomic size and high electron density so that the incoming electron is repelled.
  2. Electron gain enthalpy of the elements decreases down the group due to successive de­crease in electronegativity and nuclear attraction and increase in atomic size.
    Element S Se Te Po O
    Electron gain enthalpy kJ/mol -200 -195 – 190 – 174 – 141

Question 32.
Why is the first ionisation energy of oxygen lower than that of nitrogen?
Answer:

  1. Electronic configuration :
    7N Is2 2s2 2px1 2py1 2pz1
    8O Is2 Is2 2px2 2py1 2pz1
  2. Nitrogen has extra stability due to half-filled p-orbitals. Therefore it has higher first ionisation enthalpy.
  3. Oxygen by losing one electron from 2px orbital acquires extra stability of half-filled 7-orbitals and hence has lower ionisation enthalpy.
  4. Therefore oxygen has lower ionisation enthalpy than nitrogen.

Question 33.
Why do halogens possess very high values of electronegativity? Arrange the halogens in the order of decreasing electronegativity.
Answer:

  • Since halogens have eletronic configuration, ns2 np5, they have tendency to accept one electron to complete an octet.
  • Group 17 elements have the lowest atomic radii and high effective nuclear charge.
  • Therefore halogens have high values of electronegativity.
  • The decreasing order of electronegativity is, F > Cl > Br > I

Question 34.
Discuss the physical states and the types of elements of Groups 16,17 and 18.
Answer:
Physical states :

  • Oxygen is a gas, while the other elements of Group 16 are solids at room temperature.
  • All the elements of group 16 show allotropy and exist in several allotropic modifications.
  • In group 17, fluorine and chlorine are gases, bromine is a liquid and iodine is a solid at room temperature.
  • All halogens are coloured. Fluorine is a yellow coloured gas, chlorine is a greenish-yellow coloured gas, bromine is a red coloured liquid and iodine is a violet coloured solid.
  • All the elements of group 18 are monoatomic gases.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Types of elements :

  • In group 16 elements, oxygen and sulphur are non-metals, selenium and tellurium are metalloids, while polonium is a radioactive metal with half-life 138 days.
  • All halogens are non-metals.
  • Group 18 elements are chemically inert and hence called inert elements.

Question 35.
Explain the colour of halogens.
Answer:

  • All halogens are coloured.
Halogen Fluorine Chlorine Bromine Iodine Astatine
colour pale yellow greenish yellow red violet metallic grey
  • The colour arises due to absorption of radiation in visible region and exCltation of electrons.
  • From F to I atomic size increases, hence the valence electrons are loosely bound.
  • For example, fluorine absorbs violet radiation of higher energy and transmits yellow light of lower energy while iodine absorbs yellow light of lower energy and transmits violet radiation of higher energy.

Question 36.
Explain the trend in the density, melting and boiling points of Group 16 elements.
Answer:
Density :

  • The density of group 16 elements increases down the group.
  • On moving down the group, the increase in atomic mass is more than the increase in atomic size.
  • Down the group the magnitude of van der Waals forces of attraction increases resulting in compact lattice formation of elements.

Therefore the density increases down the group.

The density increases in the order O < S < Se < Te

Melting and boiling point :

  • The melting and boiling points of the elements increase regularly on moving down the group.
  • However, the melting and boiling points of polonium are lower than that of tellurium.
  • This is because the intermolecular van der Waals forces are weaker in polonium.
  • There is also a large difference in the melting and boiling points of oxygen and sulphur as oxygen has a smaller size, while sulphur has a larger size and stronger van der Waals forces.
Element 0 S Se Te Po
Melting point (K) 55 393 490 725 520
Boiling point (K) 90 718 958 1260 1235

Question 37.
Explain the following in the case of group 17 elements :
(i) Density
(ii) Melting and boiling point
Answer:
Density :

  • Down the group, density of halogens increases.
  • This is, because down the group, van der Waals forces of intermolecular attraction increase, and hence tendency for agglomerisation increases. Therefore density increases.

Melting point and boiling point :

  • Halogens have low melting points and boiling points.
  • Melting points and boiling points increase down the group.

Question 38.
In case of group 18 elements, explain the variation in melting and boiling points.
Answer:
Melting points and boiling points :

  • Group 18 elements have very low melting points and boiling points.
  • The melting points and boiling points increase down the group from He to Rn.
  • As the size of the atoms increases on moving down the group, the magnitude of the van der Waals forces increase from He to Rn.
  • Thus, the melting and boiling points increase from He to Rn. Helium has the lowest boiling point (4.2 K) of any known substance.
  • The boiling points increase in the order He < Ne < Ar < Kr < Xe < Rn

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 39.
Explain reactions of halogens with water.
Answer:

  • Halogens react with water forming halo acids and haloxyaClds.
  • The reactivity decreases from fluorine to iodine.
  • 2F2 + 2H2O → 4HF + O2
    3F2 + 3H2O → 6HF + O3
    X2(g) + H2O(1) → HX(aq) + HOX (X = Cl, Br)

Question 40.
How do halogens react with other solvents and with hydrocarbons?
Answer:

  • Halogens are soluble in various organic solvents such as chloroform, carbon disulphide and carbon tetrachloride
  • All halogens react with hydrocarbons and form mono or multisubstituted compounds.
  • The reactivity decreases down the group from fluorine to iodine.
    CH4 + 2F2 → C + 4HF
    C + 2F2 → CF4
    CH4 + Cl2 → CCl4 + 4HCl

Question 41.
Explain the trend in the bond dissociation enthalpies of halogen molecules.
Answer:

  • The bond dissociation enthalpies of halogen molecules decrease down the group with an increase in atomic size.
  • However, the bond dissociation enthalpy of fluorine is lower than that of chlorine and bromine because the F – F bond is weak.
  • The bond dissociation enthalpies of the halogen molecules decreases in the order,
    Cl – Cl > Br – Br > F – F > I -1.

Question 42.
Why does the density of halogens increase on moving down the group?
Answer:
The bond dissociation enthalpies of halogen molecules decrease down the group with an increase in atomic size.

Question 43.
Why do melting and boiling points of halogens increase on moving down the group?
Answer:

  • The atomic size of halogens increases on moving down the group and hence the strength of van der Waals forces between the molecules also increases.
  • In the lighter elements, F and Cl, these forces are weak, hence they are gases at room temperature and possess low melting and boiling points.
  • In the heavier elements of the group, the van der Waals forces become stronger. Thus, bromine is a liquid and iodine is a solid and they possess higher melting and boiling points.

Question 44.
Why does oxygen show anomalous behaviour?
OR
Oxygen differs from the rest of the members of the family. Explain
Answer:
Oxygen is the first element of group 16.
Reasons for anomalous behaviour of oxygen :

  • It has the smallest size in the group.
  • It has the highest electronegativity (3.5).
  • It does not have vacant d-orbitals like other elements in group 16.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 45.
Explain the anomalous behaviour of oxygen in relation to the properties of the Group 16 elements.
Answer:
Oxygen shows following anomalous behaviour :

  • Physical state : Oxygen is a gas while other elements in the group are solids at ordinary temperature.
  • AtomiClty : Oxygen exists as a diatomic molecule O2 while other elements are polyatomic molecules like S8, Se8 have puckered ring structure.
  • Magnetic behaviour : Molecular oxygen O2 is paramagnetic while other elements are diamagnetic. Molecular O2 has two unpaired electrons in the antibonding molecular orbitals.
  • Oxidation states : Oxygen shows oxidation state-2 in oxides, – 1 in peroxides while + 2 in oxygen difluoride, OF2.
  • Since it does not have vacant d-orbital it doesn’t show higher oxidation states while other elements of group 16 show + 2, + 4 and + 6 oxidation states.
  • Hydrogen bonding : Since oxygen has high elec-tronegativity (3.5), it forms hydrogen bonding in its compounds like H2O, alcohols, etc. Other elements in the group do not show this property.
  • Hydrides : The hydride of oxygen, H2O is a liquid while the hydrides of all other elements in group 16 are gases.
  • Covalency : Oxygen shows a common covalency 2 since it has only two unpaired electrons and no d -orbitals in its valence shell. In rare cases, it shows covalency 4.
  • The other members of Group 16 can show covalency, more than 4, due to the presence of J-orbitals in their valence shell.

Question 46.
Oxygen generally exhibits an oxidation state of – 2, whereas the other members of its family show oxidation states of +2, +4 and +6 as well. Explain.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of oxygen is ls22s22p4.
  • It has two half filled p-orbitals and no d-orbitals for exCltation of electrons. Hence it cannot show higher oxidation states.
  • Oxygen being highly electronegative, it mostly shows an oxidation state of – 2 only.
  • Other members of the family like sulphur, have vacant d-orbitals, thereby giving four and six half- filled orbitals for bonding.
  • Furthermore, they can combine with more electronegative elements.
  • Hence, they show oxidation states of +2, +4 and 4- 6 also.

Question 47.
Why is H2O a liquid and H2S a gas?
OR
Water is a liquid and other hydrides of the group, are gases. Explain.
Answer:

  • The boiling point of water (373 K) is very high hence it is less volatile while that of H2S is low (213 K) and hence it is volatile.
  • Since oxygen is more electronegative than sulphur, O-H bond is more polar and there arises associ-
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 10
  • Hydrogen bonding and molecular assoClation are not present in H2S and other hydrides.
  • In H2S, there are weak van der Waals forces.
  • Therefore to separate H2O molecules in H2O liquid, energy required is higher than that required to separate H2S molecules.

Hence H2O is a liquid and H2S (and other hydrides) is a gas.

Question 48.
Why does fluorine show anomalous behaviour?
Answer:
Fluorine exhibits anomalous behaviour as compared to other halogens in the group.

The reasons for anomalous behaviour of fluorine are as follows :

  • the smallest size of fluorine
  • the highest electronegativity
  • low bond dissoClation enthalpy of F-F bond
  • non-availability of d-orbitals in its valence shell.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 49.
Explain the anomalous properties of fluorine.
Answer:
The anomalous properties of fluorine are as follows :

  • Fluorine has the highest reactivity among other halogens.
  • Fluorine forms strong hydrogen bonding in its hydrides unlike other halogens.
  • HF is a liquid while other hydrogen halides are gases at room temperature.
  • HF is a weak aCld while other haloaClds are strong aClds.
  • Fluorine shows only one oxidation state – 1 while all other halogens show variable oxidation states like -1, +1, +3, +5 and + 7.
  • Fluorine has the highest electronegativity but less negative electron gain enthalpy than chlorine.
  • The compounds of fluorine have higher ionic character than other halogens.
  • Fluorine has no tendency to form polyhalide ion whereas other halogens form polyhalide ions like, Cl3, Br3 and I3.
  • Fluorine unlike other halogens when reacts with water and produces O2 and O3.
    2F2 + 2H2O → 4HF + O2;
    3F2 + 3H2O → 6HF + O3
  • Fluorine shows much higher values of ionisation enthalpy, electronegativity and standard electrode potentials compared to the other halogens.
  • Fluorine shows much lower values of ionic and covalent radii, melting and boiling points and electron gain enthalpy than expected.
  • Fluorine forms only one oxoacid HOF, while the other halogens form a number of oxoacids.

Question 50.
Describe anomalous behaviour of fluorine with the other elements of group 17 with reference to :
(a) Hydrogen bonding
(b) Oxidation state
(c) Polyhalide ions.
Answer:
Anomalous behaviour of fluorine with other 17 group elements (Cl, Br, I) :

(a) Hydrogen bonding : Hydrogen bonding is present in HF only, while it is absent in other haloaClds (HCl, HBr and HI).
(b) Oxidation state : Fluorine shows only one oxidation state namely – 1 due to absence of d-orbital. Other halogens exhibit along with – 1 other oxidation states namely +1, +3, + 5 and +7.
(c) Polyhalide ion : Fluorine does not form polyhalide ion but other halogens form polyhalide ions like Cl3, Br3 and I3.

Question 51.
At room temperature hydrogen fluoride is a liquid while all other hydrogen halides are gases. Explain.
Answer:

  • Fluorine has the highest electronegativity compared to remaining halogens.
  • H-F bond has the highest bond polarity compared to other halides.
  • The presence of strong intermolecular hydrogen bonding leads to the association of HF molecules as follows :
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 11
  • Other hydrogen halides do not show hydrogen bonding due to their larger atomic size and less electronegativity.

Hence HF is a liquid while other hydrogen halides (HCl to HI) are gases.

Question 52.
Explain the oxidation states of Group 16 elements.
Answer:

  • Group 16 elements have general electronic configuration, ns2 np4,
  • They show variable oxidation states, – 2, + 2, + 4 and -6.
  • Since all elements have 6 valence electrons, they tend to gain or share 2 electrons to complete an octet, and show common oxidation state – 2.
  • Oxygen being highly electronegative, it shows the common oxidation state -2 in oxides (H2O, MgO). It shows – 1 oxidation state in peroxides (H2O2, Na2O2) and + 2 oxidation states in OF2.
  • Except oxygen all other elements have vacant d-orbitals, hence they show higher oxidation states + 4 and + 6. For example
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 12
  • The stability of the + 6 oxidation state decreases but the stability of the +4 oxidation state increases down the group due to the inert pair effect.
  • Bonding in +4 and +6 oxidation states is covalent in nature.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 53.
What is the oxidation state of S in H2S2O6?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 13
∴ The oxidation state of S atom = + 5

Question 54.
What is the oxidation state of oxygen in OF2?
Answer:
The oxidation state of oxygen in OF2 is +2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 14

Question 55.
What is the oxidation state of oxygen in compounds
(i) O2F2 and
(ii) H2O2?
Answer:
(i) In O2F2, the oxidation state of oxygen is + 1.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 15

(ii) In H2O2, the oxidation state of oxygen is – 1.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 16

Question 56.
Oxygen usually exhibits – 2 oxidation state, but it exhibits + 2 oxidation state in OF2?
Answer:

  • Oxygen being highly electronegative, it shows the common oxidation state – 2 in oxides.
  • In the presence of a highly electronegative fluorine atom it exhibits + 2 oxidation state in OF2.

Question 57.
Why do sulphur and other heavier elements of group 16 exhibit higher oxidation states?
Answer:
Since sulphur and heavier elements of group 16 have large atomic radii and available d-orbitals, they exhibit higher oxidation states.

Question 58.
Why does the tendency of group 16 elements to exist in -2 oxidation state decrease on moving down the group?
Answer:

  • The electronegativity of the elements of Group 16 elements decreases on moving down the group in the order O > S > Se > Te > Po.
  • Thus, the tendency to show -2 oxidation state also decreases.

Question 59.
Discuss the oxidation states in Group 18 eiements.
Answer:

  • The group 18 elements have a stable electronic configuration ns2np6 with completely filled orbitals.
  • Due to completely filled orbitals and complete octets these elements do not show a tendency to lose, gain or share electrons.
  • They have zero valency and mostly exist as mono- atomic gases.
  • Xenon exhibits higher oxidation states, as the paired electrons of the valence shell can be unpaired and promoted to the empty d-orbitals.
  • The unpaired electrons are shared with fluorine or oxygen atoms to form covalent compounds with higher oxidation states such as XeF2, XeF4, XeF6, XeO3 and XeOF6.

Question 60.
Why does xenon being a noble gas form compounds with other elements?
Answer:
Xenon forms compounds with other elements due to the following reasons :

  • Xenon has large atomic size and lower ionisation enthalpy.
  • The paired electrons of the valence shell can be unpaired and promoted to the empty d-orbitals.
  • The unpaired electrons are shared with fluorine or oxygen atoms to form covalent compounds with higher oxidation states.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 61.
Explain the reactivity of group 16 elements with hydrogen.
Answer:

  • All the elements of group 16 react with hydrogen and form hydrides of the type H2M where M = O, S, Se, Te and Po. For example H2O, H2S, H2Se, H2Te and H2Po.
  • The hydrides of these elements show regular trends in their physical and chemical properties.

Question 62.
Explain the general structures of hydrides of group 16 elements.
OR
Give reason : Bond angle decreases from H2O to H2S.
Answer:

  • Group 16 elements form hydrides of the type H2M where M = O, S, Se, Te and Po.
  • All these hydrides are formed by sp3 hybridisation of the central atom and have angular shape.
  • All hydrides have similar structure but differ in H-M-H bond angle. This bond angle decreases from H2O to H2Te.
  • All these hydrides have two M-H bond pairs and two lone pairs of electrons.
  • Due to repulsion between lone pairs-lone pairs and lone pairs-bond pairs, and bond pairs-bond pairs the bond angle is reduced from regular 109° 28′.
  • On moving down the group, atomic size increases, electronegativity decreases, electron density decreases.
  • Since among group 16 elements, oxygen has the highest electronegativity, lowest atomic size and hence the highest electron density, the repulsion between electron pairs is maximum in H2O, hence H-O-H bond angle is maximum.
  • The electron pair repulsion decreases down the group, hence bond angle also decreases down the group.
Hydrides H2O H2s H2Se H2Te
H-M-H angle 104° 92° 91° 90°

Question 63.
Explain the physical states, volatility and chemical properties of hydrides of group 16 elements.
Answer:
(1) Physical state : Hydride of oxygen, H2O is a colourless odourless liquid while the hydrides of other group 16 elements are colourless poisonous gases with unpleasant odours.

(2) Volatility : Volatility of hydrides increase from H2O to H2S and then decreases. H2O < H2S > H2Se > H2Te
At ordinary temperature H2O is a liquid while all other hydrides are gases.

(3) Thermal stability :

  • The thermal stability of hydrides decreases in the order of H2O > H2S > H2Se > H2Te.
  • Since atomic size increases from O to Te, the tendency to form hydride bond, M-H decreases. Hence M-H bond in O-H is the strongest and in Te-H the weakest. Therefore thermal stability decreases from H2O to H2Te.

(4) ACldic character :

  • The hydrides of group 16 elements are weakly acidic and acidic strength increases from H2O to H2Te.
    Since M-H bond strength decreases, bond enthalpy decreases, acidic character increases.

(5) Reducing power :

  • Except H2O, all hydrides of group 16 elements are reducing agents.
  • Reducing power increases from H2S to H2Te.
  • Reducing power of the hydrides is due to their less stability and tendency to dissociate, which increases from H2S to H2Te.

Question 64.
Giving suitable reasons, arrange the hydrides of group 16 elements in the decreasing order of their thermal stability.
Answer:

  • The thermal stability of hydrides decreases in the order of H2O > H2S > H2Se > H2Te.
  • Since atomic size increases from O to Te, the tendency to form hydride bond, M-H decreases.
  • Hence M-H bond in O-H is the strongest and in Te-H the weakest. Therefore thermal stability decreases from H2O to H2Te.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 65.
What is the oxidation state of S in the following :
(a) S8
(b) \(\mathrm{HSO}_{4}^{-}\)
(c) K2S2Og?
Answer:
(a) Oxidation state of S in, S8 is zero.
(b) In \(\mathrm{HSO}_{4}^{-}\) it is +6
(c) in K2S2O8 it is +6

Question 66.
H2S is less acidic than H2Te, why?
Answer:

  • Sulphur is more electronegative than Tellurium.
  • Bond energy of S-H in H2S is (347 kJ mol-1) more than the bond energy of Te-H (238 kJ mol-1).
  • Hence H2Te dissociates more giving H + (or H3O+) than H2S in the solution. Therefore H2S is less acidic than H2Te.

Question 67.
“The reducing power of the hydrides of group 16 elements increases from H2S to H2Te”. Explain.
Answer:

  • Except H2O, all hydrides of group 16 elements are reducing agents.
  • reducing power increases from H2S to H2Te.
  • reducing power of the hydrides is due to their less stability and tendency to dissociate, which increases from H2S to H2Te.

Question 68.
Explain the volatility of hydrides from H2S to H2Te.
OR
“The boiling points of the hydrides of Group 16 elements increases from H2S to H2Te.” Explain.
Answer:

  • In group 16 elements, except H2O which is a liquid, all other hydrides are gases.
  • From H2S to H2Te boiling point increases due to an increase in atomic size from S to Te.
  • The magnitude of van der Waals forces increases as atomic size increases, from S to Te, therefore boiling points increase from H2S to H2Te.
Hydrides H2o H2S H2Se H2Te
Boiling point K 373 213 232 269

Question 69.
Give reasons : H2S has a lower boiling point than H2O.
Answer:

  • Hydrogen bonding and molecular association are not present in H2S.
  • The H2O molecules are associated with each other through intermolecular hydrogen bonding.
  • Hence, H2S has a lower boiling point than H2O.

Question 70.
Among the hydrides of group 16, water shows unusual properties. Why?
Answer:

  • Oxygen being more electronegative, the O-H bond is more polar and there arises association of H2O molecules through intermolecular hydrogen bonding.
  • The other hydrides of group 16 do not form H bonds and hence exist as discrete molecules.
  • As a result, water shows unusual properties like high B.P, high thermal stability and weaker acidic character as compared to the other hydrides of group 16.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 71.
Explain the reactivity of halogens towards hydrogen.
Answer:

  • All halogens react with hydrogen and form hydrogen halides HX where X = F, Cl, Br, I.
  • The affinity and reactivity decrease down the group from F to I.
  • Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 17

Question 72.
Explain the acidic strength of halo acids.
OR
Write a short note on the acidic strength of hydrogen halides.
Answer:

  • The aCldic strength of haloaClds vary in the following order, HF < HCl < BHr < HI
  • The stability of hydrogen halides decreases down the group. HF > HCl > HBr > HI.
    This is because from F to I, atomic size increases and bond dissociation enthalpy of H-X decreases.

Question 73.
HF is the most stable among all the hydrogen halides. Explain.
OR
Explain the thermal stability of hydrogen halides.
Answer:

  • HF is the most stable among all the hydrogen halides.
  • The thermal stability decreases from HF to HI.
  • This is due to a decrease in bond dissociation enthalpy and bond strength of H-X bond from F to I.
  • Down the group, from F to I, atomic size increases, bond length of H-X bond increases, bond polarity decreases and hence bond strength decreases.
  • F being of the lowest atomic size and the highest electronegativity, HF bond is stronger and highly thermally stable.

Question 74.
Explain the reducing character of hydrogen halides.
Answer:

  • The reducing character of hydrogen halides increases from HF to HI.
  • HF does not show any reducing property while HI is a strong reducing agent.
  • H-X bond strength and thermal stability of hydrogen halides decrease from HF to HI.

Unlike other hydrogen halides, HF does not dissociate releasing hydrogen, hence HF is not a reducing agent.

Question 75.
Why is HCl a weaker acid than HI?
Answer:

  • Bond length of HCl is less than HI.
  • Cl is more electronegative than I.
  • Hence bond strength of HCl is more than HI.
  • Therefore HCl dissociates less than HI, which makes HCl a weaker acid than HI.

Question 76.
Why is HF a weaker acid than HCl2
Answer:

  • The H-F bond is stronger than H-Cl bond.
  • Hence, HF ionises less readily than HCl in H2O, to give H+ ions.
    Therefore, HF is a weaker acid than HCl.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 77.
Arrange the halogen acids in the decreasing order of :
(1) thermal stability
(2) acidic strength.
Answer:
(1) Thermal stability : As the atomic size increases from F to I, the bond dissociation enthalpy of H-X decreases.
Thus, the thermal stability of hydrogen halides decreases down the group in the order HF > HCl > HBr > HI

(2) ACldic strength : Since, the bond dissociation enthalpy of H-X decreases down the group, the acidic strength varies in the order HI > HBr > HCl > HF

Question 78.
Noble gases do not form compounds with hydrogen. Why?
Answer:
Noble gases have a stable electronic configuration, and so are unreactive. Since, they are chemically inert, they do not form compounds with hydrogen.

Question 79.
Explain the reactivity of group 16 elements with oxygen.
OR
Give brief account of the oxides of group 16 elements.
Answer:

  • All elements of group 16 react with oxygen and form oxides of the types EO2 and EO3 where E = S, Se, Te or Po. Examples are SO2, SeO2, TeO2, SO3, TeO3, etc.
  • SO2 and SeO2 are acidic in nature and react with water to form acids.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 18
  • The reducing power reduces from SO2 to TeO2. SO2 is an oxidising agent, while TeO2 is a reducing agent.
  • SO3, SeO3 and TeO3 are also acidic in nature. They react with water to form acids.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 19

Question 80.
Complete the following reactions :
(i) S + O2(air)
(ii) Se + O2(air)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 20

Question 81.
Explain the reactivity of halogens towards oxygen.
Answer:

  • Halogens with oxygen form many oxides with different oxidation states of halogens.
  • Fluorine forms O2F2 and OF2.
  • Chlorine forms oxides like Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 21 Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 22 All oxides are oxidising agents.
  • Bromine forms oxides like Br2O, BrO2, BrO3 and iodine forms I2O4, I2O5, I2O7.

Question 82.
Discuss the properties of the oxides of halogens.
Answer:
Properties of oxides of halogens :

  • Both OF2 and O2F2 are strong fluorinating agents. Only OF2 is thermally stable at 298 K. OF2 oxidises plutonium to PuF6. This reaction is used to remove Pu as PUF6 from spent nuclear fuel.
  • The chlorine oxides Cl2O, ClO2, Cl2O6 and Cl2O7 are highly reactive oxidizing agents and tend to explode. ClO2 is used as a bleaching agent in the paper industry and textiles and in water treatment.
  • Bromine forms oxides like Br2O, BrO2, BrO3, which are the least stable halogen oxides. They are powerful oxidising agents.
  • Iodine forms oxides like I2O4, I2O5 and I2O7. These solids are insoluble in water and decompose on heating. I2O5 is a powerful oxidising agent and is used to determine the amount of carbon monoxide.

For a particular halogen, higher oxides are more stable than the lower ones.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 83.
Explain the reactivity of group 16 elements towards halogens.
Answer:

  1. The group 16 elements with halogens form a large number of halides of the type EX2, EX4 and EX6 where E is an element of the group and X is a halogen.
  2. The stability of the halides decreases in the order fluoride > chloride > bromide > iodide.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 23
  3. The hexahalides SF6, SeF6, TeF6 are formed by direct combination. They are colourless gases. The hexahalides have sp3d2 hybridisation and have an octahedral structure. SF6 is exceptionally stable due to steric reasons.
  4. The tetrahalides SF4, SeF4, TeF4, TeCl4 have sp3d hybridisation and thus have a trigonal bipyramidal structure in which one of the equatorial positions is occupied by a lone pair of electrons. This geometry is also called see-saw geometry.
  5. The dihalides SCl2, SeCl2, TeCl2 have sp3 and thus have a tetrahedral structures with two equatorial positions occupied by lone pairs.
  6. The monohalides S2F2, S2Cl2, Se2Cl2 and Se2Br2 are dimeric in nature. These halides have a tendency to undergo disproportionation. For example, 2Se2Cl2 → SeCl4 + 3Se

Question 84.
Complete the following reaction :
(i) S + 3F2
(ii) Se + 2Cl2
Answer:
(i) S + 3F2 → SF6
(ii) Se + 2Cl2 → SeCl4

Question 85.
Explain the reactivity of halogens towards other halogens.
OR
What are interhalogen compounds?
Answer:

  • The halogens have a tendency to combine amongst themselves forming different compounds called interhalogen compounds.
  • Interhalogens are of the type XX, XX’3, XX’5 and XX’7 where X is larger size halogen than X’.
  • They are covalent, diamagnetic, reactive and good oxidising agents.
  • Preparation :
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 24

Question 86.
Explain the reactivity of Group 18 towards halogens.
Answer:

  • Group 18 elements are chemically inert.
  • However, inert elements like krypton and xenon react directly with fluorine under appropriate conditions to give their fluorides. For example,
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 25
  • The xenon fluorides XeF2, XeF4 and XeF6 are colourless crystalline solids which sublime at 298 K.
  • These fluorides are strong fluorinating agents.

Question 87.
What is the action of metals on group 16 elements?
Answer:
Metals react with O, S, Se to form oxides, sulphides and selenides respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 26

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 88.
Complete the following reactions :
(i) Cu + S
(ii) Cd + Se
Answer:
(i) Cu + S → CuS
(ii) Cd + Se → CdSe

Question 89.
Explain the reactivity of halogens with metals.
Answer:

  • All halogens react with metals instantly to give metal halides.
  • Down the group reactivity decreases from fluorine to iodine.
  • 2Na(s) + Cl2(1) → 2NaCl(s), Mg(s) + Br2(s) → MgBr2(s)
  • Halogens being highly electronegative, the metal-halogen bonds are ionic and ionic character decreases down the group. For example M-F > M-Cl > M-Br > M-I.
  • The metal halides with higher oxidation state of the metal are more covalent than the halides with lower oxidation state of metal. For example SnCl4, PbCl4, SbCl5 and UF6 are more covalent than

Question 90.
Explain the property of allotropy in Group 16 elements.
Answer:

  • All the elements of group 16 exhibit allotropy.
  • These elements exist in different allotropic modifications.
  • Oxygen exists as O2 and ozone O3.
  • Sulphur exists as α-sulphur, β-sulphur, γ-sulphur, homocyclic sulphur, plastic sulphur, etc. Rhombic sulphur (α sulphur) and mono-clinic sulphur (β sulphur) are the important allotropes. Both are non-metallic in nature.
  • Selenium exists in two allotropic forms red (non-metallic) and grey (metallic).
  • Tellurium exists in two allotropic forms crystalline form and the amorphous form.
  • Po has two forms namely α-form and β-form both being metallic.

Question 91.
What are the allotropes of oxygen?
Answer:
Allotropes of oxygen :

  • Oxygen O2
  • Ozone O3

Question 92.
Which are the most important allotropic forms of sulphur?
Answer:
The most important allotropes of sulphur are :

  • Rhombic (α-sulphur)
  • Monoclinic (β-sulphur)

Question 93.
Write a note on the following :
(1) Rhombic sulphur
(2) Monoclinic sulphur
Answer:
(1) Rhombic sulphur :

  • Rhombic sulphur are orthorhombic crystals.
  • This is the most stable form and common form of sulphur.
  • It is pale yellow., having density 2.069 g/cm3 and melting point 385.8 K
  • It is insoluble in water, but soluble in CS2
  • It is stable below 369 K and transforms to β-sulphur above this temperature.
  • It exists as S8 molecules with a structure of a puckered ring.
  • It is obtained by the evaporation of roll sulphur is CS2.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 28

(2) Monoclinic sulphur :

  • Monoclinic sulphur (β sulphur or prismatic sulphur) are needle-shaped monoclinic crystals.
  • It is bright yellow, having a density 1.989 gcm3 and melting point 393 K.
  • It is soluble in CS2.
  • It is stable above 369 K and transforms into α-sulphur below this temperature.
  • It exists as, S8 molecules with a structure of a puckered ring.
  • It is prepared by melting rhombic sulphur and cooling it till a crust is formed. Two holes are pierced in the crust and the remaining liquid is poured to obtain needle-shaped crystals of monoclinic sulphur.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 94.
What are the different oxyacids of sulphur?
Answer:
Sulphurous acid : H2SO3
Sulphuric acid (Oil of vitriol): H2SO4
Di or pyrosulphuric acid or oleum H2S2O7
Peroxy monosulphuric acid or Caro’s acid H2SO5
Peroxy sulphuric acid (or Marshall’s acid : H2S2O8
Thiosulphuric acid H2S2O3

Question 95.
Write the structures of oxyacids of sulphur. Write the oxidation number of sulphur.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 30
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 31

Question 95.
Write molecular formulae and structure of the following compounds :
(1) Peroxy monosulphuric acid
(2) Pyrosulphuric aCld
Answer:
(1)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 113
(2)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 114

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 96.
What is oil of vitriol?
Answer:
In ancient days, sulphuric acid, H2SO4 was called, oil of vitriol.

Question 97.
What is the oxidation state of S in the following compounds?
(i) H2SO2
(ii) H2S2O4
(iii) H2S2O6
(iv) H2S2O5
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 32

Question 98.
Which are different oxyacids (or oxoacids) of halogens?
Answer:
Fluorine forms only one oxyacid namely, hypofluorous acid or fluoric acid, HOF while other halogens form several oxyacids.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 33

Question 99.
How do
(i) oxidising power and
(ii) thermal stability of oxyacids (or oxoacids) of halogens vary?
Answer:
(i) Oxidising power of oxyacids of halogens decreases as the oxidation number of halogens increases.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 34

(ii) The thermal stability of oxyacids of halogens increases with the increase in the oxidation state of halogen. Hence the increasing order of thermal stability is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 35

Question 100.
How does the acid strength of the halogen oxoacids vary?
Answer:
The acid strength of the halogen oxoacids increases with increase in the oxidation state of the halogen.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 36

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 101.
Explain the laboratory methods for the preparation of dioxygen.
Answer:
Laboratory methods :
(i) By heating chlorates, nitrates and permanganates.
Potassium chlorate in the presence of manganese dioxide on heating decomposes to form potassium chloride and oxygen.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 39

(ii) By the thermal decomposition of metal oxides.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 40
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 41

(iii) By the thermal decomposition of hydrogen peroxide :
The thermal decomposition of hydrogen peroxide in the presence of finely divided metal and manganese dioxide used as catalyst gives oxygen.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 42

Question 102.
How is oxygen prepared by thermal decomposition of certain metallic oxides?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 43

Question 103.
Write the reactions for the decomposition of following oxides on heating :
(i) HgO
(ii) Ag2O
(iii) PbO2
(iv) H2O2.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 44

Question 104.
How is dioxygen manufactured on a large scale?
Answer:
Dioxygen on a large scale or commercial scale is obtained by two following methods :
(1) From water : By electrolysis of acidified water, H2 gas is obtained at the cathode and O2 is obtained at anode.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 45

(2) From air :

  • Carbon dioxide and water vapour is removed from air and the remaining gases are liquefied.
  • O2 on large scale is obtained by fractional distillation of liquid air.
  • On distillation, liquid dinitrogen having low boiling point distils out first leaving behind liquid dioxygen. Then liquid O2 is distilled out and separated.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 105.
What is the action of heat on KClO3?
Answer:
Laboratory methods :
(i) By heating chlorates, nitrates and permanga­nates.
Potassium chlorate in the presence of manganese dioxide on heating decomposes to form potassium chloride and oxygen.
\(2 \mathrm{KClO}_{3} \frac{\Delta}{\mathrm{MnO}_{2}} 2 \mathrm{KCl}+3 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)

(ii) By the thermal decomposition of metal oxides.
\(2 \mathrm{Ag}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{s})} \stackrel{\text { heat }}{\longrightarrow} 4 \mathrm{Ag}+\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)
\(\begin{aligned}
&2 \mathrm{HgO}_{(\mathrm{s})} \stackrel{\text { heat }}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{Hg}+\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \\
&2 \mathrm{PbO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})} \stackrel{\text { heat }}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{PbO}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}
\end{aligned}\)

(iii) By the thermal decomposition of hydrogen per­oxide :
The thermal decomposition of hydrogen peroxide in the presence of finely divided metal and manganese dioxide used as catalyst gives oxygen.
\(2 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2 \text { (aq) }} \frac{\text { heat }}{\mathrm{MnO}_{2}} 2 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(1)}+\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)

Question 106.
Write the reactions of dioxygen with
(i) ZnS
(ii) CH4
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 110

Question 107.
Complete the following reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 46
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 47

Question 108.
What are the uses of dioxygen?
Answer:
The uses of dioxygen are as follows :

  • Dioxygen is essential for sustaining life. It is used in hospitals for artificial respiration.
  • It is used in oxy-hydrogen (2800 °C) and oxy-acetylene (3200 °C) torches used for cutting and welding metals.
  • Oxygen cylinders are used in hospitals, for high altitude flying and in mountaineering.
  • It is used in the combustion of fuels. In rockets, hydrazine in oxygen is used as a fuel as it provides tremendous thrust.

Question 109.
What are oxides? How are they classified? Give examples.
OR
What are the different types of oxides? Give example.
Answer:
The oxides are binary compounds in which one element is oxygen and another may be a metal or a non-metal.
They are classified as follows :

  • acidic oxides, CO2, SO2, etc.
  • Basic oxides, CaO, BaO, etc.
  • Amphoteric oxides, Al2O3, ZnO, etc.
  • Neutral oxides, NO, N2O, CO, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 110.
Explain different types of oxides.
Answer:
Oxides are of four types as follows :
(1) acidic oxides :

  • The oxide, which on reaction with water forms an acid or reacts with a base to give a salt is called an acidic oxide.
  • It is formed by the combination of oxygen with non-metals. For example CO2, SO3, etc.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 48

(2) Basic oxide :

  • The oxide, which on reaction with water forms a base or reacts with an acid to give a salt is called basic oxide.
  • It is formed by the reaction of oxygen with highly electropositive metals.
    For example, Na2O, CaO, etc.
    Na2O(s) + H2O(1) → 2NaOH(aq)
    CaO(s) + H2O(1) → Ca(OH)2(aq)
    BaO(s) + 2HCl(aq) → BaCl2 + H2O
  • Basic oxides are generally ionic in nature.

(3) Amphoteric oxide :

  • The oxide, which shows both acidic and basic I characteristics is called an amphoteric oxide.
  • They are formed by the reaction of oxygen with elements which lie on the border of electroposi- five (metals) and electronegative (non-metals) nature.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 49

Along the period, from left to right the nature of oxides changes from basic to amphoteric to acidic.

(4) Neutral oxide : The oxide which behaves neither acidic nor basic is called a neutral oxide.
For example, CO, NO, N2O.

Question 111.
What is the nature of the following oxides :
(i) N2Os
(ii) P4O10
(iii) Cl2O7
(iv) ZnO
(v) Al2O3
(vi) K2O
(vii) BaO
(viii) CO
(ix) N2O?
Answer:

Acidic oxide (i) N2O5 (ii) P4O10 (iii) Cl2O7
Basic oxide (vi) K2O (vii) BaO
Amphoteric oxide (iv) ZnO (v) Al2O3
Neutral oxide (viii) CO (ix) N2O

Question 112.
Complete the following reactions :
(i) P4O10 + H2O
(ii) C12O7 + H2O
(iii) ZnO + HCl
(iv) ZnO + NaOH
(v) Al2O3 + NaOH.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 50

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 113.
Explain the nature of zinc oxide with the help of the reactions.
OR
Explain with chemical reactions, why is zinc oxide amphoteric in nature.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 115

Question 114.
What is ozone umbrella?
OR
Explain Ozone as a protective umbrella for UV from sun.
Answer:
The stratospheric pool of ozone which is a layer above earth’s surface and protects from harmful high energetic ultraviolet (UV) rays is called the ozone umbrella or ozonosphere.

Question 115.
How is ozone formed naturally?
Answer:

  • In the atmosphere, ozone is naturally formed through photochemical reactions.
  • Oxygen present in the lower mesosphere on the absorption of solar radiations, is dissociated into two oxygen atoms which oxidise oxygen to ozone.
  • One atomic oxygen combines with molecular oxygen to form O3.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 51

Question 116.
Explain laboratory preparation of ozone.
Answer:

  • When a slow dry stream of oxygen is passed through a silent electric discharge, oxygen is converted into ozone (about 10%). The mixture is called ozonised oxygen.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 52
  • It is an endothermic reaction.
  • Silent electric discharge prevents the decomposition of ozone.

Question 117.
What are the physical properties of ozone?
Answer:
The physical properties of ozone are as follows :

  • Gaseous ozone is blue, liquid ozone is dark blue and solid ozone is violet-black.
  • It has a pungent odour hence the name is ozone.
  • At higher concentrations (about 100 ppm), it is harmful and results into nausea and headache while in small concentrations it is harmless.
  • Ozone is thermodynamically less stable than oxygen.
  • The decomposition of ozone (2O3 → 3O2) is exothermic (ΔH < O) and has ΔS > 0.
  • Therefore ΔG < 0 and hence decomposition of O3 is spontaneous.
  • Ozone is diamagnetic in nature.

Question 118.
Ozone acts as an oxidising agent and a reducing agent. Explain with examples.
Answer:
(A) Ozone as an oxidising agent : Since ozone decomposes to liberate nascent oxygen, it is a powerful oxidising agent next to fluorine.
O3(g) → O2(g) + O
For example :

  • It oxidises lead sulphide (PbS) to lead sulphate (PbSO4) changing the oxidation state of S from – 2 to +6.
    PbS(s) + 4O3(g) → PbSO(s) + 4O2(g)
  • Potassium iodide, KI is oxidised to iodine, I3 in the solution.
    2KI(aq) + H3O(1) + O3(g) → 2KOH(aq) + I2(s) + O2(g)
  • Ozone oxidises nitrogen oxide to nitrogen dioxide.
    NO(g) + O3(g) → NO2(g) + O2(g)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

(B) Ozone as a reducing agent : Ozone reduces peroxides (O1-) to oxides (O2-).

  • Ozone reduces barium peroxide, BaO2 to barium oxide, BaO.
    BaO2 + O3 → BaO + 2O2
  • Ozone reduces hydrogen peroxide, H2O2 to water, H2O.
    H2O2 + O3 → H2O + 2O2

Question 119.
What is meant by ozone depletion?
Answer:
The thinning of the ozone layer in the upper atmosphere is called ozone depletion. This thinning has been more pronounced in the polar regions, especially over the Antarctica.

Question 120.
How does ozone protect the people of the earth?
Answer:
Ozone layer in the upper atmosphere absorbs the harmful high energetic UV radiations of the Sun and protects the earth. The ultraviolet radiations damage plant and animal life on earth.

Question 121.
How do exhaust systems of cars and supersonic jet aeroplanes deplete the concentration of ozone layer?
Answer:
The exhaust gases from cars and supersonic jet aeroplanes contain nitric oxide (NO), which combines with ozone in the atmosphere forming oxygen.
NO + O3 → NO2 + O2
Hence the concentration of ozone is depleted in the upper layer of the atmosphere.

Question 122.
How do the coolents in refrigerants deplete the concentration of ozone?
Answer:

  • The coolents used in refrigerants are generally chlorofluorocarbons, CFCs also known as Freon, for example CF2Cl2.
  • CFCs have very long lifetime about 20 to 100 years.
  • CF2Cl2 undergoes photochemical decomposition giving free radicals which react and destroy ozone.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 53

Thus Cl- propagates the destruction of ozone in the atmosphere.

Question 123.
What is the action of ozone on unsaturated hydrocarbons? Give reaction.
Answer:
Ozone with unsaturated hydrocarbons form ozonides.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 54

Question 124.
Ozone depletion is a major environmental problem. Explain.
Answer:

  • The depletion of ozone layer increases the amount of ultraviolet radiation reaching the Earth.
  • This has caused an increase in the rate of skin cancer, eye cataracts and damage to the genetic as well as immune system.
  • Thus, ozone depletion has become a major environ-mental problem.

Question 125.
What are the uses of ozone?
Answer:
Uses of Ozone :

  • Ozone sterilises drinking water by oxidising germs and bacteria present in it.
  • It is used as a bleaching agent for ivory, oils, starch, wax and delicate fabrics like silk.
  • Ozone is used to purify the air in crowded places like Clnema halls, railways, tunnels, etc.
  • In industry, ozone is used in the manufacture of synthetic camphor, potassium permanganate, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 126.
How is sulphur dioxide prepared?
Answer:
Sulphur dioxide, SO2 is prepared by following methods :
(1) From sulphur : When sulphur is burnt in air or oxygen, SO2 is formed along with SO3.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 57

(2) Laboratory method (From sulphite) :

  • Sodium sulphite on treating with dilute H2SO4 forms SO2.
    Na2SO3 + H2SO4(aq) → Na2SO4 + H2O(1) + SO2(g)
  • Sodium sulphite, Na2SO3 on reaction with dilute hydrochloric acid solution forms SO2.
    Na2SO3(aq) + 2HCl(aq) → 2NaCl9aq0 + H2O(1) + SO2(g)

(3) Industrial method (From sulphides): It is obtained as a by-product in the roasting of ores of pyrites and blendes.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 58

The gas is dried and liquefied under pressure and stored.

Question 127.
What happens when an excess of SO2 is passed through sodium hydroxide solution?
Answer:
When SO2 gas is passed through sodium hydroxide solution (NaOH), it forms sodium sulphite, Na2SO3 which further with excess of SO2 forms sodium hydrogen sulphite, NaHSO3.
2NaOH + SO2 → Na2SO3 + H2O
Na2SO3 + H2O + SO2 → 2NaHSO3

Question 128.
Give reactions to show that SO2 gas acts as a reducing agent.
Answer:
Sulphur dioxide (SO2) acts as a reducing agent in the presence of moisture.

  • Sulphur dioxide, SO2 reduces halogens (X°) to haloacids (X1-).
    I2 + 2H2O + SO2 → 2HI + H2SO4
  • SO2 gas when passed through an acidified solution of KMnO4 it is decolourised due to reduction (Mn7+ to Mn2+).
    2KMnO4 + 2H2O + 5SO2 → K2SO4 + 2MnSO4 + 2H2SO4
  • Sulphur dioxide (SO2) reduces Fe3+ to Fe2+
    2FeCl3 + SO2 + 2H2O → 2FeCl2 + H2SO4 + 2HCl

Question 129.
Complete the following reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 61
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 62

Question 130.
What are the uses of sulphur dioxide?
Answer:
The uses of sulphur dioxide are as follows :

  • SO2 is used in the manufacture of H2SO4.
  • In refining petroleum and also in sugar industry.
  • In the manufacture of NaHSO3.
  • As an antichlor, as a disinfectant and preservative.
  • Liquid SO2 is used as a selective solvent to dissolve many inorganic and organic compounds.
  • Sulphur dioxide is used for bleaching wool and silk. As a bleaching agent in moist condition due to reduction reaction (SO2 + 2HaO → H2SO4 + 2[H]) colouring matter + [H] → colourless matter.
  • On exposing the bleached matter, the colour is restored due to oxidation. Colourless matter + [O] → coloured matter. Hence the bleaching action is temporary.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 131.
Explain, the nature of S-O bond in SO2.
Answer:

  • In SO2, sulphur atom is sp2 hybridised forming three hybrid orbitals.
  • In SO2, each oxygen atom is bonded to sulphur by a σ and a π bond. Hence in SO2 there are two σ and two π bonds.
  • a bonds are formed by sp2-p overlap while one of n bonds is due to pπ-pπ overlaps and other is due to pπ-pπ overlap.
  • But both S-O bonds are identical due to resonance and has bond length 143 pm.

Question 132.
What are the physical properties of H2SO4?
Answer:

  • It is a colourless, dense, oily liquid having speClfic gravity 1.84 at 298 K.
  • It has freezing point 283 K and boiling point 611 K.
  • It is a strong dehydrating agent and dissolves in water with the evolution of a large amount of heat.
  • It is a strong dibasic acid and acts as an oxidising agent.
  • Due to hydrogen bonding, it is viscous.
  • It is highly corrosive and produces severe bums on skin.

Question 133.
How is a solution of H2SO4 prepared from concentrated sulphuric acid solution?
Answer:

  • Concentrated H2SO4 dissolves in water with the evolution of a large amount of heat.
  • Generally a dilute solution is prepared by adding water to the concentrated solution.
  • In case of concentrated H2SO4, since its specific gravity is higher, the added water remains on the surface of it and due to evolution of heat, a glass vessel cracks at the interface.
  • Hence concentrated H2SO4 must be added slowly into fine stream of water with constant stirring to obtain a dilute H2SO4 solution.

Question 134.
Give two chemical reactions to explain oxidizing property of concentrated H2SO4.

Question 135.
Why is sulphuric acid a strong acid?
Answer:
Sulphuric acid ionises in an aqueous solution in two steps as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 69
The larger value of Ka (Ka >10) shows more dissociation of the acid into H3O+ and H2SO4. Thus H2SO4 is a strong acid.

Question 136.
What is the action of hot and concentrated sulphuric acid on the following :
(i) Carbon
(ii) Sulphur
(iii) Phosphorus
(iv) Zn
(v) Cu
(vi) Haloacid (HX)?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 71
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 72

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 137.
Write the reactions of the following with concentrated H2SO4 :
(i) NaCl
(ii) KNO3
(iii) CaF2.
Answer:
(i) NaCl + H2SO4conc. → NaHSO4 + HCl
(ii) 2KNO3 + H2SO4conc. → K2SO4 + 2HNO3
(iii) CaF2 + H2SO4conc. → CaSO4 + 2HF.

Question 138.
What is the action of hot and concentrated H2SO4 on
(i) FeSO4 and
(ii) HI?
Answer:

  • FeSO4 is oxidised to Fe2(SO4)3 by hot and concentrated H2SO4.
    \(2 \mathrm{FeSO}_{4}+2 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{SO}_{4} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{Fe}_{2}\left(\mathrm{SO}_{4}\right)_{3}+\mathrm{SO}_{2}+2 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}\)
  • HI is oxidised to I2 by hot and concentrated H2S04.
    2HI + H2SO4 → 2H2O + SO2 + I2

Question 139.
Complete the following reactions :
(i) Fe + dil. H2SO4
(ii) Benzene + H2SO2(conc.)
(iii) PCl5 + H2SO4
(iv) K4[Fe(CN)6]
(v) KClO3
(vi) Fluorspar, CaF2 + dil. H2SO4.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 73

Question 140.
In the dissociation of H2SO4 in water, why is the second dissociation constant smaller than the first?
Answer:

  • H2SO4 is a dibasic acid. In aqueous, solution it dissociates in two steps as follows :
    H2SO4(aq) ⇌ H+(aq) + HSO4(aq) Ka1 > 10
    HSO; (aq) ⇌ H+(aq) + SO2-4(aq) Ka2 = 1.2 x 10-2
  • Neutral H2SO4 molecule has more tendency to lose proton (H+) than anionic Lowry-Bronsted base \(\mathrm{HSO}_{4}^{-} \text {. }\)
  • Therefore second dissociation constant Ka2 is smaller than first dissociation constant Ka1.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 141.
Mention the conditions to maximize the yield of H2SO4 by contact process.
Answer:

  • In the contact process of the manufacture of sulphuric acid, SO2 is oxidised to SO3 by heating the mixture on the heterogeneous catalyst V2O5.
    2SO2(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2SO3(g) ΔH= – 196.6 kJ
  • The forward reaction is exothermic and there is a decrease in number of moles and volume.
  • The optimum conditions to maximise the yield of H2SO4 are pressure of 2 bar and temperature around 720 K.

Question 142.
What are the uses of H2SO4?
Answer:
H2SO4 has following uses :

  • In the preparation of HNO3, HCl, H2PO4, Na2CO3 sulphates, alums, alcohols, ethers, etc.
  • In the manufacture of dyes, fertilizers like ammonium sulphate, super phosphate, detergents.
  • As an electrolyte in lead storage battery.
  • As a dehydrating agent.
  • As an oxidising agent.
  • For refining petroleum.
  • As a pickling agent for removing layers of basic oxides from the metal surfaces like Fe, Cu, etc. before the metals are galvanized, electroplated, etc.
  • It is used as a laboratory reagent.
  • It is used in the manufacture of nitrocellulose products.

Question 143.
What happens when,
(i) SO3 gas is passed through water
(ii) Concentrated sulphuric acid is added to sugar?
Answer:
(i) SO3 dissolves in water and forms sulphuric acid, H2SO4.
SO3(g) + H2O(1) → H2SO4(aq)
(ii) Concentrated sulphuric acid when added to sugar, it is dehydrated giving carbon.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 74

Question 144.
How is chlorine obtained from HCl?
Answer:
Chlorine is obtained by the oxidation of hydrochloric acid by various oxidising agents:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 75
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 76

Question 155.
How is chlorine obtained from rock salt or NaCl?
Answer:
Rock salt or NaCl in the presence of MnO2 and concentrated H2SO4 forms chlorine.

The reaction takes place in two steps.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 77

Question 156.
How is chlorine manufactured by Deacon’s process?
Answer:
In Deacon’s process, chlorine is manufactured by oxidising hydrogen chloride gas by atmospheric oxygen in the presence of CuCl2 as a catalyst at 723 K.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 78

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 147.
How is chlorine manufactured by the electrolytic process?
Answer:

  • On a large scale chlorine is obtained by an electrolytic process.
  • The electrolyte is brine, a concentrated solution of NaCl.
  • Nelson’s two compartments diaphragm cell is used for electrolysis in which stout graphite rod is used as an anode while U shaped steel vessel is used as a cathode.
  • Reactions :
    NaCl → Na+ + Cl
    H2O ⇌ H++ OHAt cathode :
    2H2O + 2e → H2 + 20H
    Na+ +OH → NaOHAt anode :
    2Cl → 2Cl + 2e
    2Cl → Cl2(g)

Question 148.
What are the physical properties of chlorine?
Answer:
The physical properties of chlorine are as follows :

  • It is greenish-yellow gas with a suffocating and pungent smell and is heavier than air.
  • It is a poisonous gas.
  • When liquefied, chlorine forms a greenish-yellow liquid which has boiling point 239 K.
  • Chlorine is soluble in water and the solution is called chlorine water.

Question 149.
What is the action of chlorine on the following :
(i) Na
(ii) K
(iii) Ca
(iv) Fe
(v) A1
(vi) Cu?
Answer:
(i) 2Na + Cl2 → 2NaCl
(ii) 2K + Cl2 → 2KCl
(iii) Ca + Cl2 → CaCl2
(iv) 2Fe + 3Cl2 \(\stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow}\) 2FeCl3
(v) 2A1 + 3Cl2 \(\stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow}\) 2A1Cl3
(vi) Cu + Cl2 → CuCl2

Question 150.
What is the action of Cl2 on the following :
(i) P4
(ii) As
(iii) Sb
(iv) B
(v) S.
Answer:
(i) P4 + 6Cl2 → 4PCl3 and P4 + 10Cl2 → 4PCl5
(ii) 2As + 3Cl2 → 2AsCl3
(iii) 2Sb + 3Cl2 → 2SbCl3
(iv) 2B + 3Cl2 → 2BCl3
(v) S8 + 4Cl2 → 4S2Cl2
Sulphur monochloride

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 151.
What is the action of chlorine on
(i) hydrogen
(ii) hydrogen sulphide?
OR
Give two reactions to show the affinity of hydrogen towards chlorine.
Answer:
(i) Since chlorine has high affinity for hydrogen, it forms hydrogen chloride in the presence of sunlight.
\(\mathrm{H}_{2}+\mathrm{Cl}_{2} \stackrel{h v}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{HCl}\)
(ii) Chlorine reacts with hydrogen sulphide to form hydrogen chloride and sulphur.
H2S + Cl2 → 2HCl + S

Question 152.
What is the reaction of chlorine with ammonia?
Answer:

  • Chlorine reacts with the excess of ammonia to form ammonium chloride, NH4Cl and nitrogen.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 80
  • When chlorine is in excess, then with ammonia it forms explosive nitrogen trichloride, NCl3.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 81

Question 153.
Explain the reactions of chlorine with alkalies.
Answer:

  • Chlorine with cold and dilute caustic soda, NaOH forms sodium chloride and sodium hypochlorite, NaOCl.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 82
  • Chlorine with hot and concentrated NaOH forms sodium chloride and sodium chlorate, NaClO3.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 83
  • When chlorine is passed over dry slaked lime Ca(OH)2, bleaching powder, CaOCl2 is obtained.
    Ca(OH)2 + Cl2 → CaOCl2 +H2O

Question 154.
What is the action of chlorine on
(i) methane and
(ii) ethylene?
Answer:
(i) With methane, chlorine forms substituted products.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 84
(ii) With unsaturated hydrocarbons, chlorine forms addition products.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 85

Question 155.
Explain oxidising nature of chlorine with chemical reactions.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 86

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 156.
Explain the bleaching action of chlorine.
Answer:
(i) Chlorine acts as a powerful bleaching agent due to its oxidising nature.
(ii) In moist conditions or in the presence of water it forms unstable hypochlorous acid, HOCl which decomposes giving nascent oxygen which oxidises the vegetable colouring matter of green leaves, flowers, litmus, indigo, etc.
Cl2 + H2O → HCl + HOCl
HOCl → HCl + [O]
Vegetable coloured matter + [O] → colourless matter.

Question 157.
Explain disinfecting action of chlorine.
OR
Chlorine is used for the sterilization of water. Explain.
Answer:
(i) Since chlorine has an ability of killing harmful micro-organisms, it acts as a good disinfecting agent.
(ii) This ability is due to the oxidising nature of chlorine which produces nascent oxygen in aqueous solutions.
H2O + Cl2 → HCl + HOCl
HOCl → HCl + [O]

Question 158.
What is the action of Cl2 on
(a) Cold and dil. NaOH
(b) Hot and cone. NaOH
(c) P4 molecule
(d) Iron (II)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 87

Question 159.
Write the formulae of tear gas, phosgene and mustard gas.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 112

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 160.
Who prepared hydrochloric acid first?
Answer:
Glauber in 1648, first prepared hydrochloric acid by heating common salt NaCl with concentrated H2SO4.
\(2 \mathrm{NaCl}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{SO}_{4}(\text { conc. }) \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{Na}_{2} \mathrm{SO}_{4}+2 \mathrm{HCl}\)

Question 161.
What are the physical properties of hydrogen chloride gas?
Answer:

  • Hydrogen chloride is a colourless gas with a pungent odour.
  • It is heavier than air.
  • Hydrogen chloride on liquefication forms a colourless liquid having boiling point 189 K and on freezing it forms white solid crystals having melting point 159 K.
  • Hydrogen chloride is highly soluble in water.

Question 162.
What is hydrochloric acid?
Answer:
An aqueous solution of hydrogen chloride is called hydrochloric acid.

It is acidic in nature. It is a strong acid and dissociates almost completely.
HCl(aq) + H2O → H3O+(aq) + Cl(aq) Ka = 107

Question 163.
What is aquaria? What is the action of aquaria on (i) Au and (ii) Pt?
Answer:
A mixture of three parts of concentrated HCl solution and one part of concentrated HNO3 solution is known as aquaria.

Aquaregia dissolves almost all substances including noble metals like gold, platinum.

This high solubility is due to the formation of nascent chlorine.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 89

Question 164.
Write the reactions of hydrochloric acid with the following :
(a) NaHSO3
(b) NaHCO3
(c) CaO
(d) Mg(OH)2
(e) NaOH.
Answer:
(a) NaHSO3 + HCl → NaCl + H2O + SO2
(b) NaHCO3 + HCl → NaCl + H2O + CO2
(c) CaO + 2HCl → CaCl2 + H2O
(d) Mg(OH)2 + 2HCl → MgCl2 + 2H2O
(e) NaOH + HCl → NaCl + H2O

Question 165.
What are the uses of hydrogen chloride (hydrochloric acid)?
Answer:
Hydrogen chloride (OR hydrochloric acid) is used :

  • in the manufacture of chlorine and ammonium chloride,
  • to manufacture glucose from com, starch
  • to manufacture dye
  • in mediClne and galvanising
  • as an important reagent in the laboratory
  • to extract glue from bones and for the purification of bone black.
  • for dissolving metals, Fe + 2HCl(aq) → FeCl2 + H2(g)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 166.
What are the general compositions of interhalogen compounds?
Answer:
(i) The general compositions of interhalogen compounds are XX’, XX’3, XX’5 and XX’7 where halogen X is more electropositive and has larger size than another halogen X’. For example,

XX’ XX’3 XX’5 XX’7
CIF
BrF
BrCl
ICl
C1F3
BrF3
If3
IC13
(unstable)
C1F5
BrF5
If5
IF7

(ii) As the ratio of radii of X and X’ increases, the number of atoms of X’ per molecule of interhalogen compound increases. For example, iodine having the largest size with fluorine of the smallest size forms stable IF7.

Question 167.
Which are the different types of interhalogen compounds?
Answer:
(i) The general compositions of interhalogen compounds are XX’, XX’3, XX’5 and XX’7 where halogen X is more electropositive and has larger size than another halogen X’. For example,

XX’ XX’3 XX’5 XX’7
CIF
BrF
BrCl
ICl
C1F3
BrF3
If3
IC13
(unstable)
C1F5
BrF5
If5
IF7

(ii) As the ratio of radii of X and X’ increases, the number of atoms of X’ per molecule of interhalogen compound increases. For example, iodine having the largest size with fluorine of the smallest size forms stable IF7.

Question 168.
What are general characteristics of interhalogen compounds?
Answer:
The general characteristics of interhalogen compounds are as follows :

  • In XX’n, X is the halogen which has larger size and is more electropositive, while X’ is the halogen having smaller size and is less electropositive, n is the number of atoms of X’ attached to X.
  • Interhalogen compounds are named as halogen halides. The more electropositive halogen is named as such and the less electropositive halogen is named as the halide. In ClF, since Cl is larger and more electropositive than F, the interhalogen compound is named as Chlorine monofluoride,
  • As the ratio of radii (radius of X : radius of X’ ) between the atoms X and X’ increases, the number of halogen atoms (n) per interhalogen compound also increases.
  • The interhalogen compounds have even number of atoms i.e. 2,4,6,8. For example, ClF3 has 4 atoms and BrF5 has 6 atoms.
  • The number of X’ atoms in the interhalogen compounds are always odd.
  • The properties of interhalogen compounds are generally intermediate between those of the halogens from which they are made.
  • The oxidation state of the atom X in XX’n, is equal to +1, +3, +5, +7 and that of X’ is -1.
  • Since the electronegativity difference between two different halogens is low, the interhalogen compounds are covalent in nature.
  • Interhalogen compounds exist as gases, liquids and solids depending upon their composition. They are volatile and less stable but not explosive.
  • They are diamagnetic in nature.
  • Since the interhalogen bond (X – X’) is weaker than parent halogens, they are more reactive than halogens.
    x- l so >oui bruin Timor! N

Question 169.
How are interhalogen compounds prepared?
Answer:
All interhalogen compounds are prepared by direct reaction of halogens or reaction of halogen on lower interhalogen compounds. The compound formed depends upon specific conditions of the reactions,

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

(a) By direct combination :

  • Chlorine monofluoride, ClF : It is a colourless gas obtained by reacting equal volumes of Cl2 and F2.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 90
  • Chlorine trifluoride, ClF3 : It is a colourless gas, obtained by reacting Cl2 with excess of F2.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 91
  • Bromine trifluoride, BrF3 : It is a yellow green liquid obtained by reacting Br2.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 92
  • Iodine trichloride, ICl3 : It is an orange solid obtained by reacting I2 with excess of Cl. This orange solid dimerises to form I2Cl6 having Cl-bridges.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 93
  • Iodine chloride, ICl : It is obtained by reaction between equimolar amounts of I2 and Cl2. a- form of it is a ruby red solid while 1-form is a brown-red solid.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 94
  • Bromine pentafluoride, BrF5 : It is a colourless liquid and obtained by the reaction of bromine with the excess of fluorine.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 95
  • Bromine chloride BrCl : It is a gas, obtained by the reaction of bromine with chlorine taken in equal volumes.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 96

(b) By the reaction of halogen with interhalogen compound :

  • Bromine fluoride (BrF) : It is a pale brown coloured gas prepared by the action of Br2 on BrF3. Br2 + BrF3 → 3BrF
  • Bromine trifluoride ( BrF3) : BrF3 can also be prepared by the action of Br2 on ClF’3.
    Br2 + ClF3 → 2BrF3 + BrCl

(c) SpeClal reaction for the preparation of ICl :

  • ICl( Wij’s solution) can be prepared by the action of Iodinef (I2) on potassium chlorate (KClO3)
    I2 + KClO3 → ICl + KlO3

Question 170.
Give the physical states of the following molecules :
BrCl, IBr, IF5, BrF5, ClF3, IF7
Answer:

Molecules Physical states
BrCl Gas
IBr Black solid
If5 Colourless gas
BrF5 Colourless liquid
ClF3 Colourless gas
IF7 Colourless gas

Question 171.
Discuss the hydrolysis reactions given by interhalogen compounds.
Answer:
Interhalogen compounds undergo hydrolysis and form haloacids of lower halogen and oxyacid of higher halogen in interhalogen compounds.

BrCl + H2O → HOBr + HCl
5ICl + 3H2O → HIO3 + 5HCl + 2I2
2ICI3 + 3H2O → HIO3 + 5HCl + ICl

Question 172.
Give the addition reaction given by interhalogen compounds.
Answer:
Interhalogen compounds give addition reactions with unsaturated hydrocarbons.
CH2 = CH2 + XX’ → CH2X – CH2X’
CH2 = CH2 + ICl → CH2I – CH2Cl

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 173.
Arrange the given compounds in the order of their thermal stability. ClF, IBr, BrCl, ICl.
Answer:
The thermal stability of interhalogen compounds depends upon the electronegativity of the combining atoms.

Elements F Cl Br I
Electronegativity 4.0 3.2 3.0 2.7

More the difference between the electronegativity the combining atoms, more is the thermal stability. Hence the order of thermal stability is ClF > ICl > IBr > BrCl

Question 174.
Give one fluorinating reaction given by inter-halogen compounds.
Answer:
Interhalogen compounds like ClF3, BrF3, etc. are very reactive and they are strong fluorinating agents.
U(S) + 3ClF3(1) → UF6(g) + 3ClF(g)

Question 175.
What are the uses of interhalogen compounds?
Answer:
The uses of interhalogen compounds are as follows :

  • ICl is used as a halogenating agent and also in the estimation of iodine number of fats and oils.
  • In the preparation of polyhalides, interhalogen compounds are used.
  • ClF3 and BrF3 are widely used as fluorinating agent. They are used in the separation of 235U isotope by fluorinating.
    235U(S) + 3ClF3(l)235UF6(g) + 3ClF(g)
  • In propellants ClF3 and IF3 are used as oxidisers.
  • They are used as non-aqueous solvents.
  • The XX’ interhalogen compounds are used as a catalyst for the oxidation of As(III)

Question 176.
Give the disproportionation reactions given by the following :
(i) BrF
(ii) ClF3
(iii) ICl3
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 100

Question 177.
Give hybridisation and geometry of the following molecules :
(1) C1F3
(2) IF5
(3) IF7.
Answer:

Molecule Hybridisation Geometry
(1) C1F3 sp3d Trigonal bipyramidal or T-shaped
(2) IF5 sp3d2 Square pyramidal
(3) IF7 sp3d3 Pentagonal bipyramidal

Question 178.
Draw structure of :
(a) Chlorine trifluoride
(b) Chlorine pentafluoride
(c) Bromine trifluoride
(d) Iodine dichloride
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 101

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 179.
Complete the given table :

The oxidation state of the central atom Number of lone pairs of electrons Examples
+ 7 ……………………………….. IF7
……………………………….. 1 IF5
……………………………….. 2 I2Cl6
+ 1 ……………………………….. IBr

Answer:

The oxidation state of the central atom Number of lone pairs of electrons Examples
+ 7 0 IF7
+ 5 1 IF5
+ 3 2 I2Cl6
+ 1 3 IBr

Question 180.
Explain IC1 is more reactive than I2.
Answer:

  • in interhalogen compound ICl and I2 the atoms are bonded by covalent bonds.
  • The covalent bond between dissimilar atoms, I and Cl atoms in ICl is weaker than between similar atoms in I2.
  • Therefore bond dissociation enthalpy of ICl bond is less than that of I2 bond.
    Hence ICl is more reactive than I2.

Question 181.
What is the action of
(i) H2O and
(ii) PF5 on XeF2?
Answer:
(i) Action of H2O ( Hydrolysis) :
XeF2 undergoes hydrolysis to form HF.
2XeF2 + 2H2O → 4HF + 2Xe + O2

(ii) Reaction with PF5 :
XeF2 forms adducts on reaction with PF5.
XeF2 + PF5 → XeF2.PF5

Question 182.
Give the method of preparation of XeF4 and its structure.
Answer:
For the preparation of XeF4 :
The covalent bond between dissimilar atoms, I and Cl atoms in ICl is weaker than between similar atoms in I2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 107

Question 183.
Complete the following :
(1) XeF4 + H2O → ……………… + HF
Answer:
XeF4 + H2O → XeOF2 + 2HF

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 184.
What are the uses of :
(1) Helium
(2) Neon
(3) Argon.
Answer:
(1) Uses of helium (He) :

  • A mixture of helium (85%) and oxygen (15%) is used for filling balloons.
  • A mixture of helium and oxygen is also used for respiration by sea divers instead of air because helium is less soluble in blood than nitrogen under high pressure. It is also used for treatment of asthma.
  • Helium is used in produClng inert atmosphere in metallurgical operations and welding of metals.
  • Liquid helium is used in produClng low temperature required for research.
  • Helium is also used in produClng lasers in low temperature gas thermometry.
  • It is used in magnetic resonance imaging.
  • It is used as a shielding gas for arc welding, (viii) It is used in supersonic wind tunnels.
  • Helium nucleus is used as a bombarding particle for disintegration of atoms.

(2) Uses of neon (Ne) :

  • Neon is used in the production of neon discharge lamps and signs by filling Ne in glass discharge tubes.
  • Neon signs are visible from a long distance and also have high penetrating power in mist or fog.
  • A mixture of neon and helium is used in voltage stabilizers and current rectifiers.
  • Neon is also used in the production of lasers and fluorescent tubes.

(3) Uses of argon (Ar) :

  • Argon is used to fill fluorescent tubes and radio valves.
  • It is used to provide inert atmosphere for welding and production of steel.
  • It is used along with neon in neon sign lamps to obtain different colours.
  • A mixture of 85% Ar and 15% N2 is used in electric bulbs to enhance the life of the filament.

Question 185.
Helium and neon do not form compounds with fluorine. Why?
Answer:
Helium and Neon do not contain d-orbitals in their respective valence shells and hence their electrons cannot be promoted to higher energy levels like other elements in group 18. Therefore, helium and neon do not form compounds with fluorine.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 223.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each sub¬question :

1. Oxygen molecule shows :
(a) Paramagnetism
(b) Diamagnetism
(c) Ferromagnetism
(d) ferrimagnetism
Answer:
(a) paramagnetism

2. Among group 16 elements, the radioactive element is
(a) Ra
(b) Rn
(c) Bi
(d) Po
Answer:
(d) Po

3. Hybridization involved in H2O is
(a) sp
(b) sp3
(c) sp3d2
(d) sp2
Answer:
(b) sp3

4. The structure of SF4 is
(a) Octahedral
(b) Bipyramidal
(c) Square planar
(d) Tetrahedral
Answer:
(b) Bipyramidal

5. Which one has the highest bond energy?
(a) 0-0
(b) S-S
(c) Se-Se
(d) Te-Te
Answer:
(b) S – S

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

6. Which of the following compounds contains S = O as well as S = S bonds?
(a) Sulphuric acid
(b) Thiosulphuric acid
(c) Sulphurous acid
(d) Thiosulphurous acid
Answer:
(b) Thiosulphuric acid

7. Ozone is :
(a) A compound of oxygen
(b) An allotropic oxygen
(c) An isotope of oxygen
(d) An isobar of oxygen
Answer:
(b) An allotropic oxyen

8. Which one has lowest boiling point?
(a) H2O
(b) H2S
(C) H2Se
(d) H2Te
Answer:
(b) H2S

9. Maximum covalency of sulphur is :
(a) Four
(b) Six
(c) Three
(d) Two
Answer:
(b) Six

10. Oxygen exhibits-1 oxidation state in :
(a) OF2
(b) H2O2
(c) HClO
(d) H2O
Answer:
(b) H2O2

11. The oxidation state of oxygen in OF2 is
(a) -1
(b) -2
(c) +1
(d) +2
Answer:
(d) +2

12. In the hydrides of group 16 elements, the minimum bond angle is in
(a) H2O
(b) H2S
(C) H2Se
(d) H2Te
Answer:
(d) H2Te

13. In SF6, sulphur atom undergoes hybridisation
(a) sp3
(b) sp3d
(c) sp3d2
(d) sp3d3
Answer:
(c) sp3d2

14. Al2O3 is
(a) acidic oxide
(b) basic oxide
(c) amphoteric oxide
(d) neutral oxide
Answer:
(c) amphoteric oxide

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

15. Which of the following is a basic oxide?
(a) SiO2
(b) P4O10
(c) MgO
(d) Al2O3
Answer:
(c) MgO

16. The most stable allotropic form of sulphur is :
(a) Rhombic sulphur
(b) Flowers of sulphur
(c) Platic sulphur
(d) Mono clinic sulphur
Answer:
(a) Rhombic sulphur

17. The atomicity of sulphur in orthorhombic sulphur is –
(a) 8
(b) 6
(c) 4
(d) 2
Answer:
(a) 8

18. The oxidation state of sulphur in peroxy disul- phuric acid is
(a) +2
(b) +3
(c) +4
(d) +6
Answer:
(d) +6

19. In the contact process, the catalyst used is
(a) TiO2
(b) Pt
(c) V2O5
(d) Fe2O3
Answer:
(c) V2O5

20. What is the molecular formula of the oleum?
(a) H2SO3
(b) H2SO4
(c) H2S2O7
(d) H2S2O8
Answer:
(c) H2S2O7

21. The electronic configuration of bromine is
(a) [Ne] 3s23p5
(b) [Kr] 4d105s25ps
(c) [Ar] 3d104s24p5
(d) [Ar]4d105s25p5
Answer:
(c) [Ar] 3d104s24p5

22. The decreasing order for negative values for electron gain enthalpies is
(a) F > Cl > Br
(b) Cl > F > Br
(c) Br > Cl > F
(d) F > Br > Cl
Answer:
(b) Cl > F > Br

23. The molecular formula H2S2O2 represents which oxoacid among the following?
(a) Hydrosulphurous acid
(b) Thiosulphurous acid
(c) Sulphuric acid
(d) Pyrosulphurous acid
Answer:
(b) Thiosulphurous acid

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

24. General electronic configuration of group 16 elements is
(a) ns2np3
(b) ns2np4
(c) ns2np2
(d) ns2np5
Answer:
(b) ns2np4

25. The decreasing order of electronegativity is
(a) Cl > I > Br
(b) Br > I > F
(c) F > Br > I
(d) Cl > F > Br
Answer:
(c) F > Br > I

26. The increasing order of acidic strength of haloacids is
(a) HF > HCl > HBr > HI
(b) HCl > HF > HBr > HI
(c) HCl < HF < HBr < HI
(d) HF < HCl < HBr < HI
Answer:
(d) HF < HCl < HBr < HI

27. Amongst haloacids, the strongest reducing agent is
(a) HCl
(b) HF
(c) HI
(d) HBr
nswer:
(c) HI

28. Haloacid with the maximum thermal stability is
(a) HI
(b) HCl
(c) HF
(d) HBr
Answer:
(c) HF

29. The bleaching action of chlorine is due to
(a) oxidation
(b) reduction
(c) neutralisation
(d) double decomposition
Answer:
(a) oxidation

30. The halogen which does not form polyhalide ion is
(a) F
(b) Br
(c) I
(d) Cl
Answer:
(a) F

31. Camalite is a natural source of
(a) F
(b) Cl
(c) Br
(d) I
Answer:
(b) Cl

32. In Deacon’s process the catalyst used is
(a) V2O5
(b) CuCl2
(c) PtCl4
(d) FeCl3
Answer:
(b) CuCl2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

33. Chlorine on reaction with carbon disulphide forms
(a) CCl4
(b) SO2Cl2
(c) S2Cl2
(d) CSCl2
Answer:
(c) S2Cl2

34. When chlorine is passed over dry slaked lime the product obtained is
(a) CaCl2
(b) HCl
(c) CaOCl2
(d) HOCl
Answer:
(c) CaOCl2

35. Hybridisation in ClF3 is
(a) sp3
(b) sp3d
(c) dsp3
(d) sp3d2
Answer:
(b) sp3d

36. The geometry of ClF3 is
(a) tetrahedral
(b) trigonal bipyramidal
(c) square planar
(d) triangular
Answer:
(b) trigonal bipyramidal

37. The structure of interhalogen compound XX’5 is
(a) square pyramidal
(b) trigonal bipyramidal
(c) tetrahedral
(d) pentagonal bipyramidal
Answer:
(a) square pyramidal

38. Interhalogen compound used as a fluorinating agent is
(a) IF7
(b) BrF5
(c) IF5
(d) ClF3
Answer:
(d) ClF3

39. The increasing order of thermal stability of oxoacids of halogens is
(a) HClO2 < HCIO3 < HClO4
(b) HClO4 < HCIO3 < HClO2
(c) HClO4 < HClO2 < HCIO3
(d) HCIO3 < HClO2 < HClO4
Answer:
(a) HClO2 < HCIO3 < HClO4

40. The shape of IF7 molecules is :
(a) Tetrahedral
(b) Octahedral
(c) Trigonal bipyramidal
(d) Pentagonal bipyramidal
Answer:
(d) Pentagonal bipyramidal

41. The strongest oxidizing agent is :
(a) HOCl
(b) HClO4
(c) HClO3
(d) HClO2
Answer:
(b) HClO4

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

42. Iodine can exist in the oxidation states
(a) +1, +3, +5
(b) -1, +1, +3
(c) +3, +5, +7
(d) -1, +1, +3, +5, +7
Answer:
(d) -1, +1, +3, +5, +7

43. Fluorine does not show positive oxidation state due to absence of:
(a) d-orbitals
(b) s-orbitals
(c) p-orbitals
(d) f-orbitals
Answer:
(a) d-orbitals

44. The most powerful oxidising agent is :
(a) Fluorine
(b) Chlorine
(c) Iodine
(d) Bromine
Answer:
(a) Fluorine

45. Which one is the strongest reducing agent?
(a) HF
(b) HCl
(c) HBr
(d) HI
Answer:
(d) HI

46. Fluorine can exist in the oxidation state :
(a) – 1 only
(b) – 1 and + 1
(c) 1-, +1, +3 only
(d) -1, +l,. + 3, +7
Answer:
(a) – 1 only

47. Which of the following halogen is radioactive in nature?
(a) Chlorine
(b) Bromine
(c) Iodine
(d) Astatine
Answer:
(d) Astatine

48. The electronic configuration of krypton is
(a) [Ar] 3d10 As2 Ap6
(b) [Ne] 3s2 3p6
(c) [Ai] 4d10 5s2 5p6
(d) [Xe] 6s2 6p6
Answer:
(a) [Ar] 3d10 As2 Ap6

49. Which one of the following does not exist?
(a) HeF4
(b) XeF4
(c) CF4
(d) SF6
Answer:
(a) HeF4

50. Name the noble gas not present in the air.
(a) Radon
(b) Argon
(c) Krypton
(d) Helium
Answer:
(a) Radon

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

51. Which is the most abundant noble gas?
(a) Argon
(b) Helium
(c) Neon
(d) Krypton
Answer:
(a) Argon

52. A mixture used for respiration by the sea divers is OR Which mixture is used for respiration by deep sea divers?
(a) He + O2
(b) Ne + O2
(c) Ar + O2
(d) Kr + O2
Answer:
(a) He + O2

53. Iodine exists as-
(a) polar molecular solid
(b) ionic solid
(c) nonpolar molecular solid
(d) hydrogen-bonded molecular solid
Answer:
(c) nonpolar molecular solid

54. Hybridisation in H2S is
(a) sp
(b) sp3
(c) sp3d2
(d) sp2
Answer:
(b) sp3

55. Noble gas which finds the use as a cryogenic agent is
(a) He
(b) Ne
(c) Ar
(d) Kr
Answer:
(a) He

56 Which of the following compounds of chlorine is used as refrigerant?
(a) CCl3NO2
(b) CCl2F2
(c) COCl2
(d) CCl4
Answer:
(b) CCl2F2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

57. The increasing order of oxidising power of oxyacids of chlorine is
(a) HClO2 > HClO3 > HClO4
(b) HOCl > HCl02 > HClO4
(c) HClO2 < HClO3 < HClO4
(d) HClO4 < HOCl < HCO2
Answer:
(c) HClO2 < HClO3 < HClO4

58. S-O-O-S bonds are present in
(a) H2S2O6
(b) H2SO5
(c) H2S2O5
(d) H2S2O8
Answer:
(d) H2S2O8

59. The increasing order of thermal stability of hydrides of sixteenth group elements is
(a) H2O < H2S < H2Se < H2Te
(b) H2S < H2O < H2Se < H2Te
(c) H2Te < H2S < H2Se < H2O
(d) H2Te < H2Se < H2S < H2O
Answer:
(d) H2Te < H2Se < H2S < H2O

60. The bond angle F-Cl-F in ClF3 is
(a) 89°
(b) 109°29
(c) 95°
(d) 120°
Answer:
(a) 89°

61. The oxidation number of Xe in XeOF2 is :
(a) O
(b) +2
(c) +4
(d) +3
Answer:
(c) +4

62 XeF4 on partial hydrolysis produces
(a) XeF2
(b) XeOF2
(c) XeOF4
(d) XeO3
Answer:
(c) XeOF4

63. Shape of XeO4 is
(a) Octahedral
(b) Square pyramidal
(c) Pyramidal
(d) T-shaped
Answer:
(b) Square pyramidal

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

64. In XeF2, XeF4 and XeF6 the number of lone pairs on Xe is respectively
(a) 2, 3, 1
(b) 1, 2, 3
(c) 4, 1, 2
(d) 3, 2, 1
Answer:
(d) 3, 2, 1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 1.
What is chemical kinetics?
Answer:
Chemical kinetics is a branch of physical chemistry that involves the study of the rates and mechanisms of chemical reactions and the influence of various factors like temperature, pressure, catalyst, etc., on the rates of reactions.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 2.
What is the importance of chemical kinetics?
Answer:

  • It deals with the study of the rates and mechanism of reactions.
  • The effect of temperature on the reaction rates can be studied.
  • The influence of catalysts can be studied.
  • The conditions for altering the rates and mechanisms of chemical reactions can be predicted.
  • Thermodynamic parameters like energy, enthalpy changes, Δ5, ΔG of the reactions can be calculated.

Question 3.
How are reactions classified according to their rates? Give one example of each.
Answer:
According to the rates of the reactions, they can be classified as :
(1) Fast reactions,
(2) Very slow reactions,
(3) Moderately slow reactions.

(1) Fitst actions : In this, reactants react almost instantaneously, e.g., neutralisation reaction between H+ and OH-, forming water.
\(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{xa})}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \rightarrow \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{0 \mathrm{D}}\)

(2) Very slow reactions : In this, the reactants react extremely slow, so that there is no appreciable change in the concentrations of the reactants over a long period of time. E.g., reaction of silica with mineral acids, rusting of iron, etc.

(3) Moderately slow reactions : In this, the reactants react moderately slow with a measurable velocity, e.g., the hydrolysis of the esters.
\(\begin{aligned}
\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COOC}_{2} \mathrm{H}_{5}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O} \stackrel{\mathrm{H}^{+}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COOH} \\
&+\mathrm{C}_{2} \mathrm{H}_{5} \mathrm{OH}
\end{aligned}\)

Question 4.
Define rate of a reaction.
Answer:
Definition : The rate of a chemical reaction is defined as the change in the concentration of the reactants or products per unit time.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 2
It is often expressed in mol dm-3s-1.

Question 5.
Explain the following :
(A) Rate of the reaction in terms of the concentration of the reactants.
(B) Rate of reaction in terms of the concentration of the products.
Answer:
(A) Rate of the reaction in terms of the concentration of the reactants :
If c1 and c2 are the concentrations of the reactant A at time t1 and t2 respectively, then, the change in concentration, Δc = c2 – c1
Since c2 < c1, the term Δc is negative often written as – Δc.
The time interval is, Δt – t2 – t1
If Δ [A] is the change in concentration of A, then A[A] = C2 – C1
∴ Rate of the reaction = \(\mathrm{A}=\frac{-\Delta[\mathrm{A}]}{\Delta t}\)
∴ Rate of the reaction = \(\frac{-\Delta c}{\Delta t}\)

(B) Rate of the reaction in terms of the concentration of the products :
If x1 and x2 are the concentrations of the product B at time t1 and t2 respectively, then the change in concentration, Δx = x2 – x1.

∴ x2 > x1, the term Δx is positive.
The time interval is, Δt = t2 – t1

If Δ B is the change in concentration of product B, then Δ[B] = x2 – x1 = Δx
∴ Rate of formation of \(\mathrm{B}=+\frac{\Delta[\mathrm{B}]}{\Delta t}\)
∴ Rate of the reaction \(=\frac{\Delta x}{\Delta t}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 6.
What are the units of rate of a chemical reaction?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 3
∴ The unit of the rate of a chemical reaction : mol L-1 3t-1 or mol dm-3s-1 (According to IUPAC, the rate of a chemical reaction should be expressed in mol m-3s-1 [SI unit]).

Question 7.
Mention the factors that affect the rate of a chemical reaction.
Answer:
The rate of a chemical reaction depends on the following factors :

  • Nature of the reactants.
  • The concentration of the reactants. In case of a gaseous reaction the rate depends on the pressures of the reactants.
  • Temperature of the reaction.
  • The presence of a catalyst and its nature.

Question 8.
Explain the term Average rate of a reaction.
Answer:
In chemical kinetics the rate of a reaction is measured in terms of the changes in the concentrations of the reactants or the products per unit time. Average rate of a chemical reaction : It is expressed as a finite change in concentration (- Δc) of the reactant divided by the time interval (Δt) for the change in concentration.

Consider a reaction,
A → B
The rate of a reaction, \(R=\frac{-\Delta[\mathrm{A}]}{\Delta t}=\frac{-\Delta c}{\Delta t}=\frac{c_{2}-c_{1}}{t_{2}-t_{1}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 4
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 5
∴ Average rate \(=\frac{-\Delta[\mathrm{A}]}{\Delta t}\) (in mol dm-3s-1)

Δc is negative, since the concentrartion of the reactant decreases with the time.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 6
The rate of a reaction is also measured in terms of a finite change in the concentration (Δx) of the product divided by the time interval (Δt), for the change.

For the reaction,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 7

Question 9.
Explain the term Instantaneous rate of a reaction.
Answer:
Instantaneous rate of a reaction : It is defined as a rate of a reaction at a specific instant during a course of the reaction.

If the average reaction rate is calculated over shorter and shorter intervals (making Δt very small) then instantaneous rate is obtained.

In case of reactant A, the instantaneous rate is represented as, \(R=\frac{-d[\mathrm{~A}]}{d t}\) and in case of product B, it is represented as \(R=\frac{+d[B]}{d t}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 10.
Define :
(a) Average rate of reaction.
(b) Instantaneous rate of reaction.
Answer:
(a) Average rate of a chemical reaction : It is expressed as a finite change in concentration (- Δc) of the reactant divided by the time interval (Δt) for the change in concentration.

∴ Average rate, \(R=\frac{-\Delta c}{\Delta t}\)

(b) Instantaneous rate of reaction : It is defined as a rate of a reaction at a specific instant during a course of the reaction.

Instantaneous rate \(=\frac{-d c}{d t}\)

Question 11.
Represent the average rates of the following reaction. N2(g) + 3H2(g) → 2NH3(g).
Answer:
For the reation,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 12
This is because the rate of consumption of H2 is thrice the rate of consumption of N2 while the rate of formation of NH3 will be twice the rate of consumption of N2.

Question 12.
Express the rate of a reaction in terms of change in concentration of each constituent in the following reaction : aA+bB → cC+ dD
Answer:
The rate of a reaction may be expressed in terms of decrease in the concentration of the reactants or in-crease in the concentration of the product per unit time,

∴ For the given reaction, aA T bB → cC +dD
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 13

Question 13.
For a hypothetical reaction, A + 2B → products, the concentration of A and B at different intervals of time are given in the following table. Find the rates of the reaction in terms of concentration changes in A and B.

The equilibrium concentration of A and B at different time intervals :

Time t/minute [A]/mol L-1 [B]/ml L-1
0 1.000 2.000
10 0.534 1.068
20 0.342 0.360
30 0.180 0.360

Answer:
Rate of a reaction = \(\frac{-\Delta[\mathrm{A}]}{\Delta t}=-\frac{1}{2} \frac{\Delta[\mathrm{B}]}{\Delta t}\)
(1) Over time interval from O to 10 minutes
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 14
(Note that the rate of a reaction in terms of changes in concentration of any reactant or product at the given time remains the same.)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(2) Over the time interval from 10 to 20 minutes,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 15

Question 14.
Show that the rate of reaction is the same whether expressed in terms of the rate of consumption of any reactant or of the formation of any product.
2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
The concentrations of reactants and products at different time intervals are given in the following table :
Concentrations of various species at different times for the reaction N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g) :

Time/s [N2O5]/M [NO2]/M [O2]/M
0 0.0300 0 0
200 0.0213 0.0174 0.00435
400 0.0152 0.0296 0.00740
600 0.0108 0.0384  0.00960

Answer:
The rate of the reaction can be expressed in terms of rate of consumption of reactants or rate of formation of products.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 16
Consider concentrations at time t1 = 200 seconds and t2 = 400 seconds
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 17
The constant values of rate of reaction proves that the rate of the reaction may be measured in terms of concentration changes of reactants or products per unit time.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 15.
Define Rate law (or differential rate law).
Answer:
Rate law (or differential rate law) : It is defined as an experimentally determined mathematical equation which expresses the rate of a chemical reaction in terms of molar concentrations of the reactants which influence the rate of the reaction. For example, for a reaction, A + B → Products By rate law, Rate = R = k[A] x [B] where k is a rate constant and [Al and [B] are molar concentrations of the reactants A and B respectively.

Question 16.
Give examples of rate law with illustrations.
Answer:
Consider following examples :
(i) H2(g) + I2(g) → 2HI(g)
R = k[H2] [I2]

(ii) 2H2O2(g) → 2H2O(I) + O2(g)
Experimentally it is observed that the rate of the reaction is proportional to the concentration of H2O2.
∴ R = k [H2O2]

(iii) NO2(g) + CO(g) → NO(g) + CO2(g)
Experimentally it is observed that rate of the reaction does not depend on the concentration of CO but it is proportional to [NO2]2.
∴ R = k[NO2]2

Question 17.
What are the applications of the rate law?
Answer:

  • The rate of any reaction at the given concentration can be measured by knowing the rate law and the rate constant.
  • The concentration of the reactants or the products at any instant during the progress of a reaction can be estimated with the help of rate law and the rate constant.
  • The mechanisms of simple or complex chemical reactions can be predicted and studied.

Question 18.
Define the rate constant. What are the factors which influence the rate constant of a chemical reaction?
Answer:
(A) Rate constant : The rate constant of a chemical reaction is defined as the rate of the chemical reaction when the concentration (or active masses) of each reactant has unit value, i.e., 1 mol dm-3 in the case of solution and the pressure is 1 atm in case of gases, e.g., for a reaction, A → products, Rate R = k[A].

If [A] = 1 mol dm-3, then k = R.

(B) The rate constant of a reaction depends on the following factors:

  • Nature of the reactants.
  • Temperature of the reaction. As the temperature increases, the velocity constant (rate constant) increases.
  • The conditions of the reactions like the presence of the catalyst, solvent, pH, etc.
  • It does not depend on the concentration of the reactants. But if one or more substances are in excess concentration, then the order of the reaction is independent of them.

Question 19.
What are the characteristics of rate constant?
Answer:
The characteristics of rate constant are as follows :

  • The rate constant depends upon the nature of the reaction.
  • Higher the value of the rate constant, faster is the reaction.
  • Lower the value of the rate constant, slower is the reaction.
  • By increasing the temperature, the magnitude of the rate constant increases.
  • For the given reaction, the rate constant has higher value in the presence of a catalyst than in the absence of the catalyst.
  • The reactions having lower activation energy have higher values for rate constants.

Solved Examples 6.2 – 6.3.2

Question 20.
Solve the following :

(1) Write the rate expressions for the following reactions in terms of rate of consumption of the reactants and the rate of formation of the products.
(i) 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)
(ii) H2(g) + I2(g) → 2HI(g)
Solution :
(i) Given : 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)
Rate of consumption of NO at time \(t=\frac{-d[\mathrm{NO}]}{d t}\)
Rate of consumption of O2 at time \(t=\frac{-d\left[\mathrm{O}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)
Rate of formation of NO2 at time \(t=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{NO}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)
Rate of the reaction \(=-\frac{1}{2} \frac{d[\mathrm{NO}]}{d t}=\frac{-d\left[\mathrm{O}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)
\(=\frac{1}{2} \frac{d\left[\mathrm{NO}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)

(ii) Given : H2(g) + I2(g) → 2HI(g)
Rate of consumption of H2 at time \(t=\frac{-d\left[\mathrm{H}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)
Rate of consumption of I2 at time \(t=\frac{-d\left[\mathrm{I}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)
Rate of formation of HI at time \(t=\frac{d[\mathrm{HI}]}{d t}\)
∴ Rate of reaction at any time t \(=-\frac{d\left[\mathrm{H}_{2}\right]}{d t}=-\frac{d\left[\mathrm{I}_{2}\right]}{d t}=\frac{1}{2} \frac{d[\mathrm{HI}]}{d t}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(2) The gas-phase reaction between NO and Br2 is represented by the equation. 2NO(g) + Br2(g) → 2NOBr(g)
(a) Write the expressions for the rate of consumption of reactants and formation of products.
(b) Write the expression for the rate of overall reaction in terms of rates of consumption of reactants and formation of products.
Solution :
Given : 2NO(g) + Br2(g) → 2NOBr(g)
(a) Rate of consumption of NO at time t \(=-\frac{d[\mathrm{NO}]}{d t}\)
Rate of consumption of Br2 at time t \(=\frac{-d\left[\mathrm{Br}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)
Rate of formation of NOBr at time \(t=\frac{d[\mathrm{NOBr}]}{d t}\)
(b) Rate of reaction \(=-\frac{1}{2} \frac{d[\mathrm{NO}]}{d t}=\frac{-d\left[\mathrm{Br}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)
\(=\frac{1}{2} \frac{d[\mathrm{NOBr}]}{d t}\)

(3) The decomposition of N2Os is represented by the equation
2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
(a) How is the rate of formation of NO2 related to the rate of formation of O2?
(b) How is the rate of formation of O2 related to the rate of consumption of N2O5?
Solution :
Given : 2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
(a) Rate of formation of NO2 at time \(t=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{NO}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)
Rate of formation of O2 at time \(t=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{O}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)

They are related to each other through rate of reaction.
∴ Rate of reaction \(=\frac{1}{4} \frac{d\left[\mathrm{NO}_{2}\right]}{d t}=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{O}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)

(b) Rate of consumption of N2O5 at time t \(=-\frac{d\left[\mathrm{~N}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{5}\right]}{d t}\)

Rate of reaction \(=-\frac{1}{2} \frac{d\left[\mathrm{~N}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{5}\right]}{d t}=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{O}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)

In general,
Rate of reaction \(=-\frac{1}{2} \frac{d\left[\mathrm{~N}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{5}\right]}{d t}=\frac{1}{4} \frac{d\left[\mathrm{NO}_{2}\right]}{d t}=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{O}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)

(4) Nitric oxide reacts with H2 according to the reaction. 2NO(g) + 2H2(g) → N2(g) + 2H2O(g)
What is the relationship among \(\frac{d[\mathrm{NO}]}{d t}=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{H}_{2}\right]}{d t}=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{~N}_{2}\right]}{d t} \text { and } \frac{d\left[\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}\right]}{d t} ?\)
Solution :
Given : 2NO(g) + 2H2(g) → N2(g) + 2H2O(g)
The relationship among the rate of consumption of the reactants and the rate of formation of products is as follows :

Rate of reaction :
\(R=-\frac{1}{2} \frac{d[\mathrm{NO}]}{d t}=-\frac{1}{2} \frac{d\left[\mathrm{H}_{2}\right]}{d t}=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{~N}_{2}\right]}{d t}=\frac{1}{2} \frac{d\left[\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}\right]}{d t}\)

(5) The rate of decomposition of N2Os was studied in liquid bromine,
2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
If at a certain time, the rate of disappearance of N2O5 is 0.015 Ms-1 find the rates of formation of NO2 and O2. What is the rate of the reaction at this instant?
Solution :
Given : 2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
Rate of disappearance of N2O5 = 0.015 M s-1
Rate of formation of NO2 =?
Rate of formation of O2 =?
Rate of reaction = ?
Rate of disappearance of \(\mathrm{N}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{5}=\frac{-d\left[\mathrm{~N}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{5}\right]}{d t}\)
= 0.015 M s-1

Since 4 moles of NO2 are formed from 2 moles of N2O5 Rate of formation of NO2Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 21
Answer:
Rate of formation of NO2 = 0.03 Ms-1
Rate of formation of O2 = 0.0075 M s-1
Rate of reaction = 0.0075 Ms-1.

(6) In the reaction, PCl5(g) → PCl3(g) + CI2(g), at a particular moment, the rate of disappearance of PCl5 is 0.015 Ms-1. What are the rates of formation of PCI3 and Cl2?
Solution :
Given : PCl5(g) → PCl3(g) + Cl2(g)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 22
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 23
Answer:
Rate of formation of PCl3 = 0.015 Ms-1
Rate of formation of Cl2 = 0.015 Ms-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(7) In the reaction, 2N3O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g), at a certain time, the rate of formation of NO2 is 0. 04 Ms-1. Find the rate of consumption of N2O5, rate of formation of O2 and the rate of the reaction.
Solution :
Given : 2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
Rate of formation of NO2 = \(\frac{d\left[\mathrm{NO}_{2}\right]}{d t}\) = 0.04 Ms-1

From the reaction, rate of consumption of N2O5 is half the rate of formation of NO2 since when 2 moles of N2O5 are consumed, 4 moles of NO2 are formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 24
Rate of formation of O2 is one-fourth rate of formation of NO2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 25
Answer:
(i) Rate of consumption of N2O5
(ii) Rate of formation of O2 = 0.01 Ms-1
(iii) Rate of reaction = 0.01 Ms-1

(8) Consider the reaction 2A + B → 2C. Suppose that at a particular moment during the reaction, rate of disappearance of A is 0.076 M/s,
(a) What is the rate of formation of C?
(b) What is the rate of consumption of B?
(c) What is the rate of the reaction?
Solution :
Given : 2A + B → 2C
Rate of disappearance of A = 0.076 Ms-1
(a) Rate of formation of C =?
(b) Rate of consumption of B =?
(c) Rate of reaction = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 26
Answer:
(a) Rate of formation of C = 0.076 Ms-1
(b) Rate of consumption of B = 0.038 M s-1
(c) Rate of reaction = 0.038 Ms-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(9) Consider the reation \(\mathbf{3 I}_{(\mathbf{a q})}^{-}+\mathbf{S}_{2} \mathbf{O}_{8(u q)}^{2-} \longrightarrow \mathbf{I}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+2 \mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\) At a particular time t, \(t, \frac{d\left[\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\right]}{d t}=2.2 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{M} / \mathrm{s}\) What are the values of \(\text { (a) }-\frac{d\left[\mathrm{I}^{-}\right]}{d t}\) \(-\frac{d\left[\mathrm{~S}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{8}^{2-}\right]}{d t}\) \(\text { (c) } \frac{d\left[\mathbf{I}_{3}^{-}\right]}{d t}\) at the same time?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 27
(a) Rate of consumption of \(\mathrm{I}^{-}=-\frac{d\left[\mathrm{I}^{-}\right]}{d t}\)
When 2 moIes of \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\) are formed, 3 moves of I are consumed in the same time.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 28

(b) In the formation of 2 moles of \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\), 1 mole of \(\mathrm{S}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{8}^{2-}\) is consumed in the same time.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 29
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 30

(10) Ammonia and oxygen react at high temperature as :
4NH3(g) + 5O2(g) → 4NO(g) + 6H2O(g)
In an experiment, rate of formation of NO(g) is 3.6 x 10-3 mol L-1s-1.
Calculate-
(a) Rate of disappearance of ammonia
(b) Rate of formation of water.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 31
Answer:
(a) Rate of disappearance of NH3
= 3.6 x 10-3 mol L-1s-1
(b) Rate of formation of H2O
= 5.4 x 10-3 mol L-1s-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(11) The rate law for the reaction
C2H4Br2 + 3I → C2H4 + 2Br +I3 is Rate = k [C2H4Br2][I]. The rate of the reac-tion is found to be 1.1 x 10-4 M/s when the concentrations of C2H4Br2 and I– are 0.12M and 0.18 M respectively. Calculate the rate constant of the reaction.
Solution :
Given : C2H4Br2 + 3I → C2H4 + 2Br +I3
By rate law, Rate of reaction = R = k x [C2H4Br2][I]
R = 1.1 x 10-4 Ms-1
[C2H4Br2] = 0.12 M; [I] =0.18 M
Rate constant = k =?
R = k x [C2H4Br2] x [I]
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 33
Answer:
Rate constant = k = 5.1 x 10-3 M-1s-1

(12) For a reaction, 2A + B → C, the rate law is, rate =k x [A]2 x [B]. If the rate constant of the reaction is 3.74 x 10-2M-2s-1, calculate the rate of the reaction when the concentrations of A, B and C are 0.108 M, 0.132 M and 0.124 M respectively.
Solution :
Given : Rate constant of the reaction = k
= 3.74 x 10-2M-2s-1
[A] =0.108 M, [B] = 0.132M, [C] = 0.124 M
Rate of the reaction = R = ?
By rate law,
R = k [A]2 x [B] = (0.108)2 x 0.132 = 1.54 x 10-3 Ms-1
(Concentration of C need not be considered since it is a product.)
Answer:
Rate of reaction = 1.54 x10-3 Ms-1

(13) For a reaction, A + B → C, if the concentration of A doubles, the rate of the reaction doubles. While if the concentration of B doubles the rate of the reaction increases by four fold. Write rate law. .
Solution :
Let x moles of A react with y moles of B. xA + yB → C
To write rate law, it is necessary to find x and y values.

(i) Initial rate \(=R_{1}=k[\mathrm{~A}]_{1}^{x}[\mathrm{~B}]_{1}^{y}\)
Final rate R2 is doubled when the concentration of A is doubled, i.e., R2 = 2R1 when final concentration,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 174
(It is assumed that the concentration of B remains same.)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 34

(ii) Initial rate \(=R_{1}=k[\mathrm{~A}]_{1}^{x}[\mathrm{~B}]^{y}\)
If the concentration of B is doubled keeping of A constant, rate becomes four times, i.e.,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 35
Hence the rate law is represented by an expression.
Rate = k[A] [B]2
Answer:
Rate law is. Rate = k [A] [B]2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(14) For the reaction, A2 + B + C → AC + AB, it is found that tripling the concentration of A2 triples the rate, doubling the concentration of C doubles the rate and doubling the concentration of B has no effect,
(a) What is the rate law?
(b) Why the change in concentration of B has no effect?
Solution :
Given : A2 + B + C → AC + AB
(a) The rate law may be represented as,
Rate = k [A2]x [B]y [C]z
Let [A]1, [B]1 and [C]1 represent initial concentration and [A]2, [B]2 and [C]2 represent final concentrations, and let R1 and R2 be initial and final rates of the reaction when the concentrations are changed.

(i) If [A]2 = 3[A]1, R2 = 3R1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 36
If the concentrations of B and C remain constant, then
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 37

(b) In the rate determining step, B may not be involved as the reactant, hence rate is independent of changes in concentration of B. (OR B may be in large excess as compared to the concentrations of A and C.)
Answer:
(a) Rate law : Rate = k [A] [C]

Question 21.
Define and explain the term order of a chemical reaction.
Answer:
Order of a chemical reaction : The order of a chemical reaction is defined as the number of molecules (or atoms) whose concentrations influence the rate of the chemical reaction.
OR
The order of a chemical reaction is defined as the sum of the powers (or exponents) to which the concentration terms of the reactants are raised in the rate law expression for the given reaction.

Explanation :
Consider a reaction,
n1A + n2B → Products
where n1 moles of A react with n2 moles of B.

The rate of this reaction can be expressed by the rate law equation as,
R = k [A]n1 [B]n2
where k is the rate constant of the reaction, hence, the order of the reaction is n – n1 + n2, (observed, experimentally).

If n = 1, the reaction is called the first order reaction, if n = 2, it is called the second order reaction, etc.

If n = 0, it is called the zero order reaction, e.g., photochemical reaction of H2(g) and Cl2(g).

Question 22.
What are the features (or key points) of order of a reaction?
Answer:
The features of order of reaction are as follows :

  • It represents the number of atoms, ions or molecules whose concentrations influence the rate of the reaction.
  • It is not related to the stoichiometric equation of the reaction, hence it cannot be predicted from stoichiometric balanced equation.
  • It is experimentally determined quantity.
  • It is defined only in terms of the concentrations of the reactants and not of products.
  • It may have values which are integers, fractional or zero.
  • Higher values are rare. Reactions of first and second order are in large number. Third order reactions are very few like,
    2NO(g) + Cl2(g) → 2NOCl(g).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Solved Examples 6.3.3

Question 23.
Solve the following :
(1) From the rate expressions for the following reactions, determine their order :
(a) 2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g) : Rate = k [N2O5]
(b) CHCl3(g) + Cl2(g) → CCl4(g) + HCl(g) : Rate = k [CHL3] [Cl2]1/2
(c) C2H5Cl(g) → C2H4(g) + HCl(g): Rate = k [C2H5Cl]
(d) 2NO2(g) + F2(g) → 2NO2F(g) → : Rate = k (NO2] [F2]
Solution :
(a) 2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
The rate law expression given for the reaction is Rate = k x [N2O5]
Hence the reaction is of first order.

(b) CHCl3(g) + Cl2(g) → CCl4(g) + HCl(g)
The given rate law expression is, R = k [CHCl3] x [Cl2]1/2 Here the order of a reaction is one with respect to CHCl3(g) and half with respect to Cl2(g). Therefore the overall order of the reaction is 1 + 1/2 = 1.5.

(c) C2H5Cl(g) → C2H4(g) + HCl(g)
The given rate law expression is, Rate = k [C2H5Cl]
Hence the reaction has order equal to one.

(d) 2NO2(g) + F2(g) → 2NO2F(g)
The given rate law expression for the reaction is Rate = k [NO2] x [F2]
Hence the reaction is first order with respect to NO2 and first order with respect to F2. The overall order of the reaction is, n = nNO2 + nF1 = 1 + 1 = 2.

(2) Determine the order of following reactions from their rate expressions :
(a) 2H2O2 → 2H2O + O2 Rate = k [H2O2]
(b) NO2 + CO → NO + CO2 Rate = k [NO2]2
(c) 2NO + O2 → 2NO2 Rate = k [NO]2 x [O2]
(d) CHCl3(g) + Cl2(g) → CCl4(g) + HCl(g)
Rate = k [CHCl3] [Cl2]
Solution :
(a) For the reaction,
2H2O2 → 2H2O + O2
Since the rate law expression given is,
Rate = k [H2O2]
Hence the reaction is of first order.

(b) For the reaction,
NO2 + CO → NO + CO2
Since the rate law given is Rate = k [NO2]2, the reaction is second order with respect to NO2 and zero order with respect to CO. Hence the net order of the reaction is, n = nNO2 + nco = 2 + 0 = 2

(c) For the reaction,
2NO + O2 → 2NO2
Since the rate law expression given is, Rate = k [NO]2 x [O2] the reaction is second order with respect to NO and first order with respect to O2. Hence the overall order of reaction is n = nNO2 + no2 = 2 + 1 = 3.

(d) For the reaction, by rate law,
Rate = k [CHCl3] x [Cl2] reaction is first order with respect to CHCl3 and first order with respect to Cl2. Hence the overall order is, n = ncHcl3 + ncl2 = 1 + 1 = 2.

(3) Write the rate law expressions for the following reactions:
(1) 2N2O5(g) → 4NO2 + O2; order of the reaction is 1.
(2) CH3CHO → CH4 + CO; order of the reaction Is 3/2.
Solution :
(1) For the given reaction, order is one hence the rate law expression is, Rate = k [N2O5].
(2) For the given reaction, order is 3/2, hence the rate law expression is Rate = k x [CH2CHO]3/2.

(4) The reaction \(\mathbf{H}_{2} \mathbf{O}_{2(\mathbf{a q})}+3 \mathbf{I}_{(\mathbf{a q})}^{-}+2 \mathbf{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow 2 \mathbf{H}_{2} \mathbf{O}_{(0)}+\mathbf{I}_{3(a q)}^{-}\) is first order in H2O2 and I, zero order in H+. Write the rate law.
Solution:
Given :
\(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+3 \mathrm{I}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+2 \mathrm{H}^{+}{ }_{(\mathrm{aq})} \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{i})}+\mathrm{I}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
Since the reaction is first order in H2O2 and F and zero order in H+, the expression for rate law will be,
Rate =k [H2O2]1 [I]1 [H+]0
∴ Rate = k [H2O2] [I]
Answer:
Rate = k [H2O2] [I]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(5) The rate law for the gas-phase reaction
2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g) is rate = k [NO2]2 [O2]. What is the order of the reaction with respect to each of the reactants and what is the overall order of the reaction?
Solution :
Given : 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)
Rate = k [NO]2[O2]
Order of the reaction with respect to NO = nNo = 2
Order with respect to O2 = nO2 = 1
Overall order of the reaction = n = nNO + nO2
= 2 + 1
= 3
Answer:
Order with respect to NO = 2
Order with respect to O2 = 1
Overall order = 3

(6) What is the order for the following reactions?
(a) 2NO2(g) + F2(g) → 2NO2F(g), rate = k [NO2][F2]
(b) CHCl3(g) + Cl2(g) → CCl4(g) + HCl(g), rate = k[CHCl3][Cl2]1/2
Solution :
(a) Given : 2NO2(g) + F2(g) → 2NO2F
Rate = k [NO2][F2]
Hence the reaction is first order with respect to NO2 and first order with respect to F2
∴ Order of reaction = nNO2 + nF2 = 1 + 1 = 2

(b) Given :
CHCl3(g) + Cl2(g) → CCl4(g) + HCl(g),
Rate = k [ CHCl3] [Cl2]1/2
Hence the reaction is first order in CHCl3 and half order in Cl2.
∴ Order of reaction
= nCHCl3 + nCl2 = 1 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{3}{2}\)
Answer:
(a) Order of the reaction = 2
(b) The order of the reaction = \(\frac{3}{2}\)

(7) Write the rate law for the following reactions :
(a) A reaction that is zero order in A and second order in B.
(b) A reaction that is second order in NO and first order in Br2.
Solution :
(a) Given : A + B → Products
The reaction is zero order in A and second order in B. Hence the rate law is represented as, Rate = k [A]O[B]2
Rate = k[B]2

(b) Given : 2NO(g) + Br2(g) → 2NOBr(g)
The reaction is second order in NO and first in Br2. Hence the rate law is,
∴ Rate = k [NO]2[Br2]
Answer: (a) Rate law : Rate = k[B]2
(b) Rate law : Rate = k [NO]2[Br2]

(8) The reaction A + B → Products, is first order in each of the reactants, (a) Write the rate law.
(b) How does the reaction rate change if the concentration of B is decreased by a factor 3?
(c) What is the change in the rate if the concentration of each reactant is tripled? (d) What is the change in the rate, if the concentration of A is doubled and that of B is halved?
Solution :
(a) The reaction is first order in A and B. Hence the equation for rate law is,
Rate = k [A] [B]
(b) Before changing the concentration of B, Initial rate = R1 – k [A]1 [B]1
After change in concentration of B,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 39
Hence the rate of the reaction will be decreased by a factor 3.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(c) When the concentration of each reactant is tripled, then the final concentrations will be, [A]2 = 3[A]1 and [B]2 = 3[B1]
∴ R2 = k x 3[A]1 x 3 [B]1
∴ R2 = k x 3[A]1 x 3 [B]1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 40
Hence the rate of the reaction will be increased by 9 times.

(d) When the concentration A is doubled and that of B is halved then the final concentrations will be,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 41
Rate of the reaction will remain unchanged.
Answer:
(a) Rate law is, Rate = k [A] [B],
(b) Rate is decreased by a factor 3,
(c) Rate is increased by 9 times,
(d) Rate remains unchanged.

(9) Consider the reaction A2 + B → products. If the concentration of A2 and B are halved, the rate of the reaction decreases by a factor of 8. If the concentration of A2 is increased by a factor of 2.5, the rate increases by the factor of 2.5. What is the order of the reaction? Write the rate law.
Solution :
Given : A2 + B → Products
(i) When concentration of A2 and B are halved :
[A2]2(final) = 1/2 [A2]1(final) and [B]2 = 1/2 [B]1 then, R2(final) = 1/8R1(intial).

(ii) When concentration of A2 is increased by the factor 2.5,
[A2]2 = 2.5 [A2]1 (concentration of B is same) then, R2 = 2.5 R1
Now let the reaction be, XA2 + yB → Products

From data in (ii),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 43
Hence the reaction is of third order. The rate law can be represented as,
Rate = k [A2] [B]2
Answer:
(i) Order of the reaction = 3
(ii) Rate law : Rate = k [A2] [B]3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(10) Consider the reaction C + D → Products. The rate of the reaction increases by a factor of 4 when the concentration of C is doubled. The rate of the reaction is tripled when concentration of D is tripled. What is the order of the reaction? Write the rate law.
Solution :
Given : C + D → Products OR xC + yD → Products
(i) When the concentration of C is doubled, the rate of the reaction increases by 4.

[C]2(final) = 2[C]1(initial) then R2(final) = 4R1(initial)
(In this, the concentration of D is assumed to be constant.)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 44
Hence, the reaction is second order in C.
∴ nC = 2
(ii) When the concentration of D is tripled, rate is tripled. The concentration of C is assumed to be constant.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 45
Rate law : Rate = A[C]2[D]
Answer:
(i) Order of the reaction = 3
(ii) Rate law : Rate = A[C]2[D]

(11) The reaction F2(g) + 2ClO2(g) → 2FClO2(g) is first order in each of the reactants. The rate of the reaction is 4.88 x 10-4 M/s when [F2] = 0.015 M and [ClO2]= 0.025 M. Calculate the rate constant of the reaction.
Solution :
Given :
F2(g) + 2ClO2(g) → 2FClO2(g)
Order of reaction in F2 = nF2 = 1
Order of reaction in CIO2 = nClO2 = 1
Rate = R = 4.88 x 10-4 Ms-1
[F2] = 0.015 M; [ClO2] = 0.025 M
Rate = k = ?
By rate law,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 46
Answer:
Rate constant = 1 = 1.3 M-2s-1

(12) The reaction 2H2(g) + 2NO(g) → 2H2O(g) + N2(g) is first order in H2 and second order in NO. The rate constant of the reaction at a certain tem­perature is 0.42M-2s-1. Calculate the rate when [H2] = 0.015 M and [NO] = 0.025 M.
Solution :
Given : 2H2(g) + 2NO(g) → 2H2O(g) + N2(g)
Order of reaction in H2 = nH1 = 1
Order of reaction in NO = nNO = 2
Rate constant = k = 0.42 M-2s-1
[H2] = 0.015 M; [NO] = 0.025 M
Rate of reaction = R = ?
By rate law,
Rate = R = k [H2] [NO]2
= 0.42 x 0.015 x (0.025)2 M-2s-1 M M
= 3.94 x 10-6 Ms-1
Answer:
Rate of reaction = R = 3.94 x 10-6 Ms-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(13) Find the order of following reactions whose rate laws are expressed as follows. CA and CB are the concentrations of reactants A and B respectively :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 47
Solution :
Given :
(1) For, – \(\frac{d c}{d t}\) = k x \(\mathrm{C}_{A}^{0}\) the order of the reaction, n = 0. Hence it is a zero order reaction.

(2) For, – \(\frac{d c}{d t}\) = k x \(\mathrm{C}_{A}^{3 / 2}\), the overall order of the reaction is 3/2.

(3) For, –\(\frac{d c}{d t}\) = k x \(\mathrm{C}_{A}^{1 / 2} \mathrm{C}_{B}^{2}\), the reaction has order 1/2 with respect to A and 2 with respect to B.
∴ n = nA + nB = \(\frac{1}{2}\) + 2 = \(\frac{5}{2}\).
Hence the (overall) order of the reaction is \(\frac{5}{2}\).

(4) For, \(-\frac{d c}{d t}=k \mathrm{C}_{A}^{5 / 2} \times \mathrm{C}_{B}^{0}\)
The reaction has order \(\frac{5}{2}\) with respect to A and zero with respect to B.
∴ n = nA + nB = \(\frac{5}{2}\) + 0 = \(\frac{5}{2}\)
Hence the order of the reaction is \(\frac{5}{2}\).

(5) For, \(-\frac{d c}{d t}=k \times \mathrm{C}_{A}^{1 / 3} \times \mathrm{C}_{B}^{2 / 3}\). The reaction has order \(\frac{1}{3}\) with respect to A and \(\frac{2}{3}\) with respect to B.
∴ n = nA + nB = \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{2}{3}\) = 1
Hence the order of the reaction is 1.

(14) The rate of a reaction, 2A + B → Products is 3.78 x 10-4 M s-1 when the concentrations of A and B are 0.3 M each. If the rate constant of the reaction is 4.2 x 10-3s-1 find the order of the reaction.
Solution :
Given : 2A + B → Products
Rate = R = 3.78 x 10-4Ms-1
[A] = [B] = 0.3 M
Rate constant = 1 = 4.2 x 10-3 s-1
Let the order of the reaction in A be x and in B be y.

Then, by rate law,
Rate = R = k [A]x [B]y 3.78 x 10-4
= 4.2 x 10-3(0.3)x(0.3)y
= 4.2 x 10-3 (0.3)x+y
∴ \(\frac{3.78 \times 10^{-4}}{4.2 \times 10^{-3}}\) = (0.3)x+y
0.09 = (0.3)x+y
(0.3)2 = (0.3)x+y                        .
∴ x + y = 2
Hence the order of overall reaction is 2.
Answer:
The order of the reaction is 2.

(15) The rate of the reaction, A → Products is 1.25 x 10-2 M/s when concentration of A is 0. 45 M. Determine the rate constant if the reaction is
(a) first order in A
(b) second order in A.
Solution :
Given : A → Products
Rate = R = 1.25 x 10-2 M/s
[A] = 0.45 M

(a) Rate constant, k = ? if order is one.
For first order, rate law is, R = k [A]
∴ \(k=\frac{R}{[\mathrm{~A}]}=\frac{1.25 \times 10^{-2}}{0.45}\)
= 2.78 x 10-2s-1

(b) Rate constant, k =? if order is two. For second order, rate law is, R = k [A]2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 50
Answer:
(a) Rate constant, k = 2.78 x 10-2
(b) Rate constant, k = 6.173 x 10-2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 24.
Define and explain the term elementary reaction.
Answer:
Many reactions take place in a series of steps. Such reactions are called complex reactions. Each step taking place in a complex reaction is called an elementary reaction. This shows that a complex reaction is broken down in a series of elementary chemical reactions.

By adding all the elementary steps of a complex reaction we get the overall reaction.

The mechanism of a reaction is decided from the sequence of the elementary steps that are added to give overall reaction.

Elementary reaction : It is defined as the reac­tion which takes place in a single step and cannot be divided further into simpler chemical reactions.

The order and molecularity of the elementary reaction are same.

Some reactions take place in one step and cannot be broken down into simpler reactions. For example,

C2H5I(g) → C2H4(g) + HI(g)
O3(g) → O2(g) + O(g)

Question 25.
Define and explain the term molecularity of a reaction. Give examples.
OR
Define the molecularity of a chemical reaction.
Answer:
Molecularity : The molecularity of an elementary reaction is defined as the number of molecules (or atoms or ions) which take part in a chemical reaction.

Explanation :

  • The molecularity of a reaction is always integral.
  • It cannot be determined experimentally.
  • The minimum value of the molecularity is one.
  • It cannot have fractional or zero values.
  • The reactions are classified according to the mole­cularity as follows :

(a) Unimolecular reaction (OR First order reac­tion) : In this only one molecule takes part in the reaction, e.g., N2O5(g) → 2NO2(g) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)O2(g)

The rate law expression for this reaction is, Rate = k [N2O5]. Hence it is unimolecular and first order.

Other unimolecular reactions are,
O3(g) → O2(g) + O(g)
C2H5I(g) → C2H2(g) + HI(g)

(B) Bimolecular reaction In this two molecules take part in the reaction,
e.g., 2HI(g) → H2(g) + I2(g)
O3(g) + O(g) → 2O2(g)
2NO2(g) → 2NO(g) + O2(g)

(c) Trimolecular reaction: In this three molecules take part in the reaction.
e.g., 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)

The higher molecularity is rare since the prob ability of simultaneous collisions between more molecules is very low.

Question 26.
Explain order and molecularity of elementary reactions.
Answer:
(1) The order and molecularity of elementary reaction are same.
(2) Consider second order bimolecular reaction,
2NO2(g) → 2NO(g) + O2.
(3) The rate of the reaction is given by, Rate = k [NO2]2
(4) Similarly consider unimolecular first order reaction,
C2H5I(g) → C2H4(g) + HI(g)
Rate = k [C2H5I]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 27.
Define and explain the term rate-determining step.
Answer:
(1) Many chemical reactions take place in a series of elementary steps. Among many steps of the reaction, one of the steps is the slowest step compared to other steps.

Rate determining step : The slowest step in the reaction mechanism which involves many steps is called the rate-determining step.

(2) Example :
Consider decomposition of gaseous NO2Cl.
2NO2Cl(g) → 2NO2(g) + Cl2(g)
This reaction takes place in two steps :
Step I : \(\mathrm{NO}_{2} \mathrm{Cl}_{(g)} \stackrel{k_{1}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{g})}\) (slow, unimolecular)

Step II: \(\mathrm{NO}_{2} \mathrm{Cl}_{(g)} \stackrel{k_{2}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{g})}\) (fast, bimolecular)

2NO2CI(g) → 2NO2(g) + CI2(g) (overall reaction)

Among two steps, first step being slower represents rate-determining step. The rate law can be represented as, Rate = k1 [NO2CI]

Hence, the reaction is first order.

In this Cl(g) is formed as a reaction intermediate.

Question 28.
What are the features of rate-determining step?
Answer:
Features of rate-determining step :

  • The overall reaction can never occur faster than its rate-determining step.
  • The rate-determining step can occur anywhere in the reaction mechanism and depends on nature of reactants, conditions of the reaction, etc.
  • The rate law of a rate-determining step can directly be obtained from its stoichiometric equation.
  • The rate law of a rate-determining step can directly be obtained from its stoichiometric equation.

Question 29.
What is reaction intermediate? Explain with an example.
Answer:
Reaction intermediate : The additional species other than the reactants or products formed in the mechanism during progress of the reaction is called reaction intermediate.

Features of reaction intermediate :

  • The reaction intermediate appears in the reaction mechanism but does not appear in the overall reaction or in the products.
  • It is always formed in one step and consumed in the subsequent step in the mechanism.
  • Its concentration is very small and cannot be determined easily.
  • Rate of the reaction is independent of concentration of this intermediate.
  • The life period of the reaction intermediate is extremely small, hence cannot be isolated.
  • The composition of the reaction intermediate, decides the mechanism of the reaction.
  • Consider decomposition of gaseous NO2Cl. 2NO2Cl(g) → 2NO2(g) + Cl2(g)

This reaction takes place in two steps :
Step I : \(\mathrm{NO}_{2} \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{g})} \stackrel{k_{1}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{g})}\) (slow, unimolecular)

Step II : \(\mathrm{NO}_{2} \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{g})}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{g})} \stackrel{k_{2}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{Cl}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\) (fast, bimolecular)
2NO2Cl(g) → 2NO2(g) + Cl2(g) (overall reaction)
Cl formed in Step I is removed in Step II, Hence Cl is a reaction intermediate.

Question 30.
Identify the molecularity and write the rate law for each of the following elementary reactions :
(a) NO(g) + O3(g) → NO3(g) + O(g)
(b) H2I(g) + I(g) → 2HI(g)
(c) CI(g) + Cl(g) + N2(g) → N2(g)
Answer:
NO(g) + O3(g) → NO3(g) + O(g) Molecularity is 2.
Rate law : Rate = k [NO] x [O3]

(b) H2I(g) + I(g) → 2HI(g) Molecularity is 2.
Rate law : Rate = k [H2I] x [I]

(c) Cl(g) + Cl(g) + N2(g) →Cl2(g) + N2(g) Molecularity is 3.
Rate law : Rate = k [Cl]2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 31.
Write molecularity of the following reaction:
2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g).
Answer:
For the reaction, 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g) Molecularity = 3.

Question 32.
How Is reaction intermediate predicted in the reaction?
Answer:
(1) When a reaction takes place in more than one steps, then a substance produced in one step is removed in the next step is called reaction intermediate.
(2) For example,
(I) NO(g) + O3(g) → NO3(g) + O(g)
(ii) NO3(g) + O(g) → NO2(g) + O(g)
In the reaction. NO3 and O are reaction intermediates.

Question 33.
A certain reaction occurs in the following steps :
(i) Cl(g) + O3(g) → ClO(g) + O2(g)
(ii) ClO(g) + O(g) → Cl(g) + O2(g)
(a) Write the chemical equation for overall reaction.
(b) Identify the reaction intermediate.
(c) Identify the catalyst.
(d) What is the molecularity of each step?
Answer:
Step I : Cl(g) + O3(g) → ClO(g) + O2(g)
Step II : ClO(g) + O(g) → Cl(g) + O2(g)
(a) Overall reaction is obtained by adding both the reactions.
O3(g) + O(g) → 2O2(g)
(b) Reaction intermediate is ClO(g) which is formed in the first step and removed in the second step.
(c) Cl(g) acts as a catalyst. It is an example of homo-geneous catalysis in which catalyst Cl(g) forms an intermediate ClO(g) and again is released in the second step.
(d) Since both the steps involve two reactants each, both the steps are bimolecular.

Question 34.
The rate law for the reaction 2H2(g) + 2NO(g) → N2(g) + 2H2O(g) is given by rate = k [H2] [NO]2.
The reaction occurs in the following two steps :
(i) H2(g) + 2NO(g) → N2O(g) + H2O(g)
(ii) N2O(g) + H2(g) → N2(g) + H2O(g)
What is the role of N2O in the mechanism? What is the molecularity of each of the elementary steps?
Answer:
N2O is a reaction intermediate which is formed in the first step and removed in the second step. Molecularity of the elementary steps :
(a) First step – Termolecular.
(b) Second step-Bimolecular.

Question 35.
What is the rate law for the reaction,
NO2(g) + CO(g) → NO(g) + CO2(g)
The reaction occurs in the following steps :
NO2 + NO2 → NO3 + NO (slow)
NO3 + CO → NO2 + CO2 (fast)
What is the role of NO3?
Answer:
Overall reaction :
NO2(g) + CO(g) → NO(g) + CO2(g)
Step-I NO2 + NO2 → NO3 + NO (slow) (slow)
Step-II NO3 + CO → NO2 + CO2 (fast)

(A) From first rate determining slow step, rate law is, Rate = k[NO2]2
(B) Role of NO3 : In the reaction, NO3 is the reaction intermediate which is formed in first step and removed in the second step.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 36.
The rate law for the reaction 2NO(g) + Cl2(g) → 2NOCl(g) is given by rate = k[NO][Cl2]. The reaction occurs in the following steps :
(i) NO(g) + Cl2(g) → NOCl2(g)
(ii) NOCl2(g) + NO(g) → 2NOCl(g)
(a) Is NOCl2 a catalyst or reaction intermedi-ate? Why?
(b) Identify the rate determining step.
Answer:
(a) NOCl2 is a reaction intermediate since it is formed in the first step and removed in the second step. It is not a catalyst since it was not present in the first step or on reactant side nor in the second step on product side.
(b) Since rate law is, Rate = k[NO][Cl2], and the sub-stances NO and Cl2 are present in the first step as reactants, it is the slow and rate-determining step.

Question 37.
The rate law for the reaction 2H2(g) + 2NO(g) → N2(g) + 2H2O(g) is given by rate = k[H2][NO]2. The reaction occurs in the following steps :
(i) H2 + 2NO → N2O + H2O
(ii) N2O + H2 → N2 + H2O
What is the role of N2O in the mechanism? Identify the slow step.
Answer:
(a) N2O is the reaction intermediate since it is formed in the first step and removed in the second step.
(b) By rate law, Rate = k [H2][NO]2. Since the first step involves the substances H2 and NO, it is the slow and rate-determining step.

Question 38.
What are integrated rate laws?
Answer:
Integrated rate laws : The equations which are obtained by integrating the differential rate laws (expressions) and which provide direct relationship between the concentrations of the reactants and time are called integrated rate laws.

For example, integrated rate law for first order reaction is represented as,
\(k=\frac{2.303}{t} \log _{10} \frac{[\text { Reactant }]_{\text {final }}}{[\text { Reactant }]_{\text {initial }}}\)

Question 39.
Derive the expression for integrated rate law (equation) for the first-order reaction.
Answer:
Consider the following first-order reaction, A → B The rate of the chemical reaction is given by the rate law expression as, Rate, R = k [A] where [A] is the concentration of the reactant A and k is the velocity constant or specific rate of the reaction.
The instantaneous rate is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 52

If [A0] is the initial concentration of the reactant and [A]t at time t, then by integrating the above equation,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 53

This is the integrated rate equation for the first order reaction. This is also called integrated rate law.

Question 40.
How is the integrated rate equation for the first order reaction represented by considering the concentration of the product?
Answer: The
integrated rate equation for the first order reaction can be represented as,
\(k=\frac{2.303}{t} \log _{10} \frac{[\mathrm{A}]_{0}}{[\mathrm{~A}]_{t}}\) where [A]0 is the initial concentration of the reactant (at time, 1 = 0) and [A]t is that at time t. Consider the reaction, A → B
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 54

If a is the initial concentration of the reactant A and x is the concentration of the product B after time t, then
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 55

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 41.
Explain the exponential rate law expression for the first order reaction.
Answer:
The integrated rate equation for the first order reaction can be represented as,
\(k=\frac{1}{t} \log _{\mathrm{e}} \frac{[\mathrm{A}]_{0}}{[\mathrm{~A}]_{t}}\)
where k is a rate constant, [A]0 and [A]t are initial and final concentrations of the reactant after time t.
∴ k = \(-\frac{1}{t} \log _{\mathrm{e}} \frac{[\mathrm{A}]_{t}}{[\mathrm{~A}]_{0}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 56
where [A]0 and [A]t are the concentrations of the reactant when t = 0 and t = t respectively.

Thus, the concentration of the reactant decreases exponentially with time and the time required to complete the first order reaction will be infinity.

Another feature of the exponential behaviour is the time required to complete a definite fraction of the reaction is always constant. Therefore, the first order reactions are also described in terms of the half-life of the reaction ™.

Question 42.
What are the units of rate constant of first order reaction?
Answer:
The units of rate constant (k) for the first order reaction is per time (or s-1).

Question 43.
Give three examples of first order reaction.
Answer:
The examples of first order reaction are :
(1) Decomposition of H2O2 :
2H2O2(I) → 2H2O(1) + O2(g) Rate = k[H2O2]
(2) Decomposition of N2Os :
2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g) Rate = k[N2O5]
(3) Isomerisation of cyclopropane to propene :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 67

Question 44.
Write a note on a zero order reaction.
OR
What is a zero order reaction? Explain.
Answer:
(1) Definition : Zero order reaction : A reaction in which the rate of the reaction does not depend on the concentration of any reactant taking part in the reaction is called zero order reaction.
(2) Explanation : For example, consider photochemical reaction between H2 and Cl2 gases.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 72
In this the rate of the reaction remains constant throughout the progress of the reaction, even if the concentrations of the reactants decrease with time, until the reactant has reacted entirely.

Hence, by the rate law,
R = k [H2]° [Cl2]° = k (constant).

Question 45.
Derive the expression for integrated rate law for zero-order reaction A → Products.
Answer:
Consider a zero order reaction, A → Products
The rate of the reaction is, Rate \(=\frac{-d[\mathrm{~A}]}{d t}\)

By rate law,
Rate = k x [A]0 = k
∴ – d[A] = k x dt

If [A]0 is the initial concentration of the reactant A at t = 0 and [A]t is the concentration of A present after time t, then by integrating above equation,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 73
This is the integrated rate law expression for rate constant for zero order reaction.
∴ k x t = [A]0 – [A]t
∴ [A]t = – kt + A0

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 46.
How would you obtain the unit of the velocity constant k for (i) the first order reaction (ii) the zero order reaction?
Answer:
(i) For a first order reaction :
Consider the reaction,
A → B
The rate (R) of the reaction will be, R = k [A] = kc, where [A] is concentration in mol dm-3Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 74
Hence, the SI unit of velocity constant for the first order reaction is second-1.

(ii) For a zero order reaction :
The rate of reaction is R = k [A]0 = k
Hence, the velocity constant k has the unit of the rate of the reaction, i.e., mol dm-3 s-1.

Question 47.
Obtain an expression for half-life period of zero order reaction.
Answer:
The rate law expression for zero order reaction is, [A]t = – kt + [A]0
where [A]0 and [A]t are the concentrations of the reactant at time, t = 0 and after time t respectively, Half-life period, t1/2 is the time when the concentration reduces from [A]0 to [A]0/2. i.e., at t = t1/2, [A]t = [A]0/2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 75
Hence for a zero-order reaction, the half-life period is directly proportional to the initial concentration of the reactant.

Question 48.
Give the examples of zero order reactions.
Answer:
Zero order reactions are not common. They take place under special conditions. They are hetero-geneous catalysed reactions generally involving metals as catalysts.

(1) Decomposition NH3 on Pt surface :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 79
(2) Decomposition of N2O to N2 and O2 on Pt :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 80
(3) Decomposition of PH3 on hot tungsten catalyst at high pressure.

Question 49.
Decomposition of NH3(g) on platinum surface at high temperature is a zero order reaction. Explain.
Answer:

  • The decomposition of NH3(g) on platinum surface is represented as,
    2NH3(g) \(\frac{1130 \mathrm{~K}}{\mathrm{Pt}}\) N2(g) + 3H2(g)
  • Since it is a heterogeneous catalysed reaction, NH3 gaseous molecules at high pressure are adsorbed on the metal surface covering the surface area.
  • The number of NH3 molecules adsorbed is small compared to NH3 molecules in the gaseous phase.
  • Only the molecules adsorbed on the surface get decomposed. Hence rate of the decomposition becomes independent of the concentration (pressure) of NH3. Therefore the decomposition reaction is zero order.

Question 50.
The catalysed decomposition of nitrous oxide (N2O) to nitrogen and oxygen is a zero order reaction. Explain.
Answer:

  • The decomposition of N2O(g) on platinum can be represented as, \(2 \mathrm{~N}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{g})} \stackrel{\mathrm{Pt}}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{~N}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)
  • Since it is heterogeneously catalysed reaction, N2O gaseous molecules are adsorbed on the metal surface covering the surface area.
  • The number of N2O molecules adsorbed is small compared to N2O molecules in the gaseous phase.
  • Only the molecules adsorbed on the metal surface get decomposed. Hence rate of decomposition becomes independent of the concentration (pressure) of N2O. Therefore the decomposition of N2O is a zero order reaction.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 51.
Inversion of cane sugar (sucrose) is a pseudo-first-order reaction. Explain.
OR
The reaction,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 82
Can it be of pseudo-first-order type?
Answer:
The inversion of cane sugar (sucrose) is an acid catalysed hydrolysis reaction which can be represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 83

This is a bimolecular reaction. Hence, the true rate law for the reaction should be, Rate = k[C12H22O11] [H2O]. This shows that the reaction should be second order.

Since water (H2O) is in large excess, its concentration remains constant and the rate depends only upon the concentration of cane sugar.

∴ Rate = k[C12H22O11]

Therefore the second order true rate law becomes first order rate law. Hence the inversion of cane sugar is a pseudo first order reaction.

Solved Examples 6.4-6.5

Question 52.
Solve the following :

(1) For the reaction 2A + B → products, find the rate law from the following data :

[A]/M [B]/M rate/Ms-1
0.3 0.05 0.15
0.6 0.05 0.30
0.6 0.2 1.20

Solution:
In steps (i) and (ii), the concentration of A is doubled but the concentration of B remains constant. Since the rate is doubled the rate is proportional to the concentration of A or R α [A] and hence with respect to A order of the reaction is 1 or nA = 1.

In steps (ii) and (iii), the concentration of A is kept constant but the concentration of B is increased 4 times and rate of the reaction is increased 4 times. Hence the rate of reaction is proportional to concentration of B, R α [B] and hence with respect of B, order is 1 or nB = 1. Hence rate law will be, Rate = k [A] x [B].

(2) In a first order reaction A → product, 80 % of the given sample of compound decomposes in 40 min. What is the half life period of the reaction ?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 91
Answer:
Half life period = 17.22 min

(3) The reaction A + B → products is first order in each of the reactants.
(a) How does the rate of reaction change if the concentration of A is increased by factor 3?
(b) What is the change in the rate of reaction if the concentration of A is halved and concen­tration of B is doubled?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 92
Hence the rate remains the same.
Answer:
(a) The rate increases by factor 3.
(b) The rate remains the same.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(4) Half-life period of a first order reaction is 41.09 min. Calculate rate constant in per second.
Solution :
Given : Half-life period = t1/2
= 41.09 min = 41.09 x 60 s
= 2.465 x 103s
Rate constant = k = ?
For a first order reaction,
\(\begin{aligned}
k &=\frac{0.693}{t_{1 / 2}} \\
&=\frac{0.693}{2.465 \times 10^{3}}
\end{aligned}\)
= 2.81 x 10-4 s-1
Answer:
Rate constant = k = 2.81 x 10-4 s-1

(5) A first order reaction takes 15 minutes to com­plete 25%. How much will it take to complete 65 %?
Solution:
(i) Given : For 25% completion, t1 = 15 min.
For 35 % completion, t2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 94
Answer:
Time required to complete 65 % reaction = 547 min

(6) Gaseous A2 dissociates as, A2(g) → 2A(g). Initial pressure of A2 is 0.8 atm. After 20 minutes the pressure is 1.1 atm. Calculate rate constant and half-life period for the reaction.
Solution :
Given : [A]0 = Initial pressure = P0 = 0.8 atm
Final pressure = Total pressure = PT = 1.1 atm
Rate constant = k = ?
Half life period = t1/2 = ?
A2(g) → 2A(g)
P0 – x 2x
Pressure of A2 = Pt = P0 – x
Total pressure of the mixture,
PT = P0 – x + 2x = P0 + x
∴ x = PT – P0
∴ Pt = P0 – X = P0 – (PT – P0) – 2P0 – PT
\(k=\frac{2.303}{t} \log _{10} \frac{[\mathrm{A}]_{0}}{[\mathrm{~A}]_{t}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 95
Answer:
Rate constant = k = 2.35 x 10-2 min-1
Half-life period = t1/2 = 29.5 min

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(7) The decomposition of N2O5(g) at 320 K according to the following equation follows first order reaction :
N2O5(g) → 2NO2(g) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)O2(g)
The initial concentration of N2O5(g) is 1-24 x 10-2 mol. L-1 and after 60 minutes,
0.20 x 10-2 mol. L-1. Calculate the rate con­stant of the reaction at 320 K.
Solution :
Given :
Initial concentration
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 96

(8) From the following data for the liquid phase reaction A → B, determine the order of reaction and calculate its rate constant:

t/s 0 600 1200 1800
[A]/Mol L-1 0.624 0.446 0.318 0.226

Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 97
Answer:
Rate constant = k = 5.618 x 10-4 s-1

(9) The concentration of a reactant in a first-order reaction A → products, varies with time as follows :

t/min 0 10 20 30 40
[AJ/M 0.0800 0.0536 0.0359 0.0241 0.0161

Show that the reaction is first order.
Solution :
Given : A → Products
[A]0 = 0.08 M
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 98
Since all the values of rate constant using first order rate law equation come constant, the reaction is of first order.
Answer:
Order of the reaction is one.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(10) In a first order reaction x → y, 40% of the given sample of compound remains unreacted in 45 minutes. Calculate rate constant of the reac­tion.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 99
Answer:
k = 0.02036 min-1

(11) If the half-life period of a zero order reaction with initial concentration 0.1 M is 21.3 min, what will be the half-life when the concentration is 0.3 M?
Solution :
Given : Reaction is zero order. t1/2 = 21.3, when
initial concentration = [A]1 x = 0.1 M t1/2 = 2 when
initial concentration = [A]2 = 0.3 M
For zero order reaction, t1/2 = \(\frac{[\mathrm{A}]_{0}}{2 k}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 100
Answer:
Half life period = 63.9 min

(12) Consider the reaction 2A + 2B → 2C + D.
From the following data, calculate the order and rate constant of the reaction.

[A]0/M [B]0/M r0/Ms_1
0.488 0.160 0.24
0.244 0.160 0.06
0.244 0.320 0.12

Write the rate law of the reaction.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 101

Hence the reaction is 2nd order in A.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 102
Hence the reaction is first order in B.
The order of overall reaction = n = nA + nB = 2 + 1 = 3
By rate law,
Rate = R = k[A]2[B]
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 103
Answer:
(i) Order of reaction = 3
(ii) Rate constant = k = 63M-2s-1
(iii) Rate law : Rate = k [A]2 [B]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(20) In acidic solution, sucrose is converted to a mixture of glucose and fructose in pseudo first order reaction. It has been found that the con-centration of sucrose decreased from 20 mmol L-1 to 8 mmol L-1 in 38 minutes. What is the half-life of the reaction?
Solution :
Given :
Initial concentration = [A]0 = [sucrose]0
= 20 mmol L-1
= 20 x 10-3 mol L-1

Final concentration = [A]t = [sucrose]t
= 8 mmol L-1
= 8 x 10-3 mol L-3
time = t = 38 min
Half-life period = t1/2 =?
For first order reaction,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 106
Answer:
Half-life period = t1/2 = 28.74 min

(21) The half-life of a first order reaction is 1.7 hours. How long will it take for 20 % of the reactant to disappear?
Solution :
Given : Half-life period = t1/2 = 1.7 hrs.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 107
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 108
Answer:
Time required for 20% reaction = 32.86 min

(22) The gaseous reaction A2 → 2A is first order in A2. After 12.3 minutes, 65% of A2 remains un­decomposed. How long will it take to decompose 90% of A2? What is the half-life of the reaction?
Solution :
Given : A2 → 2A
t1 = 12.3 min
[A]0 = 100, [A], = 65
t2 = ? for 90 % decomposition Half-life period = t1/2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 109
Answer:
(i) Time required for 90% reaction = 65.8 min
(ii) Half-life periods = t1/2 = 19.8 min

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(23) Sucrose decomposes in acid solution to give glucose and fructose according to the first-order rate law. The half-life of the rection is 3 hours. Calculate the fraction of sucrose which will remain after 8 hours.
Solution :
Given : Half-life period = t1/2 = 3 hrs
Time = t = 8 hrs
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 110
Answer:
Fraction of sucrose left = 0.1576

(24) The rate constant of a first order reaction is 6.8 x 10-4 s-1. If the initial concentration of the reactant is 0.04 M, what is its molarity after 20 minutes? How long will it take for 25% of the reactant to react?
Solution :
Given : Rate constant = k = 6.8 x 10-4s-1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 111
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 112
Answer:
(i) Molarity of reactant after 20 min = 0.0177 M
(ii) Time for 25 % of the reaction = 7.05 min

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(25) The rate constant of a certain first-order reaction is 3.12 x 10-3 min-1,
(a) How many minutes does it take for the reactant concentra­tion to drop to 0.02 M if the initial concentration of the reactant is 0.045 M?
(b) What is the molarity of the reactant after 1.5 hr?
Solution :
Given : Rate constant = k = 3.12 x 10-3 min-1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 113
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 114
Answer:
(i) Time required to drop the concentration to 0.02 M = 260 min
(ii) Molarity after 1.5 hr = 0.034 M

(26) From the following data for the decomposition of azoisopropane,
(CH32)2 CHN = NCH(CH3)2 → N2 + C6H14 estimate the rate of the reaction when total pressure is 0.75 stm.

Time/s Total pressure/atm
0 0.65
200 1.0

Solution :
Given :
(CH3)2CHN = NCH(CH3)2(g) → N2(g) + C6H14(g)
At time t P0 – x x x
At t = 0, [A]0 = P0 = 0.65 atm
At t = 200 s,
Total pressure = PT = 0.75 atm, Rate =?
From the reaction,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 115
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 116
Answer:
Rate of the reaction = 2.13 x 10-3 atm s-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(27) The rate constant for a zero order reaction is 0.04 Ms-1. Calculate the half-life period of the reaction, when the initial concentration of the reactant is 0.01 M.
Solution :
Given : Order of the reaction = 0
Rate constant = k = 0.04 Ms-1
Concentration = [A]0 = 0.01 M
Half-life period = t1/2 =?
For zero order reaction,
\(t_{1 / 2}=\frac{[\mathrm{A}]_{0}}{2 k}=\frac{0.01}{0.04}=0.25 \mathrm{~s}\)
Answer:
Half-life period = t1/2 = 0.25 s

(28) A flask contains a mixture of A and B. Both the compounds decompose by first order kinetics. The half-lives are 60 min for A and 15 min for B. If the initial concentrations of A and B are equal, how long will it take for the concentration of A to be three times that of B?
Solution :
Given :
For A : tm = 60 min For B : t1/2 = 15 min
Let initial concentrations of
[A]0 = [B]0 = M mol dm-3
After time t, let the concentrations be, [B]t = x, then [A]t = 3x
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 117
Answer:
After 31.8 min, concentration of A will be three time that of B. ‘

Question 53.
Obtain Arrhenius equation from collision theory of bimolecular reactions.
Answer:
Consider a bimolecular reaction,
A – B + C → A + B – C
(i) Collisions of reactant molecules : The basic
requirement for a reaction to occur is reacting species A – B and C must come together and collide. The rate of reaction will depend on the rate and frequency of collisions between them. As the i concentration and temperature increase, rate of collisions increases, hence the rate of reaction increases. But the rate of reaction is low as com-pared to the rate of collisions.

(ii) Energy of activation : For fruitful collisions, the colliding molecules must possess a certain amount of energy called activation energy Ea. Due to collisions between A – B and C, there is a change in electron distribution about three nuclei namely A, B and C so that old A – B bond is weakened while new bond is partially formed between B and C, and results in the formation of an activated complex or a transition state.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 119

Therefore transition state always has higher energy than reactants or products. Due to high energy, activated complex is unstable, short lived and decomposes into the products.

To form activated complex, the reactant mol-ecules have to climb the potential energy barrier i. e., activation energy level, hence molecular collision energy of colliding molecules must be high so that reactant molecules form activated complex and further decompose into products.

The fraction (f) of molecules at temperature T having activation energy Ea is given by f = e-Ea/RT.

If P represents the probability of Z collisions with proper orientation then,
Reaction rate = P x Z x e-Ea/RT,

Hence the rate constant k of the reaction may be represented as, k = A x e-Ea/RT where A is called frequency factor or pre-exponential factor and ΔH is the enthalpy change of the reaction. This equation is called Arrhenius equation.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 54.
Define :
(i) Transition state or activated complex.
Answer:
Transition state or activated complex : The configuration of atoms formed from reactant molecules and which is at the peak of barrier in energy profile diagram having maximum potential energy compared to reactants and products is called transition state or activated complex.

Question 55.
If a gaseous reaction has activation energy 75k J mol-1 at 298 K, find the fraction of successful collisions.
Answer:
Activation energy = Ea = 75 kJ mol-1 = 75000 mol-1; Temperature = T = 298 K The fraction (f) of successful collisions between the molecules with an energy equal to Ea is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 120
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 121
This shows that only 7 collisions out of 1014 collisions are sufficiently energetic to convert reactants into products.

Question 56.
Draw energy profile diagram and show
(i) Activated complex
(ii) Energy of activation for forward reaction
(iii) Energy of activation for backward reaction
(iv) Heat of reaction.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 122
(i) B → Activated complex
(ii) Ef → Energy of activation for forward reaction
(iii) Eb → Energy of activation for backward reaction
(iv) ΔH → Heat of reaction.

Question 57.
Obtain Arrhenius equation, k = A x e-Ea/RT
Answer:
(i) From experimental observations of variation in rate constants with temperature, Arrhenius developed a mathematical equation between reaction rate con­stant (k), activation energy (Ea) and temperature T.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 123

When a graph of Ink is plotted against reciprocal of temperature (1/T) a straight line with a negative slope is obtained. This is described by a mathematical equation as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 124

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

where k is a rate constant, R is the gas constant, E.a is activation energy, T is absolute temperature and the parameter A is called frequency factor or preexponential factor. This is Arrhenius equation.

Question 58.
What is a frequency factor or pre-exponential factor?
Answer:
In Arrhenius equation, k=A x e-Ea/RT the factor A is called frequency factor and since it is a coefficient of exponential expression, e~Ea/RT it is also called a pre-exponential factor.

In the above equation k is a rate constant at temperature T, Ea is the energy of activation and R is a gas constant.

A is related to frequency of collisions (Z) or rate of collisions. It is represented as, A = P x Z where P is the probability of collisions with proper orientations and Z is the frequency of collisions of reacting molecules.

The units of A are same as that of k.

Question 59.
Obtain a relation, \(\log _{10} \frac{k_{2}}{k_{1}}=\frac{E_{\mathrm{a}}\left(T_{2}-T_{1}\right)}{2.303 R \times T_{1} \times T_{2}}\),
OR
Obtain a relation showing variation in rate constant with temperature.
Answer:
By arrhenius equation, the rate constant k of the reaction at a temperature T is represented as, k = A x e-Ea/RT where A is a frequency factor, R is a gas constant and Ed is the energy of activation.

By taking logarithm to the base e, we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 126

If kt and k2 are the rate constants at temperatures T1 and T2 respectively, then
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 127
By measuring the rate constants k1 and k2 at two different temperatures T1 and T2, the energy of activation Ea of the reaction can be obtained.

Question 60.
How is the energy of activation determined from rate constants at two different temperatures?
Answer:
For the given reaction, rate constants k1 and k2 are measured at two different temperatures T1 and T2 respectively. Then \(\log _{10} \frac{k_{2}}{k_{1}}=\frac{E_{\mathrm{a}}\left(T_{2}-T_{1}\right)}{2.303 R \times T_{1} \times T_{2}}\) where Ea is the energy of activation.

Hence by substituting appropriate values, energy of activation Ea for the reaction is determined.

Question 61.
Obtain a relation, \(\frac{k_{2}}{k_{1}}=\frac{\left(t_{1 / 2}\right)_{2}}{\left(t_{1 / 2}\right)_{1}}\), where k1 and k2 are rate constants while (t1/2)1 and (t1/2)2 are halflife periods of the first order reaction at temperatures T1 and T2 respectively. Write the relation for activation energy.
Answer:
The rate constant k and half-life period t1/2 are related as
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 129

Question 62.
How does a catalyst differ from reaction intermediate?
Answer:

  • A catalyst accelerates the rate of reaction, while reaction intermediate has no effect on the rate of the reaction.
  • The catalyst is always present at the start of the reaction whereas reaction intermediate is produced during the mechanism of the reaction.
  • A catalyst is consumed in one of the steps of mechanism and regenerated in a subsequent step while the reaction intermediate is formed in one step and consumed in subsequent step.
  • The catalyst is stable but the reaction intermediate is unstable and short lived.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 63.
How is lowering of activation energy in the presence of a catalyst obtained?
Answer:

  • In the presence of a catalyst, activation energy of a reaction is lowered, hence rate and rate constant increase.
  • If ΔEa is lowering of activation energy, while k1 and k2 are the rate constants of the reaction in the absence and presence of the catalyst respectively then,
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 135

Question 64.
The rate constant of a reaction of 400 K is 1.35 x 102s-1. When a nickel catalyst is used, the rate constant of the reaction becomes 3.8 x 102s-1. Find activation energy. If the initial activation energy is 20 KJ, what will be activation energy in the presence of the catalyst?
Answer:
In the presence of a catalyst, the activation energy is lowered and rate constant is increased.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 136
The decrease activation energy of the reaction in the presence of a catalyst will be Ea = 20 – 3.446 = 16.554 kJ.

Solved Examples 6.6-6.7

Question 65.
Solve the following :

(1) Calculate activation energy for a reaction of which rate constant becomes four times when temperature changes from 30 °C to 50 °C. (Given : R = 8.314 K-1mol-1)
Solution :
Given : k2 = 4k1
T1 = 273 + 30 = 303 K
T2 = 273 + 50 = 323 K
Activation energy = Ea =?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 141
Answer:
Activation energy = Ea = 56.41 kJ

(2) The rate constant of a first order reaction are 0.58 s-1 at 313 K and 0.045 s-1 at 293 K. What is the energy of activation for the reaction?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 142
Answer:
Energy of activation = Ea = 97.46 kJ mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(3) The energy of activation for a first order reaction is 104 kJ mol-1. The rate constant at 25°C is 3.7 x 10-5s-1. What is the rate constant at 30 °C?
Solution :
Given : Energy of activation = Ea = 104 kJ mol-1 = 104 x 103 mol-1
Initial rate constant – k1= 3.7 x 10-5 s-1
Initial temperature = T1 = 273 + 25 = 298 K
Final temperature = T2 = 273 + 30 = 303 K
Final rate constant = k2 =?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 143
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 144
Answer:
Rate constant at 30 0C = 7.4 x 10-4 s-1

(4) What is the activation energy for a reaction whose rate constant doubles when temperature changes from 30 °C to 40 °C?
Solution :
Given :
Initial rate constant = k1
and final rate constant = k2; \(\frac{k_{2}}{k_{1}}\) = 2
Initial temperature = T1 = 273 + 30 = 303 K
Final temperature = T2 = 273 + 40 = 313 K
Energy of activation = Ea = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 145
Answer:
Activation energy = Ea = 54.66 kj mol-1

(5) The activation energy for a certain reaction is 334.4 kj mol-1. How many times larger is the rate constant at 610 K than the rate constant at 600 K?
Solution :
Given :
Activating energy = Ea = 334.4 kJ mol-1
= 334.4 x 103 J mol-1
Initial temperature = T1 = 600 K
Final temperature = T2 = 610 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 146
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 147
Answer:
Rate constant increase three time.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(6) The rate of a reaction at 600 K is 7.5 x 105 times the rate of the same reaction at 400 K. Calculate the energy of activation for the reaction. (Hint: The ratio of rates is equal to the ratio of rate constants.)
Solution :
Given : \(\frac{R_{2}}{R_{1}}\) = 7.5 x 105.
From the hint, \(\frac{R_{2}}{R_{1}}=\frac{k_{2}}{k_{1}}\) = 7.5 x 10s
Initial temperature = T1 = 400 K
Final temperature = T2 = 600 K
Energy of activation = Ea = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 148
Answer:
Activation energy = Ea = 135 kj mol-1

(7) The rate constant of a first order reaction at 25 °C is 0.24 s’. If the energy of activation of the reaction is 88 kJmol-1, at what temperature would this reaction have rate constant of 4 x 10-2s-1?
Solution :
Given : k2 =0.24s-1; k2 =4 x 10-2s-1 T1 = 273 + 25 = 298 K
Energy of activation = Ea
= 88 kJ mol-1 = 88000 J mol-1
T2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 149
Answer:
Temperature = 283.6 K

(8) The half-life of a first order reaction is 900 min at 820 K. Estimate its half-life at 720 K if the energy of activation ot the reaction is 250 kJ mol-1 (1.464 x 105 mm).
Solution:
Given: Initial half-life period = (t1/2)1 = 900 min
Energy of activation = 250 kJ mol-1
= 250 x 103 kJ mol-1
Initial temperature = T1 = 820 K
Final temperature = T2 = 720 K
Final half-life period = (t1/2)2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 150
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 151
Answer:
Half-life period = 1.46 x 105 min

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(9) The rate of a gaseous reaction is 6.08 x 10-2 Ms-1 at 50°C. What will be its rate at 60°C? Energy of activation of the reaction is 18.26 kj mol-1. (R = 8.314k-1 mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Initial rate = R1 = 6.08 x 10″2Ms-1
Energy of activation = Ea = 18.26 kJmol-1 = 18260 mol-1
Initial temperature = T1 = 273 + 50 = 323 K
Final temperature = T2 = 273 + 60 = 333 K
Final rate of the reaction = R2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 152
Answer:
Rate of reaction at 37°C = 7.46 x 10-2 Ms-1

(10) A first order gas-phase reaction has an energy of activation of 240 kj mol-1. If the frequency factor of the reaction is 1.6 x 1013 s-1, calculate its rate constant at 600 K.
Solution :
Given : Energy of activation = Ea = 240 kJ mol-1 = 240 x 103 mol-1
Frequency factor = A = 1.6x 1013 s-1
Temperature = T= 600 K
Rate constant = k = ?
By Arrhenius equation,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 153
Answeer:
Rate constant = k = 2.01 x 10-8 s-1

(11) In the Arrhenius equation for a first order reaction, the values of ‘A’ and ‘Ea’ are 4 x 1013 sec-1 and 98.6 kJ mol-1 respectively. At what temperature will its half-life period be 10 minutes? [R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-2]
Solution :
Given
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 154
= 311.3 K
Answer:
Temperature = T = 311.3 K

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(12) The frequency factor for a second-order reaction is 4.83 x 1012M-1s-1 at 27°C. If the rate con­stant of the reaction is 1.37 x 10-3M-1s-1, find the energy of activation.
Solution :
Given : Frequency factor = A
= 4.83 x 1012 M-1s-1
Rate constant = k= 1.37 x 10-3 M-1s-1
Temperature = T = 273 + 27 = 300 K
Energy of activation = Ea = ?
By Arrhenius equation,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 155
Answer:
Energy of activation = Ea = 89.305 kJ mol1

(13) Rate constants (k) for a reaction were measured at different temperatures. When log10ft was plotted against 1/T, the slope of the graph was 3.28 x 103. Calculate the energy of activation.
Solution :
Given : Slope of a graph = 3.28 x 103
Activation energy = Ea = ?
From Arrhenius equation, k = A x e-Ea/RT
\(\log _{10} k=\frac{-E_{\mathrm{a}}}{2.303 R} \times \frac{1}{T}+\log _{10} A\)

The graph is a straight line with slope equal to Ea/2.303R
∴ \(\frac{E_{\mathrm{a}}}{2.303 R}\) = 3.28 x 103
∴ Ea = 2.303/? x 3.28 x 103
= 2.303 x 8.314 x 3.28 x 103
= 62.8 x 103 mol-1
= 62.8 kJ mol-1
Answer:
Activation energy = Ea = 62.8 kj mol-1

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 66.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each subquestion :

1. The rate of a reaction is expressed in the units
(a) L mol-1t-1
(b) mol dm-3 t-1
(c) Ms
(d) M-1s-1
Answer:
(b) mol dm-3 t-1

2. For a gaseous reaction the unit of rate of reaction is
(a) L atm s-1
(b) atm mol-1s-1
(c) atm s-1
(d) mol s
Answer:
(c) atm s-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

3. In the reaction A 4- 3B → 2C, the rate of formation of C is
(a) the same as rate of consumption of A
(b) the same as the rate of consumption of B
(c) twice the rate of consumption of A
(d) 3/2 times the rate of consumption of B
Answer:
(c) twice the rate of consumption of A

4. The units of rate of a reaction and rate constant are same for a reaction of order.
(a) zero
(b) one
(c) two
(d) fractional
Answer:
(a) zero

5. During the progress of a reaction, the rate constant of a reaction
(a) increases
(b) decreases
(c) remains unchanged
(d) first increases and then decreases
Answer:
(a) increases

6. For the reaction, 2A → 3C, the reaction rate is equal to
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 158
Answer:
(c)

7. For the reaction, 2X + 3Y → 4Z, reaction may be represented as
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 159
Answer:
(b)

8. For the reaction 2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g) liquid bromine, which of the following rate equation is ‘incorrect’?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 160
Answer:
(b)

9. The rate of reaction for certain reaction is expressed as :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 161
The reaction is
(a) 3A → 2B + C
(b) 2B → 3A + C
(c) 2B+C → 3A
(d) 3A + 2B → C
Answer:
(c) 2B+C → 3A

10. Order of a reaction is
(a) number of molecules reacting in a reaction
(b) the number of molecules whose concentration changes during a reaction
(c) the number of molecules of reactants whose concentration determine the rate
(d) increase in number of molecules of products
Answer:
(c) the number of molecules of reactants whose concentration determine the rate

11. The unit of rate constant for zero order reaction is
(a) t-1
(b) mol dm-3 t-1
(c) mol-1 dm3 t-1
(d) mol-2 dm6 t-1
Answer:
(b) mol dm-3 t-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

12. A → B is a first order reaction with rate 6.6 x 10-5 ms-1. When [A] is 0.6 m, rate constant of the reaction is-
(a) 1.1 x 10-5 s-1
(b) 1.1 x 10-4 s-1
(c) 9 x 10-5 s-1
(d) 9 x 10-4 s-1
Answer:
(b) 1.1 x 10-4 s-1

13. For a first order reaction, when the rate of a reaction is plotted against concentration of the reactant, then the graph obtained is
(a) a curve
(b) a straight line with negative slope
(c) a straight line with a positive slope
(d) a straight line with positive intercept
Answer:
(c) a straight line with a positive slope

14. For a chemical reaction, A → products, the rate of reaction doubles when the concentration of ‘A’ is increased by a factor of 4, the order of reaction is
(a) 2
(b) 0.5
(c) 4
(d) 1
Answer:
(b) 0.5

15. The order of reaction between equimolar mixture of H2 and Cl2 in the presence of sunlight is
(a) 0
(b) 1
(c) 2
(d) 3
Answer:
(a) 0

16. Molecularity of reaction can be
(a) zero
(b) integral
(c) fractional
(d) negative
Answer:
(b) integral

17. The reaction,
CH3COOC2H5 + H2O \(\stackrel{\mathrm{H}^{+}}{\longrightarrow}\) CH3COOH + C2H5OH is of
(a) zero order
(b) first order
(c) second order
(d) pseudo first order reaction
Answer:
(d) pseudo first order reaction

18. A reaction is first order with respect to reactant A and second order with respect to reactant B. The rate law for the reaction is given by
(a) rate = k[A][B]2
(b) rate = [A][B]2
(c) rate = k [A]2[B]
(d) rate = k[A]0[B]2
Answer:
(a) rate = k[A][B]2

19. Molecularity of an elementary reaction
(a) may be zero
(b) is always integral
(c) may be semi-integral
(d) may be integral, fractional or zero.
Answer:
(b) is always integral

20. The unit of rate constant for first order reaction is
(a) min-2
(b) s
(c) s-1
(d) min
Answer:
(c) s-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

21. The integrated rate equation for first order reaction A → products is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 162
Answer:
(b)

22. Time required to complete 90% of the first order reaction is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 163
Answer:
(a)

23. The rate constant of a first order reaction is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 164
Answer:
(d)

24. The half-life of a first order reaction is 30 min and the initial concentration of the reactant is 0.1M. If the initial concentration of reactant is doubled, then the half-life of the reaction will be
(a) 1800s
(c) 15 min
(b) 60 min
(d) 900s
Answer:
(a) 1800s

25. The rate constant for a first order reaction is loos the time required for completion of 50% of reaction is-
(a) 0.0693 milliseconds
(b) 0.693 milliseconds
(c) 6.93 milliseconds
(d) 69.3 milliseconds
Answer:
(c) 6.93 milliseconds

26. The slope of the straight line obtained by plotting rate versus concentration of reactant for a first order reaction is
(a) – k
(b) – k/2.303
(c) k/2.303
(d) k
Answer:
(d) k

27. If C0 and C are the concentrations of a reactant initially and after time t then, for a first order reaction
(a) C = C0ekr
(b) C0 = 1/C e-kr
(c) C = C0e-kr
(d) CO = C ekr
Answer:
(b) C0 = 1/C e-kr

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

28. A graph corresponding to a first order reaction is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 165
Answer:
(b)

29. For two first order reactions, A → products and B → products, k1 and k2 are the rate constants. The fIrst reaction (A) is slower than the second reaction (B). The graphical observation corresponding to this observation will be
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 166
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 167
Answer:
(b)

30. Half-life (t1/2) of first order reaction is
(a) dependent of concentration
(b) independent of concentration
(c) dependent of time
(d) dependent of molecularity
Answer:
(b) independent of concentration

31. For a first order reaction, the half-life period is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 168
Answer:
(c)

32. When half-life period of a zero order reaction is plotted against concentration of the reactant at constant temperature, the graph obtained is
(a) a curve
(b) a straight line with a positive slope
(c) a straight line with a negative slope
(d) an exponential graph
Answer:
(b) a straight line with a positive slope

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

33. The rate of a reaction between A and B is R = k [A]n x [B]m On doubling the concentration of A and halving the concentration of B, the ratio of the new rate to the earlier rate of the reaction will be
(a) m + n
(b) n – m
(c) 2(n-m)
(d) \(\frac{1}{{ }_{2} n+m}\)
Answer:
(c) 2(n-m)

34. Consider the reaction
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 169
(a) 0,052 M/s
(b) 0.114 M/s
(c) 0.026 M/s
(d) -0.026 M/s
Answer:
(c)

35. The rate of the first order reaction A → products is 0.01 M/s, when reactant concentration is 0.2 M. The rate constant for the reaction will be
(a) 0.05 s-1
(b) 0.05 min-1
(c) 0.1 s-1
(d) 0.01 s-1
Answer:
(a) 0.05 s-1

36. The rate constant of a reaction
(a) decreases with increasing Ea
(b) decreases with decreasing Ea
(c) is independent of Ea
(d) decreases with increasing temperature
Answer:
(a) decreases with increasing Ea

37. The slope of a graph In [A]t versus t for a first order reaction is -2.5 x 10-3s-1. The rate constant for the reaction will be
(a) 5.76 x 10-3s-1
(b) 1.086 x 10-3s-1
(c) -2.5 x 10-3s-1
(d) 2.5 x 10-3s-1
Answer:
(d) 2.5 x 10-3s-1

38. For the reaction, Cl2 + 2I → 2CI + I2, the initial concentration of I was 0.2 mol L and the concentration after 20 minutes was 0.18 mol L-1. Then the rate of formation of I2 in mol L min-1 will be
(a) 1 x 10-3
(b) 5 x 10-4
(c) 1 x 10-4
(d) 2 x 10-3
Answer:
(b) 5 x 10-4

39. A catalyst increases the rate of the reaction by
(a) increasing Ea
(b) increasing T
(c) decreasing Ea
(d) decreasing T
Answer:
(c) decreasing Ea

40. The Arrhenius equation is
(a) A = ke-Ea/RT
(b) A/k = e-Ea/RT
(c) k = AeEa/RT
(d) k = Aee-RT/Ea
Answer:
(b) A/k = e-Ea/RT

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

41. The Arrhenius equation is
(a) k = Ae-RT/Ea
(b) A = keEa/RT
(c) k = Ae-RT/Ea
(d) A = keEa/RT
Answer:
(d) A = keEa/RT

42. When the initial concentration of the reactant is doubled, the half-life period of the reaction is also doubled. Hence the order of the reaction is
(a) one
(b) two
(c) fraction
(d) zero
Answer:
(d) zero

43. If k1 and k2 are the rate constants of the given reaction in the presence and absence of the catalyst, then
(a) k1 = k2
(b) k1 > k2
(c) k1 < k2
(d) k1 > k2
Answer:
(b) k1 > k2

44. If the ratio of rate constants at two temperatures for the given reaction is 2.5, the ratio of corresponding half-life periods is
(a) 2.5
(b) 4
(c) 5
(d) 0.4
Answer:
(d) 0.4

45. For a zero order reaction, if Co is the initial concentration, then the half life period will be
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 170
Answer:
(c)

46. The order of nuclear disintegration reaction is
(a) zero
(b) one
(c) two
(d) fraction
Answer:
(b) one

47. The unit of rate constant for zero order reaction is
(a) mol L-2 s-1
(b) mol-1Ls-1
(c) mol2L-2s-1
(d) mol L-1 s-1
Answer:
(d) mol L-1 s-1

48. When a graph of log10k is plotted against 1 /T, the slope of the line is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 171
Answer:
(d)

49. The slope of a graph obtained by plotting half-life period and initial concentration of the reactant in zero order reaction is
\((a) \frac{2.303}{k}
(b) \frac{1}{k}
(c) \frac{1}{2 k}
(d) \frac{k}{2.303}\)
Answer:
(c)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

50. When a graph of log, 0k against 1/T is plotted, for reaction, a graph with slope equal to 1 x 103 is obtained. Hence the activation energy is
(a) 8.314 x 103 Jmor-1
(b) 3.61 kJ mol-1
(c) 4.85 x 103 Jmol-1
(d) 19.1 kJ mol-1
Answer:
(d) 19.1 kJ mol-1

51. The correct expression for activation energy is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 172
Answer:
(c)

52. In the reaction, 2A(g) → B(g), the initial pressure of A is 2.5 atm. After 10 minutes the pressure becomes 2.2 atm. Hence the pressure of A is
(a) 1.2 atm
(b) 1.9 atm
(c) 2.3 atm
(d) 0.3 atm
Answer:
(b) 1.9 atm

53. The half-life period of zero order reaction A → product is given by –
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 173
Answer:
(c)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 1.
What is electrochemistry?
Answer:
Electrochemistry: It is the branch of physical chemistry that involves the study of the inter-relation between chemical changes and electrical energy and is also concerned with the electrical properties of electrolytic solutions such as resistance and conductance.

Question 2.
What is electric conduction?
Answer:
The transfer of electric charge or electrons from one point to another is called electric conduction which results in an electric current.

Question 3.
What are the electric conductors?
Answer:
The substances that allow the flow of electricity or electric charge transfer through them are called electric conductors.

Question 4.
What is a flow of electricity or a transfer of electric charge?
Answer:
The flow of electricity or a transfer of electric charge through a conductor involves the transfer of electrons from one point to the other point. This takes place under the influence of applied electric potential.

Question 5.
What are the types of electric conductors? On what basis are they classified?
Answer:
The electric conductors are classified according to the mechanism of the transfer of electrons or charge. There are two types of conductors as follows :

(i) Electrons (or metallic) conductors : The electric conductors through which the conduction of electricity takes place by a direct flow of electrons under the influence of applied potential are called electronic conductors.

In this case, there is no transfer of matter like atoms or ions. For example, solid and molten metals such as Al, Cu, etc.

(ii) Electrolytic conductors : The conductors in which the conduction of electricity takes place by the migration of positive ions (cations) and negative ions (anions) of the electrolyte are called electrolytic conductors. In this, the conduction involves the transfer of matter and it is accompanied with chemical changes. For example, solutions of electrolytes (strong and weak), molten salts.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 6.
Distinguish between electronic and electrolytic conductors.
Answer:
Electronic conductors:

  1. The flow of electricity takes place by direct flow of electrons through the conductor.
  2. The conduction does not involve the transfer of a matter.
  3. No chemical change is involved during conduction.
  4. The resistance of the conductor increases and conductivity decreases with the increase in temperature.
  5. The conductance of metallic conductors is very high.
  6. Examples are solid or molten metals, such as Al, Cu, etc.

Electrolytic conductors:

  1. The electron transfer takes place by the migration of ions (cations and anions) of the electrolyte.
  2. The conduction involves the transfer of a matter.
  3. Chemical changes are always involved during the passage of an electric current.
  4. The resistance decreases and the conductivity increases with the increase in temperature.
  5. The conductance of the electrolytes is comparatively low.
  6. Examples are aqueous solutions of acids, bases or salts.

Question 7.
What information is provided by measurement of conductivities of solutions?
Answer:

  • The conducting and nonconducting properties of solutions can be identified by the measurement of their conductivities.
  • The substances like sucrose and urea which do not dissociate in aqueous solutions have same conductivity as that of water. Hence they are nonelectrolytes.
  • The substances like KCl, CH3COOH, NaOH, etc. dissociate in their aqueous solutions and their conductivities are higher than water. Hence they are electrolytes.
  • On the basis of high or low electrical conductivity, the electrolytes can be classified as strong and weak electrolytes. The solutions of strong electrolytes have high conductivities while solutions of weak electrolytes have lower conductivities.

Question 8.
What is Ohm’s law?
Answer:
Ohm’s law : According to Ohm’s law, the electrical resistance R of a conductor is equal to the electric potential difference, V divided by the electric current, I.
R = \(\frac{V}{I}\) ohm

Question 9.
What are SI units of
(a) electrical resistance
(b) potential and
(c) electric current?
Answer:
(a) The SI unit of electrical resistance is Ohm denoted by Ω (omega).
(b) The SI unit of potential is volt denoted by V.
(c) The SI unit of electric current is ampere denoted by A.

Question 10.
How is electrical conductance of a solution denoted ? What are its units ?
Answer:
The electrical conductance of a solution is denoted by G and it is the reciprocal of resistance, R.
G = \(\frac{1}{R}\)
The unit of G is siemens denoted by S or Ω-1.
Hence we can write, S = Ω-1 = AV-1 = CV-1S-1 where A is ampere and C is coulomb.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 11.
What is electrical conductance? What are its units ?
Answer:
The reciprocal of the electrical resistance of a solution is called the conductance. It is represented by G.
∴ Conductance (G) = \(\frac{1}{\text { Resistance }}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}}\)
The conductance has units of reciprocal of ohm (Ω-1, ohm-1 or mho). In SI units, conductance has units as Siemens, (S). (1 S = 1 Ω-1 = 1 ohm-1 = 1 mho = AV-1 = CV-1 S, where C represents electric charge in coulomb, and A represents current strength)

Question 12.
What is specific conductance or conductivity?
Answer:
The reciprocal of specific resistance or resistivity is called specific conductance or conductivity.
If ρ is the resistivity then,
conductivity = \(\frac{1}{\text { resistivity }}=\frac{1}{\rho}\)
Conductivity is denoted by κ (kappa), where κ = \(\frac{1}{\rho}\)
It is the conductance of a conductor that is 1 m in length and 1 m2 in cross section area in SI units. (In C.G.S. units, it is the resistance of a conductor that is 1 cm in length and 1 cm2 in cross section area.) It is the conductance of a conductor of volume 1 m3 (or in C.G.S. units, the volume of 1 cm3).

Question 13.
What are the units of specific conductance or conductivity?
Answer:
If ρ is a resistivity and κ is conductivity or specific conductance, then
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 1
(where S is Siemens)
(In C.G.S. system, the units of κ are Ω-1 cm-1 or S cm-1 which are commonly used.)

Question 14.
Define molar conductivity. What is the significance of it ?
Answer:
Molar conductivity: It is defined as a conductance of a volume of the solution containing ions from one mole of an electrolyte when placed between two parallel plate electrodes 1 cm apart and of large area, sufficient to accommodate the whole solution between them, at constant temperature. It is denoted by ∧m.

Thus, the significance of molar conductivity is the conductance due to ions from one mole of an electrolyte.

Question 15.
Obtain a relation between conductivity (κ) and molar conductivity (∧m).
Answer:
Conductivity or specific conductance (κ) is the conductance of 1 cm3 of the solution in C.G.S. units, while molar conductivity is the conductance of a solution containing one mole of an electrolyte. Consider C molar solution, i.e., C moles of an electrolyte present in 1 litre or 1000 cm3 of the solution.
∴ C moles of an electrolyte are present in 1000 cm3 solution.
∴ 1 mole of an electrolyte is present in \(\frac{1000}{\mathrm{C}}\) cm
solution.
Now,
∴ Conductance of 1 cm3 of this solution is κ,
∴ Conductance of \(\frac{1000}{\mathrm{C}}\) cm3 of the solution is \(\frac{\kappa \times 1000}{C}\)
This represents molar conductivity, ∧m.
∴ ∧m = \(\frac{\kappa \times 1000}{C}\) cm2 mol-1 (in C.G.S units)
[In case of SI units :
Consider a solution in which C moles of an electrolyte are present in 1 m3 of solution.
Conductivity κ is the conductance of 1 m3 of solution.
∵ C moles of an electrolyte are present in 1 m3 solution.
∴ 1 mol of an electrolyte is present in \(\frac{1}{C}\) solution.
∵ Conductance of 1 m3 of this solution is κ.
∴ Conductance of \(\frac{1}{C}\) m3 of the solution is \(\frac{\kappa}{\mathrm{C}}\)
This represents molar conductivity, ∧m.
∴ ∧m = \(\frac{\kappa}{\mathrm{C}}\)Ω-1 m2 mol-1 (In SI units).]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 16.
What are the units of molar conductivity, ∧m?
Answer:
In SI units: Conductivity κ is expressed in Ω-1m-1 (or S m-1) and concentration of the solution is expressed in mol m-3.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 2
In C.G.S. units : Conductivity is expressed in Ω-1 cm-1 (or S cm-1) and concentration of the solution is expressed in mol L-1 or moles in 1000 cm3 of the solution.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 3

Question 17.
Explain the variation of molar conductivity with concentration for strong and weak electrolytes.
OR
How is the molar conductivity of strong electrolytes at zero concentration determined by graphical method? Why is this method not useful for weak electrolytes?
Answer:
(i) As the dilution of an electrolytic solution increases, the dissociation of the electrolyte increases, hence the total number of ions increases, therefore, the molar conductivity increases.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 4
Fig. 5.5 : Variation of molar conductivity with \(\sqrt{\mathbf{c}}\)
(ii) The increase in molar conductivity with increase in dilution or decrease in concentration is different for strong and weak electrolytes.
(iii) On dilution, the molar conductivity of strong electrolytes increases rapidly and approaches to a maximum limiting value at infinite dilution or zero concentration and represented as ∧ ∞ or ∧0 or ∧0m. In case of weak electrolytes which dissociate less as compared to strong electrolytes, the molar conductivity is low and increases slowly in high concentration region, but increases rapidly at low concentration or high dilution. This is because the extent of dissociation increases with dilution rapidly.
(v) ∧0 values for strong electrolytes can be obtained by extrapolating the linear graph to zero concentration (or infinite dilution). However ∧0 for the weak electrolytes cannot be obtained by this method, since the graph increases exponentially at very high dilution and does not intersect ∧m axis at zero concentration.

Question 18.
Why has the molar conductance of an electrolyte the maximum value at infinite dilution ?
Answer:

  • As the dilution of an electrolytic solution increases or concentration decreases, the dissociation of an electrolyte increases.
  • At infinite dilution, the dissociation of an electrolyte is complete (100% dissociation). Hence all the ions from one mole of an electrolyte are available to carry electricity.

Therefore the molar conductance at infinite dilute (∧0) for a given electrolyte has the highest or limiting value. It is always constant for the given electrolyte at constant temperature.

Question 19.
State Kohlrausch’s law.
OR
State and explain Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions.
Answer:
(A) Statement of Kohlrausch’s law : This states that at infinite dilution of the solution, each ion of an electrolyte migrates independently of its co-ions and contributes independently to the total molar conductivity of the electrolyte, irrespective of the nature of other ions present in the solution.

(B) Explanation : Both the ions, cation and anion of the electrolyte make a definite contribution to the molar conductivity of the electrolyte at infinite dilution or zero concentration (∧0).
If \(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) and \(\lambda_{-}^{0}\) are the molar ionic conductivities of cation and anion respectively at infinite dilution, then
0 = \(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) + \(\lambda_{-}^{0}\)
This is known as Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions.
For an electrolyte, Bx Ay giving x number of cations and y number of anions,
0 = x\(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) + y\(\lambda_{-}^{0}\)

(C) Applications of Kohlrausch’s law :
(1) With this law, the molar conductivity of a strong electrolyte at zero concentration can be determined. For example,
\(\wedge_{0(\mathrm{KCl})}=\lambda_{\mathrm{K}^{+}}^{0}-\lambda_{\mathrm{Cl}^{-}}^{0}\)
(2) ∧0 values of weak electrolyte with those of strong electrolytes can be obtained. For example,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 5

Question 20.
State Kohlrausch’s law and write mathematical expression of molar conductivity of the given solution at infinite dilution.
Answer:
Statement of Kohlrausch’s law : This states that at infinite dilution of the solution, each ion of an electrolyte migrates independently of its co-ions and contributes independently to the total molar conductivity of the electrolyte, irrespective of the nature of other ions present in the solution.

This law of independent migration of ions is represented as
0 = \(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) + \(\lambda_{-}^{0}\).
where ∧0 is the molar conductivity of the electrolyte at infinite dilution or zero concentration while \(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) and \(\lambda_{-}^{0}\) are the molar ionic conductivities of cation and anion respectively at infinite dilution.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 21.
Explain the determination of molar conductivity of a weak electrolyte at infinite dilution or zero concentration using Kohlrausch’s law.
Answer:
Molar conductivity of a weak electrolyte at infinite dilution or zero concentration cannot be measured experimentally.
Consider the molar conductivity (∧0) of a weak acid, CH3COOH at zero concentration. By Kohlrausch s law, ∧0CH3COOH = λ0CH3COOH + λ0 H+ where λ0 CH3COO and λ0 H+ are the molar ionic conductivities of CH3COO and H+ ions respectively.

If ∧0CH3COONa, ∧0HCl and ∧0NaCl are the molar conductivities of CH3COONa, HCl and NaCl respectively at zero concentration, then by
Kohlrausch’s law,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 6
Hence, from ∧0 values of strong electrolytes, ∧0 of a weak electrolyte CH3COOH, at infinite dilution can be calculated.

Question 22.
How is the degree of dissociation related to the molar conductance of the electrolytic solution ?
Answer:
(i) At zero concentration or at infinite dilution, the molar conductivity has a maximum value denoted by ∧0.
(ii) This is due to complete dissociation of the weak electrolyte making all the ions available from one mole of the electrolyte to carry electricity at zero concentration.
(iii) If α is the degree of dissociation, then
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 7
This suggests that at zero concentration or infinite dilution, the electrolyte is completely (100%) dissociated.

Question 23.
Write the relation between molar conductivity and molar ionic conductivities for the following electrolytes :
(a) KBr, (b) Na2SO4, (c) AlCl3.
Answer:
(a) If ∧0 is molar conductivity of an electrolyte at infinite dilution and \(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) and \(\lambda_{-}^{0}\) are molar ionic conductivities then,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 8

Question 24.
How is molar conductivity of an electrolytic solution measured ?
Answer:
The resistance of an electrolytic solution is measured by using a conductivity cell and Wheatstone bridge.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 9
Fig. 5.6 : Measurement of conductance

The measurement of molar conductivity of a solution involves two steps as follows :
Step I : Determination of cell constant of the conductivity cell :
KCl solution (0.01 M) whose conductivity is accurately known (κ = 0.00141 Ω-1 cm-1) is taken in a beaker and the conductivity cell is dipped. The two electrodes of the cell are connected to one arm while the variable known resistance (R) is placed in another arm of Wheatstone bridge.

A current detector D’ which is a head phone or a magic eye is used. J is the sliding jockey (contact) that slides on the arm AB which is a wire of uniform cross section. A source of A.C. power (alternating power) is used to avoid electrolysis of the solution.

By sliding the jockey on wire AB, a balance point (null point) is obtained at C. Let AC and BC be the lengths of wire.
If Rsolution is the resistance of KCl solution and Rx is the known resistance then by Wheatstone’s bridge principle,
\(\frac{R_{\text {solution }}}{\mathrm{BC}}=\frac{R_{x}}{\mathrm{AC}}\)
∴ Rsolution = \(\mathrm{BC} \times \frac{R_{x}}{\mathrm{AC}}\)
Then the cell constant ‘b’ of the conductivity cell is obtained by, b = κKCl × Rsolution.

Step II : Determination of conductivity of the given solution :
KCl solution is replaced by the given electrolytic solution and its resistance (Rs) is measured by Wheatstone bridge method by similar manner by obtaining a null point at D.
The conductivity (κ) of the given solution is, cell constant b
κ = \(\frac{\text { cell constant }}{R_{\mathrm{s}}}=\frac{b}{R_{\mathrm{s}}}\)

Step III: Calculation of molar conductivity :
The molar conductivity (∧m) is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 10
Since the concentration of the solution is known, ∧m can be calculated.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Solved Examples 5.3

Question 25.
Solve the following :

(1) The resistance of a solution is 2.5 × 103 ohm. Find the conductance of the solution.
Solution :
Given : Resistance of solution = R = 2.5 × 103
Conductance of solution = G = ?
G = \(\frac{1}{R}\)
= \(\frac{1}{2.5 \times 10^{3}}\) ohm-1 (Ω-1 or S)
= 4 × 10-3-1 (or S)
Ans. Conductance = G = 4 × 10-3-1

(2) A conductivity cell has two electrodes 20 mm apart and of cross section area 1.8 cm2. Find the cell constant.
Solution :
Given: Distance between two electrodes = l
= 20 mm
= 2 cm
Cross section area = a = 1.8 cm
Cell constant = b = ?
b = \(\frac{l}{a}=\frac{2}{1.8}\) = 1.111 cm-1
Ans. Cell constant = 1.111 cm-1

(3) The conductivity of 0.02 M AgNO3 at 25 °C is 2.428 × 10-3-1 cm-1. What is its molar conductivity ?
Solution :
Given : Concentration of solution = C = 0.02 M AgNO3
Temperature = T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
Conductivity = κ = 2.428 × 10-3-1 cm-1 (or S cm-1)
Molar conductivity = ∧m = ?
m = \(\frac{\kappa \times 1000}{C}\)
= \(\frac{2.428 \times 10^{-3} \times 1000}{0.02}\)
= 121.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 (or 121.4 S cm2 mol-1)
Ans. Molar conductivity = ∧m
= 121.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

(4) 0.05 M NaOH solution offered a resistance of 31.6 in a conductivity cell at 298 K. If the cell constant of the cell is 0.367 cm-1, calculate the molar conductivity of NaOH solution.
Solution :
Given : Concentration = C = 0.05 M NaOH
Resistance = R = 31.6 Ω
Cell constant = b = 0.367 cm-1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 11
Ans. Molar conductivity = ∧m = 232.2 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(5) A conductivity cell filled with 0.1 M KCl gives at 25 °C a resistance of 85.5 ohms. The conductivity of 0.1 M KCl at 25° is 0.01286 ohm-1 cm-1. The same cell filled with 0.005 M HCl gives a resistance of 529 ohms. What is the molar conductivity of HCl solution at 25 °C ?
Solution :
Given : Resistance of KCl solution = RKCl = 85.5 Ω
Conductivity of KCl solution = κKCl
= 0.01286 ohm-1 cm-1
Concentration = C = 0.005 M HCl
Resistance of HCl solution = Rsoln = 529 ohms
Molar conductivity of HCl = ∧m(HCl) = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 12
Ans. Molar conductivity of HCl solution = ∧m(HCl)
= 416 ohm-1 cm2 mol-1

(6) The molar conductivity of 0.05 M BaCl2 solution at 25 °C is 223 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1. What is its conductivity?
Solution :
Given : Molar conductivity = ∧m
= 223 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Concentration = C = 0.05 M BaCl2
Conductivity = κ = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 13
Ans. Conductivity = κ = 0.01115 Ω-1 cm-1

(7) Conductivity of a solution is 6.23 × 10-5-1 cm-1 and its resistance is 13710 Ω. If the electrodes are 0.7 cm apart, calculate the cross-sectional area of electrode.
Solution :
Given : κ = 6.23 × 10-5-1 cm-1
R = 13710 Ω
l = 0.7 cm
a = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 14
Ans. Cross sectional area of electrode = 0.8195 cm2

(8) A conductivity cell filled with 0.01 M KCl gives at 25 °C the resistance of 604 ohms. The conductivity of KCl at 25 °C is 0.00141 Ω-1 cm-1. The same cell filled with 0.001 M AgNO3 gives a resistance of 6529 ohms. Calculate the molar conductivity of 0.001 M AgNO3 solution at 25 °C.
Solution :
Given : Resistance of KCl solution = RKCl
= 604 ohm (Ω)
Conductivity of KCl solution = κKCl
= 0.00141 Ω-1 cm-1
Concentration = C = 0.001 M AgNO3
Resistance of solution = Rsol = 6529 ohm (Ω)
Molar conductivity = ∧m = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 15
cell constant b
= 130.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Ans. Molar conductivity of AgNO3 solution = ∧m
= 130.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

(9) Resistance and conductivity of a cell containing 0.001 M KCl solution at 298 K are 1500 Ω and 1.46 × 10-4 S.cm-1 respectively. What is cell constant.
Solution :
Given : Resistance of KCl solution = 1500 Ω, conductivity of KCl solution = κ = 1.46 × 10-4 S.cm-1, Cell constant = b = ?
Cell constant = Conductivity (k) × Resistance
= 1.46 × 10-4 × 1500
= 0.219 cm-1
Ans. Cell constant = 0.219 cm-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(10) A conductivity cell filled with 0.02 M H2SO4 gives at 25 °C resistance of 122 ohms. If the molar conductivity of 0.02 H2SO4 is 618 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1, what is the cell constant?
Solution :
Given : Concentration = C = 0.02 M H2SO4
Resistance of H2SO4 solution = Rsoln = 122 Ω
Molar conductivity = ∧m = 618 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Cell constant = b = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 16
Ans. Cell constant = b = 1.51 cm-1

(11) A conductivity cell filled with 0.02 M AgNO3 gives at 25 °C resistance of 947 ohms. If the cell constant is 2.3 cm-1, what is the molar conductivity of 0.02 M AgNO3 at 25 °C?
Solution :
Given : Concentration = C = 0.02 M AgNO3
Resistance of solution = Rsoln = 947 Ω
Cell constant = b = 2.3 cm-1
Molar conductivity = ∧m = ?
Conductivity of soln = κ
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 17
Ans. Molar conductivity = ∧m
= 121.5 Ω-1 m2 mol-1

(12) Resistance of conductivity cell filled with 0.1 M KCl solution is 100 ohms. If the resistance of the same cell when filled with 0.02 M KCl solution is 520 ohms, calculate the conductivity and molar conductivity of 0.02 M KCl solution. [Given : Conductivity of 0.1 M KCl solution is 1.29 Sm-1.]
Solution:
Given : Resistance of 0.1 M KCl solution = R1 = 100 Ω
Resistance of 0.02 M KCl solution = R2 = 520 Ω
Conductivity of 0.02 M KCl solution = κ2 = ?
Molar conductivity of 0.02 M KCl solution = ∧m = ?
Conductivity of 0.1 M KCl solution = κ1
= 1.29 S m-1
Cell constant = b = κ1 × R1 = 1.29 × 100
= 129 m-1
= 1.29 cm-1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 18

(13) The molar conductivities at zero concentration (or at infinite dilution) of CH3COONa, HCl and NaCl in Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 are 90.8,426.2 and 126.4 respectively. Calculate the molar conductivity of CH3COOH at infinite dilution.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 19
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 20

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(14) The molar conductivities at zero concentrations of NH4Cl, NaOH and NaCl are respectively 149.7Ω-1 cm2 mol-1, 248.1 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 and 126.5 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1. What is the molar conductivity of NH4OH at zero concentration ?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 21

(15) What is the molar conductivity of AgI at zero concentration if the ∧0 values of NaI, AgNO3 and NaNO3 are respectively 126.9 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1, 133.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 and 121.5 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 ?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 22
Adding equations (i) and (ii) and subtracting equation (iii) we get equation I.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 23

(16) Molar conductivity of KCl at infinite dilution is 150.3 S cm2 mol-1. If the molar conductivity of K+ is 73.4, calculate that of Cl.
Solution :
Given : Molar conductivity at infinite dilution
= ∧(KCl) = 150.3 S cm2 mol-1
Molar conductivity of K+
= \(\lambda_{\mathrm{K}^{+}}^{0}\) = 73.4 S cm2 mol-1
Molar conductivity of Cl = \(\lambda_{\mathrm{Cl}^{-}}^{0}\) = ?
By Kohlrausch’s law,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 24

(17) Molar conductivities at infinite dilution of Mg2+ and Br are 105.8 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 and 78.2 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 respectively. Calculate molar conductivity at zero concentration of MgBr2.
Solution :
Given : \(\lambda_{\mathrm{Mg}^{2+}}^{0}\) = 105.8 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
\(\lambda_{\mathrm{Br}^{-}}^{0}\) = 78.2 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
\(\wedge_{0\left(\mathrm{MgBr}_{2}\right)}\) = ?
By Kohlrausch’s law,
\(\wedge_{0\left(\mathrm{MgBr}_{2}\right)}\) = \(\lambda_{\mathrm{Mg}^{2+}}^{0}\) + 2\(\lambda_{\mathrm{Br}^{-}}^{0}\)
= 105.8 + 2 × 78.2 = 105.8 + 156.4
= 262.2 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Ans. Molar conductivity of MgBr2 at zero concentration = \(\wedge_{0\left(\mathrm{MgBr}_{2}\right)}\) = 262.2 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(18) The molar conductivity of 0.1 M CH3COOH at 25 °C is 15.9 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1. If the molar conductivities of CH3COO and H+ ions in Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 at zero concentration are 40.8 and 349.6 respectively, calculate degree of dissociation of 0.1 M CH3COOH.
Solution :
Given : Concentration = C = 0.1 M CH3COOH
Molar conductivity = ∧m = 15.9 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
\(\lambda_{\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COO}^{-}}^{0}\) = 40.8 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1;
\(\lambda_{\mathrm{H}^{+}}^{0}\) = 349.6 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Degree of dissociation = α = ?
By Kohlrausch’s law,
\(\wedge_{0\left(\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COOH}\right)}=\lambda_{\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COO}^{-}}^{0}+\lambda_{\mathrm{H}^{+}}^{0}\)
= 40.8 + 349.6
= 390.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
α = ∧m/∧0
= \(\frac{15.9}{390.4}\) = 0.0407
Ans. The degree of dissociation of CH3COOH = 0.0407

(19) The dissociation constant of a weak monoacidic base is 1.2 × 10-5 at 25 °C. The molar conductivity of the base at zero concentration is 354.8 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 at 25°C. Calculate the percentage dissociation and molar conductivity of the weak base at 0.1 M concentration.
Solution :
Given : Dissociation constant of the base = Kb = 1.2 × 10-5
Concentration = C = 0.1 M
0 = 354.8 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Percentage dissociation = ?
m = ?
Ka = \(\frac{\mathrm{C} \alpha^{2}}{1-\alpha}\); For a week electrolyte, α is small,
∴ Ka = cα2;
∴ α = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{C}}}=\left(\frac{1.2 \times 10^{-5}}{0.1}\right)^{\frac{1}{2}}\) = 1.0954 × 10-2
∴ Percentage dissociation = α × 100
= 1.0954 × 10-2 × 100 = 1.0954%
Now, α = \(\frac{\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}}{\wedge_{0}}\)
∴ ∧m = α × ∧0 = 1.954 × 10-2 × 354.8
= 6.932 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Ans. Percentage dissociation = 1.0954
Molar conductivity = ∧m
= 6.932 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

Question 26.
What is an electrochemical cell? What does it consist of?
Answer:
Electrochemical cell : It consists of two electronic conductors such as metal plates dipping into an electrolytic or ionic conductor which is an aqueous electrolytic solution or a pure liquid of a molten electrolyte.

Question 27.
What are electrochemical reactions ?
Answer:

  1. Electrochemical reactions : The chemical reactions occurring in electrochemical cells which involve transfer of electrons from one species to other are called electrochemical reactions. They are redox reactions.
  2. These reactions are made of two half reactions namely oxidation at one electrode (anode) and reduction at another electrode (cathode) of the electrochemical cell.
  3. The net reaction is the sum of the above two half reactions.

Question 28.
Define electrode.
Answer:
Electrode : The arrangement consisting of a metal rod dipping in an aqueous solution or molten electrolyte containing ions and conduct electric current due to oxidation or reduction half reactions occurring on its surface is called an electrode.

The electrodes which take part in the reactions are called active electrodes while those which do not take part in the reactions are called inert electrodes.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 29.
Define : (a) Anode (b) Cathode.
Answer:
(a) Anode : An electrode of an electrochemical cell, at which oxidation half reaction occurs due to the loss of electrons from some species is called an anode.
(b) Cathode : An electrode of an electrochemical cell at which reduction half reaction occurs due to gain of electrons by some species is called a cathode.

Question 30.
What are the types of electrochemical cells ?
Answer:
There are two types of electrochemical cells as follows :

  1. Electrolytic cells
  2. Voltaic or galvanic cells.

Question 31.
Define : (1) Electrolytic cell (2) Voltaic or galvanic cell.
Answer:
(1) Electrolytic cell : An electrochemical cell in which a non-spontaneous chemical reaction is forced to occur by passing direct electric current into the solution from the external source and where electrical energy is converted into chemical energy is called an electrolytic cell. E.g. voltameter, electrolytic cell for deposition of a metal.

(2) Voltaic or galvanic cell : An electrochemical cell in which a spontaneous chemical reaction occurs producing electricity and where a chemical energy is converted into an electrical energy is called voltaic cell or galvanic cell. E.g. Daniell cell, dry cell, lead storage battery, fuel cells, etc.

Question 32.
Define electrolysis.
Answer:
Electrolysis : The process of a non-spontaneous chemical decomposition of an electrolyte by the passage of an electric current through its aqueous solution or fused mass and in which electrical energy is converted into chemical energy is called electrolysis. E.g. Electrolysis of fused NaCl.

Question 33.
Describe electrolysis of aqueous NaCl.
Answer:
(1) Construction of an electrolytic cell : It consists of a vessel containing aqueous solution of NaCl. Two inert electrodes (graphite electrodes) are dipped in it and connected to an external source of electricity like battery. The electrode connected to the negative terminal is a cathode and that connected to a positive terminal is an anode.

(2) Working of the cell :
(A) NaCl(aq) and H2O(l) dissociate as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 25
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 26

(3) Reactions in electrolytic cell :
(i) Reduction half reaction at cathode : There are Na+ and H+ ions but since H+ are more reducible than Na+, they undergo reduction liberating hydrogen and Na+ are left in the solution.
2H2O(l) + 2e → H2(g) + \(2 \mathrm{OH}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\) (reduction)
E0 = -0.83 V
(ii) Oxidation half reaction at anode : At anode there are Cl and OH. But Cl ions are preferably oxidised due to less decomposition potential.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 27
Net cell reaction : Since two electrons are gained at cathode and two electrons are released at anode for each redox step, the electrical neutrality is maintained. Hence we can write,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 28
Since Na+ and OH are left in the solution, they form NaOH(aq).

(4) Results of electrolysis :

  • H2 gas is liberated at cathode.
  • Cl2 gas is liberated at anode.
  • NaOH is formed in the solution and it reacts basic.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 34.
Define and explain the following electrical units : (1) Coulomb (2) Ampere (3) Volt (4) Joule (5) Ohm.
Answer:
(1) Coulomb : It is a quantity of electricity obtained when one ampere current flows for one second.
It is the unit of quantity of electricity.
Q = I × t Coulomb (C)
where Q is the charge or quantity of electricity in coulombs.

(2) Ampere : It is a strength of an electric current obtained when one coulomb of electricity is passed through a circuit for one second.
∴ I = Q/t

(3) Volt : It is the potential difference between two points of an electric conductor required to send a current of one amphere through a resistance of one ohm.
∴ V = I × R
where V is the potential difference in volts and R is the resistance of a conductor in ohms.

(4) Joule : It is the electrical work or energy produced when one coulomb of electricity is passed through a
potential difference of one volt.
∴ Electrical work = Q × V J
where Q is electrical charge in coulombs and V is the potential difference.

(5) Ohm : It is the resistance of an electrical conductor across which when potential difference of 1 volt is applied, a current of one ampere is obtained. It has units, Ω or per siemens.

Question 35.
Explain quantitative aspects of electrolysis.
Answer:
(1) Calculation of quantity of electricity : If an electric current of strength I A is passed through the cell for t seconds, then quantity of electricity (Q) obtained is given by,
Q = I × t C (Coulomb)

(2) Calculation of moles of electrons passed : The charge carried by one mole of electrons is referred to as one faraday (F). If total charge passed is Q C, then moles of electrons passed = \(\frac{Q(\mathrm{C})}{F\left(\mathrm{C} / \mathrm{mol} \mathrm{e}^{-}\right)}\)

(3) Calculation of moles of product formed : Consider one mole of ions, \(\mathbf{M}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{n^{+}}\) which will require n moles of electrons for reduction.
\(\mathbf{M}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{n^{+}}\) + ne → M (Reduction half reaction)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 29

(4) Calculation of mass of product : Mass, W of product formed is given by,
W = moles of product × molar mass of product (M)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 30
When two electrolytic cells containing different electrolytes are connected in series so that same quantity of electricity is passed through them, then the masses W1 and W2 of products produced are given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 31

Question 36.
Define Faraday.
Answer:
Faraday : It is defined as the quantity of the electric charge carried by one mole of electrons.
It has value, 1F = 96500 C/mol

Question 37.
Obtain a charge on one electron from Faraday’s value.
Answer:

  • One Faraday is the electric charge on one mole of electrons (6.022 × 1023 electrons).
  • 1 Faraday = 96500 (per mol of electrons).
  • Hence the charge on one electron is, change on one electron = \(\frac{96500}{6.022 \times 10^{23}}\)
    = 1.602 × 10-9 C.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Solved Examples 5.4-5.5

Question 38.
Solve the following :

(1) An electric current of 100 mA is passed through an electrolyte for 2 hours, 20 minutes and 20 seconds. Find the quantity of electricity passed.
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 100 mA
= 100 × 10-3 A
= 0.1 A
Time = t = 2 hrs + 20 min + 20 s
= 2 × 60 × 60 + 20 × 60 + 20
= 8420 s
The quantity of electricity = Q = ?
Q = I × t
= 0.1 × 8420
= 842 C
Ans. Quantity of electricity passed, Q = 842 C

(2) An electric current of 500 mA is passed for 1 hour and 30 minutes. Calculate the
(i) Quantity of electricity (or charge)
(ii) Number of Faradays of electricity
(iii) Number of electrons passed (Charge on 1 electron = 1.602 × 10-19 C)
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 500 mA
= 500 × 10-3 A = 0.5 A
Time = t = 1 hr + 30 min
= 1 × 60 × 60 + 30 × 60
= 5400 s
(i) The quantity of electricity = Q = ?
(ii) Number of Faradays of electricity = ?
(iii) Number of electrons passed = ?

(i) Q = I × t = 0.5(A) × 5400(s) = 2700 C
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 32
(iii) 1F is the electric charge on 6.022 × 1023 electrons.
∴ 0.028F is the charge on,
0.028 × 6.022 × 1023 = 1.686 × 1022 electrons
∴ Number of electrons passed = 1.686 × 1022
Ans. (i) The quantity of electricity = Q = 2700 C
(ii) Number of Faradays of electricity = 0.028 F
(iii) Number of electrons passed = 1.686 × 1022

(3) How much electricity in terms of Faraday is required to produce :
(a) 20 g of Ca from molten CaCl2
(b) 40 g of Al from molten Al2O3
(Given : Molar mass of Calcium and Aluminium are 40 g mol-1 and 27 g mol-1 respectively.)
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 33

(4) For the following conversions,
calculate
(i) number of moles of electrons
(ii) number of Faradays
(iii) Amount of electricity :
(A) 0.1 mol conversion of Zn2+ to Zn.
(B) 0.08 mol conversion of \(\mathbf{M n O}_{4}^{2-}\) to Mn2+
(C) 1.1 mol conversion of \(\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathbf{O}_{7}^{2-}\) to Cr3+.
Solution :
(i) Number of moles of electrons = ?
(ii) Number of Faradays = ?
(iii) Amount of electricity = Q = ?
(A) Number of moles of Zn2+ =0.1 mol
Zn2+ + 2e → Zn
(i) ∵ 1 mol Zn2+ requires 2 mol electrons
0.1 mol Zn2+ will require
∴ 0.1 × 2 = 0.2 mol electrons
(ii) ∵ 1 mol electrons = 1 Faraday
∴ 0.2 mol electrons = 0.2 × 1
= 0.2 Faradays
(iii) ∵ 1 Faraday = 96500 C
∴ 0.2 Faraday = 96500 × 0.2 = 48250 C
Amount of electricity required =48250C

(B) Number of moles of \(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}\) = 0.08 mol
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}+5 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}^{2+}\)
(i) ∵ 1 mol \(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}\) requires 5 mol electrons
∴ 0.08 mol \(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}\) will require
5 × 0.08 = 0.4 mol electrons
(ii) Number of Faradays = 0.4 × 1 = 0.4
(iii) Amount of electricity = Q = 0.4 × 96500
= 38600 C

(C) Number of moles of \(\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7}^{2-}\) = 1.1 mol
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 34
(i) ∵ 1 mol \(\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7}^{2-}\) requires 6 mol electrons
∴ 1.1 mol \(\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7}^{2-}\) will require
6 × 1.1 = 6.6 mol electrons
(ii) Number of Faradays = 1 × 6.6 = 6.6
(iii) Amount of electricity = 6.6 × 96500
= 6.369 × 105 C
Ans.
(A) (i) Number of moles of electrons = 0.2 mol
(ii) Number of Faradays = 0.2
(iii) Amount of electricity = 48250 C

(B) (i) Number of moles of electrons = 0.4 mol
(ii) Number of Faradays = 0.4
(iii) Amount of electricity = 38600 C

(C) (i) Number of moles of electrons = 6.6 mol
(ii) Number of Faradays = 6.6
(iii) Amount of electricity = 6.369 × 105 C

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(5) What mass of aluminium is produced at the cathode during the passage of 4 ampere current through Al2(SO4)3 solution for 100 minutes? Molar mass of aluminium is 27 g mol-1.
Solution :
Given : I = 4 A; t = 100 × 60 = 600 s
F = 96500 C mol-1, M = 27 g mol-1, WAl = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 35

(6) How long will it take to produce 2.415 g Ag metal from its salt solution by passing a current of 3 amperes? How many moles of electrons are required ? Molar mass of Ag is 107.9 gmol-1.
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 3A
Mass of Ag produced = 2.415 g
Molar mass of Ag = Atomic mass of Ag
= 107.9 gmol-1
Time = t = ? Number of moles of electrons = ?
Reduction half reaction at cathode :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 36
From the reaction,
∵ 1 mole of Ag requires 1 mole of electrons
∴ 0.02238 mole of Ag will require,
0.02238 mol electrons
∵ 1 mole of electrons carries a charge of 96500 C,
∴ 0.02238 mole of electrons will carry a charge, 0.02238 × 96500 = 2160 C
∴ Quantity of electricity passed = Q = 2160 C
Let I be the current strength and t be time of electrolysis. Then,
∵ Q = I × t
∴ t = \(\frac{Q}{I}=\frac{2160}{3}\) = 720 s = \(\frac{720}{60}\) min = 12 min.
Ans. Time of electrolysis = 12 min
Moles of electrons = 0.02238 mol

(7) What current strength in ampere will be required to produce 2.369 × 10-3 kg of Cu from CuSO4 solution in one hour? How many moles of electrons are required? Molar mass of copper is 63.5 gmol-1.
Solution :
Given : Mass of Cu produced = 2.369 × 10-3 kg
= 2.369 g
Time = t = 1 hr = 1 × 60 × 60 = 3600 s
Molar mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1
Strength of current = I = ?
1 Faraday = 96500 C = 1 mol electrons
1 mol Cu = Molar mass of Cu = 63.5 g
Reduction half reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 37
Moles of Cu deposited = \(\frac{2.369}{63.5}\) = 0.0373 mol Cu
From the reaction,
∵ 1 mol of Cu requires 2 mol electrons
∴ 0.0373 mol Cu will require 2 × 0.0373
= 0.0746 mol electrons
Now,
∵ 1 mol electrons = 96500 C
∴ 0.0746 mol electrons = 96500 × 0.0746 = 7199 C
∴ Quantity of electricity required = Q = 7199 C
∴ Q = I × t
∴ Current, I = \(\frac{Q}{t}=\frac{7199}{3600}\) = 2A
Ans. Current strength = I = 2A
Moles of electrons required = 0.0746 mol

(8) A current of 6 amperes is passed through AlCl3 solution for 15 minutes using Pt electrodes, when 0.504 g Al is produced. What is the molar mass of Al ?
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 6 A
Time = t = 15 min = 15 × 60 s = 900 s
Mass of Al produced = 0.504 g
Molar mass of Al = ?
Reduction half reaction,
\(\mathrm{Al}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+3 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Al}_{(\mathrm{aq})}\)
Quantity of electricity passed = Q = I × t
= 6 × 900 = 5400 C
Number of moles of electrons = \(\frac{Q}{F}=\frac{5400}{96500}\)
= 0.05596 mol
From half reaction,
∵ 3 moles of electrons deposit 1 mole Al
∴ 0.05596 moles of electrons will deposit,
\(\frac{0.05596}{3}\) = 0.01865 mol Al
Now,
∵ 0.01865 mole Al weighs 0.504 g
∴ 1 mole Al will weigh, \(\frac{0.504}{0.01865}\) = 27 g
Hence molar mass of Al is 27 g mol-1
Ans. Molar mass of Al = 27 g mo-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(9) How many moles of electrons are required for the reduction of (i) 3 moles of Zn2+ to Zn,
(ii) 1 mol of Cr3+ to Cr ?
How many Faradays of electricity will be required in each case ?
Solution :
(i) Given : For reduction of 3 mol Zn2+ to Zn;
Number of moles of electrons required = ?
Reduction half reaction,
Zn2+ + 2e → Zn
∵ 1 mole of Zn2+ requires 2 moles of electrons
∴ 3 moles of Zn2+ will require,
∵ 3 × 2 = 6 moles of electrons
∴ 1 mole of electrons = 1 F 6 moles of electrons = 6 F

(ii) Given : Reduction of 1 mol of Cr3+ to Cr :
Reduction half reaction,
Cr3+ + 3e → Cr
Hence 1 mole of Cr3+ will require 3 moles of electrons
∵ 1 mole of electrons = 1
∴ 3 moles of electrons = 3 F
Ans. (i) 6 mol electrons and 6 Faradays.
(ii) 3 mol electrons and 3 Faradays.

(10) In an electrolysis of AgNO3 solution, 0.7 g of Ag is deposited after a certain period of time. Calculate the quantity of electricity required in coulomb. (Molar mass of Ag is 107.9 g mol-1.)
Solution :
Given : Mass of Ag deposited = 0.7 g
Molar mass of Ag = 107.9 g mol-1
Quantity of electricity = Q = ?
Reduction half reaction is,
Ag+ + e → Ag
1 mole of Ag = 107.9 g Ag requires 1 mole of electrons
∴ 0.7 g Ag will require, \(\frac{0.7}{107.9}\) = 6.49 × 10-3 mole of electrons
∵ 1 mole of electrons carry 96500 C charge
∴ 6.49 × 10-3 mole of electrons will carry, 96500 × 6.49 × 10-3 = 626 C
Ans. Quantity of electricity required = 626 C,

(11) Calculate the amounts of Na and Chlorine gas produced during the electrolysis of fused NaCl by the passage of 1 ampere current for 25 minutes. Molar masses of Na and Chlorine gas are 23 g mol-1 and 71 g mol-1 respectively.
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 1 ampere
Time = t = 25 minutes = 25 × 60 s = 1500 s
Molar mass of Na = 23 g mol-1
Molar mass of Cl2 = 71 g mol-1
Mass of Na produced = ?, Mass of Cl2 produced = ?
Reactions during electrolysis :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 38
Quantity of electricity = Q = I × t = 1 × 1500
= 1500 C
Number of moles of electrons passed
= \(\frac{Q}{F}=\frac{1500}{96500}\) = 0.01554
From half reaction (i),
∵ 2 moles of electrons deposit 2 moles of Na
∴ 0.01554 moles of electrons will deposit, \(\frac{0.01554 \times 2}{2}\) = 0.01554 mol Na
Mass of Na = Moles of Na × Molar mass of Na
= 0.01554 × 23 = 0.3572 g Na
From half reaction (ii)
∵ 2 moles of electrons produce 1 mole Cl2
∴ 0.01554 moles of electrons will produce,
\(\frac{0.01554 \times 1}{2}\) = 7.77 × 10-3 × 71
∴ Mass of Cl2 gas = Moles of Cl2 × Molar mass
= 7.77 × 10-3 × 71
= 0.5518 g
Ans. Mass of Na deposited = 0.3572 g
Mass of Cl2 liberated = 0.5518 g

(12) Calculate the mass of Mg and the volume of Chlorine gas at NTP produced during the electrolysis of molten MgCl2 by the passage of 2 amperes of current for 1 hour. Molar masses of Mg and Cl2 are 24 g mol-1 and 71 g mol-1 respectively.
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 2A
Time = t = 1 hr = 1 × 60 × 60 s = 3600 s
Molar mass of Mg = 23 g mol-1
Molar mass of Cl2 = 71 g mol-1
Mass of Mg produced = ?
Volume of Cl2 at NTP produced = ?
Reactions during electrolysis :
(i) Mg2+ + 2e → Mg (Reduction half reaction)
(ii) 2Cl → Cl2(g) + 2e (Oxidation half reaction)
Quantity of electricity passed = Q = I × t
= 2 × 3600 = 7200 C
∵ 1 Faraday = 1 mol electrons
∴ Number of moles of electrons passed
= \(\frac{Q}{F}=\frac{7200}{96500}\) = 0.07461 mol
From half reaction (i),
∵ 2 moles of electrons deposit 1 mole of Mg
∴ 0.07461 moles of electrons will deposit, \(\frac{0.07461 \times 1}{2}\) = 0.037305 mol Mg
Mass of Mg = Moles of Mg × Molar mass of Mg
= 0.037305 × 24 = 0.8953 g Mg
From half reaction (ii),
∵ 2 moles of electrons produce 1 mol Cl2 gas
∴ 0.07461 moles of electrons will produce,
\(\frac{0.07461}{2}\) = 0.037305 mol Cl2
∵ 1 mole of Cl2 occupies 22.4 dm at NTP
∴ 0.037305 mole of Cl2 will occupy,
22.4 × 0.037305 = 0.8356 dm3
∴ Volume of Cl2 gas produced
= 0.8356 dm3
= 0.8356 × 103 cm3
= 835.6 cm3
Ans. Mass of Mg produced = 0.8953 g
Volume of Cl2(g) at NTP produced = 835.6 cm3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(13) How many Faradays would be required to plate out one mole of free metal from the following cations?
(a) Mg2+ (b) Cr3+ (c) Pb2+ (d) Cu+
Solution :
(a) Reduction half reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 39
∵ 1 mol electrons = 1 Faraday
Since to deposite 1 mol Mg, two moles of electrons are required,
∴ To plate one mole Mg, 2 Faradays of electricity will be required.

(b) Reduction half reaction :
\(\mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+3 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
∴ 1 mol Cr will require 3 mol electrons, hence 3 Faradays of electricity are required.

(c) Reduction half reaction :
\(\mathrm{Pb}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Pb}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
∴ 1 mol Pb will require 2 mol electrons, hence 2 Faradays are required.

(d) Reduction half reaction :
\(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
∴ 1 mol Cu will require 1 mol electrons hence one Faraday of electricity is required.

(14) In a certain electrolysis experiment, 0.561 g of Zn is deposited in one cell containing ZnSO4 solution. Calculate the mass of Cu deposited in another cell containing CuSO4 solution in series with ZnSO4 cell. Molar masses of Zn and Cu are 65.4 g mol-1 and 63.5 g mol-1 respectively.
Solution :
Given : Mass of Zn deposited = WZn = 0.561 g
Molar mass of Zn = 65.4 g mol-1
Molar mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1
Mass of Cu deposited = ?
Number of moles of Zn deposited
= \(\frac{\text { Mass of Zn deposited }}{\text { Molar mass of } \mathrm{Zn}}=\frac{0.561}{65.4}\)
= 8.578 × 10-3 mol Zn
Reactions of electronics:
(i) Zn++ + 2e → Zn (Half reaction in ZnSO4 cell)
(ii) Cu++ + 2e → Cu (Half reaction in CuSO4 cell)
Mole ratio of Zn
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 40
∴ Mass of Cu produced
= moles of Cu × molar mass of Cu
= 8.578 × 10-3 × 63.5
= 0.5447 g Cu
Ans. Mass of Cu deposited = 0.5447 g

(15) Two electrolytic cells, one containing AlCl3 solution and the other containing ZnSO4 solution are connected in series. The same quantity of electricity is passed through the cells. Calculate the amount of Zn deposited in ZnSO4 cell if 1.2 g of Al are deposited in AlCl3 cell. The molar masses of Al and Zn are 27 g mol-1 and 65.4 g mol-1 respectively.
Solution :
Given : Mass of Al deposited = 1.2 g
Molar mass of Al = 27 g mol-1
Molar mass of Zn = 65.4 g mol-1
Mass of zinc deposited = ωZn = ?
Reduction reactions in electrolysis :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 41
Number of moles of Al deposited = \(\frac{1.2}{27}\)
= 0.04444 mol.
From reaction (i),
∵ 1 mol Al requires 3 mol electrons
∴ 0.04444 mol Al requires 3 × 0.04444
= 0.1333 mol electrons
Hence 0.1333 moles of electrons are passed through both the cells in the series.
From reaction (ii),
∵ 2 moles of electrons deposit 1 mol Zn
∴ 0.1333 moles of electrons will deposit, \(\frac{0.1333}{2}\) = 0.06665 mol Zn
Mass of Zn deposited = 0.06665 × 65.4 = 4.36 g
Ans. Mass of Zn deposited = 4.36 g

(16) How much quantity of electricity in coulomb is required to deposit 1.346 × 10-3 kg of Ag in 3.5 minutes from AgNO3 solution ?
(Given : Molar mass of Ag is 108 × 10-3 kg mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Mass of Ag deposited = 1.346 × 10-3 kg
Molar mass of Ag = 108 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Time = t = 3.5 × 60 s
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 42
∵ 108 × 10-3 kg Ag requires 1 Faraday
1.346 × 10-3 kg Ag will require,
\(\frac{1.346 \times 10^{-3}}{108 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 0.01246 F
∵ If F = 96500 C
∴ 0.01246 F = 96500 × 0.01246 = 1202 C
Ans. Amount of electricity required = 1202 C

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(17) How many electrons will have a total charge of 1 Coulomb ?
Solution :
Given : Charge = 1 Coulomb
Number of electrons = ?
1 Faraday = 96500 C per mol electrons
∵ 96500 C electric charge is present on 1 mol electrons
∴ 1C charge is present on \(\frac{1}{96500}\) mol electrons
∴ Number of electrons = \(\frac{1}{96500}\) × 6.022 × 1023
= 6.24 × 1018 electrons
Ans. 1 Coulomb charge is present on 6.24 × 1018 electrons.

(18) A constant electric current flows for 4 hours through two electrolytic cells connected in series. One contains AgNO3solution and second contains CuCl2 solution. During this time, 4 grams of Ag are deposited in the first cell.
(a) How many grams of Cu are deposited in the second cell?
(b) What is the current flowing in amperes? (Atomic mass : Cu = 63.5 gmol-1; Ag = 107.9 gmol-1)
Solution :
Given : Mass of Ag deposited = 4 g
Molar mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1
Molar mass of Ag = 107.9 g mol-1
Time = t = 4 hrs = 4 × 60 × 60 = 14400 s
Mass of Cu deposited = WCu = ?
Current = I = ?
(a) Number of moles of Ag deposited
\(=\frac{\text { Mass of } \mathrm{Ag}}{\text { Molar mass of } \mathrm{Ag}}=\frac{4}{107.9}\)
= 0.03707 mol of Ag
Reactions of electrolysis :
(i) Ag+ + e → Ag (Half reaction in AgNO3 cell)
(ii) Cu2+ + 2e → Cu (Half reaction in CuCl2 cell)
Mole ratio of Ag
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 43
∴ Mass of Cu produced = 0.01854 × 63.5 = 1.177 g

(b) From the reaction,
∵ 1 mol Ag+ requires 1 mol electrons
∴ 0.03707 mol Ag will require 0.03707 mol electrons
∵ 1 mol electrons = 1 Faraday
∴ 0.03707 mol electrons = 0.03707 Faraday
∵ 1 Faraday = 96500 C
∴ 0.03707 Faraday
= 0.03707 × 96500 = 3577 C
∴ Quantity of electricity = Q = 3577 C.
Q = I × t
∴ I = \(\frac{\mathrm{Q}}{t}=\frac{3577}{14400}\) = 0.25 A
Ans. (a) Mass of Cu deposited = 1.177 g
(b) Current passed = 0.25 A

(19) The passage of 0.95 A current for 40 minutes deposited 0.7493 g Cu from CuSO4 solution. Calculate the molar mass of Cu.
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 0.95 A
Time = f = 40 min = 40 × 60 = 2400 s
Mass of Cu deposited = 0.7493 g
Molar mass of Cu = ?
Reduction half reaction,
\(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
Quantity of electricity = Q = I × t
= 0.95 × 2400
= 2280 C
Number of moles of electrons = \(\frac{2280}{96500}\)
= 0.02362 mol
∵ 2 mol electrons deposit 1 mol Cu
∴ 0.02362 mol electrons will deposit,
\(\frac{0.02362}{2}\) = 0.01181 mol Cu
Now,
0.01181 mol Cu weighs 0.7493 g
∴ 1 mol of Cu weigh, \(\frac{0.7493 \times 1}{0.01181}\) = 63.44 g
Hence molar mass of Cu 63.44 g mol-1
Ans. Molar mass of Cu = 63.44 g mol-1

(20) A quantity of 0.3 g of Cu was deposited from CuSO4 solution by passing 4A through the solution for 3.8 min. Calculate the value of Faraday constant. (Atomic mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Mass of Cu deposited = 0.3 g
Electric current = I = 4A
Time = t = 3.8 min = 3.8 × 60 = 228 s
Value of Faraday = ?
Quantity of electricity passed = Q = I × t
= 4 × 228 = 912 C
Reduction half reaction,
\(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
Number of moles of Cu deposited 0.3
= \(\frac{0.3}{63.5}\) = 0.004724 mol
From reduction half reaction,
1 mol Cu ≡ 2 mol electrons
∴ 0.004724 mol Cu = 2 × 0.004724
= 0.009448 mol electrons
Now
∵ 0.009448 mol electrons = 912 C
∴ 1 mol electrons = \(\frac{912}{0.009448}\) = 96528 C
∵ 1 Faraday charge is equal to charge on 1 mol electrons
∴ 1 Faraday = 96528 C
Ans. 1 Faraday = 96528 C

(21) In the electrolysis of water, one of the half reactions is
2H+(aq) + 2e → H2(g)
Calculate the volume of H2 gas collected at 25 °C and 1 atm pressure by passing 2A for 1h through the solution. R = 0.08205 L atm K-1 mol-1.
Solution :
Given : Reduction half reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 44
Temperature = T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
Pressure = P = 1 atm
Electric current = I = 2A
Time = t = 1 hr = 1 × 60 × 60 = 3600 s
R = 0.08205 L atm K-1 mol-1
Volume of H2 = VH2 = ?
Quantity of electricity passed = Q = I × t
= 2 × 3600 = 7200 C
Number of moles of electrons = \(\frac{Q}{F}\)
\(\frac{7200}{96500}\) = 0.0746 mol
From the reaction,
∵ 2 mol electrons produces 1 mol H2 gas
∴ 0.0746 mol electrons will produce \(\frac{0.0746}{2}\)
= 0.0373 mol H2.
pVH2 = nRT
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 45
= 0.912 L
Ans. Volume H2 gas = 0.912 L

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(22) Calculate the current strength and number of moles of electrons required to produce 2.369 × 10-3 kg of Cu from CuSO4 solution in one hour. (Molar mass of Cu is 63.5 g/mol)
Solution :
Given : Mass of Cu deposited = 2.369 × 10-3 kg;
t = 1 hr = 3600 s
Molar mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1
I = ?; Number of moles of electrons = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 46
∵ For 63.5 × 10-3 kg Cu Q = 2 × 96500 C
∴ For 2.369 × 10-3 kg Cu
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 47
Ans. I = 2A; Number of moles of electrons = 0.07461

Question 39.
Define : Galvanic cell or voltaic cell.
Answer:
Galvanic or voltaic cell : An electrochemical cell which is used to produce electrical energy by a spontaneous chemical reaction inside it is called an electrochemical cell. In this chemical energy is converted into electrical energy.
Example : Daniell cell.

Question 40.
Define : Half cell or Electrode.
Answer:
Half cell or Electrode : It is a metal electrode dipped in the electrolytic solution and capable of establishing oxidation reduction equilibrium with one of the ions of electrolyte solution and develop electrode potential. E.g. Zn in ZnSO4 solution.

Question 41.
What are the functions of a salt bridge ?
Answer:
The functions of a salt bridge are :

  1. It maintains the electrical contact between the two electrode solutions of the half cells.
  2. It prevents the mixing of electrode solutions.
  3. It maintains the electrical neutrality in both the solutions of two half cells by a flow of ions.
  4. It eliminates the liquid junction potential.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 42.
What are the conventions used to write galvanic cell or cell diagram (cell formula) ?
Answer:
A galvanic cell or voltaic cell is represented by a short notation or diagram which includes electrodes, aqueous solutions of ions and other species that may or may not involve in the cell reaction.
The following conventions are used to represent the cell or write the cell notation :
(1) The metal electrodes or the inert electrodes like platinum are placed at the ends of the cell formula.
(2) The galvanic cell consists of two half cells or electrodes. The electrode on the extreme left hand side is anode where oxidation takes place and it carries negative (-) charge while extreme right hand electrode is cathode where reduction takes place and it carries positive (+) charge.
(3) The gases or insoluble substances are placed in the interior positions adjacent to the metal electrode.
(4) A single vertical line is written between two phases like solid electrode and aqueous solution containing ions.
(5) A double vertical line is drawn between two solutions of two electrodes which indicates a salt bridge connecting them electrically.
(6) The concentration of solutions or ions or pressures of gases are written in brackets along with the substances in the cell.
(7) Different ions in the same solution are separated by a comma.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 48
(8) Examples of electrochemical cells :
(i) Daniel cell is represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 49

Question 43.
How to write cell reaction for a galvanic cell ?
Answer:
(1) A galvanic cell consists of two half cells or electrodes.
(2) Write oxidation half reaction for left hand electrode which is an anode and reduction half reaction for right hand electrode which is a cathode.
(3) Balance the number of electrons in the oxidation and reduction reactions.
(4) By adding both the reactions, overall cell reaction is obtained.
(5) For example, consider following cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 50

Question 44.
Why is anode in a galvanic cell considered to be negative?
Answer:

  1. According to IUPAC conventions, the electrode of a galvanic cell where de-electronation or oxidation takes place releasing electrons is called anode. Zn(s) → \(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) + 2e
  2. The electrons released due to oxidation reaction are accumulated on the metal electrode surface charging it negatively.

Hence anode in the galvanic cell is considered to be negative.

Question 45.
Why is cathode in a galvanic cell considered to be positive electrode?
Answer:
(1) According to IUPAC conventions, the electrode of the galvanic cell where electronation or reduction takes place is called cathode. In this, the electrons from the metal electrode are removed by cations required for their reduction.
\(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) + 2e → Cu(s)

(2) Since the electrons are lost, the metal electrode acquires a positive charge.
Hence cathode in the galvanic cell is considered to be positive.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 46.
Give the cell reactions in the case of the following cells :
(1)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 51
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 52

(2)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 53
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 54

(3) Pt, H2(g) | H+(aq) || Cl(aq) | Cl2(g), Pt
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 55

(4) Ni(s)|Ni2+ (1 M) || Al3+ (1 M) | Al(s)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 56

Question 47.
Represent the half cells or electrodes for the following reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 57
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 58

Question 48.
Formulate a cell from the following electrode reactions :
(a) Cl2(g) + 2e → 2Cl(aq)
(b) 2I(aq) → I2(s) + 2e
Answer:
(a) Cl2(g) + 2e → 2Cl(aq) (Reduction half reaction)
(b) 2I(aq) → I2(s) + 2e (Oxidation half reaction)
The galvanic cell is,
Pt |I2(s)|I(aq) (1 M) | Cl(aq) (1 M) | Cl2(g, PCl2)|Pt

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 49.
Formulate a cell for each of the following reactions :
(a) \(\mathrm{Sn}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) + 2AgCl(s) → \(\mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{4+}\) + 2Ag(s) + \(2 \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
(b) Mg(s) + Br2(l) → \(\mathrm{Mg}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{Br}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
Answer:
(a) \(\mathrm{Sn}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) + 2AgCl(s) → \(\mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{4+}\) + 2Ag(s) + \(2 \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
The overall reaction takes place into two steps :
(i) \(\mathrm{Sn}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) → Sn4+ + 2e (Oxidation half reaction)
(ii) 2AgCl(s) + 2e → 2Ag(s) + \(2 \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\) (Reduction half reaction)
Hence the cell is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 59

(b) Mg(s) + Br2(l) → \(\mathrm{Mg}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{Br}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
The overall reaction takes place into two steps :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 60

Question 50.
What is electrode potential?
Answer:
(1) Electrode potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential established due to electrode half reaction between metal electrode and the solution around it at equilibrium at constant temperature.

(2) Explanation : When a metal is immersed into a solution containing its ions there arises oxidation (or reduction) reaction involving a release of electrons (or gain of electrons). This gives rise to the formation of an electrical double layer, consisting of a charged metal surface and an ionic layer. The potential across this double layer i.e., between metal and the solution is an electrode potential.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 61
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 62

Question 51.
Define :
(1) Oxidation potential,
(2) Reduction potential.
Answer:
(1) Oxidation potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential between metal electrode and the solution around it at equilibrium developed due to oxidation reaction at anode and at constant temperature.

(2) Reduction potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential between metal electrode and the solution around it at equilibrium developed due to reduction reaction at cathode and at constant temperature.

Question 52.
What is a standard state of a substance ?
Answer:
The standard state of a substance is that state in which the substance has unit activity or concentration at 25 °C. i.e., For solution having concentration 1 molar, gas at 1 atm, pure liquids or solids are said to be in their standard states.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 53.
Define the following terms :
(1) Standard electrode potential
(2) Standard oxidation potential
(3) Standard reduction potential.
Answer:
(1) Standard electrode potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential between metal electrode and the solution around it equilibrium when all the substances involved in the electrode reaction are in their standard states of unit activity or concentration at constant temperature.

(2) Standard oxidation potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential between metal electrode and the solution around it at equilibrium due to oxidation reaction, when all the substances involved in the oxidation reaction are in their standard states of unit activity or concentration at constant temperature.

(3) Standard reduction potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential between metal electrode and the solution around it at equilibrium due to reduction reaction, when all the substances involved in the reduction reaction are in their standard states of unit activity or concentration at constant temperature.

Question 54.
What is the standard potential of an electrode according to IUPAC convention?
Answer:
Standard reduction potential : According to IUPAC convention, the standard potential of an electrode due to reduction reaction at 298 K is taken as the standard reduction potential. In this active mass of the substance has unit value.

Question 55.
What is cell potential or emf of a cell ?
Answer:
Cell potential or emf of a cell : It is defined as the potential difference between two electrodes, responsible for an external flow of electrons from the left hand electrode at higher potential (anode), to the right hand electrode at lower potential (cathode), when connected to form an electrochemical or galvanic cell.

Since there is oxidation reaction at left hand electrode (LHE) or anode and reduction reaction at right hand electrode (RHE) or cathode, emf of the galvanic, Ecell, is given by
Ecell = (Eoxi)anode + (Ered)cathode
Since by IUPAC conventions, generally reduction potentials are used, hence, for the given cell,
(∵ Eoxi = -Ered)
∴ Ecell = (Ered)cathode – (Ered)anode
Similarly, standard emf of the cell, E0cell is given by
E0cell = (E0red)cathode – (E0red)anode

Question 56.
Explain dependence of cell potential on concentration.
OR
Explain Nernst equation for cell potential.
Answer:
Consider following general reaction taking place in the galvanic cell.
aA + bB → cC + dD
The cell voltage is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 63
where,
T → temperature
R → Gas constant
F → Faraday
n → Number of electrons in the redox cell reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 64
This is Nernst equation for cell potential. It is used to calculate cell potential and electrode potentials.

Question 57.
State (or write) Nernst equation for the electrode potential and explain the terms involved.
Answer:
The Nernst equation for the single electrode reduction potential for a given ionic concentration in the solution in the case, \(M_{(a q)}^{n+}\) + ne → M(s) is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 65

\(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{M}^{\mathrm{n}+} / \mathrm{M}}\) is the single electrode potential,
\(E_{\mathrm{M}^{n+} / \mathrm{M}}^{0}\) is the standard reduction electrode potential,
R is the gas constant = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
T is the absolute temperature,
n is the number of electrons involved in the reaction,
F is Faraday (96500 C)
[Mn+] is the molar concentration of ions.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 58.
Obtain Nernst equation for the following cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 66
Answer:
Electrode reactions and a cell reaction for the given cell are,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 67
Here, n = 2
By Nernst equation, the cell potential is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 68

Question 59.
Obtain Nernst equation for the electrode potential for the electrode, \(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \mid \mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}\).
Answer:
For the electrode, \(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \mid \mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}\),
the reduction reaction is,
\(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}\) ∴ n = 2
By Nernst equation, the reduction electrode potential is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 69
where E0zn2+/zn is the standard electrode potential of zinc electrode.

Question 60.
Obtain a relation between cell potential and Gibbs energy for the cell reaction.
Answer:
Consider a galvanic cell which involves n number of electrons in the overall cell reaction. Since one mole of electrons involve the electric charge equal to one Faraday (F) which is equal to 96500 C, the total charge involved in the reaction is,
Electric charge = n × F
If Ecell is the cell potential, then Electrical work = n × F × Ecell
According to thermodynamics, electric work is equal to decrease in Gibbs energy, -ΔG, we can write,
Electric work = n × F × Ecell = -ΔG
∴ ΔG = -nFEcell
Under standard conditions, we can write
∴ ΔG0 = -nF\(E_{\text {cell }}^{0}\)
where \(E_{\text {cell }}^{0}\) is the standard cell potential and ΔG0 is the standard Gibbs free energy change.

Question 61.
Write Nernst Equation for the following reactions :
(a) Cr(s) + 3Fe3+(aq) → Cr3+(aq) + 3Fe2+(aq)
(b) Al3+(aq) + 3e → Al(s)
Answer:
(a) Cr(s) + 3Fe3+(aq) → Cr3+(aq) + 3Fe2+(aq)
The cell formulation is,
Cr(s)|Cr3+(aq) || Fe3+(aq), Fe2+(aq)| Pt
Hence cell potential is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 70

Question 62.
A single electrode potential can’t be measured but the cell potential can be measured. Explain.
Answer:
(1)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 71
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 72
According to Nemst theory, electrode potential is the potential difference between the metal and ionic layer around it at equilibrium, i.e. the potential across the electric double layer.

(2) For measuring the single electrode potential, one part of the double layer, that is metallic layer can be connected to the potentiometer but not the ionic layer. Hence, single electrode potential can’t be measured experimentally.

(3) When an electrochemical cell is developed by combining two half cells or electrodes, they can be connected to the potentiometer and the potential difference or cell potential can be measured.
Ecell = E2 – E1
where E1 and E2 are reduction potentials of two electrodes.

(4) If one of the electrode potentials is known or arbitrarily assumed and Ecell is measured by potentiometer, then potential of another electrode can be obtained. Therefore it is necessary to choose a reference electrode with arbitrarily fixed potential and measure the potentials of other electrodes.

(5) Therefore Standard Hydrogen Electrode (SHE) is selected assuming arbitrary potential 0.0 volt. Hence potentials of all other electrodes are referred to as hydrogen scale potentials.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 63.
Describe the construction and working of the standard hydrogen electrode (S.H.E.). Give its advantages and disadvantages.
OR
What is the standard hydrogen electrode
OR
Primary reference electrode? Write the construction and working of it.
Answer:
A single electrode potential cannot be measured, but the cell potential can be measured experimentally. Hence, it is necessary to have a reference electrode. S.H.E. is a primary reference electrode.
(1) Construction :
(1) The standard hydrogen electrode (S.H.E.) consists of a glass tube at the end of which a piece of platinised platinum foil is attached as shown in Fig. 5.14. Around this plate there is an outer jacket of glass which has a side inlet through which pure and dry hydrogen gas is bubbled at one atmosphere pressure. The inner tube is filled with a little mercury and a copper wire is dipped into it. This provides an electrical contact with the platinum foil. The outer jacket ends into a broad opening.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 73
(2) The whole assembly is kept immersed in a solution containing hydrogen ions (H+) of unit activity.
(3) This electrode is arbitrarily assigned zero potential.
(4) The platinised platinum foil is used to provide an electrical contact for the electrode. This permits rapid establishment of the equilibrium between the hydrogen gas adsorbed by the metal and the hydrogen ions in solution.

(2) Representation of S.H.E. :
H+ (1 M) | H2 (g, 1 atm) | Pt

(3) Working :
Reduction : H+(aq) + e ⇌ \(\frac {1}{2}\)H2(g) E0 = 0.00 V
H2 gas in contact with H+(aq) ions attains an equilibrium establishing a potential.

(4) Applications of SHE : A reversible galvanic cell with the experimental (indicator) electrode, Zn2+ (1M) | Zn(s) and SHE can be developed as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 74
Thus the potential can be directly obtained.

(5) Disadvantages (Drawbacks or Difficulties) :

  • It is difficult to construct and handle SHE.
  • Pure and dry H2 gas cannot be obtained.
  • Pressure of H2 gas cannot be maintained exactly at 1 atmosphere.
  • The active mass or concentration of H+ from HCl cannot be maintained exactly unity.

Question 64.
How is the potential of hydrogen electrode obtained?
Answer:
Hydrogen gas electrode is represented as,
H+(aq) | H2 (g, PH2) | Pt
Electrode reduction reaction is,
2H+(aq) + 2e → H2(g)
By Nernst equation, the reduction potential is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 75

If H2 gas is passed at 1 atm, then PH2 = 1 atm
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 76

Question 65.
Draw the diagram for the determination of standard electrode potential with SHE.
Answer:
Consider the following cell :
Zn | Zn2+(aq) || HCl | H2(g, 1atm) | Pt
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 77

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 66.
A voltaic cell consisting of Fe2+(aq)|Fe(s) and Bi3+(aq) | Bi(s) electrodes is constructed. When the circuit is closed, mass of Fe electrode decreases and that of Bi electrode increases.
(a) Write cell formula, (b) Which electrode is cathode and which electrode is anode ? (c) Write electrode reactions and overall cell reaction.
Answer:
(a) Since the mass of Fe electrode decreases, it undergoes oxidation and it is an anode or an oxidation electrode while as the mass of Bi electrode increases, there is a reduction of Bi3+ to Bi and it is cathode or a reduction electrode. Hence the cell formula is,
\(\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{s})}\left|\mathrm{Fe}_{\mathrm{(aq})}^{2+}(1 \mathrm{M}) \| \mathrm{Bi}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}(1 \mathrm{M})\right| \mathrm{Bi}\)

(b) The left hand electrode is an anode and right hand electrode is a cathode.

(c) Reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 78

Solved Examples 5.7 – 5.9

Question 67.
Solve the following :

(1) Write the reaction and calculate the potential of the half cell,
\(\mathbf{Z n}_{(\mathbf{a q})}^{2+}\) (0.2M) | Zn. (E0Zn2+/Zn = – 0.76 V).
Solution :
Given : E0Zn2+/Zn = -0.76 V
Concentration of Zn2+ = [Zn2+] = 0.2 M
EZn2+/Zn = ?
Reduction reaction for the half cell,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 79
= – 0.76 + 0.0296 (-0.6990)
= -0.76 – 0.02069
= -0.78069 V
Ans. E0Zn2+/Zn = -0.78069 V

(2) Write a reaction and calculate the potential of the electrode, \(\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\) (0.05 M) | Cl2 (g, 1 atm) | Pt E0Cl2/Cl = 1.36 V.
Solution :
Given : Reduction reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 80
= 1.36 – 0.0592 (- 2 + 0.6990)
= 1.36 – 0.0592 (-1.3010)
= 1.36 + 0.077
= 1.437 V
Ans. Potential of the electrode = 1.437 V

(3) Calculate the potential of the electrode,
pH = 4.5 | H2 (g, 1 atm) |Pt.
Solution :
Given : pH = 4.5
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 81
∴ EH+/H2 = -0.0592 pH
= -0.0592 × 4.5
= -0.2664 V
Ans. EH+/H2 = -0.2664 V

(4) If the standard cell potential of Daniell cell is 1.1 V, calculate standard free energy change for the cell reaction.
Solution :
Given : Daniell cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 82
= – 2 × 96500 × 1.1
= -212300 J
= -212.3 kJ
Ans. Standard free energy change = ΔG0
= -212.3 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(5) Write balanced equations for the half reactions and calculate the reduction potentials at 25 °C for the following half cells :
(a) Cl (1.2 M) | Cl2(g, 3.6 atm) E0 = 1.36 V
(b) Fe2+ (2 M) | Fe(s) E0 = – 0.44 V
Solution :
(a) Given : Half cell,
\(\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\) (1.2 M) | Cl2(g, 3.6 atm)|Pt
E0Cl2/Cl = 1.36 V
The reduction reaction:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 83
= 1.36 – 0.0296 (-0.3979)
= 1.36 + 0.01178
= 1.37178
≅ 1.372 V

(b) Given: Half cell, \(\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) (2M) |Fe(s)
E0 Fe2+/Fe = -0.44 V
The reduction reaction:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 84
= – 0.44 – 0.0296 × (- 0.3010)
= -0.44 + 0.00891
= -0.43109 V
Ans. (a) Half reaction : Cl2(g) + 2e → \(2 \mathrm{Cl}_{\text {(aq) }}^{-}\)
ECell = 1.372 V
(b) \(\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) + 2e → Fe(s)
ECell = -0.43109 V.

(6) Using Nernst equation, calculate the potentials for the following half reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 85
Solution :
(a) Given :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 86
= 0.535 – 0.0296 [ – 4 + 0.9542]
= 0.535 – 0.0296 [-3.0458]
= 0.535 + 0.0902
= 0.6252 V
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 87
Ans. (a) Potential of the half cell = 0.6252 V
(b) Potential of the half cell = 0.7118 V.

(7) Write the cell reaction and calculate the standard potential of the cell,
Ni(s) | Ni2+(1 M) || Cl(1M) | Cl2 (g, 1 atm) | Pt
E0Cl2 = 1.36 V and E0Ni = – 0.25 V.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 88
= 1.36 – (-0.25)
= 1.36+ 0.25 = 1.61V
Ans. Cell reaction : Ni(s) + Cl2(g) → \(\mathrm{Ni}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
E0Cell = 1.61 V

(8) Write the cell reaction and calculate cell potential and standard free energy change for a cell reaction in the following cell :
\(\mathbf{A l}_{(\mathrm{s})}\left|\mathbf{A l}_{(\mathbf{a q})}^{3+}(1 \mathbf{M}) \| \mathbf{C d}_{(\mathbf{a q})}^{2+}(1 \mathrm{M})\right| \mathbf{C} d\)
E0Al3+/Al = -1-66 V and E0cd2+/cd = -0.403 V
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 89
Since concentrations of ions are 1 M each, it is a standard cell, hence the cell potential is E0Cell.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 90
Standard free energy change ΔG0 is given by,
ΔG0= – nFE0Cell
= -6 × 96500 × 1.257
= – 727800 J
= -727.8 kJ
Ans. Cell reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 91

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(9) Write the cell reaction and calculate cell potential and the standard free energy change for the cell reaction in the following cell :
Pt | H2 (g, 1 atm) | \(\mathbf{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\)(1M) || \(\mathrm{Cu}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) (1M) | Cu(s).
Mention anode and cathode and direction of flow of electrons in the external circuit. (E0Cu2+/Cu = 0.337 V)
Solution :
Given : E0Cu2+/Cu = 0.337 V;
E0H+/H2 = E0SHE = 0.0V
Pt | H2(g, 1 atm) | \(\mathbf{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) (1M) || \(\mathrm{Cu}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) (1M) | Cu(s)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 92
Anode : Hydrogen gas electrode (LHE)
Cathode : Copper electrode (RHE)
E0Cell = E0Cu2+/Cu – E0H+/H2
= 0.337 – (0.0)
= 0.337 V
ΔG0 = – nFE0 = -2 × 96500 × 0.337
= – 65040J
= – 65.04 kJ
Electrons in the external circuit will flow from (LHE) hydrogen gas electrode to (RHE) copper electrode.
Ans. Cell reaction : H2(g) + \(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) → 2 \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) + Cu(s)
Cell potential = E0Cell = 0.337 V
ΔG0 = -65.04 kJ

(10) Calculate the reduction potential of the electrode, Zn2+ (0.02 M) | Zn(s). E0Zn++/Zn = – 0.76 V.
Solution :
Given :E0red = E0Zn++/Zn = -0.76 V;
Concentration of \(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) = [Zn2+] = 0.02 M
The reduction reaction for the electrode,
\(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) +2e → Zn(s); ∴ n = 2
The reduction potential is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 93
= – 0.76 + 0.0296 (- 1.6990)
= -0.76 – 0.0296 × 1.6990
= -0.76 – 0.0503
= -0.8103 V
Ans. Ered = EZn2+/Zn = -0.8103 V

(11) Calculate the potential of the following cell at 25 °C :
Zn | Zn2+(0.6 M) ||H+(1.2 M) | H2 (g, 1 atm) | Pt
E°Zn2+/Zn = -0.763 V
Solution :
Given : E0Zn2+/Zn = -0.763 V;
Concentrations : [Zn2+] = 0.6 M; [H+] = 1.2 M
[H2]g = 1 atm
Cell potential = Ecell = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 94
= 0.763 – 0.0296 × (- 0.3801)
= 0.763 + 0.01125
= 0.77425 V
Ans. Cell potential = E0cell = 0.77425 V

(12) The following redox reaction occurs in a galvanic cell.
2Al(s) + 3Fe2+(1 M) → 2Al3+(1 M)+ 3Fe(s)
(a) Write the cell notation.
(b) Identify anode and cathode
(c) Calculate E0cell if E0anode = – 1.66 V and E0cathode = – 0 44 V
(d) Calculate ΔG0 for the reaction.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 95
(a) In the cell reaction, Al is oxidised from zero to 3+ while Fe3+ is reduced from 3+ to zero. Hence the cell notation is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 96

(b) Anode : Al electrode at LHE
Cathode : Fe electrode at RHE

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 97

(d) The standard free energy change ΔG0 is given by,
ΔG0 = – nFE0cell
= – 6 × 96500 × 1.22
= – 70640 J
= – 706.4 kJ
Ans. (a) Cell notation :
\(\mathrm{Al}_{(\mathrm{s})}\left|\mathrm{Al}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}(1 \mathrm{M}) \| \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}(1 \mathrm{M})\right| \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
(b) Anode : Al; Cathode : Fe
(c) E0cell = 1.22 V
(d) ΔG0 = – 706.4 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(13) Construct a cell consisting of \(\mathbf{N i}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) | Ni(s) half cell and H+ | H2(g) | Pt half cell.
(a) Write the cell reaction
(b) Calculate emf of the cell if [Ni2+] = 0.1M,
PH2 = 1 atm [H+] = 0.05 M and
E0Ni = – 0.257 V.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 98
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 99
= 0.257 – 0.0296 × 1.6020
= 0.257 – 0.04742
= 0.20958
≅ 0.2096 V
Ans.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 100

(14) Calculate the cell potential of the following cell at 25°C,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 101
Standard reduction potentials (SRP) of Zn and Cu are -0.76 V and 0.334 V respectively.
Solution:
Given:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 102

(15) Set up the cell consisting of \(\mathbf{H}_{\text {(aq) }}^{+} \mid \mathbf{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\) and \(\mathbf{P b}_{(\mathbf{a q})}^{2+}\) | Pb(s) electrodes. Calculate the emf at 25 °C of the cell if [Pb2+] = 0.1 M,
[H+] = 0.5 M and hydrogen gas is at 2 atm pressure. E0pb2+/pb = – 0.126 V.
Solution :
Given : Half cells :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 103
Concentrations : [H+] = 0.5 M; [Pb2+] = 0.1M;
[H2]g = PH2 = 2 atm; E0H+/H2 = ESHE = 0.0 V;
E0pb2+/pb = -0.126 V
Since E0pb2+/pb (reduction) < E0H+/H2 the Pb electrode is anode and hydrogen gas electrode is cathode.
The cell formulation :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 104
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 105
= 0.126 – 0.0296 (- 0.0969)
= 0.126 + 0.002868
= 0.128868
≅ 0.1289 V
Ans. Ecell = 0.1289 V

(16) Consider a galvanic cell that uses the half reactions,
2H+(aq) + 2e → H(g)
Mg2+(aq) + 2e → Mg(s)
Write balanced equation for the cell reaction. Calculate E0cell, Ecell and ΔG0 if concentrations are 1M each and PH2 = 10 atm
E0Mg2+/Mg = -2.37 V.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 106
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 107
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 108
The standard free energy change ΔG0 is given by
ΔG0= – nFE0cell
= – 2 × 96500 × 2.37
= -457400 J
= – 457.4 kJ
Ans. E0cell = 2.37 V; Ecell = 2.3404 V;
ΔG0 = -457.4 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(17) Calculate Ecell and ΔG for the following at 28 °C : Mg(s) + Sn2+ (0.04M) → Mg2+ (0.06M) + Sn(s)
E0cell = 2.23 V
Is the reaction spontaneous ?
Solution:
Given:
Mg(s) + Sn2+ (0.04 M) → Mg2+ (0.06 M) + Sn
[Sn2+] = 0.4 M
[Mg2+] = 0.06 M
E0cell = 2.23V
Ecell = ?
ΔG = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 109
2.23 – 0.0296 × 0.1761
= 2.23 – 0.005213
= 2.224V
ΔG = – nFE
= – 2 × 96500 × 2.224
= – 4.292 × 105 J
= -429.2 kJ
Since ΔG is negative, the electrochemical reaction is spontaneous.

(18) The standard potentials for Sn2+/Sn and Fe2+/Fe half reactions are -0.136 V and -0.440 V respectively. At what relative concentrations of Sn2+ and Fe2+ will these have the same reduction potentials?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 110
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 111
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 112
Hence when relative concentrations of Sn2+ and Fe2+ i.e., [Sn2+]/[Fe2+] = 5.37 × 10-11, both the electrodes will have same potential.

(19) Write the cell reaction and calculate the emf of the cell at 25 °C.
Cr(s) | Cr3+(0.0065 M) || Co2+(0.012 M) | Co(s)
E0Co = – 0.280 V, E0Cr = – 0.74 V
What is ΔG for the cell reaction ?
Solution :
Given :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 113
By Nernst equation,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 114
Ecell = 0.4463 V
ΔG = -nFECell
= – 6 × 96500 × 0.4463
= – 258407 J
= – 258.4 kJ
Ans. Cell reaction :
\(2 \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{s})}+3 \mathrm{Co}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+3 \mathrm{Co}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
ECell = 0.4463 V; ΔG = – 258.4 kJ.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(20) Calculate E0Cell, ΔG0 and equilibrium constant for the reaction 2Cu+ → Cu2+ + Cu.
E0Cu+/Cu = 0.52 V and E0Cu2+,Cu+ = 0.16 V.
Solution :
Given : Cell reaction : 2Cu+(aq) → Cu2+(aq) +Cu(s)
E0Cu+/Cu = 0.52V; E0Cu2+,Cu+ = 0.16 V
1F = 96500 C
E0Cell = ? ΔG0 = ? K=?
(i) The formulation of the cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 115
(ii) ΔG0 = – nFE0Cell = – 1 × 96500 × 0.36
= – 34740 J
= – 34.74 kJ
(iii) Electrochemical redox reactions are considered as reversible reactions. If K is the equilibrium constant for the electrochemical redox reaction, then
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 116
Ans. E0Cell = 0.36 V; ΔG0 = – 34.74 kJ; Equilibrium constant = K= 1.2 × 106 mol-1 dm3.

(21) Calculate the equilibrium constant for the redox reaction at 25 °C.
Sr(s) + Mg2+ → Sr2+(aq) + Mg(s),
that occurs in a galvanic cell. Write the cell formula.
E0Mg = – 2.37 V and E0Sr = – 2.89 V.
Solution :
Given :
Cell reaction : Sr(s) + Mg2+ → Sr2+(aq) + Mg(s)
E0 Mg2+/Mg = -2.37 V; E0 Sr2+/Sr = -2.89 V
Equilibrium constant K = ?
The formation of the cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 117
Ans. Equilibrium constant = K = 3.698 × 1017

(22) The equilibrium constant for the following reaction at 25 °C is 2.9 × 109. Calculate standard voltage of the cell.
Cl2(g) + 2Br(aq) ⇌ Br2(l) + 2Cl(aq)
Solution :
Given : Cell reaction : Cl2(g) + 2Br(aq) ⇌ Br2(l) + 2Cl(aq)
Equilibrium constant = K = 2.9 × 109 atm-1
Standard voltage of the cell = E0Cell = ?
The formulation of the cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 118

(23) Write the cell representation and calculate equilibrium constant for the following redox reaction :
Ni(s) + 2 Ag+(aq) (1M) → Ni2+(aq) (1 M) + 2Ag(s)
at 25 °C
E0Ni = – 0.25 V and E0Ag = 0.799 V
Solution :
Given : E0Ni2+/Ni = – 0.25 V; E0Ag+/Ag = 0.799 V
Equilibrium constant = K = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 119

(24) Calculate the cell potential of the following galvanic cell :
Pt|H2 (g, 1 atm)|\(\mathbf{H}_{\text {(aq) }}^{+} \mathbf{p H}\) = 3.51||Calomel electrode
Ecal = 0.242 V at 25 °C.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 120
= -0.0592 × pH
= -0.0592 × 3.5
= -0.2072 V
∴ Ecell = Ecal – EH+/H2
= 0.242 – (-0.2072)
= 0.242 + 0.2072
= 0.4492 V
Ans. Ecell = 0.4492 V

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 68.
How are the voltaic cells classified ?
Answer:
The voltaic cells are classified as primary and secondary voltaic cells.
(1) Primary voltaic cells : These are the voltaic cells in which the electrical energy or cell potentials are developed within the cells due to oxidation and reduction reactions at the reversible electrodes.

The chemicals and electrode materials consumed during the discharging can be regenerated by passing the current in opposite direction from the external source of electricity i.e., these cells can be recharged. For example, Daniell cell. There are the examples where the primary cells can’t be recharged. E.g. Dry cell.

(2) Secondary voltaic cells :
(i) These are the voltaic cells in which the electrical energy or cell potentials are not developed within the cell but electrical energy can be stored or cell potentials can be regenerated by passing electricity from the external source of electricity. Since the electrical energy obtained is second hand, these cells are called secondary cells or accumulators or storage cells.

(ii) These cells can be recharged by passing electric current in opposite direction from the external source of higher emf. Therefore the secondary cells are reversible cells. For example, lead accumulator (lead storage battery).

Question 69.
Explain the construction and working of a dry cell (or Leclanche’s cell).
OR
Write a note on dry cell.
Answer:
(A) Principle :

  • Leclanche’s cell is a primary voltaic cell.
  • It doesn’t contain mobile liquid electrolyte but contains moist viscose aqeuous paste of the electrolytes.
  • It is an irreversible voltaic cell which can’t be recharged.

(B) Construction :
(i) It consists of a small zinc vessel which serves as an anode (negative electrode).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 121
(ii) The zinc vessel contains a porous paper bag containing an inert graphite (C) electrode which serves as cathode, immersed in a paste of MnO2 and carbon black. This paper bag divides the dry cell into two compartments, namely anode and cathode compartments.
(iii) The rest of the cell is filled with a moist paste of NH4Cl and ZnCl2 which acts as an electrolyte for zinc anode.
(iv) The graphite rod is fitted with a metal cap and the cell is sealed to prevent the drying of moist paste by evaporation.

(C) The dry cell can be represented as,
Zn|ZnCl2(aq), NH2Cl(aq), MnO2(s)|C+.

(D) Reactions in the dry cell :
(i) Oxidation at zinc anode :
Zn(s) → \(\mathrm{Zn}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) + 2e (oxidation half reaction)
(ii) Reduction at graphite (C) cathode :
The electrons released in the oxidation reaction at anode, flow to cathode through external circuit.
Hydrogen in NH4 ion is reduced to molecular hydrogen which reduces MnO2 to Mn2O3.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 122
(iii) Zn2+ react with NH3 and form a complex.
\(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+4 \mathrm{NH}_{3(\text { aq) }} \longrightarrow\left[\mathrm{Zn}\left(\mathrm{NH}_{3}\right)_{4}\right]^{2+}{ }_{(\mathrm{aq})}\)
Since Zn2+ ions are removed, the overall cell reaction can’t be reversed.

(E) Uses of dry cell :

  • Dry cell is used as a source of electric power in radios, flashlights, torches, clocks, etc.
  • Since they are available in small size and portable, they can be used conveniently.

Question 70.
Describe the construction and working of lead accumulator (lead storage cell).
OR
Draw a neat labelled diagram of the lead accumulator. Explain the reactions involved in discharging and charging this cell. Represent this cell using cell conventions.
Answer:
(A) Principle :
(1) The lead accumulator is a secondary electrochemical cell since electrical energy and emf are not developed within the cell but it is previously stored by passing an electric current. Hence it is also called lead accumulator or lead storage battery.
(2) It is reversible since the electrochemical reaction can be reversed by passing an electric current in opposite direction and consumed reactants can be regenerated.
(3) Hence battery can be charged after it is discharged.

(B) Construction : In a lead accumulator, the negative terminal (anode) is made up of lead sheets packed with spongy lead, while the positive terminal (cathode) is made up of lead grids packed with PbO2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 123
Sulphuric acid of about 38% strength (%w/w) or specific gravity 1.28 or 4.963 molar is the electrolyte in which the lead sheets and lead grids are dipped. The positive terminal and negative terminal are alternatively arranged in the electrolyte and are separately interconnected.

(C) Representation of lead accumulator :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 124

(D) Working of a lead accumulator :
(1) Discharging : When the electric current is withdrawn from lead accumulator, the following reactions take place :
Oxidation at the – ve electrode or anode :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 125

(2) Net cell reaction :
(i) Thus, the overall cell reaction during discharging is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 126
OR
Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq) → 2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(l)
The cell potential or emf of the cell depends upon the concentration of sulphuric acid. During the operation, the acid is consumed and its concentration decreases and specific gravity decreases from 1.28 to 1.17. As a result, the emf of the cell decreases. The emf of a fully charged cell is about 2.0 V.

(ii) Recharging of the cell : When the discharged battery is connected to external electric source and a higher external potential is applied the cell reaction gets reversed generating H2SO4.
Reduction at the – ve electrode or cathode :
PbSO4(s) + 2e → Pb(s) + \(\mathrm{SO}_{4(a q)}^{2-}\)
Oxidation at the + ve electrode or anode :
PbSO4(s) + 2H2(l)O → PbO2(s) + 4H+(aq) + \(\mathrm{SO}_{4(a q)}^{2-}\) + 2e
The net reaction during charging is
2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(l) → Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 4H+(aq) + 2\(\mathrm{SO}_{4(a q)}^{2-}\)
OR
2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O → Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq)
The emf of the accumulator depends only on the concentration of H2SO4.

(E) Applications :

  1. It is used as a source of d.c. electric supply.
  2. It is used in automobile in ignition circuits and lighting the head lights by connecting 6 batteries giving 12V potential.
  3. It is also used in invertors.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 71.
In lead accumulator which electrode is coated with PbO2 ? Anode or cathode ?
Answer:
In lead accumulator, cathode is coated with PbO2.

Question 72.
Write net charging and discharging reactions for lead storage battery.
Answer:
For lead storage battery :
Net charging reaction :
2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(l) → Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq)
Net discharging reaction :
Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq) → 2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(l)

Question 73.
Write a note on Nickel-Cadmium (NICAD) cell.
Answer:
(1) Nickel-Cadminum (NICAD) cell is a secondary dry cell.
(2) It is rechargable, hence it is a reversible cell.
(3) It consists of a cadmium electrode in contact with an alkali and acts as anode while nickel (IV) oxide, NiO2 in contact with an alkali acts as cathode. The alkali used is moist paste of KOH.
(4) Reactions in the cell :
(i) Oxidation at cadmium anode :
Cd(s) + 2OH(aq) → Cd(OH)2(s) + 2e
(ii) Reduction at Ni02(s) cathode :
NiO2(s) + 2H2O(l) + 2e → Ni(OH)2(s) + 2OH(aq)
The overall cell reaction is the combination of above two reactions.
Cd(s) + NiO2(s) + 2H2O(l) → Cd(OH)2(s) + Ni(OH)2(s)
(5) Since the net cell reaction doesn’t involve any electrolytes but solids, the voltage is independent of the concentration of alkali electrolyte.
(6) The cell potential is about 1.4 V.
(7) This cell has longer life than other dry cells.

Question 74.
Write a note on mercury battery.
Answer:
(1) Mercury battery is a rechargeable secondary dry cell.
(2) It consists of zinc anode amalgamated with mercury.
(3) The cathode consists of a paste of Hg and carbon.
(4) The electrolyte is a paste of KOH and ZnO in a strong alkaline medium.
(5) Reactions:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 127
(6) The overall reaction involves only solid substances and electrolytic composition remains unchanged.
(7) Therefore mercury battery provides constant voltage (1.35 V) over a long period.
(8) It is superior to Leclanche’s cell in durability.
(9) Uses : It is used in hearing aids, electric watches, pacemakers, etc.

Question 75.
Describe the construction and working of hydrogen-oxygen (H2-O2) fuel cell.
Answer:
(A) Principle :
(i) The functioning of the fuel cell is based on the combustion reaction like,
2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(g) is exothermic redox reaction and hence it can be used to produce electricity.
(ii) The reactants of this fuel cell can be continuously supplied from outside, hence this can be used to supply electrical energy for a very long period.

(B) Construction :
(i) In fuel cell the anode and cathode are porous electrodes with suitable catalyst like finely divided platinum.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 128
(ii) The electrolyte used is hot aqueous KOH solution in which porous anode and cathode carbon rods are immersed.
(iii) H2 is continuously bubbled through anode while O2 gas is bubbled through cathode.

(C) Working (cell reactions) :
(i) Oxidation at anode : At anode, hydrogen gas is oxidised to H2O.
2H2(g) + 4OH(aq) → 4H2O(l) + 4e (oxidation half reaction)
(ii) Reduction at cathode : The electrons released at anode travel to cathode through external circuit and reduce oxygen gas to OH-.
O2(g) + 2H2O(l) + 4e → 4OH(aq) (reduction half reaction)
(iii) Net cell reaction: Addition of both the above reactions at anode and cathode gives a net cell reaction.
2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(l) (overall cell reaction)

(D) Representation of the cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 129
The overall cell reaction is an exothermic combustion reaction. However in this, H2 and O2 gases do not react directly but react through electrode reactions. Hence the chemical energy released in the formation of O-H bonds in H2O, is directly converted into electrical energy.

(E) Advantages :

  1. The fuel cell operates continuously as long as H2 and O2 gases are supplied to the electrodes.
  2. The cell reactions do not cause any pollution.
  3. The efficiency of this galvanic cell is the highest about 70% as compared to ordinary galvanic cells.

(F) Drawbacks of H2-O2 fuel cell :

  1. The cell requires expensive electrodes like Pt, Pd.
  2. In practice, voltage is less than 1.23 volt due to spontaneous reactions at the electrodes.
  3. H2 gas is expensive and hazardous.

(G) Applications :

  1. It was successfully used in spacecraft.
  2. It has potential applications in automobiles, power generators for domestic and industrial uses.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 76.
What are the applications of the fuel cells?
Answer:

  1. Fuel cells have been used in the space programme providing electrical energy for a long duration.
  2. The fuel cells have been used in automobiles on experimental basis.
  3. In case of H2-O2 fuel cell, used in spacecraft, the water produced is used for drinking for astronauts.
  4. The fuel cells using methanol as a fuel for combustion are used in electronic products such as cell phones and laptop computers.
  5. The fuel cells have many potential applications as power generators for domestic and industrial uses.

Question 77.
In what way fuel cell differs from ordinary galvanic cells ?
Answer:

  1. Fuel cell is a modified galvanic cell in which the thermal energy of combustion reactions is directly converted into electrical energy.
  2. In the fuel cell, the reactants are not placed within the cell like ordinary galvanic cells, but they are continuously supplied to the electrodes from outside reservoir.
  3. They cannot be recharged unlike ordinary galvanic cell.

Question 78.
Define electrochemical series or electromotive series.
Answer:
Electrochemical series (Electromotive series) : It is defined as the arrangement in a series of electrodes of elements (metal or non-metal in contact with their ions) with the electrode half reactions in the decreasing order of their standard reduction potentials.

Question 79.
Explain electrochemical series or electromotive series.
Answer:
The conventions used in the construction of electrochemical series (or electromotive series) are as follows :

  • The (reduction) electrodes or half cells of the elements are written on the left hand side of the series and they are arranged in the decreasing order of their standard reduction potentials (E°red).
  • Reduction half reactions are written for each half cell in such a way that the species with higher oxidation state and electrons are on left hand side while reduced species with lower oxidation state are on right hand side.
  • The standard reduction potential of standard hydrogen electrode is 0.00 V, i.e., E0H+/H2 = 0.0 V. The electrodes and half cell reactions with positive E0red values are located above hydrogen and those with negative E0red values below hydrogen. Above hydrogen, positive E0red values increase, while below hydrogen negative E0 values increase.
  • The positive E0red values indicate the tendency for reduction and the negative E0red values indicate the tendency for oxidation.
  • The elements, whose electrodes are at the top of the series having high positive values for E0red are good oxidising agents.
  • The elements, whose electrodes are at the bottom of the series having high negative values for E0red are good reducing agents.

Question 80.
What are the applications of electrochemical series (or electromotive series) ?
Answer:
The applications of electrochemical series (or electromotive series) are as follows :
(1) Relative strength of oxidising agents in terms of E0red values : The E0red value is a measure of the tendency of the species to be reduced i.e., to accept electrons and act as an oxidising agent. The species mentioned on left hand side of the half reactions are oxidising agents.

The substances in the upper positions in the series and hence in the upper left side of the half reactions have large positive E0red values hence are stronger oxidising agents. For example, F2, Ce4+, Au3+, etc. As we move down the series, the oxidising power decreases. Hence from the position of the elements in the electrochemical series, oxidising agents can be selected.

(2) Relative strength of reducing agents in terms of E0red values : The lower E0red value means lower tendency to accept electrons but higher tendency to lose electrons. The tendency for reverse reaction or oxidation increases as E0red becomes more negative and we move towards the lower side of the series. For example, Li, K, Al, etc. are good reducing agents.

(3) Identifying the spontaneous direction of reaction : From the standard reduction potentials, E0red, the spontaneity of a redox reaction can be determined. The difference between E0red values for any two electrodes represents cell potential E0cell, constituted by them.

If E°cell is positive then the reaction is spontaneous while if E0cell is negative the reaction is non-spontaneous. For example, E0Mg2+/Mg and E0Ag+/Ag have values -2.37 V and 0.8 V respectively. Then Mg will be a better reducing agent than Ag. Therefore Mg can reduce Ag+ to Ag.

The corresponding reactions will be:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 130

Therefore above reaction in the forward direction will be spontaneous while in the reverse direction will be non-spontaneous since for it E0cell = -3.17V.

(4) Calculation of standard cell potential E0cell : From the electrochemical series, the standard cell potential, E0cell from the E0red values for the half reactions given can be calculated.
For example,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 131

Question 81.
Write any four applications of electrochemical series.
Answer:
The applications of electrochemical series are as follows :

  1. Predicting relative strength of oxidising agents.
  2. Predicting relative strength of reducting agents.
  3. Identifying the spontaneous direction of a reaction.
  4. To calculate the standard cell potential E°cell.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 82.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each subquestion :

1. The cell constant of a conductivity cell is given by
(a) l × a
(b) \(\frac{a}{l}\)
(c) \(\frac{1}{l \times a}\)
(d) \(\frac{l}{a}\)
Answer:
(d) \(\frac{l}{a}\)

2. A conductivity cell has two platinum electrodes of area 1.2 cm2 and 0.92 cm apart. Hence the cell constant is
(a) 1.104 cm-1
(b) 1.304 cm-1
(c) 0.906 cm-1
(d) 0.767 cm-1
Answer:
(d) 0.767 cm-1

3. The conductivity of 0.02 M KI solution is 4.37 × 10-4 Ω-1 cm-1. Hence its molar conductivity is
(a) 8.74 × 10-6 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(b) 21.85 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(c) 4.58 × 10-4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(d) 136.5 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Answer:
(b) 21.85 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

4. The specific conductance of 0.02 M HCl is 8.2 × 10-3 Ω-1 cm-1. Hence its molar conductivity is
(a) 164 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(b) 6.1 × 103Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(c) 239.6 S cm2 mol-1
(d) 410 S cm2 mol-1
Answer:
(d) 410 S cm2 mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

5. Molar conductivity of an electrolyte is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 132
Answer:
(c) \(\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}=\frac{\kappa \times 1000}{\mathrm{C}}\)

6. The units of molar conductivity are
(a) Ω cm-2 mol-1
(b) Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(c) Ω-1 cm-1 mol-1
(d) Ω cm-1 mol-2
Answer:
(b) Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

7. If conductivity is expressed in Ω-1 m-1 and concentration of the electrolytic solution in mol m-3 then, the molar conductance is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 133
Answer:
(b) \(\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}=\frac{\kappa}{C}\)

8. Kohlrausch’s law is represented as
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 134
Answer:
(a) \(\wedge_{0}=\lambda_{+}^{0}+\lambda_{-}^{0}\)

9. The degree of dissociation of a weak electrolyte is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 135
Answer:
(c) α = \(\frac{\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}}{\wedge_{0}}\)

10. ∧0 for CH3COOH is 390.7 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1. If ∧0 for CH3COOK, and HBr in Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 are 115 and 430.4 respectively, then ∧0 for KBr is
(a) 74.6 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(b) 180.6 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(c) 154.7 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(d) 706.1 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Answer:
(c) 154.7 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

11. The molar conductivity of cation and anion of salt BA are 180 and 220 mhos respectively. The molar conductivity of salt BA at infinite dilution is
(a) 90 mhos · cm2 · mol-1
(b) 110 mhos · cm2 · mol-1
(c) 200 mhos · cm2 · mol-1
(d) 400 mhos · cm2 · mol-1
Answer:
(d) 400 mhos · cm2 · mol-1

12. If ∧m and ∧0 are the molar conductivities of a weak electrolyte at concentration C and at zero concentration, then the dissociation constant Ka is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 136
Answer:
(b) Ka = \(\frac{\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}^{2} \times \mathrm{C}}{\Lambda_{0}\left(\wedge_{0}-\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}\right)}\)

13. What is the ratio of volumes of H2 and O2 liberated during electrolysis of acidified water ?
(a) 1 : 2
(b) 2 : 1
(c) 1 : 8
(d) 8 : 1
Answer:
(b) 2 : 1

14. What weight of copper will be deposited by passing 2 Faradays of electricity through a cupric salt? (atomic mass = 63.5)
(a) 63.5 g
(b) 31.75 g
(c) 127 g
(d) 12.7 g
Answer:
(a) 63.5 g

15. The S.I. unit of cell constant for conductivity cell is
(a) m-1
(b) S·m-2
(c) cm-2
(d) S·dm2·mol-1
Answer:
(a) m-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

16. The charge of how many coulomb is required to deposit 1.0 g of sodium metal (molar mass 23.0 g mol-1) from sodium ions is
(a) 2098
(b) 96500
(c) 193000
(d) 4196
Answer:
(d) 4196

17. The amount of electricity equal to 0.05 F is
(a) 48250 C
(b) 3776 C
(c) 4825 C
(d) 4285 C
Answer:
(c) 4825 C

18. The number of electrons that have a total charge of 965 coulombs is
(a) 6.022 × 1023
(b) 6.022 × 1022
(c) 6.022 × 1021
(d) 3.011 × 1023
Answer:
(c) 6.022 × 1021

19. When 0.2 Faraday of electricity is passed through an electrolytic solution, the number of electrons involved are
(a) 96500
(b) 1.603 × 10-19
(c) 1.2046 × 1023
(d) 12 × 106
Answer:
(c) 1.2046 × 1023

20. When a charge of 0.5 Faraday is passed through AlCl3 solution, the amount of aluminium deposited at the cathode is (Atomic weight of Al = 27)
(a) 4.5
(b) 18
(c) 27
(d) 2.7
Answer:
(a) 4.5

21. The quantity of electricity required to deposit 54 g of silver from silver nitrate solution is
(a) 0.5 Coulomb
(b) 0.5 Ampere
(c) 0.5 Faraday
(d) 0.5 Volt
Answer:
(c) 0.5 Faraday

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

22. Passage of 5400 C of electricity through an electrolyte deposited 5.954 × 10-3 kg of the metal with atomic mass 106.4. The charge on the metal ion is
(a) + 1
(b) + 2
(c) + 3
(d) + 4
Answer:
(a) + 1

23. On calculating the strength of current in amperes if a charge of 840 C (coulomb) passes through an electrolyte in 7 minutes, it will be
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(b) 2

24. On passing 1.5 F charge, the number of moles of aluminium deposited at cathode are [Molar mass of Al = 27 gram mol-3]
(a) 1.0
(b) 13.5
(c) 0.50
(d) 0.75
Answer:
(c) 0.50

25. Number of faradays of electricity required to liberate 12 g of hydrogen is
(a) 1
(b) 8
(c) 12
(d) 16
Answer:
(c) 12

26. Daniell cell is
(a) Secondary cell
(b) Irreversible cell
(c) primary irreversible cell
(d) primary reversible cell
Answer:
(d) primary reversible cell

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

27. In the representation of galvanic cell, the ions in the same phase are separated by a
(a) single vertical line
(b) comma
(c) double vertical lines
(d) semicolon
Answer:
(b) comma

28. In the Daniell cell, reduction occurs at the
(a) anode
(b) zinc rod
(c) negative electrode
(d) positive electrode
Answer:
(d) positive electrode

29. The standard hydrogen electrode is represented as
(a) \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\)|H2(g, 1 atm) | Pt
(b) \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) 1M | H2(g, 1 atm) | Pt
(c) \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) 1M|H2(g)|Pt
(d) \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) 0.1M|H2(g, 1 atm) | Pt
Answer:
(b) \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) 1M | H2(g, 1 atm) | Pt

30. The essential condition to set a standard hydrogen electrode is
(a) 298 K
(b) pure and dry H2 gas at 1 atm
(c) solution containing H+ at unit activity
(d) all of these
Answer:
(d) all of these

31. In hydrogen-oxygen fuel cell, the carbon rods are immersed in hot aqueous solution of
(a) KCl
(b) KOH
(c) H2SO4
(d) NH4Cl
Answer:
(b) KOH

32. The emf of cell is 1.3 volt. The positive electrode has potential of 0.5 volt. The potential of negative electrode is
(a) 0.8 V
(b) -0.8 V
(c) 1.8 V
(d) – 1.8 V
Answer:
(b) -0.8 V

33. The electrode potential of a silver electrode dipped in 0.1 M AgNO3 solution at 298 K is (E0red of Ag = 0.80 volt)
(a) 0.0741 V
(b) 0.0591 V
(c) 0.741 V
(d) 0.859 V
Answer:
(c) 0.741 V

34. Which of the following species gains electrons more easily ?
(a) Na+
(b) H+
(c) Mg+
(d) Hg+
Answer:
(b) H+

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

35. In Nernst equation the constant 0.0592 at 298 K represents the value of
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 137
Answer:
(d) \(\frac{2.303 R T}{F}\)

36. The concept of electrode potential is explained on the basis of
(a) Arrhenius’ theory
(b) Ostwald’s theory
(c) Nemst’s theory
(d) Faraday’s law
Answer:
(c) Nemst’s theory

37. The standard reduction potentials of metals A and B are x and y respectively. If x > y, the standard emf of the cell containing these electrodes would be
(a) 2x – y
(b) y – x
(c) x – y
(d) x + y
Answer:
(c) x – y

38. The emf of the cell,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 138
(E0red = 0.34 V)
(a) -1.34
(b) 0.34 V
(c) -0.34 V
(d) 1.34
Answer:
(b) 0.34 V

39. The Electromotive Force of the following Cell Cu|Cu++ (1 M)||A+g (1 M)|Ag is …………….. if E0cu++ = 0.33 V and E0 Ag++/Ag = 0.79 V
(a) 0.46 V
(b) – 0.46 V
(c) 1.12 V
(d) – 112 V
Answer:
(a) 0.46 V

40. The standard cell potential of the following cell is 0.463 V Cu|Cu++ (1 M)||Ag+ (1 M)|Ag. If E0Ag = 0.8 V, what is the standard potential of Cu electrode ?
(a) 1.137 V
(b) 0.337 V
(c) 0.463 V
(d) – 0.463 V
Answer:
(b) 0.337 V

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

41. The metal which cannot displace hydrogen from dil. H2SO4 solution is
(a) Zn
(b) Al
(c) Fe
(d) Ag
Answer:
(d) Ag

42. In the Lead storage battery during discharging
(a) pH of the electrolyte increases
(b) pH decreases
(c) pH remain unchanged
(d) pH increases or decreases depends on the extent of discharging
Answer:
(a) pH of the electrolyte increases

43. During the discharging of a lead storage battery,
(a) H2SO4 is consumed
(b) PbSO4 is consumed
(c) Pb2+ ions are formed
(d) Pb is formed
Answer:
(a) H2SO4 is consumed

44. In lead accumulator, anode and cathode are
(a) (Pb + PbO2), Pb
(b) Pb, PbO2
(b) PbO2, Pb
(d) Pb, (Pb + PbO2)
Answer:
(d) Pb, (Pb + PbO2)

45. The efficiency of the hydrogen-oxygen fuel cell is about
(a) 20%
(b) 40%
(c) 70%
(d) 90%
Answer:
(c) 70%

46. The strongest oxidizing agent among the species In3+ (E0 = – 1.34 V), Au3+ (E0 = 1.4 V), Hg2+ (E0 = 0.86 V), Cr3+ (E0 = – 0.74 V) is
(a) Cr3+
(b) Au3+
(c) Hg2+
(d) In3+
Answer:
(b) Au3+

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

47. The reaction, \(2 \mathrm{Br}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Br}_{2(\mathrm{l})}+\mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
with the standard potentials, E0Sn = -0.114 V, E0Br2 = + 1.09 V, is
(a) spontaneous in reverse direction
(b) spontaneous in forward direction
(c) at equilibrium
(d) non-spontaneous in reverse direction
Answer:
(a) spontaneous in reverse direction

48. The cell potential of the following cell is
(E0Al3+/Al = – 1.66 V)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 139
(a) 1.66 V
(b) -1.66 V
(c) 0.5533 V
(d) 2.14 V
Answer:
(a) 1.66 V

49. The standard reduction potentials of Sn, Hg and Cr are – 1.36 V, 0.854 V and – 0.746 V respectively. The increasing order of oxidising power of the given elements is
(a) Sn < Hg < Cr
(b) Hg < Cr < Sn
(c) Sn < Cr < Hg
(d) Cr < Hg < Sn
Answer:
(c) Sn < Cr < Hg

50. If standard reduction potentials for Pb, K, Zn and Cu are -0.126 V, -2.925 V, -0.763 V and 0.337 V, the decreasing order of reducing power is
(a) Zn > Pb > K > Cu
(b) Cu > Pb > Zn > K
(c) K > Zn > Pb > Cu
(d) K > Pb > Cu > Zn
Answer:
(c) K > Zn > Pb > Cu+

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 1.
Define the term energy.
Answer:
The energy of a system is defined as its capacity to perform the work. A system with higher energy can perform more work.

Question 2.
What are different forms of energy?
Answer:
The energy of a system has many different forms as follows :

  • Kinetic energy arises due to motion, like rotational, vibrational and translational.
  • Potential energy arises due to position and state of a matter. If depends upon the temperature of the system.
  • Heat energy (or thermal energy) which is transferred from the hotter body to the colder body.
  • Radiant energy is associated with electro-magnetic or light radiation.
  • Electrical energy is produced in the galvanic cells.
  • Chemical energy is stored in chemical substances.

All these various forms of energy can be converted from one form to another without any loss.

Question 3.
Explain the concept of interconversion of different forms of energy.
Answer:
There are various forms of energy like kinetic energy, potential energy, heat or thermal energy, radiant energy, electrical energy and chemical energy.

All these forms of energy are interconvertible. For example, a body at very high level possesses higher potential energy. When it falls down, potential energy is converted into kinetic energy. Falling of water from high level is used to drive turbines converting potential energy into kinetic energy which is further converted into electrical energy.

In galvanic cells, chemical energy is converted into electrical energy.
In electrolytic cells, chemical energy is converted into electrical energy. But during interconversion, the energy can neither be created nor destroyed, and there is a conservation of energy.

Question 4.
What is thermodynamics ? What are its drawbacks?
Answer:
Thermodynamics : It is concerned with the energy changes in physical and chemical changes.

Drawbacks :

  • It does not give information on the rates of physical or chemical changes.
  • It does not explain mechanisms involved in physical and chemical processes.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 5.
Define and explain :
(1) System (2) Surroundings (3) Boundary.
Answer:
(1) System : The portion of the universe under thermo-dynamic consideration to study thermodynamic properties is called a system.
Explanation :

  • As such any portion of the universe under thermodynamic consideration is a system. The thermodynamic consideration involves the study of thermodynamic parameters like pressure, volume, temperature, energy, etc.
  • The system may be very small or very large.
  • The system is confined by a real or an imaginary boundary.

(2) Surroundings : The remaining portion of the universe other than under thermodynamics study i.e„ the system is called the surroundings.
Explanation :

  • Surroundings represent a large stock of mass and energy and can be exchanged with the system when allowed.
  • For a liquid in an open vessel, the surrounding atmosphere around it represents the surroundings.

(3) Boundary : The wall or interface separating the system from its surrounding is called a boundary.
Explanation :

  • This boundary may be either real or imaginary.
  • Through this boundary, exchange of heat and matter between the system and surroundings can take place, e.g. when a liquid is placed in a beaker the walls of beaker represent real boundaries while open portion of the beaker is imaginary boundary.
  • Everything outside the boundary represents surroundings.

Question 6.
What are the types of systems ?
Answer:
Following are the types of systems :

  1. Open system
  2. Closed system
  3. Isolated system
  4. Homogeneous system
  5. Heterogeneous system.

Question 7.
Define and explain the following :
(1) Open system
(2) Closed system
(3) Isolated system.
Answer:
(1) Open system :it is defined as a system which can exchange both matter and energy with its surroundings, e.g. a beaker containing water. The water continuously absorbs energy from the surroundings and forms vapour which diffuse in the surroundings. So that this system exchanges energy and matter (or mass), with the surroundings.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 1
Fig. 4.1 : Open system

(2) Closed system : it is defined as a system which can exchange only energy but not the matter with its surroundings, e.g. A closed vessel containing hot water so that only heat is lost to the surroundings and not the matter.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 2
Fig. 4.2 : Closed system

(3) Isolated system : it is defined as a system which can neither exchange energy nor matter with its surroundings, e.g. hot water filled in a thermally insulated closed vessel like thermos flask.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 3
In actual practice, perfectly isolated system is not possible.
Universe represents an isolated system.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 8.
‘Universe is an isolated system’. Explain.
Answer:
Universe represents an isolated system due to the following reasons :

  • The total mass and energy of the universe remain constant.
  • The universe has no boundary.
  • The universe has no surroundings.

Question 9.
Define and explain :
(1) Homogeneous system
(2) Heterogeneous system.
Answer:
(1) Homogeneous system : A system consisting of only one uniform phase is called a homogeneous system.
Explanation :
(1) The properties of homogeneous system are uniform throughout the phase or system.
(2) The homogeneous systems are :

  • Solutions of miscible liquids (water and alcohol) or soluble solids in liquids, (NaCl in water), etc.
  • Mixture of gases. H2 and N2, NH3 and H2, etc.

(2) Heterogeneous system : A system consisting of two or more phases separated by interfacial boundaries is called a heterogeneous system.
Explanation : These systems are :

  • Mixture of two or more immiscible liquids. E.g. Water and benzene.
  • Solid in equilibrium with liquid.
    E.g. Ice ⇌ water.
  • Liquid in equilibrium with vapour.
    E.g. Water ⇌ vapour.

Question 10.
Explain : (A) Extensive property (B) Intensive property of a system.
OR
What is the difference between extensive and intensive properties?
Answer:
The properties of a system are classified as (A) Extensive property and (B) Intesive property.
(A) Extensive property : It is defined as a property of a system whose magnitude depends on the amount of matter present in the system.
Explanation :

  • More the quantity (or amount) of the matter of the system, more is the magnitude of extensive property, e.g., mass, volume, heat, energy, enthalpy, etc.
  • The extensive properties are additive.

(B) Intensive property : It is defined as a property of a system whose magnitude is independent of the amount of matter present in the system.
Explanation :

  • Intensive property is characteristic of the system, e.g., refractive index, density, viscosity, temperature, pressure, boiling point, melting point, freezing point of a pure liquid, surface tension, etc.
  • The intensive properties are not additive.

Question 11.
Select extensive and intensive properties in the following :
Moles, molar heat capacity, entropy, heat capacity.
Answer:
Extensive property : Moles, entropy, heat capacity.
Intensive property : Molar heat capacity.

Question 12.
What is a state function ? Give examples.
Answer:
State function : The property which depends on the state of the system and independent of the path followed by the system to attain the final state is called a state function.
For example, pressure, volume, temperature, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 13.
Classify the following properties as intensive or extensive :
(i) Temperature (ii) Density (iii) Enthalpy (iv) Mass (v) Energy (vi) Refractive index (vii) Pressure (viii) Viscosity (ix) Volume (x) Weight.
Answer:
(1) Intensive properties : Temperature, Density, Refractive index. Pressure, Viscosity.
(2) Extensive properties : Enthalpy, Mass, Energy, Volume, Weight.

Question 14.
What are path functions?
Answer:
Path functions : The properties which depend on the path of the process are called path functions. For example, work (W) and heat (Q).

Question 15.
Define thermodynamic equilibrium. Mention different types of thermodynamic equilibria.
Answer:
Thermodynamic equilibrium : A system is said to have attained a state of thermodynamic equilibrium if there is no change in any thermodynamic functions or state functions like energy, pressure, volume, etc. with time.

For a system to be in thermodynamic equilibrium, it has to attain following three types of equilibrium :

  • Thermal equilibrium
  • Chemical equilibrium
  • Mechanical equilibrium

Question 16.
Distinguish between :
(1) Open system and Closed system :
Open system:

  1. An open system can exchange both matter and energy with the surroundings.
  2. In this, the total amount of matter does not remain constant.
  3. Example : Hot water kept in an open beaker.

Closed system:

  1. A closed system can exchange only energy, but not matter with the surroundings.
  2. In this, the total amount of matter remains constant.
  3. Example : Hot water kept in a closed glass flask.

(2) Closed system and Isolated system :
Closed system:

  1. A closed system can exchange only energy, but not matter with the surroundings.
  2. In this, the total amount of energy does not remain constant.
  3. Example : Hot water kept in a sealed glass flask.

Isolated system:

  1. An isolated system can exchange neither matter nor energy with the surroundings.
  2. In this, the total amount of energy remains constant.
  3. Example : Hot water kept in a thermos flask.

(3) Open system and Isolated system :
Open system:

  1. An open system can exchange matter with the surroundings.
  2. It can exchange energy with the surroundings.
  3. In this, the total amount of energy does not remain constant.
  4. Example : Hot water kept in an open beaker.

Isolated system

  1. An isolated system cannot exchange matter with the surroundings.
  2. It cannot exchange energy with the surroundings.
  3. In this, the total amount of energy remains constant.
  4. Example : Hot water kept in a thermos flask.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 17.
What is a thermodynamic process ? What are different types of processes ?
Answer:
(i) Thermodynamic process : It is defined as a transition by which a state of a system changes from initial equilibrium state to final equilibrium state.

The process is carried out by changing the state functions or thermodynamic variables like pressure, volume and temperature. During the process one or more properties of the system change.

(ii) Types of processes :

  • Isothermal process
  • Isobaric process
  • Isochoric process
  • Adiabatic process
  • Reversible process
  • Irreversible (spontaneous) process.

Question 18.
Define and explain different types of processes.
Answer:
There are following types of processes :
(1) Isothermal process : It is defined as a process in which the temperature of the system remains constant throughout the change of a state of the system.
In this, ΔT = 0.

Features :

  • In this process, the temperature at initial state, final state and throughout the process remains constant.
  • In this process, system exchanges heat energy with its surroundings to maintain constant temperature. E.g., in case of exothermic process liberated heat is given to the surroundings and in case of endothermic process heat is absorbed from the surroundings so that temperature of the system remains constant and ΔT = 0.
  • Isothermal process is carried out with a closed system.
  • Internal energy (U) of the system remains constant, hence, Δ U = 0.
  • In this process, pressure and volume of a gaseous system change.

(2) Isobaric process : It is defined as a process which is carried out at constant pressure. Hence, Δ P = 0.
Features :

  • In this process, the volume (of gaseous system) changes against a constant pressure.
  • Since the external atmospheric pressure remains always constant, all the processes carried out in open vessels, or in the laboratory are isobaric processes.
  • In this volume and temperature change.
  • Internal energy of a system changes, hence, ΔU ≠ 0.

(3) Isochoric process : It is defined as a process which is carried out at constant volume of the system.
Features :

  • In this process, temperature and pressure of the system change but volume remains constant.
  • Since ΔV = 0, no mechanical work is performed.
  • In this internal energy (U) of the system changes. The example of this process in cooking takes place in a pressure cooker.

(4) Adiabatic process : It is defined as a process in which there is no exchange of heat energy between the system and its surroundings. Hence, Q = 0.
Features :

  • An adiabatic process is carried out in an isolated system.
  • In this process, temperature and internal energy of a system change, ΔT ≠ 0, Δ U ≠ 0.
  • During expansion, temperature and energy decrease and during compression, temperature and energy increase.
  • If the process is exothermic, the temperature rises and if the process is endothermic the temperature decreases in the adiabatic process.

(5) Reversible process : A process carried out in such a manner that at every stage, the driving force is only infinitesimally greater than the opposing force and it can be reversed by an infinitesimal increase in force and the system exists in equilibrium with its surroundings throughout, is called a reversible process.
Features :

  • This is a hypothetical process.
  • Driving force is infinitesimally greater than the opposing force throughout the change.
  • The process can be reversed at any point by making infinitesimal changes in the conditions.
  • The process takes place infinitesimally slowly involving infinite number of steps.
  • At the end of every step of the process, the system attains mechanical equilibrium, hence, throughout the process, the system exists in temperature-pressure equilibrium with its surroundings.
  • In this process, maximum work is obtained.
  • Temperature remains constant throughout the isothermal reversible process.

(6) Irreversible process : it is defined as the unidirectional process which proceeds in a definite direction and cannot be reversed at any stage and in which driving force and opposing force differ in a large magnitude. It is also called a spontaneous process.
Features :

  • It takes place without the aid of external agency.
  • All irreversible processes are spontaneous.
  • All natural processes are irreversible processes.
  • Equilibrium is attained at the end of process.
  • They are real processes and are not hypothetical.

Examples :

  • Flow of heat from a matter at higher temperature to a matter at lower temperature.
  • Flow of a gas from higher to lower pressure.
  • Flow of water from higher level to lower level.
  • Flow of a solvent into a solution through a semipermeable membrane due to osmosis.
  • Flow of electricity from higher potential terminal to lower potential terminal.

Question 19.
Distinguish between :
(1) Isothermal process and Adiabatic process.
(2) Reversible and irreversible processes.
Answer:
Isothermal process:

  1. In an isothermal process, the temperature of the system remains constant. ΔT = 0
  2. In this process, the system exchanges heat with the surroundings. Q ≠ 0 (Closed system)
  3. The total internal energy of the system remains constant.
  4. In this process, the system is not thermally isolated.
  5. In this process, Q = -W as ΔU = 0.
  6. ΔH = 0.

Adiabatic process:

  1. In an adiabatic process, the temperature of the system changes. ΔT ≠ 0
  2. In this process, the system does not exchange heat with the surroundings. Q = 0 (Isolated system)
  3. The total internal energy of the system changes. ΔU ≠ 0
  4. In this process, the system is thermally isolated.
  5. In this process, W = ΔU.
  6. ΔH ≠ 0.

(2) Reversible and irreversible processes.
Reversible process:

  1. The process whose direction can be reversed at any stage by an infinitesimal increase in the opposing force is called a reversible process.
  2. Such a process is not spontaneous and takes place infinitesimally slowly and takes infinite time for completion.
  3. In this process, the thermodynamic equilibrium is always maintained between the system and the surroundings at every step.
  4. The opposing force is infinitesimally less than the driving force.
  5. It is an ideal or hypothetical process.
  6. Maximum work can be derived from such a process.

Irreversible process:

  1. The process whose direction cannot be reversed by an infinitesimal increase in the opposing force is called an irreversible process.
  2. Such a process is spontaneous and takes finite time for completion.
  3. The thermodynamic equilibrium is attained only at the end of the process.
  4. The opposing force is significantly less than the driving force.
  5. It is a practical or real and spontaneous process.
  6. Work derived from such a process is always less than the maximum work.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 20.
Show that pressure times volume (PV) is equal to work.
Answer:
The work is defined as the energy by which a body is displaced through a distance d by applying a force f.
∴ W = f × d
If area is A = d2 and volume V = d3 then,
PV = \(\frac{f}{A}\) × d3 = \(\frac{f}{d^{2}}\) × d3 = f × d = W
∴ The term PV represents the pressure-volume work.

Question 21.
Explain the process of (A) expansion and (B) compression with suitable examples.
Answer:
(A ) Expansion : Consider an ideal cylinder fitted with a piston and filled with H2O2(l).
2H2O2(l) → 2H2O(l) + O2(l)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 4
Fig. 4.5 : Decomposition of H2O2
The oxygen gas produced pushes the piston upwards lifting the mass. Thus, the system performs the work on the surroundings and loses energy by expansion. In this work is done by the system.

(B) Compression : Consider an ideal cylinder fitted with a piston and containing gaseous NH3(g) and HCl(g).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 5
Fig. 4.6 : Reaction between NH3(g) and HCl(g)
NH3(g) + HCl(g) → NH4Cl(s)
As the reaction proceeds, due to consumption of gases, the volume decreases and there is work due to compression. In this work is done on the system by surroundings and the system gains energy.

Question 22.
What are the sign conventions for Q and W in (A) expansion, (B) compression?
Answer:
(A) For expansion, work is done by the system hence,
Q = -ve and W = -ve
(B) For compression, work is done on the system hence,
Q = -ve and W = +ve
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 6
Fig. 4.7 : Sign conventions

Question 23.
Explain sign convention of work during expansion and compression.
OR
Explain +W and -W.
Answer:
(A) Expansion of a gas :
(1) When a gas expands against a constant pressure, Pex changing the volume from initial volume V1 to final volume V2,
Change in volume, Δ V = V2 – V1
The mechanical work = W = -Pex × Δ V
= -Pex (V2 – V1)

(2) During expansion V2 > V1. The work is said to be performed by the system on the surroundings. This results in the decrease in the (work) energy of the system. Hence the work is negative, i.e. W is -ve.

(B) Compression of a gas : During compression, V2 < V1. The work is said to be performed on the system by the surroundings. This results in the increase in the (work) energy of the system. Hence the work is positive, i.e. W is + ve.

Question 24.
What are different units of energy and work ?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 7

Question 25.
What are the characteristics of maximum work?
Answer:
(1) The process is carried out at constant temperature.
(2) During the complete process, driving force is infinitesimally greater than opposing force.
(3) Throughout the process, the system exists in equilibrium with its surroundings.
(4) The work obtained is maximum. This is given by,
Wmax = -2.303 nRT log10 \(\frac{V_{2}}{V_{1}}\)
OR
Wmax = -2.303 nRT log10 \(\frac{P_{1}}{P_{2}}\)
where n, P, V and T represent number of moles, pressure, volume and temperature respectively.
(5) ΔU = 0, ΔH = 0.
(6) The heat absorbed in reversible manner
Qrev, is completely converted into work.
Qrev = -Wmax.
Hence work obtained is maximum.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Solved Examples 4.3

Question 26.
Solve the following :

(1) 2.5 moles of an ideal gas are expanded isothermally from 12 dm3 to 25 dm3 against a pressure of 3.0 bar. Calculate the work obtained.
Solution :
Given : n = 2.5 mol; V1 = 12 dm3;
V2 = 25 dm3
Pext = 3.0 bar; W = ?
W = -Pext × (V2 – V1)
= – 3 × (25 – 12)
= -39 dm3 bar
∵ V1 dm3 = 100 J
∴ W = -39 × 100 = -3900 J = -3.9kJ
Ans. W= -3.9 kJ

(2) When 2.2 moles of an ideal gas are expanded from 3.5 dm3 to 12 dm3 against a constant pressure, the work obtained is 3910 J. Estimate the external pressure.
Solution :
Given : n = 2.2 mol; V1 = 3.5 dm3; V2 = 12 dm3
W= -3910 J = \(\frac{-3910}{100}\)dm3 bar
W = -Pex (V2 – V1)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 8
= 4.6 bar
Ans. Pex = 4.6 bar

(3) Three moles of an ideal gas are expanded isothermally from a volume of 300 cm3 to 2.5 dm3 at 300 K against a pressure of 1.9 bar. Calculate the work done in L atm and joules.
Solution :
Given : Number of moles of a gas = n = 3 mol
Initial volume = V1 = 300 cm3
= 0.3 dm3
Final volume = V2 = 2.5 dm3
External pressure = Pex =1.9 bar
Temperature = T = 300 K
∵ W = -Pex (V2 – V1)
= -1.9 (2.5 – 0.3)
= -4.18 dm3 bar
Now, 1 dm3 bar = 100 J
∴ W = -4.18 × 100
= -4180 J
Ans. Work of expansion = W = -4180 J

(4) Calculate the constant external pressure needed to compress an ideal gas from 25 dm3 to 15 dm3. The amount of work done in the compression process is 3500 joules.
Solution :
As the compression of the gas takes place against a constant pressure, the work done is given by
W = -Pex(V2 – V1)
W = Work done by the gas against the external pressure = 3500 J
∴ W = \(\frac{3500}{100}\) = 35 dm3 bar
P = Constant external pressure = ?
V2 = Final volume = 15 dm3
V1 = Initial volume = 25 dm3
∴ 35= -P × (15 – 25)
∴ 35 = 10 × P
∴ P = \(\frac{35}{10}\) = 3.5 bar
Ans. External pressure = 3.5 bar

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(5) Three moles of an ideal gas are compressed isothermally and reversibly to a volume of 2 dm3. The work done is 2.983 kJ at 22°C. Calculate the initial volume of the gas.
Solution :
Given : Number of moles of a gas = n = 3 mol
Final volume = V2 = 2 dm3
Initial volume = V1 = ?
For compression,
Wmax = +2.983 kJ = 2983 J
Temperature = T = (273 + 22) K = 295 K
Wmax= -2.303 nRT log10\(\frac{V_{2}}{V_{1}}\)
∴ \(\frac{2983}{2.303 \times 3 \times 8.314 \times 295}\)
= -[log102 – log10V1]
0.1760 = -log102 + log10 V1
= -0.3010 + log10V1
∴ log10 V1 = 0.1760 + 0.3010 = 0.4770
∴ V1 = Antilog 0.4770
= 3.0 dm3
Ans. Initial volume of the gas = 3.0 dm3

(6) A chemical reaction takes place in a container of cross sectional area 100 cm2. As a result of the reaction, a piston is pushed out through 10 cm against an external pressure of 1.0 bar. Calculate the work done by the system.
Solution :
Given : Cross sectional area = A = 100 cm2
Displacement of a piston = 1 = 10 cm
External pressure = P = 1.0 bar
Work = W = ?
Volume change = A × l
∴ ΔV = 100 × 10
= 1000 cm3
= 1 dm3
Work = W = -P × ΔV
= -1 × 1
= -1 dm3 bar
= – 1 × 100 J
= -100 J
Ans. Work = W = -100 J

(7) 5 moles of helium expand isothermally and reversibly from a pressure 4 atm to 0.4 at 300 K. Calculate the work done, change in internal energy and heat absorbed during the expansion. (R = 8.314 J k-1 mol-1)
Solution :
Given : n = 5 mol
P1 = 4 atm
P2 = 0.4 atm
T = 300 K
Wmax = ?, ΔU = ?, Q = ?
Wmax = -2.303 nRT log10 (\(\frac{P_{1}}{P_{2}}\))
= -2.303 × 5 × 8.314 × 300 log10 \(\frac{4}{0.4}\)
= -2.303 × 5 × 8.314 × 300 × 1
= -28720 J
= -28.72 kJ
For an isothermal process, ΔU = 0
By first law, ΔU = Q + Wmax
∴ Q = -Wmax
= – (-28.72) = 28.72 kJ
Ans. Wmax = – 28.72 kJ; ΔU = 0;
Q = 28.72 kJ

(8) 2.8 × 10-2 kg of nitrogen is expanded isothermally and reversibly at 300 K from 15.15 × 105 Pa when the work done is found to be -17.33 kJ. Find the final pressure.
Solution :
Given : Mass of nitrogen = m = 2.8 × 10-2 kg
Temperature = T = 300 K
Work obtained in expansion = Wmax = -17.33 kJ
= – 17330 J
Initial pressure = P1 = 15.15 × 105 Pa
= 1.515 × 106 Pa
Molar mass of nitrogen (N2) = MN2
= 28 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Final pressure = P2 = ?
Number of moles of N2 = n = \(\frac{m}{M_{\mathrm{N}_{2}}}\)
= \(\frac{2.8 \times 10^{-2}}{28 \times 10^{-3}}=1 \mathrm{~mol}\)
Wmax = -2.303 × nRT log10 \(\frac{P_{1}}{P_{2}}\)
17330 = 2.303 × 1 × 8.314 × 300 × \(\log _{10} \frac{1.515 \times 10^{6}}{P_{2}}\)
∴ \(\frac{17330}{2.303 \times 1 \times 8.314 \times 300}\)
= [log10 1.515 × 106 – log10P2]
3.017 = 6.1804 – log10P2
∴ log10P2 = 6.1804 – 3.017 = 3.1634
∴ P2 = Antilog 3.1634
= 1456.8 Pa
Ans. Final pressure = 1456.8 Pa

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(9) Carbon monoxide expands isothermally and reversibly at 300 K doing 4.754 kJ of work. If the initial volume changes from 10 dm3 to 20 dm3, calculate the number of moles of carbon monoxide. (R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1)
Solution :
Wmax = -2.303 nRT log10 \(\frac{V_{2}}{V_{1}}\)
Wmax = Maximum work done = -4.754 kJ
= -4754 J, n = Number of moles = ?,
= 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
T = 300 K, V1 = Initial volume of carbon monoxide = 10 dm3
V2 = Final volume of carbon monoxide = 20 dm3
∴ -4754 = 22.303 × n × 8.314 × 300 log10 \(\frac {20}{10}\)
∴ -4754 = – 2.303 × n × 8.314 × 300 × log102
∴ – 4754 = – 2.303 × n × 8.314 × 300 × 0.3010
∴ n = \(\frac{-4754}{-2.303 \times 8.314 \times 300 \times 0.3010}\)
= 2.75 mol
Ans. Number of mol = 2.75 mol

(10) Given that the work done in isothermal and reversible expansion is 6.4 kJ when 2 moles of an ideal gas expanded to double its volume. Calculate the temperature at which expansion takes place.
Solution :
Given : Work = Wmax = -6.4 kJ (For expansion)
= – 6400 J
Number of moles = 2
If 1 = x L
V2 = 2 L
Temperature = T = ?
For isothermal reversible expansion,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 9

(11) 300 mmol of perfect gas occupies 13 dm3 at 320 K. Calculate the work done in joules when the gas expands :
(a) Isothermally against a constant external pressure of 0.20 bar,
(b) Isothermal and reversible process,
(c) Into vacuum until the volume of gas is increased by 3 dm3. (R = 8.314 J mol-1K-1)
Solution :
Given : Number of moles of a gas = n
= 300 mmol = 0.3 mol
Initial volume = V1 = 13 dm3
Increase in volume = ΔV = 3 dm3
Pressure = Pex = 0.2 atm
Temperature = 320 K

(a) Expansion against constant pressure is an irreversible process.
∴ W = -Pex × ΔV
= -0.2 × 3
= -0.6 dm3 bar
= -0.6 × 100 J
= -60 J

(b) For isothermal reversible process,
Wmax = 2.303 nRT log10 \(\frac{V_{2}}{V_{1}}\)
Now, V2 = V1 + ΔV = 13 + 3 = 16 dm3
Wmax = – 2.303 × 0.3 × 8.314 × 320 log10 \(\frac {16}{13}\)
= -165.4 J

(c) In vacuum, Pex = 0
∴ W = -Pex × ΔV
= -0 × 3
= 0
Ans. (a) W= -60.78 J
(b) Wmax = -165.4 J
(c) W = 0.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 27.
Define and explain the term internal energy.
Answer:
Internal energy : It is defined as the total energy constituting potential energy and kinetic energy of the molecules present in the system.
Explanation :

  • The internal energy of a system is a state function and thermodynamic function. It is denoted by U.
  • Its value depends on the state of a system.
  • The change in internal energy (Δ U) depends only on the initial state and the final state of the system.
    Δ U = U2 – U1
  • It is an extensive property of the system.
  • It has same unit as heat and work.
  • Total internal energy U of the system is,
    Total energy = Potential energy + Kinetic energy

Question 28.
Explain the formulation of first law of thermodynamics.
OR
Deduce mathematical equation for the first law of thermodynamics. Justify its expression.
Answer:
(1) The first law of thermodynamics is based on the principle of conservation of energy.
(2) If Q is the heat absorbed by the system and if W is the work done by surroundings on the system then the internal energy of the system will increase by Δ U.
(3) From the conservation of energy we can write,
Increase in internal energy of the system = Quantity of heat absorbed by the system + Work done on the system
∴ ΔU = Q + W
(4) For an infinitesimal change,
dU = dQ + dW

Question 29.
Deduce the mathematical expression of first law of thermodynamics for the following processes :
(1) Isothermal process
(2) Isobaric process
(3) Isochoric process
(4) Adiabatic process.
Answer:
(1) Isothermal process :This is a process which is carried out at constant temperature. Since internal energy, U of the system depends on temperature there is no change in the internal energy U of the system. Hence ΔU = 0.
By first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = Q +W
∴ 0 = Q + W
∴ Q = -W or W = -Q.

  • Hence in expansion, the heat absorbed by the system is entirely converted into work on the surroundings.
  • In compression, the work done on the system is converted into heat which is transferred to the surroundings by the system, keeping temperature constant.

(2) Isobaric process : In this, throughout the process pressure remains constant. Hence the system performs the work of expansion due to volume change ΔV.
W= -Pext × ΔV
Let QP be the heat absorbed by the system at constant pressure.
By first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = QP + W.
∴ ΔU = QP – PexΔV
or QP = ΔU + PexΔV
In this process, the heat absorbed QP is used to increase the internal energy (ΔU) of the system.

(3) Isochoric process : In this process the volume of the system remains constant. Hence ΔV = 0. Therefore, the system does not perform mechanical work.
∴ W = -PΔV = -P × (0) = 0
Let QV be the heat absorbed at constant volume.
By first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = Q + W
∴ ΔU = QV.

(4) Adiabatic process : In this process, the system does not exchange heat, Q with its surroundings.
∴ Q = 0.
Since by first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = Q + W
∴ ΔU = Wad.
Hence,
(i) the increase in internal energy ΔU is due to the work done on the system by surroundings. This results in increase in energy and temperature of the system.
(ii) if the work is done by the system on surroundings, like expansion, then there is a decrease in internal energy (-ΔU) and temperature of the system decreases.

Question 30.
What are the IUPAC sign conventions of Q, U and W?
Answer:
In thermodynamics, the sign conventions are adopted according to IUPAC convention, based on acquisition of energy.
(i) Heat absorbed = +Q
Heat evolved = -Q
(ii) Internal energy change :
Increase in energy = + Δ U
Decrease in energy = – Δ U
(iii) Work done by the system = – W
Work done on the system = + W

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 31.
Define and explain the term enthalpy.
OR
What is meant by enthalpy of a system ?
Answer:
Enthalpy (H) : It is defined as the total energy of a system consisting of internal energy (U) and pressure – volume (P × V) type of energy, i.e. enthalpy represents the sum of internal energy U and product PV energy. It is denoted by H and is represented as
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 10

Explanation :

  • Enthalpy represents total heat content of the system.
  • Enthalpy is a thermodynamic state function.
  • Enthalpy is an extensive property.
  • The absorption of heat by a system increases its enthalpy. Hence enthalpy is called heat content of the system.

Question 32.
Derive the expression, ΔH = ΔU + PΔV.
Answer:
Enthalpy (H) of a system is defined as
H = U + PV
where U is internal energy
P is pressure and V is volume.
Consider a process in which a state of a system changes from an initial state A to a final state B. Let H1, U1, P1, V1 and H2, U2, P2, V2 be the state functions of the system in initial and final states.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 11
Then,
H1 = U1 + P2V2 and H2 = U2 + P2V2
The enthalpy change ΔH is given by,
ΔH = H2 – H1
= (U2 + P2V2) – (U1 + P1V1)
= (U2 – U1) + (P2V2 – P1V1)
= ΔU + ΔPV
where ΔU = U2 – U1
At constant pressure, P1 = P2 = P
∴ P2V2 – P1V1 = PV2 – PV1
= P(V2 – V1)
= P × ΔV
Hence, ΔH = ΔU + PΔV
This is a relation for enthalpy change.

Question 33.
Show that the heat absorbed at constant pressure is equal to the change in enthalpy of the system.
OR
Why is enthalpy called heat content of the system?
Answer:
By the first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = Q + W
where ΔU is the change in internal energy
Q is heat supplied to the system
W is the work obtained.
∴ Q = ΔU – W
If QP is the heat absorbed at constant pressure by the system, so that the volume changes by Δ V against constant pressure P then,
W = -PΔV
∴ QP = ΔU – (-PΔV)
∴ QP = ΔU + PΔV ……… (1)
If ΔH is the enthalpy change for the system, then
ΔH = ΔU + PΔV ……….. (2)
By comparing above equations, (1) and (2), we can write, QP = ΔH
Hence heat absorbed at constant pressure is equal to the enthalpy change for the system.
Since by increase in enthalpy heat content of the system increases, enthalpy is also called as the heat content of the system.

Question 34.
What are the conditions under which ΔH = ΔU?
Answer:

  1. For any thermodynamic process or a chemical reaction at constant volume, Δ V = 0.
  2. Since ΔH = ΔU + PΔV, at constant volume ΔH = ΔU.
  3. In the reactions, involving only solids and liquids, Δ V is negligibly small, hence ΔH = ΔH.
  4. In a chemical reaction, in which number of moles of gaseous reactants and gaseous products are equal, then change in number of moles, Δ n = n2 – n1 = 0. Since ΔH = ΔU + ΔnRT, as Δn = 0, ΔH = ΔU.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Solved Examples 4.6 – 4.8

Question 35.
Solve the following :

(1) Calculate the change in internal energy when a gas is expanded by supplying 1500 J of heat energy. Work done in expansion is 850 J.
Solution :
Given : Q = 1500 J
W = -850 J (For expansion work is negative)
ΔU = ?
By first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = Q + W
= 1500 + (- 850)
= 650 J
Ans. Change in internal energy = Δ U = 650 J

(2) A system absorbs 520 J of heat and performs work of 210 J. Calculate the change in internal energy.
Solution :
Given : Since the heat is absorbed by the system, the work is of expansion.
Q = 520 J
W= -210 J
ΔV = ?
ΔU = Q + W
= 520 + (- 210)
= 310 J
Ans. Internal energy change = Δ U = 310 J

(3) A gas expands from 6 litres to 20 dm3 at constant pressure 2.5 atmosphere. If the system is supplied with 5000 J of heat, calculate W and ΔU.
Solution :
Given : V1 = 6 dm3
V2 = 20 dm3
P = 2.5 atm
Q = 5000 J
W = ?; ΔU = ?
For expansion,
W = -Pex(V2 – V1)
= -2.5 (20 – 6)
= – 35
= – 35 × 100 J
= – 3500 J
ΔU = Q + W
= 5000 + (-3500)
= -1500 J
Ans. W= -3500 J; ΔU = – 1500 J

(4) An ideal gas expands against a constant pressure of 2.026 × 105 Pa from 5 dm3 to 15 dm3. If the change in the internal energy is 418 J, calculate the change in enthalpy.
Solution :
As the expansion takes place at a constant pressure, the change in enthalpy is given by
ΔH = ΔU + P(V2 – V1)
ΔH = Change in enthalpy = ?
ΔU = Change in internal energy = 418 J
P = Constant pressure = 2.026 × 105 Pa
V2 = 15 dm3 = 15 × 10-3 m3
V1 = 5 dm3 = 5 × 10-3 m3
∴ ΔH = 418 + 2.026 × 105 × (15 × 10-3 – 5 × 10-3)
= 418 + 2026
∴ ΔH = 2.444 × 103 J = 2.444 kJ
Ans. Change in enthalpy = 2.444 × 103 J
= 2.444 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(5) In a reaction, 2.5 kJ of heat is released from the system and 5.5 kJ of work is done on the system. Find ΔU.
Solution :
Given : Q = -2.5 kJ (since heat is released)
W= + 5.5 kJ (since the work will be of compression)
ΔU = ?
ΔU = Q + W
= -2.5 + 5.5
= +3 kJ
Internal energy of the system will increase by 3 kJ.
Ans. Δ U = 3 kJ

(6) A chemical reaction is carried out by supplying 8 kJ of heat. The system performs the work of 2.7 kJ. Calculate ΔH and ΔU.
Solution :
Given : Q = + 8 kJ (since heat is absorbed by the system)
W = -2.7 kJ (It will be a work of expansion)
ΔH = ?, ΔU = ?
ΔU = Q + W = 8 + (-2.7) = 5.3 kJ
Internal energy of the system will increase by 5.3 kJ.
Due to expansion, Δ V > 0,
∴ PΔV = +2.7 kJ
ΔH = ΔU + PΔV = 5.3 + 2.7 = 8 kJ
Enthalpy of the system will increase by 8 kJ
Ans. ΔU = 5.3 kJ, ΔH = 8 kJ

(7) A sample of gas absorbs 4000 kJ of heat, (a) if volume remains constant. What is ΔU? (b) Suppose that in addition to absorption of heat by the sample, the surroundings does 2000 kJ of work on the sample. What is Δ U ? (c) Suppose that as the original sample absorbs heat, it expands against atmospheric pressure and does 600 kJ of work on its surroundings. What is ΔU ?
Solution :
Given : Q = + 4000 kJ (since heat is absorbed)
(a) Since volume remains constant, Δ V = 0.
W = -Pex (V2 – V1)
= -PexΔV = -Pex(0) = 0
∴ ΔU = Q + W = 4000 + 0 = 4000 kJ

(b) Q = + 4000 kJ
W = + 2000 kJ (Work done on the system)
ΔU = Q + W = 4000 + 2000 = 6000 kJ

(c) W = -600 kJ (Work of expansion)
ΔU = Q + W
ΔU = 4000 + (-600) = 3400 kJ
Ans. (a) Δ U = 4000 kJ
(b) Δ U = 6000 kJ
(c) Δ U = 3400 kJ

(8) Calculate the internal energy change at 298 K for the following reaction :
\(\frac{1}{2} \mathbf{N}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\frac{3}{2} \mathbf{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \rightarrow \mathbf{N H}_{3(\mathrm{~g})}\)
The enthalpy change at constant pressure is -46.0 kJ mol-1. (R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1)
Solution :
Given : \(\frac{1}{2} \mathbf{N}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\frac{3}{2} \mathbf{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \rightarrow \mathbf{N H}_{3(\mathrm{~g})}\)
ΔH= -46.0 kJ mol-1
ΔH = Heat of formation of NH3 at constant pressure
= -46.0 kJ mol-1 = -4600 J mol-1
Δ U = Change in internal energy = ?
Δn = (Number of moles of ammonia) – (Number of moles of hydrogen + Number of moles of nitrogen)
= [1 – (\(\frac {1}{2}\) + \(\frac {3}{2}\))]= -1 mol
R= 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
T = Temperature in kelvin = 298 K
ΔH = Δ U + ΔnRT
∴ -46000 = ΔU + (-1 × 8.314 × 298)
∴ -46000 = ΔU – 2477.0
∴ ΔU = -46000 + 2477.0
= -43523 J
= -43.523 kJ
Ans. Change in internal energy = -43.523 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(9) 5 moles of helium expand isothermally and reversibly from a pressure 40 × 10-5 Nm-2 to 4 × 10-5 Nm-2 at 300 K. Calculate the work done, change in internal energy and heat absorbed during the expansion. (R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1)
Solution :
As the expansion takes place isothermally and reversibly, the work done is given by
Wmax = -2.203 nRT log\(\frac{P_{1}}{P_{2}}\)
Wmax = Maximum work done
n = Number of moles of helium = 5 moles
R = Gas constant = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
T = 300 K
P1 = Initial pressure = 40 × 10-5 Nm-2
P2 = Final pressure = 4 × 10-5 Nm-2
∴ Wmax = -2.303 × 5 × 8.314 × 300 × log \(\frac {40}{4}\)
= – 2.303 × 5 × 8.314 × 300 × log 10
= -2.303 × 5 × 8.314 × 300 × 1
= – 28720J
As the expansion takes place isothermally, i.e., at the same temperature, there is no change in the internal energy of the system.
Q = ΔU + W
∴ Q = – W= + 28720 J as ΔU = 0
Ans. Work done = -28720 J, Heat absorbed = 28720 J, Change in internal energy = 0

(10) Calculate the work done in each of the following reactions. State whether work is done on or by the system.
(a) The oxidation of one mole of SO2 at 50°C.
2SO2(g) + O2(g) → 2SO3(g)
(b) Decomposition of 2 moles of NH4NO3 at 100°C
NH4NO3(s) → N2O(g) + 2H2O(g)
Solution :
(a) Given reaction :
2SO2(g) + O2(g) → 2SO3(g)
For 1 mole of SO2,
SO2(g) + \(\frac {1}{2}\)O2(g) → SO2(g)
∴ Δn = (n2)gaseous products – (n1)gaseous reactants
= 1 – (1 + \(\frac {1}{2}\))
= -0.5 mol
Since there is decrease in number of moles of gases, there will be compression, hence, the work will be done on the system by the surroundings.
Work is given by,
∴ W = – ΔnRT
= – (- 0.5) × 8.314 × (273 + 50)
= + 1342.7 J

(b) Given reaction :
NH4NO3(s) → N2O(g) + 2H2O(g)
For 2 moles of NH4NO3,
2NH4NO3(s) → 2N2O(g) + 4H2O(g)
∴ Change in number of moles,
Δn = (n2)gaseous products – (n1)gaseous reactants
= (2 + 4) – 0
= 6 mol
Since there is an increase in number of moles of gases, work of expansion is done by the system on the surroundings.
∴ W = -ΔnRT
= – 6 × 8.314 × (273+ 100)
= – 18606 J
= – 18.606 kJ
Ans. (a) W = 1342.7 J (b) W= -18.606 kJ

(11) The amount of heat evolved for the combustion of ethane is -900kJ mol-1 at 300K and 1 atm.
C2H6(g) + \(\frac {7}{2}\)O2(g) → 2CO2(g) + 3H2O(l)
Calculate W, ΔH and ΔU for the combustion of 12 × 10-3 kg ethane.
Solution :
Given : ΔH = -900 kJ mol-1
Temperature = T = 300 K
Pressure = P = 1 atm
Mass of ethane = m = 12 × 10-3 kg
Molar mass of ethane (C2H6) = 30 × 10-3 kg mol-1
ΔH = ? Δ U = ? for given ethane.
Number of moles of C2H6 = n = \(\frac{m \mathrm{~kg}}{M \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\)
= \(\frac{12 \times 10^{-3}}{30 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 0.4 mol
For the given reaction,
C2H6(g) + \(\frac {7}{2}\)O2(g) → 2CO2(g) + 3H2O(l)
Δn = (n2)gaseous products – (n1)gaseous reactants
= 2 – (1 + \(\frac {7}{2}\)) = -2.5 mol
For 1 mol of C2H6, Δn = -2.5 mol
∴ For 0.4 mol of C2H6, Δn = -2.5 × 0.4
= -1 mol
Since there is a decrease in number of moles, the work is of compression on the system.
W = -ΔnRT
= – (-1) × 8.314 × 300
= + 2494 J
= + 2.494 kJ
For 1 mol of C2H6 ΔH = -900 kJ
∴ For 0.4 mol of C2H6, ΔH= – 900 × 0.4
= – 360 kJ
ΔH = ΔU + ΔnRT
ΔU = ΔH – ΔnRT
= -360 – (-1) × 8.314 × 300× 10-3
= – 360 + 2.494
= – 357.506 kJ
Ans. W = + 2.494 kJ, ΔH = -360 kJ;
ΔU= – 357.506 kJ

(12) The latent heat of evaporation of water is 80 kJ mol-1. If 100 g water are evaporated at 100 °C and 1 atm, calculate W, ΔH, ΔU and Q.
Solution :
Given : Latent heat of evaporation = ΔH
= 80 kJ mol-1 of water
Temperature = T = 273 + 100 = 373 K
Pressure = P = 1 atm
Mass of water = m = 100 g
Molar mass of water = 18 g mol-1
W = ?, ΔH = 1, U = ?, Q = ?
Number of moles of water = \(\frac{m}{M}=\frac{100}{18}\) = 5.556 mol
H2O(l) → H2O(g)
5.556 mol 5.556 mol
Change in number of moles = Δn = 5.556 – 0
= 5.556 mol
For evaporation of 1 mol H2O, ΔH = 80 kJ
For 5.556 mol H2O, ΔH= 80 × 5.556 = 444.5 kJ
In this reaction, the work will be of expansion.
W= -ΔnRT
= -5.556 × 8.314 × 373
= – 17230 J
= -17.23 kJ
Now,
ΔH = ΔU + ΔnRT
ΔU = ΔH – ΔnRT
= 444.5 – 5.556 × 8.314 × 373 × 10-3
= 444.5 – 17.23
= 427.27 kJ
In this, Q = QP = ΔH = 444.5 kJ
Ans. W= -17.23 kJ; ΔH = 444.5 kJ
ΔU= 427.21 kJ, Q = 444.5 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(13) Oxidation of propane is represented as
C3H8(g) + 5O2(g) → 3CO2(g) + 4H2O(g), ΔH0 = -2043 kJ
How much pressure volume work is done and what is the value of AU at constant pressure of 1 bar when the volume change is + 22.4 dm3.
Solution :
Given :
ΔH0 = – 2043 kJ
Change in volume = ΔV = +22.4 L
ΔU = ?
C3H8(g) + 5O2(g) → 3CO2(g) + 4H2O(g)
Δn = (n2)gaseous products – (n1)gaseous reactants
= (3 + 4) – (1 + 5)
= 1 mol
Since there is an increase in number of moles, the work will be of expansion.
W = -P × ΔV dm3 bar
= – 1 × 22.4
= – 1 × 22.4 × 100 J
= – 2240 J
= -2.240
ΔH = ΔU + PΔV
ΔU = ΔH – PΔV
= – 2043 – (2.24)
= – 2040.7 kJ
Ans. W = -2.27 kJ, ΔU = -2040.7 kJ

(14) How much heat is evolved when 12 g of CO reacts with NO2 ? The reaction is :
4CO(g) + 2NO2(g) → 4CO2(g) + N2(g),
ΔrH0 = -1200 kJ
Solution :
Given : 4CO(g) + 2NO2(g) → 4CO2(g) + N2(g)
Molar mass of CO = 28 g mol-1
ΔrH0 = – 1200 kJ;
Molar mass of CO = 28 g mol-1
mco = 12 g, ΔH = ?
From the reaction,
∵ For 4 × 28 g CO, ΔH0 = – 1200 kJ
∵ For 12g CO ΔH0 = \(\frac{(-1200) \times 12}{4 \times 28}\)
= -128.6 kJ
Ans. Heat evolved = 128.6 kJ

Question 36.
What is phase transformation?
Answer:
Phase transformation (or transition) :

  • The transition of one phase (physical state) of a matter to another phase at constant temperature and pressure without change in chemical composition is called phase transformation.
  • During phase transformation, both the phases exist at equilibrium.
    Solids ⇌ Liquid; Liquid ⇌ Vapour.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 37.
Mention different types of phase transitions.
Answer:
The following are the types of phase changes :
(1) Fusion : This involves the change of a matter from solid state to liquid state. In this heat is absorbed, hence it is endothermic (ΔH > 0).
H2O(s) → H2O(l)
(2) Vaporisation or evaporation : This involves the change of a matter from liquid state to gaseous state. In this heat is absorbed, hence it is endothermic (ΔH > 0).
H2O(l) → H2O(g)
(3) Sublimation : This involves the change of matter from solid state directly into gaseous state. In this heat is absorbed, hence it is endothermic (ΔH > 0).
Camphor(s) → Camphor(g)

Question 38.
Define and explain enthalpy of freezing.
Answer:
Enthalpy of freezing (ΔfreezH) : The enthalpy change that accompanies the solidification of one mole of a liquid into solid at constant temperature and pressure is called enthalpy of freezing.
For example,
\(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{l})} \stackrel{1 \mathrm{~atm}, 273 \mathrm{~K}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
ΔfreezH = -6.01 kJ mol-1
This equation describes that when one mole of water freezes (solidifies) at 0 °C (273 K) and 1 atmosphere, 6.01 kJ of heat will be released to the surroundings.

Question 39.
Define and explain the following :
(A) Enthalpy of vaporisation.
(B) Enthalpy of sublimation.
Answer:
(A) Enthalpy of vaporisation (ΔvapH) : The enthalpy change that accompanies the vaporisation of one mole of a liquid at constant temperature and pressure is called heat of vaporisation or evaporation. For example,
\(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{l})} \stackrel{1 \mathrm{~atm}, 373 \mathrm{~K}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{g})}\)
ΔvapH = +40.7 kJ mol-1
This equation describes that when one mole of water is evaporated at 100 °C (373 K) and 1 atmosphere, 40.7 kJ of heat will be absorbed.

(B) Enthalpy of sublimation (ΔsubH) : The enthalpy change or the amount of heat absorbed that accompanies the sublimation of one mole of a solid directly into its vapour at constant temperature and pressure is called enthalpy of sublimation.
For example,
\(\mathrm{CO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})} \stackrel{1 \mathrm{~atm}, 195 \mathrm{~K}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{CO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)
ΔsubH = 25.2 kJ mol-1
This equation describes that when 1 mole of dry solid carbon dioxide, CO2(s) sublimes forming gaseous CO2(g), 25.2 kJ of heat will be absorbed.

Question 40.
Explain process of sublimation and enthalpy of sublimation ?
OR
How is enthalpy of sublimation related to enthalpy of fusion and enthalpy of vaporisation ?
Answer:
(1) The sublimation involves the conversion of a solid into vapour at constant temperature and pressure. For example,
H2O(s) → H2O(g), ΔsubH = 51.08 kJ mol-1 at 0°C.
(2) This conversion takes place in two steps, first melting of solid into liquid and second vaporisation of the liquid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 12
Hence we can write,
ΔsubH = ΔfusH + ΔvapH

Question 41.
Arrange the following in order of increasing enthalpy :
H2O(s), H2O(g), H2O(l)
Answer:
The increasing order of enthalpy of the given substance will be,
HH2O(g), < HH2O(l), < HH2O(s)
This is because the conversion of H2O(s) to H2O(l) and further to H2O(g) involves absorption of heat.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 42.
Define and explain :
(A) Enthalpy of atomisation
(B) Enthalpy of ionisation.
Answer:
(A) Enthalpy of atomisation (ΔatoH) : The enthalpy change or amount of heat absorbed accompanying the dissociation of the molecules in one mole of a gaseous substance into free gaseous atoms at constant temperature and pressure is called enthalpy of atomisation.
For example,
Cl2(g) → 2Cl(g), ΔatoH = 242 kJ mol-1
CH4(g) → C(g) + 4H(g), ΔatoH = 1660 kJ mol-1.

(B) Enthalpy of ionisation (ΔionH) : The enthalpy change or amount of heat absorbed accompanying the removal of one electron from each atom or ion in one mole of gaseous atoms or ions is called enthalpy of ionisation.
For example,
Na(g) → Na+(g) + e ΔionH = 494 kJ mol-1
This equation describes that when one mole of gaseous sodium atoms, Na(g) are ionised forming gaseous ions, Na+(g), the energy required is 494 kJ.

Question 43.
Define and explain electron gain enthalpy.
Answer:
Electron gain enthalpy (ΔegH) : It is defined as the enthalpy change, when mole of gaseous atoms of an element accept electrons to form gaseous ion.
E.g. Cl(g) + e → Cl(g) ΔegH = – 349 kJ mol-1.
It is the reverse of ionisation process.

Question 44.
Define enthalpy of solution.
Answer:
Enthalpy of solution : It is defined as the enthalpy change in a process when one mole of a substance is dissolved in specified amount of a solvent.
NaCl(s) + aq ⇌ NaCl(aq) ΔsolnH = 4 kJ mol-1

Question 45.
Define enthalpy of solution at infinite dilution.
Answer:
Enthalpy of solution (ΔsolnH) : It is defined as the enthalpy change when one mole of a substance is dissolved in a large excess of a solvent, so that further dilution will not change the enthalpy at constant temperature and pressure.
For example,
HCl(g) + aq → HCl(aq) ΔsolnH
= -75.14 kJ mol-1

Question 46.
Explain the enthalpy of solution of an ionic compound.
Answer:
An ionic compound dissolves in a polar solvent like water in two steps as follows :
Step-I : The ions are separated from the molecule involving crystal lattice enthalpy ΔLH.
\(\mathrm{MX}_{(\mathrm{s})} \rightarrow \mathrm{M}_{(\mathrm{g})}^{+}+\mathrm{X}_{(\mathrm{g})}^{-} \quad \Delta_{\mathrm{L}} H\)
ΔLH is always positive.

Step-II : The gaseous ions are hydrated with water molecules involving hydration energy, ΔhydH.
\(\mathbf{M}_{(\mathrm{g})}^{+}\) + xH2O(l) → [M(H2O)x]+
\(\mathrm{X}_{(\mathrm{g})}^{-}\) + yH2O(l) → [X(H2O)y]
ΔhydH is always negative.
The enthalpy change ΔsolnH of solution is given by,
ΔsolnH = ΔLH + ΔhydH
For example, consider enthalpy of solution of NaCl(s).
ΔLHNaCl = 790 kJ mol-1
ΔhydHNaCl = -786 kJ mol-1
Hence enthalpy change for solution of NaCl(s) is,
ΔsolnH = ΔLHNaCl + ΔhydHNaCl
= 790 + (-786)
= + 4 kJ mol-1
Therefore dissolution of NaCl in water is an endothermic process.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Solved Examples 4.9

Question 47.
Solve the following :

(1) Heat of fusion of ice at 0 °C and 1 atmosphere is 6.1 kJ mol-1 and heat of evaporation of water at 100 °C is 40.7 kJ mol-1. Calculate the enthalpy change for the conversion of 1 mole of ice at 0 °C into vapour at 100 °C. Heat capacity of water is 4.184 JK-1 mol-1.
Solution :
Given : Heat of fusion of ice = ΔfusH = 6.01 kJ mol-1
Heat of evaporation of water = ΔvapH = 40.7 kJ mol-1
Temperature of ice = 273 K
Temperature of vapour = (273 + 100) K = 373 K
Heat capacity of water = 4.184 JK-1 g-1
Heat capacity of 1 mole of water
= CH2O = 4.184 × 18
= 75.312 JK-1 mol-1
The conversion of ice at 0 °C to water at 100°C takes place in three steps as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 13
ΔH1 = nice × ΔfusH = 1mol × 6.01kJ mol-1 = 6.01 kJ
ΔH2 is the enthalpy change for raising the temperature from 273 K to 373 K.
ΔH2 = nwater × CH2O × (T2 – T1)
= 1mol × 75.312JK-1 mol-1 × (373 – 273)K
= 7531 J
= 7.531 kJ
ΔH3 = nwater × ΔvapH
= 1 × 40.7
= 40.7 kJ
Hence total enthalpy change will be ΔH = ΔH1 + ΔH2 + ΔH3
= 6.01 + 7.531 + 40.7
= 54.241 kJ
Ans. ΔH = 54.241 kJ

(2) Heat of sublimation of ice at 0°C and 1 atmosphere is 6.01 kJ mol-1 and heat of evaporation of water at 0 °C and 1 atmosphere is 45.07 kJ mol-1. Calculate the heat of sublimation of one mole of ice at 0 °C and 1 atmosphere. Write the equation for the same.
Solution :
The sublimation of ice can be represented by following equation,
\(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{s})} \stackrel{1 \mathrm{~atm}, 0^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{g})}\)
This is a process of two steps.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 14
ΔH1 = nH2O × ΔfusH
= 1 × 6.01 =6.01 kJ
ΔH2 = nH2O × ΔvapH
= 1 × 45.07 = 45.07
Heat of sublimation = ΔH = ΔH1 + ΔH2
= 6.01 + 45.07
= 51.08 kJ
Ans. Heat of sublimation of ice = 51.08 kJ

(3) Heat of evaporation of ethyl alcohol at 78.5 °C and 1 atmosphere is 38.6 kJ mol-1. If 100 g ethyl alcohol vapour is condensed, what will be ΔH ?
Solution :
Given : ΔvapHC2H5OH = 38.6 kJ mol-1
Mass of C2H5OH = m = 100 g
Molar mass of C2H5OH = M = 46 g mol-1
ΔcondHC2H5OH = ?
Number of moles of C2H5OH = \(\frac{m}{M}=\frac{100}{46}\)
= 2.174 mol
Heat of condensation = ΔcondH = -38.6 kJ mol-1
∴ ΔcondH = n × ΔcondH
= 2.174mol × (-38.6)kJ mol-1 kJ = – 83.9 kJ
Ans. Heat of condensation = ΔcondH = -83.9 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(4) The hydration enthalpies of Li+(g), and Br(g) are -500 kJ mol-1 and -350 kJ mol-1 respectively and the lattice energy of LiBr(s) is 807 kJmol-1. Write the thermochemical equations for enthalpy of solution of LiBr(s) and calculate its value.
Solution :
Given : Enthalpy of hydration of Li+(g)
= ΔhydH1
= -500 kJmol-1
Enthalpy of hydration of Br(g) = ΔhydH2
= -350 kJ mol-1
Lattice energy of LiBr(s) = ΔLH3 = 807 kJ mol-1
Enthalpy of solution of LiBr(s) = ΔsolnΔH = ?
The thermochemical equation for the dissolution of LiBr(s) forming a solution is,
LiBr(s) + aq → Li+(aq) + Br(aq) (I) ΔsolH = ?
This takes place in two steps as follows :
(i) LiBr(s) → Li+(g) + Br(g) ΔLH3
(ii) (a) Li+(g) + aq → Li+(aq) ΔhydH1
(b) Br(g) + aq → Br(aq) ΔhydH2
Hence by adding equations (i) and (ii) (a) and (b) we get equation I.
∴ ΔsolH = ΔLH3 + ΔhydH1 + ΔhydH2
= 807 + (-500) + (-350)
= -43 kJ mol-1
Ans. Heat of solution of LiBr(s) = ΔsolH = -43 kJ mol-1

(5) Heat of solution of NaCl is 3.9 kJ mol-1. If the lattice energy of NaCl is 787 kJ mol-1, calculate the hydration energies of ions of the salt.
Solution :
Given : Heat of solution of NaCl
= ΔsolnH0
= ΔH1 = 3.9 kJmol-1
Lattice energy of NaCl = ΔLH
= ΔH2 = 787 kJ mol-1
Hydration energy of Na+(g) and Cl(g)
= ΔhydH(Na+ + Cl)
= ΔH3 = ?
Thermochemical equation for dissolution of NaCl(s) is;
NaCl(s) + aq → Na+(aq) + Cl(aq)…ΔH1
NaCl(s) → Na+(g) + Cl(g)… ΔH2
Na+(g) + Cl(g) + aq → Na+(aq) + Cl(aq) ΔH3
∴ ΔH1 = ΔH2 + AH3
3.9 = 787 + AH3
∴ ΔH3 = -787 + 3.9= -783.1 kJmol-1
Ans. Hydration energy of Na+(g) and Cl(g)
= -783.1 kJmol-1

(6) Enthalpies of solution are given as follows :
CuSO4(s) + 10H2O → CUSO4(10H2O)
ΔH1 = -54.5 kJ mol-1
CuSO4(s) + 100 H2O → CUSO4(100H2O)
ΔH2 = -68.4 kJ mol-1
A solution contains 1 mol of CuSO4 in 180 g water at 25 °C. If it is diluted by adding 1620 g water, calculate the enthalpy of dilution.
Solution :
Given : Enthalpy of solution of CuSO4 in 10 mol H2O
= ΔsolnH = ΔH1 = -54.5 kJ mol-1
Enthalpy of solution of CuSO4 in 100 mol
H2O = ΔH2
= -68.4 kJmol-1
Mass of water = 1620 g
For dilution, ΔdilH = ?
Now 180 g H2O = \(\frac {180}{18}\) = 10 mol H2O
And, 1620 g H2O = \(\frac {1620}{18}\) = 90 mol H2O
Hence for heat of dilution,
CUSO4(10H2O) + 90H2O(l) → CUSO4(100H2O) ΔdilH = ?
∴ ΔdilH = ΔH2 -ΔH1
= -68.4 – (54.5)
= -13.9 kJmol-1
Ans. Heat of dilution = ΔdilH = -13.9 kJ mol-1

(7) Heat of solution and heat of hydration of AgF are -20.5kJmol-1 and -930kJmol-1 respectively. Calculate lattice energy of AgF.
Solution :
Given : Heat of solution of AgF = ΔsolnH
= -ΔH1 = -20.5 kJmol-1
Heat of hydration of AgF = ΔhydH = ΔH2
= -930 kJ mol-1
Lattice energy of AgF = ΔLH = ΔH3 = ?
For heat of solution, AgF(s) + aq → AgF(aq) ΔH1
For heat of hydration,
Ag+(g) + F(g) + aq → Ag+(aq) + F(aq) ΔH2
For Lattice energy, Ag+(g) + F(g) → AgF(s)
ΔLH = ?
From above equations,
∴ ΔH3 = ΔH2 – ΔH1
= -930 – (-20.5)
= -909.5 kJmol-1
Ans. Lattice energy of AgF(s) = -909.5 kJ mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(8) Bond enthalpy of H2 is 436kJmol-1 while hydration energy of hydrogen ion is -1075 kJ mol-1. Calculate the enthalpy of formation of H+(aq). (Ionisation energy of hydrogen is 1312 kJ mol-1
Solution :
Given : Bond enthalpy of H2(g) = ΔH0H2(g)
= 436 kJ mol-1
Hydration energy of H+(g) = ΔH2 = -1075 kJmol-1
Ionisation energy of H(g) = ΔH3 = 1312 kJ mol-1
Enthalpy of formation of H+(aq) = ΔfH = ?
Thermochemical equation for the formation of H+(aq)
\(\frac {1}{2}\)H2(g) + aq → H+(aq)ΔfH
This takes place in three steps as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 15
Hence heat of formation of H+(aq) is
ΔfH = ΔH1 + ΔH2 + ΔH3
= \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 436 + (-1075) + 1312
= 218 – 1075 + 1312.
= 455 kJ mol-1
Ans. Enthalpy of formation of H+(aq) = 455 kJmol-1

(9) Calculate lattice energy of crystalline sodium chloride from the following data :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 16
Solution :
Given : Bond enthalpy of Cl2 = ΔH0 = 244 kJmol-1
Thermochemical equation for the formation of 1 mole of NaCl(s),
\(\mathrm{Na}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{Cl}_{2} \longrightarrow \mathrm{NaCl}_{(s)} \quad \Delta_{\mathrm{f}} H_{\mathrm{NaCl}}^{0}=-411 \mathrm{~kJ}\)
Lattice energy, ΔLH = ?
Since enthalpy is a state function, this reaction can be written in various steps as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 17
By Hess’s law,
ΔLH0 = ΔsubH0+ ΔionH0 + \(\frac {1}{2}\)ΔH0cl2 + ΔegH0 + ΔLH0
-411 = 109 + 496 + \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 244 + (-348) + ΔLH
= 109 + 496 + 122 – 348 + ΔLH
∴ ΔLH= -790 kJ mol-1.
Ans. Lattice energy of NaCl(s) = -790 kJ mol

(10) Calculate the internal energy at 298 K for the formation of one mole of ammonia, if the enthalpy change at constant pressure is -42.0 kJ mol-1.
(Given : R = 8.314 J K-1 mol-1)
Solution :
Given : ΔH = -42.0 kJ mol-1, T = 298 K, ΔU = ?
\(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~N}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\frac{3}{2} \mathrm{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \longrightarrow \mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{~g})}\)
Δn = 1 – (\(\frac {1}{2}\) + \(\frac {3}{2}\)) = -1 mol
ΔH = ΔU + ΔnRT
∴ ΔU = ΔH – ΔnRT
= -42 – (- 1) × 8.314 × 298 × 10-3
= -42 + 2.477
= -39.523 kJ
Ans. ΔU = -39.523 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 48.
What is thermochemistry ? Explain.
Answer:
Thermochemistry : Thermodynamic study of heat changes or enthalpy changes during the chemical reactions is called thermochemistry.
Consider a reaction, Reactants → Products
The heat changes ΔH for the reaction may be represented as,
ΔHreaction = Σ Hproducts – Σ Hreactants
where H represents enthalpy.
The energy released or absorbed during a chemical change appears in the form of heat energy.

Question 49.
Define and explain the term, enthalpy or heat of reaction.
Answer:
Enthalpy or heat of reaction : The enthalpy of a chemical reaction is the difference between the sum of the enthalpies of products and that of the reactants with every substance in a definite physical state and in the amounts (moles) represented by the coefficients in the balanced equation.
Explanation : Consider the following general reaction,
aA + bB → cC + dD
The heat of the reaction ΔH is the difference in sum of enthalpies of products and sum of enthalpies of reactants.
∴ ΔH = Σ Hproducts – Σ Hreactants
= [cHC + dHD] – [aHA + bHB]
= ΣPH – ΣRZ
where H represents enthalpy of the substance.
For endothermic reaction, ΔH is positive, (ΔH > 0).
For exothermic reaction, ΔH is negative, (ΔH < 0).

Question 50.
Explain the sign convention used for ΔH.
Answer:
The change in enthalpy or heat of reaction ΔH is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 18
(i) If the sum of enthalpies of products, ΣH and reactants, ΣRH are equal then ΔH for the reaction is zero, (ΔH = 0).
i. e. ΣPH = ΣRH
∴ ΔH = ΣPH – ΣRH = 0
(ii) If the sum of enthalpies of products ΣPH is greater than the sum of enthalpies of reactants ΣRH, then ΔH is positive, (ΔH > 0). Since such reactions take place with the absorption of heat from surroundings, they are called endothermic reactions.
∴ ΣHproducts > ΣHreactants
∴ ΔH > 0
(iii) If the sum of enthalpies of products ΣPH is less than the sum of enthalpies of reactants, ΣRH then ΔH is negative, (ΔH < 0). Since in such reactions heat is given out to the surroundings, they are called exothermic reactions.
∴ ΣPH < ΣRH
∴ ΔH < 0

Question 51.
Define : (i) Exothermic process (ii) Endothermic process.
Answer:
(i) Exothermic process : A process taking place with the evolution of heat is called exothermic process.
For this process, Q is -ve, ΔH is -ve.
(ii) Endothermic process : A process taking place with the absorption of heat (from the surroundings) is called endothermic process.
For this process, Q is +ve, ΔH is +ve.

Question 52.
Distinguish between Endothermic reaction and Exothermic reaction.
Answer:
Endothermic reaction:

  • In endothermic reaction heat is absorbed from suroundings.
  • Sum of enthalpies of products is greater than sum of enthalpies of reactants i.e. ΣPH > ΣRH
  • Heat of reaction, ΔH is positive.
  • Products are less stable than reactants.
  • C(s) + O2(g) → CO2(g)
    ΔH = -394 kJ
  • This reaction requires supply of thermal energy.

Exothermic reaction:

  • In exothermic reaction heat is given out to surroundings.
  • Sum of enthalpies of products is less than sum of enthalpies of reactants.
    i.e. ΣPH < ΣRH
  • Heat of reaction, ΔH is negative.
  • Products are more stable than reactants.
  • N2(g) + O2(g) → 2NO
    ΔH = + 180 kJ
  • This reaction does not require supply of thermal energy.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 53.
Explain the standard state of an element.
Answer:
Standard state of an element : It is defined as the most stable state of an element at 298 K and 1 atmosphere (or 1 bar).
In this state, the enthalpy of the element is assumed to be zero.
∴ H0element or in general Helement = 0
∴ H0graphite = HH2(g) = 0; HNa(s) = 0; HHg(l) = 0

Question 54.
What is a thermochemical equation? Explain with an example.
Answer:
Thermochemical equation : It is defined as a balanced chemical equation along with the corresponding heat of reaction (ΔH) and physical states and number of moles of all reactants and all products appropriately mentioned.
E.g. C6H12O6(s) + 6O2(g) = 6CO2(g) + 6H2O(l)
ΔH = -2808 kJ mol-1

Question 55.
What are the guidelines followed for writing thermochemical equations?
Answer:
According to IUPAC conventions, while writing thermochemical equations, following rules must be followed :
(1) Reaction is represented by balanced chemical equation for the number of moles of the reactants and the products. E.g.
CH4(g) + 2O2(g) = CO2(g) + 2H2O(l)
ΔrH°= -890 kJ mol-1
(2) The physical states of all the substances in the reaction must be mentioned. E.g. (s) for solid, (l) for liquid and (g) for gas.
(3) Heat or enthalpy changes are measured at 298 K and 1 atmosphere (or 1 bar).
(4) ΔH0 is written at right hand side of thermochemical equation.
(5) Proper sign must be indicated for ΔH0. For endothermic reaction ΔH0 is positive, (+ΔH0) and for exothermic reaction ΔH is negative, (-ΔH0).
(6) The enthalpy of the elements in their standard states is taken as zero. (H0Element = 0; H0C(s) = 0, H0H2(g) = 0)
(7) When all the substances taking part in the reaction are in their standard states, the enthalpy change is written as ΔH0.
(8) The enthalpy of any compound is equal to its heat of formation.
(9) In case of elements, the allotropic form must be mentioned. E.g. C(graphite), S(rhombic), Sn(white)
(10) For the reverse reaction, ΔH0 value has equal magnitude but opposite sign.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 56.
Define the following terms giving examples :
(1) Standard enthalpy of reaction.
(2) Standard enthalpy of formation or standard heat of formation
(3) Standard enthalpy of combustion or standard heat of combustion.
Answer:
(1) Standard enthalpy of reaction : it is defined as the difference between the sum of enthalpies of products and that of the reactants with every substance in its standard state at constant temperature (298 K) and pressure (1 atm).
Reactants → Products
ΔH0reaction = ΣH0products – ΣH0reactants

(2) Standard enthalpy of formation or standard heat of formation (ΔfH0) : It is defined as the enthalpy change ΔH0 when one mole of a pure compound is formed in its standard state from its constituent elements in their standard states at constant temperature (298 K) and pressure (1 atmosphere or 1 bar). It is denoted by ΔfH0. E.g.
C(s) + O2(g) = CO2(g) ΔfH0= -394 kJ mol-1
fH0 may be positive or negative.)

(3) Standard enthalpy of combustion or standard heat of combustion : it is defined as the enthalpy change when one mole of a substance in the standard state undergoes complete combustion in a sufficient amount of oxygen at constant temperature (298 K) and pressure (1 atmosphere or 1 bar). It is denoted by ΔcH0.
E.g. CH3OH(l) + \(\frac {3}{2}\)O2(g) = CO2(g) + 2H2O
ΔCH0 = -726 kJ mol-1
cH0 is always negative.)
[Note : Calorific value : It is the enthalpy change or amount of heat liberated when one gram of a substance undergoes combustion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 19

Question 57.
Show that the standard heat of formation of a compound is equal to its enthalpy.
Answer:
Consider the formation of one mole of gaseous CO2 in the standard state at 298 K and 1 atmosphere. The thermochemical equation for formation can be represented as,
C(s) + O2(g) = CO2(g) ΔfH0 = -394 kJ mol-1
Now heat of this reaction, ΔH0 is,
ΔH0reaction = ΣPH0 – ΣRH0
∴ ΔfH0co2(g) = H0co2(g) – [H0c(s) + H0O2(g)]
Since the enthalpies of elements in their standard states are zero,
i.e.
H0c(s) = o, H0O2(g) = 0
∴ ΔfH0co2(g) = H0co2(g) – [0 + 0]
∴ ΔfH0co2 = Hco2(g)
Therefore standard heat of formation of a compound is equal to its enthalpy.

Question 58.
Standard enthalpy of formation of various following compounds are given. Write thermochemical equation for each :

Compound ΔfH0 KJ mol-1
Cao(s) -635.1
Al2Cl6(s) -1300
C2H6(g) -84.7
CH3COOH(l) -484.7
C2H5OH(l) -277.7
NaNO3(s) -950.8

Answer:
(Hint: Write one mole of the compound on right hand side and corresponding constituent elements along with their standard physical states on left hand side.)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 20

Question 59.
Standard enthalpy of combustion of different substances are given. Write thermochemical equation for each.

Substance ΔCH0 KJ mol-1
C(graphite) -393.5
C6H6(l) -3268
C2H5OH(l) -1409
CH3CHO -1166

Answer:
In the combustion reaction, C forms CO2(g),
H forms H2O(l), etc.
(1) C(graphite) + O2(g) → CO2(g)
ΔCH0 = -393.5 kJ mol-1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 21

Question 60.
Write the thermochemical equations for enthalpy of solution of :
(1) Glucose (C6H12O6)
(2) NaCl(s)
(3) CaBr2(s)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 22

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 61.
How is standard enthalpy of formation useful to calculate standard enthalpy of reaction ?
Answer:
(1) The standard enthalpies of formation, ΔfH0 of the compounds can be used to determine the standard enthalpy of reaction (ΔrH0).
(2) ΔrH0 of a reaction can be obtained by subtracting the sum of ΔfH0 values of all the reactants from the sum of ΔfH0 values of all the products with each ΔfH0 value multiplied by the appropriate coefficient of that substance in the balanced thermochemical equation.
(3) Consider following reaction :
aA + bB → cC + dD
The standard enthalpy of the reaction is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 23
where a, b, c and d are the coefficients (moles) of the substances A, B, C and D respectively.

Question 62.
Write the balanced chemical equation that have ΔH0 value equal to ΔfH0 for each of the following substances :
(1) C2H2(g)
(2) KCIO3(s)
(3) C12H22O11(s) (4) CH3-CH2-OH(1)
Answer:
ΔfH0 represents the standard enthalpy of formation of each given substance. Hence it is necessary to write thermochemical equation for the formation of each substance. ΔH0 of this formation reaction is equal to standard heat of formation, ΔfH0.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 24

Question 63.
Consider the chemical reaction,
OF2(g) + H2O(g) → O2(g) + 2HF(g) ΔH0 = -323 kJ
What is ΔH0 of the reaction if (a) the equation is multiplied by 3, (b) direction of reaction is reversed?
Answer:
(a) If the given thermochemical equation is multiplied by 3 then,
ΔrH0 = 3ΔH0 = 3 × (-323) = -969 kJ
(b) If the direction of equation is reversed, then the reaction will be,
O2(g) + 2HF(g) → OF2(g) + H2O(g)
∴ ΔrH0 = – ΔH0 = – (- 323) = + 323 kJ

Question 64.
Define bond enthalpy (or bond energy).
Answer:
Bond enthalpy (or Bond energy) : The enthalpy change or amount of heat energy required to break one mole of particular covalent bonds of gaseous molecules forming free gaseous atoms or radicals at constant temperature (298 K) and pressure (1 atmosphere) is called bond enthalpy or bond energy. For example, bond enthalpy of H2 is 436.4 kJ mol-1.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 65.
Explain bond enthalpy of diatomic molecules.
Answer:
In case of diatomic molecules, since there is only one bond, the bond enthalpy is equal to heat of atomisation. For example, heat of atomisation of
HCl(g) is 431.9 kJ mol-1.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 25
(Bond enthalpy is generally denoted by D).

Question 66.
Explain bond enthalpy in polyatomic molecules.
Answer:
Consider bond enthalpy in H2O. The thermochemical equation for dissociation of H2O(g) is,
H2O(g) → 2H(g) + O(g), ΔrH0 = 927 kJ mol-1
In this, two O – H bonds are broken. It can be represented in stepwise as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 26
In above, even if two identical O – H bonds are borken, the energies required to break each bond are different.
The average bond enthalpy of O – H bond is,
ΔrH0 = \(\frac {927}{2}\) = 463.5 kJ mol-1

Solved Examples 4.10

Question 67.
Solve the following :

(1) Standard enthalpy of formation of ethane, C2H6(g) is -84.7 kJ mol-1. Calculate the enthalpy change for the formation of 0.1 kg ethane.
Solution :
Given : Enthalpy of formation of C2H6(g)
= ΔfH0 = ΔH1 = -84.7 kJ mol-1
Mass of C2H6(g) = 0.1 kg = 100 g
Molar mass ofC2H6 = 30 g mol-1
ΔH0 for the formation of 0.1 kg C2H6 = 100 g
C2H6 = ΔH2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 27
Ans. Heat of formation = -282.3 kJ

(2) When 10 g C2H5OH(l) are formed, 51 kJ heat is liberated. Calculate standard enthalpy of formation of C2H5OH(l).
Solution :
Given : Mass of C2H5OH(l) = m = 10 g
Heat liberated = ΔH1 = -51 kJ
Molar mass of C2H5OH = 46 gmol-1
Standard enthalpy of formation of C2H5OH(l)
= ΔfH = ?
Standard enthalpy of formation is the enthalpy change for the formation of 1 mole C2H5OH(l) i.e., 46 g C2H5OH(l).
Now,
∵ For the formation of 10 g C2H5OH(l)
ΔH1 = -51 kJ
∴ For the formation of 46 g C2H5OH,
ΔfH0 = \(\frac{-51 \times 46}{10}\) = – 234.6 kJ mol-1
Ans. Standard enthalpy of formation of C2H5OH = ΔfH0 = – 234.6 kJ mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(3) Standard enthalpy of combustion of CH3OH is -726kJ mol-1. Calculate enthalpy change for the combustion of 0.5 kg CH3OH.
Solution :
Given : Standard enthalpy of combustion of
CH3OH = ΔCH0 = ΔH1 = -726 kJ mol-1
Mass of CH3OH = m = 0.5 kg = 500 g
Molar mass of CH3OH = 32 g mol-1
Enthalpy of combustion = ΔCH = ΔH2 = ?
Now,
Enthalpy of combustion is ΔH for the combustion of 1 mole CH3OH = 32 g CH3OH.
∵ For 1 mole CH3OH = 32g CH3OH
ΔH1 = – 726 kJ
∴ For 500 g CH3OH, ΔH2 = \(\frac{-726 \times 500}{32}\)
= -11344 kJ
Ans. Enthalpy change for combustion of 0.5 kg CH3OH = – 11344 kJ

(4) The heat evolved in a reaction of 7.5 g of Fe2O3 with enough CO is 1.164 kJ.
Calculate ΔH0 for the reaction,
Fe2O3(s) + 3CO(g) → 2Fe(s) + 3CO2(g)
Solution :
Fe2O3(s) + 3CO(g) → 2Fe(s) + 3CO2(g)
ΔH = -1.164 kJ
Atomic mass of Fe = 56 g mol-1
Atomic mass of O = 16 g mol-1
Mass of Fe2O3 = 7.5 g
ΔH = -1.164 kJ
ΔH0 for reaction = ?
Molar mass of Fe2O3 = 2 × 56 + 3 × 16
= 160 g mol-1
∵ For 7.5 g Fe2O3 ΔH= – 1.164 kJ
∴ For 160 g Fe2O3
ΔH0 = \(\frac{-1.164 \times 160}{7.5}\) = -24.86 kJ mol-1
Ans. ΔH0 for the reaction = -24.83 kJ mol-1

(5) Calculate the standard enthalpy of the reaction,
2C (graphite) + 3H2(g) → C2H6(g), ΔH0 = ? from the following ΔH0 values :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 28
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 29
Ans. Standard enthalpy of formation of C2H6 = -84.4 kJ mol-1

(6) The enthalpy of combustion of ethane is -1300 kJ. How much heat will be evolved by combustion of 1.3 × 10-3 kg of ethane?
Solution :
Given : ΔCHC2H6(g) = -1300 kJ mol-1
ΔH = ?
Amount of C2H6(g) = 1.3 × 10-3 kg
Molar mass of C2H6 = 30 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Number of moles of C2H6
= nC2H6 = \(\frac{1.3 \times 10^{-3}}{30 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 4,333 × 10-2 mol
For, combustion of 1 mol C2H6 ΔH = -1300 kJ
∴ For combustion of 4.333 × 10-2 mol C2H6,
ΔH = 4.333 × 10-2 × ( -1300) = – 56.33 kJ
Ans. Heat evolved is -56.33 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(7) Calculate heat of formation of pentane from the following data :
(i) C(s) + O2(g) = CO2(g) ΔH0 = -393.51 kJ
(ii) H2(g) + \(\frac {1}{2}\)O2(g) = H2O(l) ΔH0 = -285.80 kJ
(iii) C5H12 + 😯2(g) = 5CO2(g) + 6H2O1 ΔH0 = -3537 kJ
Solution :
Given :
(i) CO(s) + O2(g) = CO2(g) ….. (1)
\(\Delta H_{1}^{0}\) = -393.51 kJ mol-1
(ii) H2(g) + \(\frac {1}{2}\)O2(g) = H2O(l) … (2)
\(\Delta H_{2}^{0}\) = – 285.80 kJ mol-1
(iii) C5H12(g) + 😯2(g) = 5CO2(g) + 6H2O(l) ….. (3)
\(\Delta H_{3}^{0}\) = -3537 kJ mol-1
Required thermochemical equation :
5C(s) + 6H2(g) → C5H12(g) – ΔH = ?
Add 5 × equation (1) and 6 × equation (2) and subtract equation (3), then we get the required equation.
∴ ΔH0 = 5 \(\Delta H_{1}^{0}\) + 6 \(\Delta H_{2}^{0}\) – \(\Delta H_{3}^{0}\)
= 5( -393.52) + 6( -285.8) – (-3537)
= -1967.6 – 1714.8 + 3537
= -145.4 kJ mol-1
Ans. ΔfH0C5H12 = -145.4 kJ mol-1

(8) How much heat is evolved when 12 g of CO react with NO2 according to the following reaction,
4CO(g) + 2NO2(g) → 4CO2(g) + N2(g), ΔH0 = -1198 kJ ?
Solution :
Given : Mass of CO(g) = m = 12 g
Molar mass of CO = 28 g mol-1
4CO(g) + 2NO2(g) → 4CO2(g) + N2(g)
ΔrH0 = -1198 kJ
Mass of 4 moles of CO = 4 × 28 g CO = 112 g CO
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 30
Ans. Heat evolved during combustion of 12 g CO = 128.4 kJ, or ΔCH = -128.4 kJ

(9) The heats of formation of C12H22O11(S), CO2(g) and H2O(l) are -2271.82, – 393.50 and 285.76 kJ respectively. Calculate the amount of cane sugar (C12H22O11(S)) which will supply 11296.8 kJ of energy.
Solution :
Given : ΔfHC12H22O11(S) = -2271.82 J mol-1
ΔfHCO2(g) = – 393.5 kJ mol-1
ΔfHH2O(l) = – 285.76 kJ mol-1
Energy required = 11296.8 kJ
Thermochemical equation for combustion of C12H22O11(S) is represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 31
= [ 12(-393.5) + 11 (-285.76] – [-2271.82 + 12(0)]
= [ -4722 – 3143.36] + 2271.82
= -5593.54 kJ mol-1
Molar mass of C12H22O11(S) = 342
To obtain 5593.5 kJ energy, C12H22O11(S) required is 342 gram.
Hence for 11296.8 energy, the amount of C12H22O11(S) required as = \(\frac{11296.8 \times 342}{5593.54}\)
= 690.7 g
Ans. Amount of sugar required = 690.7 g

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(10) 6.24 g of ethanol are vaporized by supplying 5.89 kJ of heat energy. What is enthalpy of vaporization of ethanol?
Solution :
Given : Mass of ethanol (C2H5OH) = m = 6.24 g
Heat energy supplied = ΔH = 5.89 kJ
Heat of vaporisation of ethanol = ΔvapH = ?
Molar mass of ethanol, C2H5OH = 46 g mol-1
∵ For 6.24 g C2H5OH ΔH = 5.89kJ
∴ For 1 mole C2H5OH = 46 g C2H5OH
ΔH = \(\frac{5.89 \times 46}{6.24}\)
= 43.42 kJ mol-1
∴ Enthalpy of vaporisation of C2H5OH(l)
= 43.42 kJ
Ans. Enthalpy of vaporisation of C2H5OH(l)
= 43.42 kJ

(11) Given the following equations calculate the standard enthalpy of the reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 32
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 33
By subtracting eq. (ii) from eq. (iii), we get eq. (i)
∴ eq. (i) = eq. (iii) – eq. (ii)
\(\Delta H_{1}^{0}=\Delta H_{3}^{0}-\Delta H_{2}^{0}\)
= -1670 – (-847.6)
= – 822.4 kJ
∴ ΔrH0 = ΔH01 = -822.4 kJ
Ans. Standrad enthalpy of the reaction = ΔrH0 = -822.4 kJ

(12) Calculate the standard enthalpy of combustion of CH2COOH(l) from the following data : ΔfH0(CO2) = -393.3 kJ mol-1
ΔfH0(H2O) = -285.8 kJ mol-1
ΔfH0(CH3COOH) = -483.2 kJ mol-1
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 34
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 35
∴ ΔH1 = 2ΔH2 + 2ΔH3 – ΔH4
= 2(-393.3) + 2(-285.8) – (-483.2)
= -786.6 – 571.6 + 483.2
= -875 kJ mol-1
Ans. Standard enthalpy of combustion of CH3COOH = -875 kJ mol-1.

(13) The bond enthalpies of H2(g), Br2(g) and HBr(g) are 436 kJ mol-1, 193 kJ mol-1 and 366 kJ mol-1 respectively. Calculate the enthalpy change for the following reaction,
H2(g) + Br2(g) → 2HBr(g).
Solution :
Given : Bond enthalpy of H2(g) = ΔH0H2(g)
= 436 kJ mol-1
Bond enthalpy of Br2(g) = ΔH0Br2(g) = 193 kJ mol-1
Bond enthalpy of HBr(g) = ΔH0HBr(g) = 366 kJ mol-1
Given reaction,
H2(g) + Br2(g) → 2HBr(g)
OR
H-H(g) + Br-Br(g) → 2H-Br(g)
The enthalpy change of the reaction is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 36
= [436 + 193] – 2[366]
= 629 – 732
= -103 kJ
Ans. Enthalpy change for the reaction = ΔrH0
= -103 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(14) Calculate ΔrH0 of the reaction
CH4(g) + O2(g) → CH2O(g) + H2O(g)
From the following data:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 37
Solution:
Given:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 38
Standard enthalpy change for the reaction = ΔrH0 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 39
= [ 2ΔH0C-H + ΔH0o=o ] – [ΔH0C=o + 2ΔH0o-H]
= [2 × 414 + 499] – [745 + 2 × 464]
= [828 + 499] – [745 + 928]
= -346 kJ
Ans. Standard enthalpy change for the reaction = ΔrH0 = -346 kJ

(15) Calculate C-Cl bond enthalpy from the following data :
CH3Cl(g) + Cl2(g) → CH2Cl2(g) + HCl(g) ΔH0 = – 104 kJ

Bond C–H Cl–Cl H–Cl
ΔH0/KJ mol-1 414 243 431

(330 kJ mol-1)
Solution :
Given :

Bond C–H Cl–Cl H–Cl
ΔH0/KJ mol-1 414 243 431

For the given reaction, ΔrH0 = -104 kJ
Bond enthalpy of C-Cl = ΔH0C–Cl] = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 40
In this reaction, 1 C–H, 1 Cl–Cl bonds of the reactants are broken while 1C–Cl and 1H–Cl bonds of the products are formed.
Sum of bond enthalpies of bonds formed of the products
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 41
Ans. Bond enthalpy of C–Cl = ΔH0C–Cl
= 330 kJ mol-1

(16) The enthalpy change for the atomisation of 1010 molecules of ammonia is 1.94 × 10-11 kJ. Calculate the bond enthalpy of N-H bond.
Solution :
Given : Enthalpy change for atomisation of 1010 molecules = 1.94 × 10-11 kJ
Number of NH3 molecules dissociate = 1010
Bond enthalpy of N-H = ΔH = ?
1 mole of NH3 contains 6.022 × 1023 NH3 molecules.
∵ For atomisation of 1010 molecules of NH3
ΔH = 1.94 × 10-11 kJ
∴ For atomisation of 6.022 × 1023 molecules of NH3,
ΔH = \(\frac{1.94 \times 10^{-11} \times 6.022 \times 10^{23}}{10^{10}}\)
= 1168 kJ mol-1
In NH3 three N-H bonds are broken on atomisation.
NH3(g) → N(g) + 3H(g) ΔH = 1168 kJ mol-1
∴ Average bond enthalpy of N-H bond is,
ΔH = \(\frac{1168}{3}\) = 389.3 kJ mol-1
Ans. Bond enthalpy of N-H bond
= 389.3 kJ mol-1

(17) Calculate the enthalpy of atomisation (or dissociation) of CH2Br2(g) at 25°C from the following data :

Bond enthalpies C-H C-Br
ΔH0 kJ mol-1 414 352

Solution :
Given : Bond enthalpies : ΔH0C-H
= 414 kJ mol-1;
ΔH0C-Br = 352 kJ mol-1
Enthalpy of atomisation of CH2Br2(g) = ?
Thermochemical equation for atomisation (or dissociation) of CH2Br2 is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 42
ΔatomH° = sum of bond enthalpies of all bonds broken
= 2ΔH0C-H + 2ΔH0C-Br
= 2 × 414 + 2 × 352
= 828 + 704
= 1532 kJ mol-1
Ans. Enthalpy of atomisation of CH2Br2(g)
= 1532 kJ mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(18) Enthalpy of sublimation of graphite is 716 kJ mol-1.

Bond enthalpy H-H C-H
ΔH0 kJ mol-1 436.4 414

Calculate standard enthalpy of formation of CH4.
Solution :
Given : ΔsubH0graphite = 716 kJ mol-1

Bond enthalpy H-H C-H
ΔH0 kJ mol-1 436.4 414

Thermochemical equation for the formation of CH4,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 43
= [716 + 2 × 436.4] – [4 × 414]
= [716+ 872.8] – [1656]
= 1588.8 – 1656
= -67.2 kJ mol-1
Ans. Standard enthalpy of formation of CH4 = ΔfH0CH4(g) = -67.2 kJ mol-1

(19) Calculate enthalpy of formation of propane from the following data :
Heat of sublimation of graphite is 716 kJ mo-1.

Bond enthalpy H-H C-H C-C
ΔH0 kJ mol-1 436.4 414 350

Solution :
Given: Enthalpy of sublimation of graphite = ΔsubH0C
= 716 kJmol-1

Bond enthalpy H-H C-H C-C
ΔH0 kJ mol-1 436.4 414 350

Enthalpy of formation of propane = ΔfH0 = ?
Thermochemical equation of the formation of propane, CH3-CH2-CH3,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 44
= [3 × 716 + 4 × 436.4] – [2 × 350 + 8 × 414]
= [2148 + 1745.6] – [700 + 3312]
= -118.4 kJmol-1
Ans. Enthalpy of formation of propane (C3H8)
= -118.4 kJmol-1

(20) The standard enthalpy of formation of propene, CH3-CH = CH2 is -13.2 kJ mol-1. Enthalpy of sublimation (atomisation) of graphite is 716 kJmol-1.

Bond enthalpy H-H C-H C-C
ΔH0 kJ mol-1 436.4 414 350

Calculate bond enthalpy of C = C
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 45
Bond enthalpy of C = C = ΔH0C=C = ?
For the formation of propene, (CH3 – CH = CH2),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 46
13.2 = [3 × 716 + 3 × 436.4] – [6 × 414 + 350 + \(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\) ]
= [2148 + 1309.2] – [2484 + 350 + \(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\) ]
= [3457.2] – [2834 + \(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\) ]
= 3457.2 – 2834 – \(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\)
\(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\) = 3457.2 – 2834 – 13.2
= 610 kJmol-1
Ans. Bond enthalpy of C = C = \(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\)
= 610 kJ mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(21) Calculate the enthalpy of the reaction,
CH3COOH(g) + CH3CH2OH(g) → CH3COOCH2CH3(g) + H2O(g)
Bond enthalpies of O-H, C-O, in kJmol-1 are 464, 351 respectively.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 47
In this reaction 1O-H and 1C-0 bond of the reactants are broken while 1C-0 and 1O-H bonds of the products are formed. Enthalpy of reaction,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 48
Ans. Hence Enthalpy change for the reaction = ΔrH0 = 0.

Question 68.
(1) What is a spontaneous process?
(2) What are its characteristics?
Answer:
(1) Spontaneous process : It is defined as a process that takes place on its own or without the intervention of the external agency or influence. For example, expansion of a gas or flow of a gas from higher pressure to low pressure or a flow of heat from higher temperature to lower temperature.

(2) Characteristics :

  • It occurs on its own and doesn’t require external agency.
  • It proceeds in one direction and can’t be completely reversed by external stimulant.
  • These processes may be fast or slow.
  • These processes proceed until an equilibrium is reached.

Question 69.
Give the examples of spontaneous processes.
Answer:
The examples of the spontaneous processes are as follows :

  1. All natural processes are spontaneous.
  2. A flow of gas from higher pressure to lower pressure.
  3. Flow of water on its own from higher level to lower level.
  4. Flow of heat from hotter body to colder body.
  5. Acid-base neutralisation is a spontaneous reaction.

Question 70.
What is relation between spontaneity and energy of a system ?
Answer:
(1) The spontaneous process takes place in a direction in which energy of the system decreases. For example, neutralisation reaction between NaOH and HCl solution is exothermic with release of energy.

(2) The spontaneous process also takes place with the increase in energy by absorbing heat. For example,
(a) Melting of ice at 0 °C by absorption of heat
(b) Dissolution of NaCl,
NaCl(s) + aq → NaCl(aq) → Na+(aq) + Cl(aq)
ΔH0 = + 3.9 kJ mol-1

Question 71.
Which of the following are spontaneous ?
(a) Dissolving sugar in hot coffee.
(b) Separation of Ar and Kr from their mixture.
(c) Spreading of fragrance when a bottle of perfume is opened.
(d) Flow of heat from cold object to hot object.
(e) Heat transfer from ice to room temperature at 25 °C.
Answer:
The spontaneous processes are :
(a) Dissolving sugar in hot coffee.
(b) Separation of Ar and Kr from their mixture.
(c) Spreading of fragrance when a bottle of perfume is opened.

The non-spontaneous processes are :
(d) Flow of heat from cold object to hot object.
(e) Heat transfer from ice to room temperature at 25 °C.

Question 72.
Explain : (a) Order in a system.
(b) Disorder in a system.
Answer:
(a) (i) When the atoms, molecules or ions constituting the system are arranged in a perfect order then the system is said to be in order. For example, in the solid state, the constituent atoms, molecules or ions are tightly placed at lattice points in the crystal lattice.
(ii) When solid melts forming a liquid or when a liquid vaporises, the constituents are separated and are in random motion imparting maximum disorder.
(iii) As energy of the system decreases order increases.

(b) Increase in entropy is a measure of disorder in the system. Consider following process :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 49
Fig. 4.11 : Order decreases and disorder increases, Entropy increases

Question 73.
What is the change in order and entropy in the following :
(i) Dissolution of solid I2 in water.
(ii) Dissociation of H2(g) into atoms ?
Answer:
(i) For dissolution of solid I2,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 50
In the solid I2, there is ordered arrangement which collapses in solution increasing disorder and entropy, hence ΔS is positive.

(ii) In the dissociation of H2(g)
H2(g) → 2H(g) (ΔS > 0)
In the molecular state, two H atoms in every molecule are together but in atomic state the disorder is increased with the increase in entropy and hence ΔS > 0.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 74.
How does addition of heat to a system at different temperatures changes disorder or ΔS ?
Answer:

  • The amount of heat added to a system at higher temperature causes less disorder than when the heat is added at lower temperature.
  • Since disorder depends on the temperature at which heat is added, ΔS relates reciprocally to temperature.
  • This can also be explained from equation,
    ΔS = \(\frac{Q_{\text {rev }}}{T}\)

Question 75.
Explain the change in entropy for the following processes :
(i) 2H2O2(l) → 2H2O(l) + O2(g)
(ii) 2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(l)
(iii) When ice melts at 0 °C and water vaporises at 100 °C.
Answer:
(i) In the following reaction,
2H2O2(l) → 2H2O(l) + O2(g) ΔS = + 126 JK
Due to formation of O2 gas from liquid, entropy increases.
(ii) In the reaction, entropy decreases due to formation of liquid H2O from gaseous H2 and O2.
(iii) \(\text { Ice } \stackrel{0^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{\longrightarrow} \text { water } \stackrel{100^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{\longrightarrow} \text { vapour }\)
In these two steps, entropy increases due to increase in disorder from solid ice to liquid water and further to gaseous state.

Question 76.
How does entropy change in the following processes ? Explain.
(a) freezing of a liquid
(b) sublimation of a solid
(c) dissolving sugar in water
(d) condensation of vapour.
Answer:
(a) Freezing of a liquid results in decrease in randomness and disorder, hence entropy decreases, ΔS < 0.
(b) Sublimation of a solid converts it into vapour where the molecules or atoms are free to move randomly. Hence disorder increases accompanying increase in entropy, ΔS > 0.
(c) Dissolving sugar in water separates the molecules of sugar in the solution increasing disorder and entropy, ΔS > 0.
(d) Condensation of vapour decreases the disorder and randomness, hence entropy, ΔS < 0.

Question 77.
Predict the sign of ΔS in the following processes. Give reasons for your answer :
OR
Explain with reason sign conventions of ΔS in the following reactions.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 51
Answer:
(a) N2O4(g) → 2NO2(g)
Since 1 mole N2O4 on dissociation gives two moles of NO2, the number of molecules increase, disorder increases hence entropy increases, ΔS > 0.

(b) Fe2O3(s) + 3H2(g) → 2Fe(s) + 3H2O(g)
In the reaction number of moles of gaseous reactants and products are same, hence ΔS = 0.

(c) N2(g) + 3H2(g) → 2NH3(g)
In the reaction, 4 moles of gaseous reactants form 2 moles of gaseous products (Δn < 0). Therefore disorder decreases and hence entropy decreases, ΔS < 0.

(d) MgCO3(s) → MgO(s) + CO2(g)
In this 1 mole of orderly solid MgCO3 gives 1 mole of solid MgO and 1 mole of gaseous CO2 (Δn > 0) with more disorder. Hence entropy increases, ΔS > 0.

(e) CO2(g) → CO2(s)
In this system from higher disorder in gaseous state changes to less disorder in the solid state, hence entropy decreases, ΔS < 0.

(f) Cl2(g) → 2Cl(g)
Since the dissociation of Cl2 gas gives double Cl atoms, the number of atoms increases (Δn >0) increasing the disorder of the system. Hence ΔS > 0.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 78.
Identify which of the following pairs has larger entropy ? Why ?
(a) He(g) in a volume of 1 L or He(g) in a volume of 5 L both at 25 °C.
(b) O2(g) at 1 atm or O2(g) at 10 atm both at the same temperature.
(c) C2H5OH(l) or C2H5OH(g)
(d) 5 mol of Ne or 2 mol of Ne.
Answer:
(a) Atoms of He in 5 L at 25 °C occupy more volume than in 1 L. Hence, the randomness and disorder is more in 5 L. Expansion of a gas always increases its entropy. Therefore He(g) in 5L will have larger entropy.

(b) O2(g) at 1 atm will occupy more volume than O2(g) at 10 atm at the same temperature. Hence at 1 atm O2(g) will have higher disorder and hence higher entropy.

(c) The molecules of gaseous C2H5OH(g) will have more disorder and randomness due to free motion of molecules than C2H5OH(l). Hence entropy of C2H5OH(g) will be larger.

(d) 5 mol Ne will contain more Ne atoms than 2 mol Ne. Hence disorder in 5 mol will be more. Therefore 5 mol Ne will have larger entropy.

Question 79.
Mention entropy change (ΔS) for :
(i) spontaneous process
(ii) nonspontaneous process
(iii) at equilibrium.
Answer:
(a) ΔStotal > 0, the process is spontaneous
(b) ΔStotal < 0, the process is non-spontaneous
(c) ΔStotal = 0, the process is at equilibrium.

Question 80.
Define Gibbs free energy and change in free energy. What are the units of Gibbs free energy ?
OR
Derive the relation between ΔG and ΔS Total.
Answer:
(i) Gibbs free energy, G is defined as,
G = H – TS
where H is the enthalpy, S is the entropy of the system at absolute temperature T.
Since H, T and S are state functions, G is a state function and a thermodynamic function.

(ii) At constant temperature and pressure, change in free energy ΔG for the system is represented as, ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 52
This is called Gibbs free energy equation for ΔG. In this ΔS is total entropy change, i.e., ΔSTotal.

(iii) The SI units of ΔG are J or kJ (or Jmol-1 or kJmol-1).
The c.g.s. units of ΔG are cal or kcal (or cal mol-1 or kcal mol-1.)

Question 81.
Explain Gibbs free energy and spontaneity of the process.
Answer:
The total entropy change for a system and its surroundings accompanying a process is given by,
ΔSTotal = ΔSsystem + ΔSsurr
By second law, for a spontaneous process,
ΔSTotal > 0. If + ΔH is the enthalpy change (or enthalpy increase) for the process, or a reaction at constant temperature (T) and pressure, then enthalpy change (or enthalpy decrease) for the surroundings will be -ΔH.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 53
By Gibbs equation,
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
By comparing above two equations,
∴ ΔG = -TΔSTotal
As ΔSTotal increases, ΔG decreases.
For a spontaneous process, ΔSTotal > 0
which is according to second law of thermodynamics.
∴ ΔG < 0.
Hence in a spontaneous process, Gibbs free energy decreases (ΔG < 0) while entropy increases (ΔS > 0).
Therefore for a non-spontaneous process Gibbs free energy increases (Δ G > 0).
It can be concluded that for a process at equilibrium, ΔG=0.
Hence,

  • For the spontaneous process, Δ G < 0
  • For the non-spontaneous process, Δ G > 0
  • For the process at equilibrium, Δ G = 0.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 82.
How does second law of thermodynamics explain the conditions of spontaneity ?
Answer:
The second law explains the conditions of spontaneity as below :
(i) ΔStotal  > 0 and ΔG < 0, the process is spontaneous.
(ii) ΔStotal  < 0 and ΔG > 0, the process is nonspontaneous.
(iii) ΔStotal = 0 and ΔG = 0, the process is at equilibrium.

Question 83.
Discuss the factors, ΔH, ΔS and ΔG for spontaneous and non-spontaneous processes.
OR
What can be said about the spontaneity of reactions when (1) ΔH and ΔS are both positive (2) ΔH and ΔS are both negative (3) ΔH is positive and ΔS is negative (4) ΔH is negative and ΔS is positive.
Answer:
For a spontaneous or a non-spontaneous process, ΔH and ΔS may be positive or negative (ΔH < 0 or ΔH > 0; ΔS < 0 or ΔS > 0). But ΔG must decrease, i.e., ΔG < 0. If ΔG > 0, the process or a reaction will definitely be non-spontaneous. This can be explained by Gibbs equation, ΔG = ΔH – TΔS.
(1) If ΔH and ΔS are both negative, then ΔG will be negative only when TΔS < ΔH or when temperature T is low. Such reactions must be carried out at low temperatures.
(2) If ΔH and ΔS are both positive then ΔG will be negative if, TΔS > ΔH; such reactions must be carried out at high temperature.
(3) If ΔH is negative (ΔH < 0) and ΔS is positive (ΔS > 0) then for all temperatures ΔG will be negative and the reaction will be spontaneous. But as temperature increase, ΔG will be more negative, hence the reaction will be more spontaneous at higher temperature.
(4) If ΔH is positive, (ΔH > 0) and ΔS is negative (ΔS < 0), ΔG will be always positive (ΔG > 0) and hence the reaction will be non-spontaneous at all temperatures.

This can be summarised in the following table :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 54

Question 84.
Obtain a temperature condition for equilibrium.
Answer:
For a system at equilibrium, free energy change ΔG is,
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
where ΔH is enthalpy change, ΔS is entropy change at temperature, T. Since ΔG = 0 at equilibrium,
O = ΔH – TΔS
∴ TΔS = ΔH
OR T = \(\frac{\Delta H}{\Delta S}\)
Hence at temperature T, changeover between forward spontaneous step and backward non-spontaneous step occurs and the system attains an equilibrium.
Here ΔH and ΔS are assumed to be independent of temperature.

Question 85.
Predict the signs of ΔH, ΔS and ΔG of the system when a solid melts at 1 atmosphere and at (a) -55 °C (b) -95 °C (c) -77 °C, if the normal melting point of the solid is -77 °C.
Answer:
Since the normal melting point of the solid is -77°C, to melt the solid at any temperature other than at -77 °C, the pressure is required to be changed. During the phase change, the system will be at equilibrium, hence Δ G = 0.
(a) In case a solid at -55 °C, the temperature should be decreased (ΔH < 0, ΔS < 0) to -77 °C and then it will melt, so ΔH > 0, ΔS > 0, ΔG = 0.
(b) In case of a solid at -95 °C, it represents supercooled system and the temperature should be raised to -77 °C (ΔH > 0, ΔS > 0) and then it will melt so ΔH > 0, ΔS > 0, ΔG = 0.
(c) At -77 °C, solid will melt, solid and liquid will be at equilibrium. Melting involves absorption of heat,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 55
ΔH >0, ΔS > 0, ΔG = 0.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Solved Examples 4.11

Question 86.
Solve the following :

(1) In an isothermal reversible process, 6 kJ heat is absorbed at 27 °C. Calculate the entropy change.
Solution :
Given : Temperature = T = 273 + 21 = 300 K
Heat absorbed = Qrev = 6 kJ = 6000 J
Entropy change = ΔS = ?
ΔS = \(\frac{Q_{\text {rev }}}{T}=\frac{6000}{300}\) = 20 JK-1
Ans. Entropy change = ΔS = 20 JK-1

(2) The latent heat of evaporation of water is 2.26 kJ g-1 at 1 atm and 100 °C. Calculate the entropy change for evaporation of 1 mole of water at 100 °C.
Solution :
Given : Latent heat of evaporation = ΔvapH0
= 2.26 kJ g-1
Temperature = T = 273 + 100 = 373 K
Molar mass of water = 18 g mol-1
ΔS = ?
For 1g H2O(l) ΔvapH0 = 2.26 KJ
∴ For 1 mol H2O(l) = 18 g H2O(l)
ΔvapH0 = 2.26 × 18
= 40.68 kJ
= 40680 J
Entropy change, ΔS is given by,
ΔS = \(\frac{\Delta_{\mathrm{vap}} H^{0}}{T}=\frac{40680}{373}\) = 109.06 JK-1 mol-1
Ans. Entropy change = ΔS = 109.06 JK-1 mol-1

(3) Calculate the standard (absolute) entropy change for the formation of CO2(g).

Substance C(graphite) O2(g) CO2(g)
Standard molar enthalpy JK-1 mol-1 5.74 205 213.7

Solution:
Given:

Substance C(graphite) O2(g) CO2(g)
Standard molar enthalpy S0 JK-1 mol-1 5.74 205 213.7

For the formation of CO2(g),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 56

(4) The standard entropies of H2(g), O2(g) and H2O(g) in JK-1 mol-1 are 130, 205 and 189 respectively. The heat of formation of H2O(g) is -242 kJ mol-1. Calculate ΔS for formation of H2O(g), for the surroundings and the universe at 298 K. Mention whether the reaction is spontaneous or non-spontaneous.
Solution :
Given :

Substance H2(g) O2(g) H2O(g)
Standard entropy S0 JK-1 mol-1 130 205 189

ΔfH0 = -242 kJ mol-1
ΔSuniverse = ?, ΔSsurr = ?
Thermochemical equation for the formation of H2O(g)
H2(g) + \(\frac {1}{2}\)O2(g) → H2O(g)
ΔS0 = [S0H2O] – [H0H2 + \(\frac {1}{2}\) H0O2]
= 189 – [130 + \(\frac {1}{2}\)(205)]
= 189 – [232.5]
= -43.5 JK-1 mol-1
Hence, ΔSsystem = -43.5 JK-1 mol-1
Since for the formation of H2O(g)
ΔfH0 = -242 kJmol-1 = -242 × 103 Jmol-1, the reaction is exothermic. Hence the surroundings gains heat energy 242 × 103J. Therefore entropy of the system decreases while entropy of surroundings increases.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 57
Hence, ΔSsys < 0 but ΔSuniverse > 0, hence the reaction is spontaneous.
Ans. ΔSH2O(g) = -43.5 JK-1 mol-1
ΔSsurr = 813 JK-1 mol-1
ΔSuniverse = 769.5 JK-1.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(5) Calculate ΔSTotal and hence show whether the following reaction is spontaneous at 25 °C.
Hg(s) + O2(g) → Hg(l) + SO2(g) ΔH0 = – 238.6 kJ
ΔS0 = +36.7 JK-1
Solution :
Given : Hg(s) + O2(g) → Hg(l) + SO2(g)
ΔrH0 = – 238.6 kJ
ΔS0 = +36.7 JK-1
T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
ΔSTotal = ?
ΔSTotal = ΔSsys + Δ Ssurr
Now, ΔSsys = 36.7 JK-1
Since the reaction is exothermic, system loses heat to surroundings. Hence the entropy of the surroundings increases.
ΔHsurr = + 238.6 kJ = 238600 J
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 58
∵ ΔSTotal > 0, the reaction is spontaneous.
Ans. ΔSTotal = 837.4 JK-1
The reaction is spontaneous.

(6) What is the value of ASsurr for the following reaction at 298 K ?
6CO2(g) + 6H2O(l) → C6H12O6(s) + 6O2(g),
ΔG0 = 2879 kJ mol-1, ΔS0 = -210 JK-1 mol-1.
Solution :
Given :
6CO2(g) + 6H2O(l) → C6H12O6(s) + 6O2(g),
ΔG0 = 2879 kJmol-1;
ΔS0 = -210 JK-1mol-1 = -0.210 kJ K-1 mol-1
T = 298 K ΔH0 = ?
ΔG0 = ΔH0 – TΔS0
∴ ΔH0 = ΔG0 + TΔS0
= 2879 + 298(-0.210)
= 2879 – 62.58
= 2816.42 kJ mol-1
Since ΔH0 > 0, the reaction is endothermic, and system absorbs heat from surroundings. Hence surroundings loses heat,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 59
Ans. ΔS0surr = -9.45 kJ K-1

(7) Calculate ΔSsurr when on mole of methanol (CH3OH) is formed from its elements under standard conditions if ΔfH0(CH3OH) = -238.9 J mol-1.
Solution :
Given : Number of moles of ethanol,
(C2H5OH) = n = 1 mol
ΔfH0(CH3OH) = -238.9 kJ mol-1
= -238.9 × 103J mol-1
Temperature = T = 298 K
ΔS = ?
ΔSsurr = ?
Since ΔfH0 is negative, the reaction for the formation of one mole of C2H5OH is exothermic.
As heat is released to the surroundings,
ΔH0surr = + 238.9 kJ mol-1
∴ ΔSsurr = \(\frac{\Delta H_{\text {surr }}^{0}}{T}=\frac{+238.9 \times 10^{3}}{298}\)
= +801.7 JK-1
Thus entropy of the surroundings increases.
Ans. ΔSsurr = +801.7 JK-1

(8) What is the value of ΔSsurr for the following reaction at 298 K –
6CO2(g) + 6H2O(l) → C6H12O6(s) + 6O2(g)
Given that: ΔG° = 2879 KJ mol-1
ΔS0 = -210 J K-1 mol-1
Solution :
Given : ΔG0 = 2879 KJ mol-1 = 2879 × 103 J mol-1
ΔS0 = -210 JK-1 mol-1
ΔSsurr = ?
ΔG0 = ΔH0 – TΔS0
∴ ΔH0 = ΔG0 + TΔS0
= 2879 × 103 + 298 × (- 210)
= 2879 × 103 – 62580
= 2816420 J
Since, for a system, ΔH0 is +2816420 J, the surrounding loses heat to system,
∴ ΔH0surr = – 2816420 J
∴ ΔS0surr = \(\frac{\Delta H_{\text {surr }}^{0}}{T}\)
= \(\frac{-2816420}{298}\)
= -9451 JK-1
= -9.451 kJ K-1
Ans. ΔSsurr = -9.451 kJ K-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(9) Determine whether the reactions with the following ΔH and ΔS values are spontaneous or non-spontaneous. State whether they are exothermic or endothermic.
(a) ΔH = -110 kJ and ΔS = +40 JK-1 at 400 K
(b) ΔH = +50 kJ and ΔS = -130 JK-1 at 250 K.
Solution :
(a) Given : ΔH= -110 kJ ΔS = 40 JK-1 = 0.04 kJK-1
Temperature = T = 400 K ΔG = ?
Since ΔH is negative, the reaction is exothermic
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
= -110 – 400 × 0.04
= -110 – 16
= -126 kJ
Since ΔG is negative, the reaction is spontaneous.

(b) Given : ΔH=50 kJ,
ΔS= -130 JK-1 = -0.13 kJ K-1
Temperature = T = 250 K
ΔG = ?
Since ΔH is positive, the reaction is endothermic.
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
= 50 – 250 × (-0.13)
= 50 + 32.5
= 82.5 kJ
Since ΔG > 0, the reaction is non-spontaneous.
Ans. (a) ΔG = -126 kJ; The reaction is exothermic and spontaneous.
(b) ΔG = 82.5 kJ; The reaction is endothermic and non-spontaneous.

(10) For a certain reaction, ΔH0 = -224 kJ and ΔS0 = -153 JK-1. At what temperature will it change from spontaneous to non-spontaneous ?
Solution :
Given : ΔH0 = – 224 kJ = – 224000 J
ΔS0 = – 153 JK-1
Temperature (T) at which, reaction changes from spontaneous to non-spontaneous = ?
Find the temperature at equilibrium, where ΔG0 = 0
ΔG0 = ΔH0 – TΔS0
0 = ΔH0 – TΔS0
∴ TΔS0 = ΔH0
∴ T = \(\frac{\Delta H^{0}}{\Delta S^{0}}\)
= \(\frac{224000}{153}\)
= 1464 K.
Hence reaction will be spontaneous below 1464 K. It will be at equilibrium at 1464 K and non-spontaneous above 1464 K.
Ans. Change over temperature from spontaneous to non-spontaneous = 1464 K.

(11) Determine whether the reactions with the following ΔH and ΔS values are spontaneous or non-spontaneous. State whether the reactions are exothermic or endothermic.
(a) ΔH = -110 kJ, ΔS = +40 JK-1 at 400 K
(b) ΔH = + 40 kJ, ΔS = – 120 JK-1 at 250 K
Solution :
(a) Given : ΔH = -110 kJ, ΔS = +40 JK-1 at T = 400K
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 60
= -110 – 16
= -126 kJ
Since ΔG is negative, the reaction is spontaneous.
Since ΔH is negative, the reaction is exothermic.

(b) Given : ΔH = + 40 kJ, ΔS = -120 JK-1 at T = 250 K
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 61
= 40 + 30
= 70 kJ
Since ΔG is negative, the reaction is spontaneous.
Since ΔH is negative, the reaction is exothermic.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(12) Determine whether the following reaction will be spontaneous or non-spontaneous under standard conditions.
Zn(s) + Cu2+ → Zn2+ +Cu(s) ΔH0 = -219 kJ, ΔS0 = -21 JK-1
Solution :
Given : ΔH0 = -219 kJ;
ΔS0 = -21 JK-1= 0.021 kJ K-1
ΔG0 = ?
For standard conditions : Pressure = 1 atm
Temperature = T = 298 K
ΔG0 = ΔH0 – TΔS0
= -219 – 298 × (-0.021)
= -219 + 6.258
= -212.742 kJ
Since ΔG < 0, the reaction is spontaneous.
Ans. The reaction is spontaneous.

(13) The equilibrium constant for a gaseous reversible reaction at 200 °C is 1.64 × 103 atm2. Calculate ΔG° for the reaction.
Solution :
Given : Equilibrium constant = KP = 1.64 × 103 atm2
Temperature = T = 273 + 200 = 473 K
ΔG0 = ?
ΔG0 = -2.303 RTlog10 Kp
= – 2.303 × 8.314 × 473 × log10 1.64 × 103
= – 2.303 × 8.314 × 473 × (3.2148)
= -29115 J
= -29.115 kJ
Ans. ΔG0 = -29.115 kJ

(14) Calculate ΔG for the reaction at 25°C
CO(g) + 2H2(g) ⇌ CH3OH(g)
ΔG0 = -24.8 kJ mol-1.
if Pco = 4 atm, PH2 = 2 atm, PCH3OH = 2 atm.
Solution :
Given : Partial pressures : pco = 4 atm,
PH2 = 2 atm,
PCH3OH = 2 atm
Temperature = T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
ΔG0 = -24.8 kJ mol-1
CO(g) + 2H2(g) ⇌ CH3OH(g)
The reaction quotient, Q is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 62
= – 24.8 + 2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × log10 0.125
= – 24.8 + 2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × (\(\overline{1} \cdot 09691\))
= – 24.8 + 2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × (- 0.90709)
= – 24.8 – 2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × 0.90709 × 10-3
= -24.8 – 5.176
= -29.976 kJ mol-1.
Ans. ΔG = – 29.976 kJ mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(15) Calculate KP for the reaction,
C2H4(g) + H2(g) ⇌ C2H6(g),
ΔG0 = -100 kJ mol-1, at 25°C.
Solution :
Given : ΔG0 = – 100 kJ mol-1 = – 100 × 103 J mol-1
= -1 × 105 Jmol-1
Temperature = T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
Equilibrium constant = KP = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 63

(16) KP for the reaction,
MgCO3(s) → MgO(s) + CO2(g) is 9 × 10-10.
Calculate ΔG0 for the reaction at 25 °C.
Solution :
Given : KP = 9 Δ 10-10
Temperature = T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
ΔG0 = ?
ΔG0 = -2.303 RTlog10KP
= -2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × log109 × 10-10
= -2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × \([\overline{10} \cdot 9542]\)
= – 2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × [ – 9.0458]
= 51683 Jmol-1
= 51.683 kJmol-1
Ans. ΔG0 = 51.653 kJ mol-1

(17) Calculate ΔH, ΔS and ΔG for melting of 10 g ice at 0 °C and 1 atm. (ΔfusH0 = 6.02 kJ mol-1 for ice)
Solution :
Given : ΔfusH0 = 6.02 kJ mol-1 = 6.02 × 103 Jmol-1
Temperature = T = 273 + 0 = 273 K
Mass of ice = 10 g
Molar mass of H2O = 18 g mol-1
ΔH= ?, ΔS = ?, ΔG = ?
For melting of ice,
H2O(s) ⇌ H2O(l)
For 1 mol ice = 18 g ice ΔfusionH = 6.05 kJ
∴ For 10 g ice
ΔH = \(\frac{6.02 \times 10}{18}\)
= 3.344 kJ
ΔH = 3.344 kJ = 3.344 × 103 J
∴ ΔS = \(\frac{\Delta H}{T}=\frac{3.344 \times 10^{3}}{273}\) = 12.25 JK-1
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
= 3.344 – 273 × 12.25 ×10-3 kJ
= 3.344 – 3.344
= 0
Since ΔG = 0, the system is at equilibrium.
Ans. ΔH = 3.344 kJ; ΔS = 12.25 JK-1; ΔG = 0

(18) Calculate Kp, ΔG0 for the reaction,
C(s) + H2O(g) ⇌ CO(g) + H2(g)
at 990 K if the equilibrium concentrations are as follows :
[H2O] = 1.10 mol dm--3,
[CO] = [H2] = 0.2 mol dm-3,
R = 0.08206 L atm K-1 mol-1.
Solution :
Given : [H2O] = 1.1 mol dm-3,
[CO] = 0.2 mol dm-3,
[H2] = 0.2 mol dm-3, T = 990 K,
R = 0.08206 L atm K-1 mol-1
KP = ? ΔG0 = ?
C(s) + H2O(g) ⇌ CO(g) + H2(g)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 64
KP = KC × (RT)Δn
= 0.03636 × (0.08206 × 990)
= 2.954 atm
ΔG0 = -2.303 RTlog10KP
= -2.303 × 8.314 × 990 × log10 2.954
= -2.303 × 8.314 × 990 × 0.4704
= -8917 J
= -8.917 kJ
Ans. KP = 2.954 atm; ΔG0 = -8.917 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 87.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each subquestion :

1. For an isochoric process, the change in
(a) pressure is zero
(b) volume is negative
(c) volume is zero
(d) temperature is zero
Answer:
(c) volume is zero

2. Which of the following is an extensive property ?
(a) Surface tension
(b) Refractive index
(c) Energy
(d) Temperature
Answer:
(c) Energy

3. Which of the following is an intensive property ?
(a) Enthalpy
(b) Weight
(c) Refractive index
(d) Volume
Answer:
(c) Refractive index

4. Which of the following pairs is an intensive property ?
(a) Density, viscosity
(b) Surface tension, mass
(c) Viscosity, internal energy
(d) Heat capacity, volume
Answer:
(a) Density, viscosity

5. The property which is not intensive is
(a) freezing point
(b) viscosity
(c) temperature
(d) free energy
Answer:
(d) free energy

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

6. Which of the following is not an extensive property ?
(a) molarity
(b) molar heat capacity
(c) mass
(d) volume
Answer:
(b) molar heat capacity

7. Which of the following is NOT a state function ?
(a) Work
(b) Enthalpy
(c) Temperature
(d) Pressure
Answer:
(a) Work

8. In an adiabatic process
(a) ΔT ≠ 0
(b) ΔU ≠ 0
(c) Q = 0
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

9. For an isothermal and reversible process
(a) P1V1 = P2V2
(b) P1V1 ≠ P2V2
(c) ΔV ≠ 0
(d) ΔH ≠ 0
Answer:
(a) P1V1 = P2V2

10. For the process to occur under adiabatic conditions, the correct condition is :
(a) ΔT = 0
(b) Δp = 0
(c) Q = 0
(d) W = 0
Answer:
(c) Q = 0

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

11. What is true for an adiabatic process ?
(a) ΔT = 0
(b) ΔU
(c) ΔH = ΔU
(d) Q = 0
Answer:
(d) Q = 0

12. ΔU = 0 is true for
(a) Adiabatic process
(b) Isothermal process
(c) Isobaric process
(d) Isochoric process
Answer:
(b) Isothermal process

13. When a gas expands in vacuum, the work done by the gas is
(a) maximum
(b) zero
(c) less than zero
(d) greater than zero
Answer:
(b) zero

14. When a sample of an ideal gas is allowed to expand at constant temperature against an atomospheric pressure,
(a) surroundings does work on the system
(b) ΔU = 0
(c) no heat exchange takes place between the system and surroundings
(d) internal energy of the system increases
Answer:
(b) ΔU = 0

15. In what reaction of the following work is done by the system on the surroundings ?
(a) Hg(l) → Hg(g)
(b) 3O2(g) → 2O3(g)
(c) H2(g) + Cl2(g) → 2HCl(g)
(d) N2(g) + 3H2(g) → 2NH3(g)
Answer:
(a) Hg(l) → Hg(g)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

16. A gas does 0.320 kJ of work on its surroundings and absorbs 120 J of heat from the surroundings. Hence, ΔU is
(a) 440 kJ
(b) 200 J
(c) 120.32 J
(d) -200J
Answer:
(d) -200J

17. For an isothermal and reversible expansion of 0.5 mol of an ideal gas, Wmax is -3.918 kJ. The value of ΔU is
(a) 3.918 kJ
(b) zero
(c) 1.959 kJ
(d) 3918 J
Answer:
(b) zero

18. The mathematical expression of the first law of thermodynamics for an adiabatic process is
(a) W = Q
(b) W = -ΔU
(c) W = +ΔU
(d ) W = -Q
Answer:
(c) W = +ΔU

19. A gaseous system absorbs 600 kJ of heat and performs the work of expansion equal to 130 kJ. The internal energy change is
(a) 730 kJ
(b) -470 kJ
(c) -730 kJ
(d) 470 kJ
Answer:
(d) 470 kJ

20. When a gas is compressed, the work obtained is 360 J while the heat transferred is 190 J. Hence the change in internal energy is
(a) -170 J
(b) 170 J
(c) 550 J
(d) -550 J
Answer:
(b) 170 J

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

21. For the reaction N2(g) + 3H2(g) = 2NH3(g); Which of the following is valid ?
(a) ΔH = ΔU
(b) ΔH < ΔU
(c) ΔH > ΔU
(d) ΔH = 2ΔH
Answer:
(b) ΔH < ΔU

22. For which reaction ΔH = ΔU ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 65
Answer:
(b) \(\mathrm{C}_{6} \mathrm{H}_{12} \mathrm{O}_{6(\mathrm{~s})}+6 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \rightarrow 6 \mathrm{CO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+6 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{l})}\)

23. For the following reaction at 298 K
H2(g) + \(\frac {1}{8}\)O2(g) = H2O(l)
Which of the following alternative is correct ?
(a) ΔH = ΔU
(b) ΔH > ΔU
(c) ΔH < ΔU
(d) ΔH = 1.5 ΔU
Answer:
(c) ΔH < ΔU

24. The heat of combustion of carbon is 394 kJ mol-1. The heat evolved in combustion of 6.023 × 1021 atoms of carbon is
(a) 3940 kJ
(b) 3940.0 kJ
(c) 3.94 kJ
(d) 0.394 kJ
Answer:
(c) 3.94 kJ

25. Which of the reactions defines the heat of formation ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 66
Answer:
(d) \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{Cl}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \rightarrow \mathrm{HCl}_{(\mathrm{g})}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

26. ΔUo of combustion of methane is -X kJ mol-1. The value of ΔH0 is
(a) = ΔUo
(b) > ΔUo
(c) < ΔUo
(d) =0
Answer:
(c) < ΔUo

27. The enthalpy of combustion of 5(rhomic)is -297.4 kJ mol-1. The amount of sulphur required to produce 29.74 kJ of heat is
(a) 32 × 10-2 kg
(b) 3.2 × 10-3 kg
(c) 3.2 × 10-2 kg
(d) 6.4 × 10-3 kg
Answer:
(b) 3.2 × 10-3 kg

28. The heat of formation of SO2(g) and SO3(g) are -269 kJ mol-1 and -395 kJ mol-1 respectively the value of ΔH for the reaction
SO2(g) + \(\frac {1}{2}\)O2(g) → SO3(g) is
(a) -664 kJ mol-1
(b) -126 kJ mol-1
(c) 63 kJ mol-1
(d) 126 kJ mol-1
Answer:
(b) -126 kJ mol-1

29. The enthalpy of combustion of methane, graphite and dihydrogen at 298 K are, -890.3 kJ mol-1, -393.5 kJ mol-1 and -285.8 kJ mol-1 respectively. Enthalpy of formation of CH4(g) will be
(a) – 74.8 kJ mol-1
(b) – 52.27 kJ mol-1
(c) + 74.8 kJ mol-1
(d) + 52.26 kJ mol-1
Answer:
(a) – 74.8 kJ mol-1

30. The enthalpies of formation of N2O(g) and NO(g) are 82 kJ mol-1 and 90 kJ mol-1 respectively. Then enthalpy of a reaction 2N2O(g) + O2(g) → 4NO(g) is …………
(a) 8 kJ
(b) -16 kJ
(c) 88 kJ
(d) 196 kJ
Answer:
(d) 196 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

31. The heat of combustion of naphthalene (C10H8) to CO2 gas and water vapour at 298 K and at constant pressure is -5.1567 × 106 J. The heat of combustion at constant volume at 298 K is (R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1)
(a) -5.1567 × 106 J
(b) -5.6161 × 106 J
(c) -5.1616 × 106 J
(d) -5.7161 × 106 J
Answer:
(c) -5.1616 × 106 J

32. Given the reaction,
2NH3(g) → N2(g) + 3H2(g) ΔH = 92.6 kJ
The enthalpy of formation of NH3 is
(a) -92.6 kJ
(b) 92.6 kJ mol-1
(c) -46.3 kJmol-1
(d) -185.2 kJmol-1
Answer:
(c) -46.3 kJmol-1

33. Calculate the heat of reaction at 298 K for the reaction C2H4(g) + H2(g) = C2H6(g)
Given that the heats of combustion of ethylene, hydrogen and ethane are 337.0, 68.4 and 373.0 kcal respectively.
(a) 23.4 kcal
(b) 62.2 kcal
(c) 32.4 kcal
(d) 34.2 kcal
Answer:
(c) 32.4 kcal

34. Entropy change for a process is given by,
(a) Qrev × T
(b) Qrev/T
(c) \(\frac{T}{Q_{\text {rev }}}\)
(d) ΔHrev × T
Answer:
(b) Qrev/T

35. For a spontaneous process, total entropy change for a system and its surroundings is
(a) ΔStotal < 0
(b) ΔStotal = 0
(c) ΔStotal > 0
(d) ΔStotal ≤ 0
Answer:
(c) ΔStotal > 0

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

36. For a system at equilibrium,
(a) ΔStotal = 0
(b) ΔStotal > 0
(c) ΔStotal < 0
(d) ΔStotal ≥ 0
Answer:
(a) ΔStotal = 0

37. If the enthalpy of vaporisation of water at 100°C is 186.5 J·mol-1, the entropy of vaporization will be-
(a) 4.0 J·K-1 mol-1
(b) 3.0 J·K-1 mol-1
(c) 1.5 J·K-1 mol-1
(d) 0.5 J·K-1 mol-1
Answer:
(d) 0.5 J·K-1 mol-1

38. Heat of fusion of ice is 6.02kJmol-1 at 0 °C. If 100 g water is frozen at 0 °C, entropy change will be
(a) -0.1225 JK-1
(b) 310.6 JK-1
(c) -122.6 JK-1
(d) 92.8 JK-1
Answer:
(c) -122.6 JK-1

39. If for a reaction ΔH is negative and ΔS is positive then the reaction is
(a) spontaneous at all temperatures
(b) non-spontaneous at all temperatures
(c) spontaneous only at high temperatures
(d) spontaneous only at low temperature
Answer:
(a) spontaneous at all temperatures

40. The relationship between ΔGo of a reaction and its equilibrium constant is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 67
Answer:
(c) \(\frac{R T \ln K}{\Delta G^{0}}=-1\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

41. Which of the following has highest entropy?
(a) Al(s)
(b) CaCO3(s)
(c) H2O(l)
(d) CO2(g)
Answer:
(d) CO2(g)

42. The entropy change for the formation of 3.5 mol NO(g) from the following data will be,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 68
Answer:
(b) 42.875 JK-1

43. Gibbs free energy change at equilibrium is
(a) ΔG = 0
(b) ΔG > 0
(c) ΔG < 0
(d) ΔG ≤ 0
Answer:
(a) ΔG = 0

44. For spontaneous process,
(a) ΔG = 0
(b) ΔG > 0
(c) ΔG < 0
(d) ΔG ≤ 0
Answer:
(c) ΔG < 0

45. A substance which shows highest entropy is
(a) SrCO3(S)
(b) Cu(S)
(c) NaC(aq)
(d) Cl2(g)
Answer:
(d) Cl2(g)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

46. For which of the following reactions ΔS is negative ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 69
Answer:
(a) \(\mathrm{Mg}_{(s)}+\mathrm{Cl}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \rightarrow \mathrm{MgCl}_{2(s)}\)

47. For a reaction, at 300K enthalpy is 138 kJ and entropy change is 115 JK-1. Hence the free energy change of the reaction is
(a) 130.5 kJ
(b) 103.5 kJ
(c) 82.8 kJ
(d) – 60.5 kJ
Answer:
(b) 103.5 kJ

48. Bond enthalpies of H2-1, I2(g) and HI are 436, 151 and 298 kJ mol-1 respectively. Hence enthalpy of formation of HI(g) is
(a) -9 kJmol-1
(b) -4.5kJmol-1
(c) 4.5 kJ mol-1
(d) 9 kJ mol-1
Answer:
(b) -4.5kJmol-1

49. The average bond energy of C-H bond is 410 kJmol-1. The enthalpy change of atomisation of 3.2 g CH4(g) is
(a) 1312 kJ
(b) 29.8 kJ
(c) 328 kJ
(d) 120 kJ
Answer:
(c) 328 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

50. For a chemical reaction ΔS = -0.035 kJ/K and ΔH = -20 kJ. At what temperature does the reaction turn non-spontaneous ?
(a) 5.14 K
(b) 57.14 K
(c) 571.4 K
(d) 5714.0 K
Answer:
(c) 571.4 K

51. For a certain reaction, ΔH = -50 kJ and ΔS = -80 JK-1, at what temperature does the reaction turn from spontaneous to non-spontaneous.
(a) 6.25 K
(b) 62.5 K
(c) 625 K
(d) 6250 K
Answer:
(c) 625 K